Land Rover Discovery 1995 Workshop Manual

Land Rover Discovery, the ultimate 4WD companion. With its rugged design, powerful engine, and advanced technology, it's ready to conquer any terrain you throw at it. From rocky trails to icy roads, this vehicle will keep you and your adventure-loving soul on track.

PDF Download

Document

Workshop manual

DISCOVERY

This manual covers vehicles from

1995 model year

01 INTRODUCTION

04 GENERAL SPECIFICATION DATA

05 ENGINE TUNING DATA

07 GENERAL FITTING REMINDERS

09 LUBRICANTS, FLUIDS AND CAPACITIES

10 MAINTENANCE

12 ENGINE Tdi

12 ENGINE 3.9 V8

12 ENGINE 4.0 V8

12 ENGINE Mpi

17 EMISSION CONTROL

19 FUEL SYSTEM Tdi

19 FUEL SYSTEM MFI

19 FUEL SYSTEM SFI

19 FUEL SYSTEM Mpi

19 CRUISE CONTROL

26 COOLING SYSTEM Tdi

26 COOLING SYSTEM V8

26 COOLING SYSTEM Mpi

30 MANIFOLD AND EXHAUST SYSTEM

33 CLUTCH

37 MANUAL GEARBOX

41 TRANSFER GEARBOX

44 AUTOMATIC GEARBOX

47 PROPELLER SHAFTS

51 REAR AXLE AND FINAL DRIVE

54 FRONT AXLE AND FINAL DRIVE

57 STEERING

60 FRONT SUSPENSION

64 REAR SUSPENSION

70 BRAKES

74 WHEELS AND TYRES

75 SUPPLEMENTARY RESTRAINT SYSTEM

76 CHASSIS AND BODY

80 HEATING AND VENTILATION

82 AIR CONDITIONING

84 WIPERS AND WASHERS

86 ELECTRICAL

Published by Rover Technical Communication



1996 Rover Group Limited

Publication Part No. LRL 0079 ENG (2nd Edition)

INTRODUCTION

This workshop manual covers vehicles from 1995 model year onwards. Amendments and additional pages will be issued to ensure that the manual covers latest models. Amendments and additions will be identified by the addition of a dated footer at the bottom of the page.

This Workshop Manual is designed to assist skilled technicians in the efficient repair and maintenance of

Land Rover vehicles.

Individuals who undertake their own repairs should have some skill and training, and limit repairs to components which could not affect the safety of the vehicle or its passengers. Any repairs required to safety critical items such as steering, brakes, suspension or supplementary restraint system should be carried out by a Land

Rover Dealer. Repairs to such items should

NEVER be attempted by untrained individuals.

WARNINGS, CAUTIONS and NOTES are given throughout this Manual in the following form:

WARNING: Procedures which must be followed precisely to avoid the possibility of personal injury.

CAUTION: This calls attention to procedures which must be followed to avoid damage to components.

NOTE: This calls attention to methods which make a job easier or gives helpful information.

REFERENCES

References to the left or right hand side in the manual are made when viewing the vehicle from the rear.

With the engine and gearbox assembly removed, the water pump end of the engine is referred to as the front.

To reduce repetition, some operations covered in this

Manual do not include reference to testing the vehicle after repair.

It is essential that work is inspected and tested after completion and if necessary a road test of the vehicle is carried out particularly where safety related items are concerned.

REPAIRS AND REPLACEMENTS

When replacement parts are required it is essential that Land Rover parts are used.

Attention is particularly drawn to the following points concerning repairs and the fitting of replacement parts and accessories: Safety features embodied in the vehicle may be impaired if other than Land Rover parts are fitted. In certain territories, legislation prohibits the fitting of parts not to the vehicle manufacturer’s specification. Torque spanner values given in the Workshop Manual must be strictly adhered to. Locking devices, where specified, must be fitted. If the efficiency of a locking device is impaired during removal it must be replaced with a new one.

Certain fasteners must not be re-used. These fasteners are specified in the Workshop Manual.

DIMENSIONS

The dimensions quoted are to design engineering specification. Alternative unit equivalents, shown in brackets following the dimensions, have been converted from the original specification.

POISONOUS SUBSTANCES

Many liquids and other substances used are poisonous and therefore must not be consumed. It is also advisable to keep all substances away from open wounds. These substances among others include anti-freeze, brake fluid, fuel, windscreen washer additives, air conditioning refrigerant, lubricants and various adhesives.

INFORMATION

INTRODUCTION

FUEL HANDLING PRECAUTIONS

The following information provides basic precautions which must be observed if fuel is to be handled safely.

It also outlines the other areas of risk which must not be ignored.

This information is issued for basic guidance only, and in any case of doubt, appropriate enquiries should be made of your local Fire Officer or Fire Department.

Fuel vapour is highly flammable and in confined spaces is also very explosive and toxic.

When fuel evaporates it produces 150 times its own volume in vapour, which when diluted with air becomes a readily ignitable mixture. The vapour is heavier than air and will always fall to the lowest level.

It can readily be distributed throughout a workshop by air current, consequently, even a small spillage of fuel is very dangerous.

Always have a fire extinguisher containing FOAM CO

GAS, or POWDER close at hand when handling fuel, or when dismantling fuel systems and in areas where fuel containers are stored.

WARNING: lt is imperative that the battery is not disconnected during fuel system repairs as arcing at the battery terminal could ignite fuel vapour in the atmosphere.

Always disconnect the vehicle battery BEFORE carrying out work on the fuel system.

Whenever fuel is being handled, transferred or stored, or when fuel systems are being dismantled all forms of ignition must be extinguished or removed, any leadlamps used must be flame proof and kept clear of spillage.

No one should be permitted to repair components associated with fuel without first having had fuel system training.

Hot fuel handling precautions

WARNING: Before commencing any operation requiring fuel to be drained from the fuel tank, the following procedure must be adhered to:

1. Allow sufficient time for the fuel to cool, thus avoiding contact with hot fuels.

2. Vent the system by removing the fuel filler cap in a well ventilated area. Refit the filler cap until the commencement of fuel drainage.

Fuel transfer

WARNING: Fuel must not be extracted or drained from any vehicle while it is standing over a pit.

The transfer of fuel from the vehicle fuel tank must be carried out in a well ventilated area. An approved transfer tank must be used according to the transfer tank manufacturer’s instructions and local regulations, including attention to grounding of tanks.

Fuel tank removal

A FUEL VAPOUR warning label must be attached to the fuel tank upon removal from the vehicle.

Fuel tank repair

Under no circumstances should a repair to any tank be attempted.

INFORMATION

INTRODUCTION

SYNTHETIC RUBBER

Many ’0’ ring seals, flexible pipes and other similar items which appear to be natural rubber are made of synthetic materials called Fluoroelastomers. Under normal operating conditions this material is safe, and does not present a health hazard. However, if the material is damaged by fire or excessive heat, it can break down and produce highly corrosive Hydrofluoric acid which can cause serious burns on contact with skin. Should the material be in a burnt or overheated condition handle only with seamless industrial gloves.

Decontaminate and dispose of the gloves immediately after use.

If skin contact does occur, remove any contaminated clothing immediately and obtain medical assistance without delay. In the meantime, wash the affected area with copious amounts of cold water or limewater for fifteen to sixty minutes.

RECOMMENDED SEALANTS

A number of branded products are recommended in this manual for use during maintenance and repair work.

These items include:

HYLOMAR GASKET AND JOINTING COMPOUND

and

HYLOSIL RTV SILICON COMPOUND.

They should be available locally from garage equipment suppliers. If there is any problem obtaining supplies, contact the following company for advice and the address of the nearest supplier.

MARSTON LUBRICANTS LTD.

Hylo House,

Cale Lane,

New Springs,

Wigan WN2 1JR

Tel 01942 824242

USED ENGINE OIL

WARNING: Prolonged and repeated contact with engine or motor oil will result in the removal of natural fats from the skin, leading to dryness, irritation and dermatitis.

Used engine oil contains potentially harmful contaminants which may cause skin cancer.

Adequate means of skin protection and washing facilities should be provided.

Handling precautions

1. Avoid prolonged and repeated contact with oils, particularly used engine oils.

2. Wear protective clothing, including impervious gloves where applicable.

3. Do not put oily rags in pockets.

4. Avoid contaminating clothes, particularly underwear, with oil.

5. Overalls must be cleaned regularly. Discard unwashable clothing and oil impregnated footwear.

6. First aid treatment must be obtained immediately for open cuts and wounds.

7. Use barrier creams, before each work period, to help the removal of oil from the skin.

8. Wash with soap and water to ensure all oil is removed (skin cleansers and nail brushes will help). Preparations containing lanolin replace the natural skin oils which have been removed.

9. Do not use gasoline, kerosene, diesel fuel, petrol, thinners or solvents for washing the skin.

10. If skin disorders develop, obtain medical advice.

11. Where practicable, degrease components prior to handling.

12. Where there is a risk of eye contact, eye protection should be worn, for example, goggles or face shields; in addition an eye wash facility should be provided.

Disposing of used oils

Environmental protection precaution

It is illegal to pour used oil onto the ground, down sewers or drains, or into waterways.

Dispose of used oil through authorised waste disposal contractors. If in doubt contact your Local Authority for advice on disposal facilities.

INFORMATION

INTRODUCTION

ACCESSORIES AND CONVERSIONS

DO NOT FIT unapproved accessories or conversions, as they could affect the safety of the vehicle.

Land Rover will not accept liability for death, personal injury, or damage to property which may occur as a direct result of the fitting of non-approved conversions to the vehicle.

WHEELS AND TYRES

WARNING: DO NOT replace the road wheels with any type other than genuine

Land Rover wheels which are designed for multi-purpose on and off road use and have very important relationships with the proper operation of the suspension system and vehicle handling.

Replacement tyres must be of the make and sizes recommended for the vehicle, and all tyres must be the same make, ply rating and tread pattern.

STEAM CLEANING

To prevent consequential rusting, any steam cleaning within the engine bay MUST be followed by careful re-waxing of the metallic components affected.

Particular attention must be given to the steering column, engine water pipes, hose clips and ignition coil clamp.

SPECIAL SERVICE TOOLS

The use of approved special service tools is important. They are essential if service operations are to be carried out efficiently, and safely. Where special tools are specified, only these tools should be used

to avoid the possibility of personal injury or

damage to the components. Also the amount of time which they save can be considerable.

Every special tool is designed with the close co-operation of Land Rover, and no tool is put into production which has not been tested and approved by us. New tools are only introduced where an operation cannot be satisfactorily carried out using existing tools or standard equipment. The user is therefore assured that the tool is necessary and that it will perform accurately, efficiently and safely.

Special tools bulletins will be issued periodically giving details of new tools as they are introduced.

All orders and enquiries from the United Kingdom should be sent direct to V. L. Churchill. Overseas orders should be placed with the local V. L. Churchill distributor, where one exists. Countries where there is no distributor may order direct from:

V. L. Churchill Limited,

PO Box 3,

Daventry, Northants,

England, NN11 4NF.

The tools recommended in this Workshop Manual are listed in a multi-language illustrated catalogue, obtainable from:

Messers. V. L. Churchill at the above address, or from:

Land Rover Merchandising Service,

PO Box 534,

Erdington,

Birmingham, B24 0Q5,

SPECIFICATION

The specification details and instructions set out in this Manual apply only to a range of vehicles and not to any one. For the specification of a particular vehicle purchasers should consult their Dealer

The Manufacturer reserve the right to vary their specifications with or without notice, and at such times and in such manner as they think fit. Major as well as minor changes may be involved in accordance with the Manufacturer’s policy of constant product improvement.

Whilst every effort is made to ensure the accuracy of the particulars contained in this Manual, neither the

Manufacturer or Dealer, by whom this Manual is supplied, shall in any circumstances be held liable for any inaccuracy or the consequences thereof.

COPYRIGHT



Land Rover 1996

All rights reserved. No part of this publication may be produced, stored in a retrieval system or transmitted in any form, electronic, mechanical, recording or other means without prior written permission of Land Rover.

INFORMATION

INTRODUCTION

JACKING

The following instructions must be carried out before raising the vehicle off the ground.

1. Use a solid level ground surface.

2. Apply parking brake.

3. Select ’P’ or 1st gear in main gearbox.

4. Select Low range in transfer gearbox.

CAUTION: To avoid damage occurring to the under body components of the vehicle the following jacking procedures must be adhered to.

DO NOT POSITION JACKS OR AXLE STANDS

UNDER THE FOLLOWING COMPONENTS.

Body structure

Bumpers

Fuel lines

Brake lines

Front radius arms

Panhard rod

Steering linkage

Rear Trailing links

Fuel tank

Engine sump

Gearbox bell housing

Jack or support vehicle by axles only.

Vehicle jack

The jack provided with the vehicle is only intended to be used in an emergency, for changing a tyre. Do

NOT use the jack for any other purpose. Refer to

Owner’s Manual for vehicle jack location points and procedure. Never work under a vehicle supported by the vehicle jack.

Hydraulic jack

A hydraulic jack with a minimum 1500 kg, 3,300 lbs load capacity must be used.

CAUTION: Do not commence work on the underside of the vehicle until suitable axle stands have been positioned under the axle.

Raise the front of the vehicle

1. Position cup of hydraulic arm under differential casing.

NOTE: The differential casing is not central to the axle. Care should be taken when raising the front road wheels off the ground as the rear axle has less sway stiffness.

INFORMATION

INTRODUCTION

2. Raise front road wheels to enable an axle stand to be installed under left hand axle tube.

3. Position an axle stand under right hand axle tube, carefully lower jack until axle sits securely on both axle stands, remove trolley jack.

4. Before commencing work on underside of vehicle re-check security of vehicle on stands.

5. Reverse procedure when removing vehicle from stands.

Raise rear of vehicle

1. Position cup of hydraulic arm under differential casing.

2. Raise vehicle to enable axle stands to be installed under left and right hand axle tubes.

3. Lower jack until axle sits securely on axle stands, remove trolley jack.

4. Before commencing work on underside of vehicle re-check security of vehicle on stands.

5. Reverse procedure when removing vehicle from stands.

HYDRAULIC VEHICLE RAMP (FOUR POST)

Use only a ’drive on’ type ramp which supports vehicle by its own road wheels. If a ’wheel-free’ condition is required, use a ’drive on’ ramp incorporating a

’wheel-free’ system that supports under axle casings.

Alternatively, place vehicle on a firm, flat floor and support on axle stands.

DYNAMOMETER TESTING - NON ANTI-LOCK

BRAKE VEHICLES

Viscous coupling

The front and rear axles cannot be driven independently due to the viscous coupling. This eliminates the need for differential lock by progressively locking the centre differential automatically if slip occurs at any wheel.

WARNING: DO NOT attempt to drive individual wheels with vehicle supported on floor jacks or stands.

Four wheel dynamometers

Provided that front and rear dynamometer rollers are rotating at identical speeds and that normal workshop safety standards are applied, there is no speed restriction during testing except any that may apply to the tyres.

Two wheel dynamometers

IMPORTANT: Use a four wheel dynamometer for brake testing if possible.

If brake testing on a single axle rig is necessary it must be carried out with propeller shaft to rear axle removed, AND neutral selected in BOTH main gearbox and transfer gearbox. When checking brakes, run engine at idle speed to maintain servo vacuum.

If checking engine performance, the transfer box must be in high range and propeller shaft to stationary axle must be removed.

TWO POST VEHICLE RAMPS

The manufacturer of LAND ROVER VEHICLES

DOES NOT recommend using ’Two Post’ ramps that employ four adjustable support arms. These are NOT considered safe for Land Rover vehicles.

If vehicle is installed on a Two Post ramp responsibility for safety of vehicle and personnel performing service operations is in the hands of the Service Provider.

INFORMATION

INTRODUCTION

DYNAMOMETER TESTING - VEHICLES WITH

ANTI-LOCK BRAKES (ABS)

WARNING: Do not attempt to test ABS function on a dynamometer

Four wheel dynamometers

NOTE: Before testing a vehicle on a four

Manual.

wheel dynamometer disconnect the valve relay.

See Electrical Trouble Shooting

The ABS function will not work, the ABS warning light will illuminate. Normal braking will be available.

Provided that front and rear rollers are rotating at identical speeds and that normal workshop safety standards are applied, there is no speed restriction during testing except any that may apply to the tyres.

Two wheel dynamometers

IMPORTANT: Use a four wheel dynamometer for brake testing if possible.

NOTE: ABS will not function on a two wheel dynamometer. The ABS light will illuminate during testing. Normal braking will be available.

If brake testing on a single rig is necessary it must be carried out with propeller shaft to the rear axle removed, AND neutral selected in BOTH main and transfer boxes.

If checking engine performance, the transfer box must be in high range and drive shaft to stationary axle removed.

TOWING

CAUTION: The vehicle has permanent four-wheel drive. The following towing instructions must be adhered to:

Towing the vehicle on all four wheels with driver operating steering and brakes.

1. Turn ignition key turn to position ’1’ to release steering lock.

2. Select neutral in main gearbox and transfer gearbox.

3. Secure tow rope, chain or cable to towing eye.

4. Release the parking brake.

CAUTION: The brake servo and power assisted steering system will not be functional without the engine running.

Greater pedal pressure will be required to apply the brakes, the steering system will require greater effort to turn the front road wheels.

The vehicle tow connection should be used only in normal road conditions, ’snatch’ recovery should be avoided.

Suspended tow by breakdown vehicle

CAUTION: To prevent vehicle damage, front or rear propeller shaft MUST BE removed, dependent upon which axle is being trailed.

1. Mark propeller shaft drive flanges at transfer gearbox and axles with identification lines to enable the propeller shaft to be refitted in its original position.

2. Remove the propeller shaft fixings, remove the shaft from the vehicle.

3. If the front axle is to be trailed turn ignition key to position ’1’ to release steering lock.

CAUTION: The steering wheel and/or linkage must be secured in a straight ahead position. DO NOT use the steering lock mechanism for this purpose.

INFORMATION

INTRODUCTION

TRANSPORTING THE VEHICLE BY TRAILER

Lashing eyes are provided on front and rear of the chassis side members, to facilitate the securing of the vehicle to a trailer or other means of transportation.

CAUTION: Underbody components must not be used as lashing points.

Install vehicle on trailer and apply park brake. Select neutral in main gearbox. Selecting ’N’ will prevent damage to parking pawl of the automatic gearbox.

FRONT OF CHASSIS

REAR OF CHASSIS

JUMP STARTING

WARNING: Hydrogen and oxygen gases are produced during normal battery operation. This gas mixture can explode if flames, sparks or lighted tobacco are brought near battery. When charging or using a battery in an enclosed space, always provide ventilation and shield your eyes.

Keep out of reach of children. Batteries contain sulphuric acid. Avoid contact with skin, eyes, or clothing. Also, shield eyes when working near battery to protect against possible splashing of acid solution. In case of acid contact with skin, eyes, or clothing, flush immediately with water for a minimum of fifteen minutes. If acid is swallowed, drink large quantities of milk or water, followed by milk of magnesia, a beaten egg, or vegetable oil.

SEEK MEDICAL AID IMMEDIATELY.

To Jump Start - Negative Ground Battery

WARNING: To avoid any possibility of injury use particular care when connecting a booster battery to a discharged battery.

1. Position vehicles so that jump leads will reach, ensuring that vehicles DO NOT TOUCH, alternatively a fully charged slave battery may be positioned on floor adjacent to vehicle.

2. Ensuring that ignition and all electrical accessories are switched off, that parking brake is applied and neutral is selected on a manual gearbox, with an automatic gearbox select neutral (N) or park (P) and then connect the jump leads as follows;

A. Connect one end of first jumper cable to positive

(+) terminal of booster battery.

B. Connect other end of first jumper cable to positive (+) terminal of discharged battery.

C. Connect one end of second jumper cable to negative terminal of booster battery.

INFORMATION

INTRODUCTION

D. Connect other end of second jumper cable to a good earth point on the engine, NOT TO

NEGATIVE TERMINAL OF DISCHARGED

BATTERY. Keep jumper lead away from moving parts, pulleys, drive belts and fan blade assembly.

WARNING: Making final cable connection could cause an electrical arc which if made near battery could cause an explosion.

3. If booster battery is installed in another vehicle, start engine and allow to idle.

4. Start engine of vehicle with discharged battery, following starting procedure in Owners’ Manual.

CAUTION: If vehicle fails to start within a maximum time of 12 seconds, switch ignition off and investigate cause. Failing to follow this instruction could result in irrepairable damage to catalysts.

5. Remove negative (-) jumper cable from the engine and then terminal of booster battery.

6. Remove positive (+) jumper cable from positive terminals of booster battery and discharged battery.

INFORMATION

INTRODUCTION

ABBREVIATIONS AND SYMBOLS USED IN THIS

MANUAL

Across flats (bolt size) ............................................

After bottom dead centre ...................................

ABDC

After top dead centre

Alternating current

.........................................

ATDC

.................................................

a.c.

Ampere ................................................................

Ampere hour ....................................................

amp amp hr

Before bottom dead centre

Before top dead centre

................................

......................................

BBDC

BTDC

Bottom dead centre .............................................

Brake horse power ................................................

BDC bhp

British Standards ....................................................

Carbon monoxide ..................................................

Centimetre .............................................................

CO cm

Centigrade (Celsius)

Cubic centimetre

................................................

...................................................

C cm

Cubic inch ...............................................................

Degree (angle) ...............................................

Degree (temperature) .....................................

in deg or

° deg or

Diameter ...............................................................

dia.

Direct current .........................................................

Electronic Control Unit ........................................

d.c.

ECU

Electronic Fuel Injection

Fahrenheit

........................................

EFI

.................................................................

Feet ...........................................................................

Feet per minute ..................................................

ft ft/min

Fifth

First

........................................................................

5th

1st

Fluid ounce ..........................................................

Foot pounds (torque) ............................................

fl oz lbf ft

Fourth .....................................................................

Gramme (force) ........................................................

4th gf

Gramme (mass)

Gallons

........................................................

...................................................................

g gal

Gallons (US) .....................................................

High tension (electrical)

US gal

........................................

H.T.

Internal diameter

Inches of mercury

...................................................

..............................................

I.D.

in. Hg

Inches ......................................................................

Kilogramme (force) .................................................

in kgf

Kilogramme (mass.) ................................................

Kilogramme centimetre (torque) .......................

Kilogramme per square millimetre .................

kgf.cm

kgf/mm

Kilogramme per square centimetre .................

kgf/cm

Kilogramme metres (torque)

Kilometres

..............................

kgf.m

..............................................................

Kilometres per hour

Kilovolts

.............................................

km/h

...................................................................

Left-hand ................................................................

Left-hand steering .............................................

LHStg

Left-hand thread

Litres

...............................................

LHThd

.....................................................................

litre

Low tension

Maximum

.............................................................

............................................................

l.t.

max.

Metre ........................................................................

Millilitre ....................................................................

m ml

Millimetre ...............................................................

Miles per gallon ....................................................

mm mpg

Miles per hour

Minute (angle)

......................................................

mph

............................................................

’

Minus (of tolerance)

Negative (electrical)

...................................................

Newton metres (torque)

Number

........................................

.................................................................

No.

Ohms ...................................................................

Ounces (force) .......................................................

ohm ozf

Ounces (mass) ........................................................

Ounce inch (torque) ..........................................

oz ozf.in.

Outside diameter

Part number

.................................................

...................................................

O.D.

Part No.

Percentage

Pints

...............................................................

.........................................................................

Pints (US) ...........................................................

% pt

US pt

Plus (tolerance) .........................................................

Positive (electrical) ....................................................

Pound (force) ..........................................................

Pounds inch (torque) ..........................................

lbf in.lbf.

Pound (mass) ...........................................................

Pounds per square inch .....................................

P.S.I.

Ratio ...........................................................................

Reference ..............................................................

ref.

Revolution per minute

Right-hand

.....................................

rev/min

.............................................................

Second (angle) ...........................................................

Second (numerical order) ......................................

2nd

Specific gravity ...................................................

Square centimetres sp.gr.

...............................................

Square inches .........................................................

Standard wire gauge .........................................

Synchroniser/Synchromesh ..........................

s.w.g.

synchro.

Third .......................................................................

Top dead centre ..................................................

3rd

TDC

United Kingdom ......................................................

Vehicle Identification Number ...............................

VIN

Volts

Watts

.........................................................................

.......................................................................

SCREW THREADS

American Standard Taper Pipe

British Standard Pipe

.........................

...........................................

NPTF

BSP

Unified Coarse

Unified Fine

....................................................

.........................................................

UNC

UNF

INFORMATION

INTRODUCTION

CROSS REFERENCE OF EMISSION SYSTEM

TERMINOLOGY

NEW TERM (ACRONYM)

Accelerator pedal

Air cleaner

.................................................

..........................................................

(AP)

(ACL)

Air conditioning ....................................................

Battery positive voltage ........................................

(AC)

(B+)

Closed loop ..........................................................

Closed throttle position ......................................

(CL)

(CTP)

Canister purge valve

Data link connector

....................................

(CANPV)

...........................................

(DLC)

Diagnostic trouble code

Distributor ignition

.....................................

(DTC)

.................................................

(DI)

Engine control module

Engine coolant level

......................................

...........................................

(ECM)

(ECL)

Engine coolant temperature ..............................

Engine coolant temperature sensor ................

(ECT)

(ECTS)

Engine speed ....................................................

(RPM)

Evaporative emission system ..........................

Engine fuel temperature sensor ......................

(EVAP)

(EFTS)

4th gear, 3rd gear etc.

Fuel pump

..............................

(4GR, 3GR)

............................................................

(FP)

Fan control module

Generator

...........................................

..........................................................

(FCM)

(GEN)

Ground ..............................................................

(GND)

Heated oxygen sensor

Idle air control

....................................

(H02S)

......................................................

(IAC)

Idle air control valve .........................................

Ignition control module .......................................

(IACV)

(ICM)

Inertia fuel shutoff ................................................

Inertia fuel shutoff switch ..................................

(IFS)

(IFSS)

Intake air temperature .........................................

Malfunction indicator lamp

Manifold vacuum zone

..................................

......................................

(IAT)

(MIL)

(MVZ)

Mass air flow sensor

Multiport fuel injection

.......................................

(MAFS)

........................................

(MFI)

On board diagnostic

Open loop

..........................................

(OBD)

............................................................

(OL)

Park/neutral position .........................................

Park/neutral position switch ............................

(PNP)

(PNPS)

Programmable read only memory

Relay module

..................

(PROM)

......................................................

(RM)

Service reminder indicator ..................................

(SRI)

Solid state relay module .................................

Three way catalytic converter ..........................

(SSRM)

(TWC)

Throttle body ........................................................

Throttle position sensor ......................................

(TB)

(TPS)

Torque converter clutch

Transmission range

....................................

(TCC)

..............................................

(TR)

Transmission range selector .............................

Vehicle speed sensor ........................................

(TRS)

(VSS)

Wide open throttle ............................................

(WOT)

OLD TERM (ACRONYM)

Throttle pedal

Air cleaner

..........................................................

...............................................................

(-)

Air conditioning ....................................................

Battery plus, bat +, bat feed

Closed loop

.................................

.............................................................

(AC)

(B+)

(-)

Closed throttle, idle position ....................................

Charcoal canister purge valve .................................

Serial link

Fault code

................................................................

...............................................................

Electronic ignition ....................................................

Electronic control unit ........................................

(-)

(ECU)

(-)

Coolant level ...........................................................

Coolant temperature .........................................

(-)

(temp)

Coolant temperature thermistor

Engine speed

..............................

................................................

(-)

(rev/min)

Evaporative loss system ...................................

Fuel temperature thermistor

(ELC)

....................................

(-)

Fourth gear, 3rd gear

Fuel pump

..............................................

...............................................................

(-)

Condenser fan timer

Alternator

................................................

................................................................

Ground, earth ........................................................

(-)

(B-)

Lambda (02) sensor

Idle speed control

................................................

(-)

(ISC)

Stepper motor

Ignition module

.........................................................

........................................................

Inertia switch

...........................................................

Intake temperature/ambient temperature

EFI warning lamp

Manifold depression, vacuum

Air flow meter

................

....................................................

Electronic fuel injection

.................................

..........................................................

.......................................

(-)

(EFI)

(-)

Fault code display unit

Open loop

............................................

...............................................................

(-)

Park or neutral .........................................................

Start inhibit switch

Chip, PROM

...................................................

(-)

(PROM)

Relay .......................................................................

Check engine light ...................................................

(-)

Control unit ..............................................................

Catalyst, catalytic converter ..............................

(-)

(CAT)

Throttle housing ......................................................

Throttle potentiometer .............................................

(-)

Direct drive clutch

Transmission gear

..............................................

(DDC)

...................................................

(-)

Shift lever, shifter ....................................................

Road speed transducer ...........................................

Full throttle, wide open throttle .........................

(-)

(WOT)

INFORMATION

INTRODUCTION

VEHICLE IDENTIFICATION NUMBER (VIN)

The Vehicle Identification Number and the recommended maximum vehicle weights are stamped on a plate located under the bonnet [hood] riveted to the front of the engine compartment.

Vehicle Identification Number Plate (UK, Australia,

R.O.W., Europe)

Vehicle Identification Number Plate (Saudi Arabia)

Build date (Australia). Type approval

VIN (17 digits)

Maximum permitted laden weight for vehicle

Maximum vehicle and trailer weight

Maximum road weight-front axle

Maximum road weight-rear axle

The number is also stamped on the right side of the chassis forward of the spring mounting turret.

Year of manufacture

Month of manufacture

Maximum vehicle weight

Maximum road weight-front axle

Maximum road weight-rear axle

VIN (17 digits)

The vehicle identification number identifies the manufacturer, model range, wheel base, body type, engine, steering, transmission, model year and place of manufacture. The following example shows the coding process.

SAL World manufacturer identifier

Range Rover or

Discovery

Class 100 inch

2 door

300 Tdi or

V8i Petrol

5 speed LHD or

5 speed RHD

1995 MY

Solihull site

INFORMATION

European vehicle identification number (VIN)

INTRODUCTION

Vehicle identification number (VIN)

An adhesive label containing the Vehicle Identification

Number, date of manufacture and gross axle weight ratings is fixed to the lock face of the front left hand door. The information includes wheel and tyre sizes and tyre pressures at gross axle weight ratings.

Stamped on the right hand side chassis forward of rear wheel.

Federal (USA) vehicle identification number

Key to vehicle identification label

Month and year of manufacture

Gross vehicle weight rating

Gross axle weight rating for front axle

Gross axle weight rating for rear axle

Vehicle identification number (17 digits)

Vehicle identification number - bar code

Stamped on a plate rivetted to the upper left hand ’A’ post, visible through the front screen of the vehicle.

INFORMATION

INTRODUCTION

LOCATION OF IDENTIFICATION NUMBERS

Engine serial number - 300Tdi Engine

The 300Tdi engine number is stamped on the cylinder block on the right hand side of the engine above the camshaft front cover plate.

Engine serial number - Mpi engine

Stamped on the R.H. face of the cylinder block adjacent to the gearbox.

Engine serial number - V8i engine

Stamped on a cast pad on the cylinder block, between numbers 3 and 5 cylinders.

NOTE: The appropriate engine compression ratio is stamped above the serial number.

Main gearbox R380

Stamped on a cast pad on the bottom right hand side of the gearbox.

Transfer gearbox LT230

The serial number is stamped on the left hand side of the gearbox casing below the mainshaft rear bearing housing adjacent to the bottom cover.

Front and rear axles

Serial number is stamped on top of the left hand axle tube.

INFORMATION

Automatic gearbox

Stamped on a plate riveted to the bottom left hand side of the gearbox casing.

INTRODUCTION

INFORMATION

INTRODUCTION

FAULT DIAGNOSTIC EQUIPMENT

TESTBOOK

Todays Land Rover Vehicles are equipped with a large amount of electronics to provide the best performance of the vehicles systems.

Diagnostic equipment named TESTBOOK is available to expand the diagnostic abilities of the dealer workshop. This repair manual is produced with

Testbook in mind.

Features of Testbook include :- Fully upgradable support for the technician. Structured diagnostics to accommodate all skill levels. Touch screen operation.

Direct print out of screen information and test results.

ELECTRICAL TROUBLESHOOTING MANUAL

The Electrical Troubleshooting Manual is a separate publication that is intended for use by trained Land

Rover technicians as an aid to diagnosing electrical concerns.

It provides circuit diagrams, system diagnosis flow charts, electrical component location tables, electrical component location views and circuit operation details.

READING THIS MANUAL

This manual is divided into sections shown on the contents page, alongside a range of icons, familiar to service technicians.

Relevant information is contained within each of these sections. These are further divided into the following sub-sections which appear at the foot of each page :-

Description and operation.

Fault diagnosis.

Adjustment.

Repair.

Overhaul.

Specifications, Torque.

Service tools.

To avoid repeating information through the sections, where part of the repair operation impacts on another section, a cross reference is given to direct the reader to where the information is sited.

For example:

The maintenance section states the need to renew

V8i drive belt. A cross reference sites this information in: Section: V8i Engine

- Sub-section: Repairs

- Heading: Drive belt renew.

Sections that contain derivatives such as engines are further separated within that section.

American terminology.

A few words used in this manual differ to words used in America. Where this occurs the American word is placed inside brackets. For example: bonnet [hood], wing [fender], ramp [hoist].

INFORMATION

GENERAL SPECIFICATION DATA

ENGINE 3.9 V8i

Type .................................................................................

Number of cylinders .........................................................

Bore .................................................................................

Stroke ...............................................................................

Capacity ...........................................................................

Compression ratio ............................................................

Valve operation

Maximum power

................................................................

- 8.13:1 ............................

- 9.35:1 ............................

V8i

Eight, two banks of four

94,00 mm

71,12 mm

3950 cc

8.13:1 or 9.35:1

Overhead by push-rod

127kW at 4550 rev/min

134kW at 4750 rev/min

Crankshaft

Main journal diameter .......................................................

Minimum regrind diameter

Crankpin journal diameter

...............................................

................................................

Minimum regrind diameter ...............................................

Crankshaft end thrust/(end float) ......................................

58,409-58,422 mm

57,393-57,406 mm

50,800-50,812 mm

49,784-49,797 mm

Taken on thrust washers of centre main bearing

0,10-0,20 mm

Main bearings

Number and material ........................................................

Diametrical clearance .......................................................

Undersize bearing shells ..................................................

5, Lead-indium

0,010-0,048 mm

0,254 mm, 0,508 mm

Connecting rods

Type .................................................................................

Length between centres ...................................................

Horizontally split big-end, plain small-end

143,81-143,71 mm

Big-end bearings

Type and material ............................................................

Diametrical clearance .......................................................

End-float crankpin ............................................................

Undersize bearing shells ..................................................

Lead-indium

0,015-0,055 mm

0,15-0,36mm

0,254 mm, 0,508 mm

Piston pins

Length ..............................................................................

Diameter ..........................................................................

Fit-in connecting rod .........................................................

Clearance in piston ..........................................................

72,67-72,79 mm

22,215-22,220 mm

Press fit

0,002-0,007 mm

INFORMATION

GENERAL SPECIFICATION DATA

Pistons

Clearance in bore, measured at bottom of skirt at right angles to piston pin ...................................

0,018-0,041 mm

Piston rings

Number of compression rings

Number of control rings

..........................................

....................................................

No 1 compression ring

No 2 compression ring

.....................................................

Width of compression rings ..............................................

Compression ring gap ......................................................

Oil control ring width .........................................................

Oil control ring rail gap .....................................................

Molybdenum barrel faced

Tapered and marked ’T’ or ’TOP’

1,478-1,49 mm

0,40-0,65 mm

3,0 mm

0,38-1,40 mm

Camshaft

Location

Bearings

...........................................................................

Number of bearings ..........................................................

Drive .................................................................................

Central

Tin - aluminium

Chain 9,52 mm pitch x 54 pitches.

Tappets

...........................................................................

Hydraulic-self-adjusting

Valves

Length:

Seat angle:

Inlet ..................................

Exhaust ...........................

Inlet ..................................

Exhaust ...........................

Head diameter:

Stem diameter:

Inlet ..................................

Exhaust ...........................

Inlet ..................................

Exhaust ...........................

Inlet ..................................

Stem to guide clearance:

Valve lift (Inlet and Exhaust)

Exhaust ...........................

............................................

Valve spring length fitted ..................................................

116,59-117,35 mm

° to 45 1/2

39,75-40,00 mm

34,226-34,480 mm

8,664-8,679 mm

8,651-8,666 mm

0,025-0,066 mm

0,038-0,078 mm

9,49 mm

40,4 mm at pressure of 29,5 kg

Lubrication

System type

Oil pump type

.....................................................................

...................................................................

Oil pressure ......................................................................

Oil filter-internal ................................................................

Oil filter-external ...............................................................

Wet sump, pressure fed

Eccentric rotor

2.75 bar (40 lb/in

) at 2500 rev/min with engine at running temperature

Wire screen, pump intake filter.

Full flow, self-contained cartridge

INFORMATION

GENERAL SPECIFICATION DATA

ENGINE 4.0 V8

Type .................................................................................

Number of cylinders .........................................................

Bore .................................................................................

Stroke ...............................................................................

Capacity ...........................................................................

Valve operation ................................................................

Compression ratio ............................................................

Valve operation

Maximum power:

................................................................

9.35:1 ..............................

8.2:1 ................................

4.0 litre V8

Eight, two banks of four

94.00 mm

71.12 mm

3950 cm

Overhead by push-rod

High Compression

9.35:1

Overhead by push-rod

140kW at 4750 rev/min

132kW at 4750 rev/min

3.70 in

2.80 in

241 cu in

Low Compression

8.2:1

Crankshaft

Main journal diameter .......................................................

Crankpin journal diameter ................................................

Crankshaft end thrust/end float ........................................

63.500 - 63.487 mm

55.513 - 55.500 mm

2.50 - 2.4995 in

2.1855 - 2.1850 in

Taken on thrust washers of centre main bearing

0.10 - 0.20 mm 0.004 - 0.008 in

Main bearings

Number and type ..............................................................

Material ............................................................................

Diametrical clearance .......................................................

5, Vandervell shells

Lead bronze with lead-indium overlay

0.015 - 0.060 mm 0.0006 - 0.0024 in

Connecting rods

Type .................................................................................

Length between centres ...................................................

Horizontally split big-end, plain small-end

155.12 - 155.22 mm 6.1071 - 6.1110 in

Big-end bearings

Type and material ............................................................

Diametrical clearance .......................................................

Vandervell VP3 Lead bronze with lead-indium overlay

0.015 - 0.016 mm 0.0006 - 0.0024 in

Piston pins

Length ..............................................................................

Diameter ..........................................................................

Fit-in connecting rod .........................................................

Clearance in piston ..........................................................

60.00 - 60.50 mm

23.995 - 24.000 mm

Press fit

0.015 - 0.006 mm

Pistons

Clearance in bore, measured at bottom of skirt at right angles to piston pin ...................................

0.020 - 0.050 mm

2.3622 - 2.3819 in

0.9447 - 0.9449 in

0.0006 - 0.0002 in

0.0008 - 0.0020 in

INFORMATION

GENERAL SPECIFICATION DATA

Piston rings

Number of compression rings

Number of control rings

..........................................

....................................................

No 1 compression ring

No 2 compression ring

.....................................................

Width of compression rings ..............................................

(Top) ................................

Compression ring gap ......................................................

Oil control ring type

(Top) ................................

..........................................................

Oil control ring width .........................................................

Oil control ring rail gap .....................................................

Nitrided steel barrel faced

Tapered spherical barrel marked ’TOP’

1.478 - 1.49 mm

1.21 - 1.23 mm

0.40-0.65 mm

0.3 - 0.5 mm

0.0582 - 0.0587 in

0.0476 - 0.0484 in

0.0157 - 0.0256 in

0.0118 - 0.0197 in

Aclonoform

3.0 mm

0.38-1.40 mm

0.1181 in

0.0150 - 0.0551 in

Camshaft

Location ...........................................................................

Bearings ...........................................................................

Number of bearings ..........................................................

Drive .................................................................................

Camshaft End Float .........................................................

Central

Non serviceable

Chain 9.52 mm pitch x 54 pitches.

0.076 - 0.355 mm 0.003 - 0.014 in

Tappets

...........................................................................

Hydraulic self-adjusting

Valves

Length:

Seat angle:

Inlet ..................................

Exhaust ...........................

Inlet ..................................

Exhaust ...........................

Head diameter:

Stem diameter:

Inlet ..................................

Exhaust ...........................

Inlet ..................................

Exhaust ...........................

Inlet ..................................

Stem to guide clearance:

Valve lift (Inlet and Exhaust)

Exhaust ...........................

............................................

Valve spring length fitted ..................................................

116.59 - 117.35 mm

- 46

25’

- 46

25’

39.75 - 40.00 mm

4.590 - 4.620 in

34.227 - 34.48 mm

8.664 - 8.679 mm

8.651 - 8.666 mm

0.025 - 0.066 mm

0.038 - 0.078 mm

9.94 mm

1.565 - 1.575 in

1.3475 - 1.3575 in

0.3411 - 0.3417 in

0.3406 - 0.3412 in

0.0010 - 0.0026 in

0.0015 - 0.0031 in

0.3913 in

40.4 mm (1.59 in) at pressure of 29.5 kg (65 lb)

Lubrication

System type

Oil pump type

.....................................................................

...................................................................

Oil pressure ......................................................................

Oil filter-internal ................................................................

Oil filter-external ...............................................................

Wet sump, pressure fed

Rotor

2.11 to 2.81 kg/cm

(30 to 40 psi) at 2400 rev/min with engine warm

Wire screen, pump intake filter in sump

Full flow, self-contained cartridge

INFORMATION

GENERAL SPECIFICATION DATA

FUEL SYSTEM 3.9 V8i

Fuel system type ..............................................................

Fuel pump-make/type ......................................................

Fuel pump delivery pressure ............................................

Fuel filter ..........................................................................

Lucas 14CUX hot wire system electronically controlled

ACX delco high pressure electrical, immersed in the fuel tank

2.4-2.6 bar (34-37 lbf/in

)

Bosch in-line filter ’canister’ type

Airflow Sensor

Make and type .................................................................

Lucas ’Hot Wire’ 5AM

Injectors

Make and type .................................................................

Lucas 8NJ

Electronic Control Unit

Make and type .................................................................

Lucas 14CUX

Fuel pressure regulator

Make and type .................................................................

Lucas 8RV

Fuel temperature sensor

Make and type .................................................................

Lucas 6TT

Coolant temperature sensor

Make and type .................................................................

Lucas 3TT

Bypass Airvalve (Stepper motor)

Make and type .................................................................

Lucas 2ACM

Throttle potentiometer

Make and type .................................................................

Lucas 215SA

Lambda sensor - catalyst vehicles

Make and type .................................................................

Lucas 3LS

INFORMATION

GENERAL SPECIFICATION DATA

FUEL SYSTEM (GEMS) 4.0 V8 ENGINE

Type .................................................................................

Fuel pump-make/type ......................................................

Fuel pump delivery pressure ............................................

Fuel filter ..........................................................................

Sagem - Lucas Gems 8 hot wire system electronically controlled

High pressure electrical, immersed in the fuel tank

2.4-2.6 bar (34-37 lbf/in

)

Bosch in-line filter ’canister’ type

Mass airflow sensor

Make and type .................................................................

Lucas ’Hot Wire’ 20AM

Injectors

Make and type .................................................................

Lucas D1000

Electronic Control Module

Make and type .................................................................

Lucas GEMS 8.3

Fuel pressure regulator

Make and type .................................................................

Lucas 8RV

Coolant temperature sensor

Make and type .................................................................

Lucas 8TT

Bypass Air valve (Stepper motor)

Make and type .................................................................

Lucas 3ACM

Throttle position sensor

Make and type .................................................................

Lucas 3TP

Heated oxygen sensor - catalyst vehicles

Make and type .................................................................

Lucas 4LS

Camshaft position sensor

Make and Land Rover part no.

.........................................

Lucas ERR6170

Crankshaft position sensor

Make and type .................................................................

Lucas 3VRS, Honeywell ERR6049

Knock sensor

Make and type .................................................................

Lucas 2KS

Intake air temperature sensor

Make and type .................................................................

Lucas 10TT

Ignition coils

Make and type .................................................................

Lucas 2DIS2

Fuel temperature sensor

Make and type .................................................................

Lucas 6TT

INFORMATION

GENERAL SPECIFICATION DATA

SHIFT SPEED AUTOMATIC ZF ON 3.9 V8i

OPERATION SELECTOR

POSITON

VEHICLE SPEED

APPROX

ENGINE SPEED

APPROX (RPM)

KD4 - 3

KD3 - 2

KD2 - 1

KD3 - 4

KD2 - 3

KD1 - 2

FT4 - 3

FT3 - 2

FT3 - 4

FT2 - 3

FT1 - 2

PT4 - 3

PT3 - 2

PT2 - 1

3(D)

2(D,3)

D(3)

D(3,2)

3(D)

D(3)

D(3,2)

D(3)

D(3,2)

MPH

84 - 92

57 - 62

27 - 34

N/A

60 - 63

34 - 40

KICKDOWN

KPH

136 - 150

91 - 99

44 - 56

N/A

96 - 104

56 - 64

FULL THROTTLE

61 - 67

40 - 46

74 - 80

55 - 60

29 - 34

98 - 108

64 - 73

119 - 129

88 - 96

48 - 56

PART THROTTLE

47 - 54

29 - 37

10 - 12

75 - 86

48 - 59

16 - 19

LIGHT THROTTLE

4750 - 5200

4600 - 5250

3980 - 4330

4350 - 4800

3950 - 4650

LT3 - 4

LT2 - 3

LT1 - 2

D(3)

D(3,2)

26 - 30

18 - 22

9 - 10

43 - 49

29 - 35

14 - 16

ZERO THROTTLE

1430 - 1650

1420 - 1820

1180 - 1220

ZT4 - 3

ZT3 - 2

ZT2 - 1

D(3)

D(3,2)

19 - 25

12 - 15

6 - 7

31 - 41

19 - 24

10 - 11

Lock up (IN)

Unlock (OUT)

TORQUE CONVERTER

51 - 54

49 - 52

81 - 86

78 - 83

1875 - 2000

1825 - 1930

NOTE: The speeds given in the above chart are approximate and only intended as a guide. Maximum shift changes should take place within these tolerance parameters.

INFORMATION

GENERAL SPECIFICATION DATA

SHIFT SPEED AUTOMATIC ZF ON Tdi ENGINE

OPERATION SELECTOR

POSITON

VEHICLE SPEED

APPROX

ENGINE SPEED

APPROX (RPM)

KD4 - 3

KD3 - 2

KD2 - 1

KD3 - 4

KD2 - 3

KD1 - 2

3(D)

2(D,3)

D(3)

D(3,2)

MPH

62 - 72

43 - 49

23 - 36

64 - 76

46 - 51

26 - 29

KICKDOWN

KPH

99 - 115

69 - 78

37 - 58

102 - 122

74 - 82

42 - 46

3400 - 4000

3600 - 3900

3500 - 3800

PT4 - 3

PT3 - 2

PT2 - 1

LT3 - 4

LT2 - 3

LT1 - 2

D(3)

D(3,2)

D(3)

D(3,2)

PART THROTTLE

39 - 45

24 - 30

18 - 20

62 - 72

38 - 48

29 - 32

LIGHT THROTTLE

24 - 28

21 - 23

13 - 14

38 - 45

34 - 37

21 - 22

ZERO THROTTLE

1300 - 1400

1700 - 1800

1700 - 1900

ZT4 - 3

ZT3 - 2

ZT2 - 1

D(3)

D(3,2)

22 - 27

18 - 22

9 - 11

35 - 43

29 - 35

14 - 18

Lock up (IN)

Unlock (OUT)

TORQUE CONVERTER

46 - 49

45 - 48

74 - 78

72 - 77

1600 - 1850

1700 - 1800

NOTE: The speeds given in the above chart are approximate and only intended as a guide. Maximum shift changes should take place within these tolerance parameters.

INFORMATION

GENERAL SPECIFICATION DATA

TRANSMISSION 3.9 V8i

Manual gearbox

Type R380 .......................................................................

Speeds .............................................................................

Single helical constant mesh

5 forward 1 reverse all synchromesh

Clutch

Make and type .................................................................

Clutch plate diameter .......................................................

Borg and beck diaphram type.

266.5mm.

Automatic gearbox

Type ZF4HP .....................................................................

Four speed and reverse with fluid torque converter

Transfer box

Type LT230T ....................................................................

Two speed reduction on main gearbox output, front and rear drive permanently engaged via a lockable differential.

Propeller shafts

Type

Front .................................................................................

Front - Catalyst vehicles ...................................................

Rear .................................................................................

Universal joints .................................................................

Tubular 51mm diameter

Solid bar 28.6mm diameter

Tubular 51mm diameter

Open type Hookes O3EHD

Rear axle

Type .................................................................................

Ratio .................................................................................

Spiral bevel, fully floating shafts

3.54:1

Front axle

Type .................................................................................

Angularity of universal joint on full lock ............................

Ratio .................................................................................

Spiral bevel, enclosed constant velocity joints, fully floating shafts

3.54:1

INFORMATION

GENERAL SPECIFICATION DATA

COOLING SYSTEM 3.9 V8i

System type .....................................................................

Fan and viscous coupling assembly ................................

Pump type ........................................................................

Thermostat opening .........................................................

Expansion tank cap pressure ...........................................

Pressurised, spill return, thermostatically controlled water and anti-freeze mixture. Pump assisted thermo syphon. Coolant radiator combined with oil cooler.

11 blade axial flow 433mm diameter.

Centifugal, impellor, belt driven.

88 degrees.

15 p.s.i. (system pressure).

STEERING

Power steering box

Make/type ........................................................................

Ratio .................................................................................

Steering wheel turns, lock-to-lock ....................................

Adwest Varamatic - worm and roller box

Variable: straight ahead 19.3:1 on lock 14.3:1

3.375

Steering pump

Make/type -V8i .................................................................

Make/type - Mpi & Tdi ......................................................

ZF - Unicorn

Hobourn-Eaton series 500

Steering geometry

Steering wheel diameter ..................................................

Steering wheel diameter airbag model .............................

Toe-out measurement ......................................................

Toe-out included angle .....................................................

Camber angle ..................................................................

Castor angle .....................................................................

Swivel pin inclination static ...............................................

405mm

400mm

0 to 2mm toe out

0˚ to 0˚ 16’

0˚ ..............

Check with vehicle in static unladen condition, that is, vehicle

3˚

7˚

..............

with water, oil and five gallons of fuel. Rock the vehicle up and down at the front to allow it to take up a position

INFORMATION

GENERAL SPECIFICATION DATA

SUSPENSION

Type

Front .................................................................................

Rear

.................................................................................

Coil springs controlled by telescopic dampers front and rear.

Lateral location of axle by Panhard rod, and longitudinal location by two radius arms.

Lateral location of axle by a centrally positioned ’A’ frame bolted at the apex to a ball joint mounting.

Longitudinal location of axle by two tubular trailing links.

ROAD SPRING DATA

V8i - Mpi

LEFT HAND DRIVE

Left hand front

Right hand front

Left/Right hand rear

RIGHT HAND DRIVE

Left hand front

Right hand front

Left/Right hand rear

Part No

NRC 4306

572315

ANR 3477 or

ANR 4352

Part No

572315

ANR 3477 or

ANR 4352

Tdi Diesel

RIGHT HAND DRIVE

Left hand front

Right hand front

Left/Right hand rear

LEFT HAND DRIVE

Left hand front

Right hand front

Left/Right hand rear

* VIN 119534 onwards

** VIN 116461 onwards

Part No

ANR 1975 or

ANR 4350

ANR 1976 or

ANR 4351

ANR 3477 or

ANR 4352

Part No

ANR 1976 or

ANR 4351

ANR 1975 or

ANR 4350

ANR 3477 or

ANR 4352

Colour Code

Blue/White

Blue

Brown/Green

Orange/Orange *

Colour Code

Blue

Brown/Green

Orange/Orange *

Colour Code

Blue/Pink/Red

Brown/Brown **

Blue/Pink/Yellow

Grey/Grey **

Brown/Green

Orange/Orange *

Colour Code

Blue/Pink/Yellow

Grey/Grey **

Blue/Pink/Red

Brown/Brown **

Brown/Green

Orange/Orange *

INFORMATION

GENERAL SPECIFICATION DATA

SHOCK ABSORBERS

Type .................................................................................

Bore diameter ...................................................................

Telescopic, double-acting non-adjustable

35.47mm

BRAKES

Front service brake

Type .................................................................................

Operation .........................................................................

Pad material .....................................................................

Outboard discs with four piston calipers

Hydraulic, servo assisted self-adjusting non asbestos

Rear service brake

Type .................................................................................

Operation .........................................................................

Pad material .....................................................................

Outboard discs with two piston calipers

Hydraulic, servo assisted, self-adjusting non asbestos

Parking brake

Type .................................................................................

Lining material ..................................................................

Mechanical-cable operated drum brake on the rear of the transfer gearbox output shaft non asbestos

Servo/master cylinder non ABS

Manufacturer ....................................................................

Servo type ........................................................................

Master cylinder type .........................................................

Lucas

LSC 115

AS/AS

Anti-lock brake system

Manufacturer/type ............................................................

Wabco 4 wheel sensed add on anti-lock brake system.

Servo/master cylinder ABS

Manufacturer ....................................................................

Master cylinder type .........................................................

Lucas

CV/CV

INFORMATION

GENERAL SPECIFICATION DATA

AIR CONDITIONING

System .............................................................................

Compressor

Refrigerant

.....................................................................

.......................................................................

Charge quantity ................................................................

Charge quantity with rear air conditioning ........................

Nippon Denso

Nippon Denso 10 PA 17

R134a

0.9Kg

1.15Kg

WIPER MOTORS

Tailgate wiper motor

Make/type ........................................................................

Running current, wet screen at 20

C ambient .................

Wiper speed, wet screen at 20

C ambient .......................

IMOS (non-serviceable)

1.0 to 2.8 amps

37 to 43 cycles per minute

Windscreen wiper motor

Make/type ........................................................................

Running current (Link disconnected) ...............................

Rotary link speed .............................................................

Delco AMR 1514/5

1.5 amps at 39 to 45 rev/min (normal speed)

60 to 73 rev/min (high speed)

ELECTRICAL

System .............................................................................

12 volt, negative ground

Battery

Make/type - basic .............................................................

Make/type - heavy duty ....................................................

Land Rover Parts and Equipment/Lucas maintenance free 9-plate-YGD 10017

Land Rover Parts and Equipment/Lucas maintenance free 14-plate-YGD 10015

Generator

Manufacturer ....................................................................

Type .................................................................................

Polarity .............................................................................

Brush length

New .........................................................................

Worn, minimum free protrusion from moulding .......

Brush spring pressure flush with moulding

Regulator voltage

......................

.............................................................

Nominal output

Generator speed .....................................................

Control voltage ........................................................

Amp .........................................................................

Magnetti Marelli

A127i 100amp

Negative ground

17 mm

5 mm

1.3N to 2.7N

13.6 to 14.4 volts

6000 rev/min

14 volt

100 amp

INFORMATION

GENERAL SPECIFICATION DATA

Coil

Make/type ........................................................................

Bosch 0221 122 392

Distributor

Make/type ........................................................................

Firing angles ....................................................................

Application .......................................................................

Pick-up air gap adjustment

(Pick-up limb/reluctor tooth) .............................................

Pick-up winding resistance ...............................................

Lucas 35 DLM8

- 45

- 90

(every 45

)

12V Negative ground

0.20 mm to 0.35 mm

2k to 5k ohms

Fuses

Type .................................................................................

Autofuse (blade type) blow ratings to suit individual circuits

Horns

Make/type ........................................................................

Klamix (Mixo) TR99

Starter motor

Make and type .................................................................

Bosch 12v

INFORMATION

GENERAL SPECIFICATION DATA

BULBS

REPLACEMENT BULBS TYPE

Exterior lights

Headlamps

Headlamps - France amber

Auxiliary driving lamps

Sidelamps

Tail lamps

Reverse lamps

Stop lamps

Direction indicator lamps

Rear side marker lamps

Number plate lamps

Interior lights

Instrument panel lamps and warning lamps

Ignition warning lamp (Instrument panel)

Interior roof lamps

Clock illumination

Cigar lighter illumination

Door shut face/puddle lamps

Auxiliary switch panel illumination (green)

Heated rear screen warning lamp (amber)

Hazard warning lamp

Automatic graphics illumination

Heater/air conditioning graphics illumination

Differential lock warning lamp

Column switch illumination

12V

60/55W (Halogen)

55W H3 (Halogen)

5/21W bayonet

21W

1.2W

10W

1.2

1.2W

bayonet bayonet bayonet bayonet capless capless bulb/holder unit capless

’Festoon’ capless capless capless capless capless capless capless bulb/holder unit bulb/holder unit capless

CAUTION: The fitting of new bulbs with wattages in excess of those specified will result in damage to vehicle wiring and switches.

INFORMATION

GENERAL SPECIFICATION DATA

VEHICLE WEIGHTS AND PAYLOAD

When loading a vehicle to its maximum (Gross Vehicle Weight), consideration must be taken of the unladen vehicle weight and the distribution of the payload to ensure that axle loadings do not exceed the permitted maximum values.

It is the customer’s responsibility to limit the vehicle’s payload in an appropriate manner such that neither maximum axle loads nor Gross Vehicle Weight are exceeded.

Maximum EEC kerb weight and distribution - all optional equipment

VEHICLE WEIGHTS - Mpi

Front axle .........................................................................

Rear axle ..........................................................................

Total .................................................................................

3 Door

930 kg

1010 kg

1940 kg

Maximum axle weights

Front axle .........................................................................

Rear axle ..........................................................................

Gross vehicle weight ........................................................

1110 kg

1650 kg

2720 kg

5 Door

930 kg

1055 kg

1985 kg

VEHICLE WEIGHTS - V8i

Front axle .........................................................................

Rear axle ..........................................................................

Total .................................................................................

970 kg

1010 kg

1980 kg

Maximum axle weights

Front axle .........................................................................

Rear axle ..........................................................................

Gross vehicle weight ........................................................

1100 kg

1650 kg

2720 kg

VEHICLE WEIGHTS - 300 Tdi

Front axle .........................................................................

Rear axle ..........................................................................

Total .................................................................................

1040 kg

1015 kg

2055 kg

Maximum axle weights

Front axle .........................................................................

Rear axle ..........................................................................

Gross vehicle weight ........................................................

1200 kg

1650 kg

2720 kg

EEC kerb weight = Unladen weight + Full fuel tank + 75 kg driver.

970 kg

1055 kg

2025 kg

1040 kg

1060 kg

2100 kg

INFORMATION

GENERAL SPECIFICATION DATA

TYRE PRESSURES

Pressures: Check with tyres cold

205R16 Radial bars lbf/in

2 kgf/cm

Normal on and off-road use.

All speeds and loads

Front

1.9

2.0

Rear

2.6

2.7

Off-road ’emergency’ soft use speed of 40 kph (25 mph)

Front

1.2

maximum

Rear

1.8

WARNING: Vehicles fitted with tubeless alloy road wheels as original equipment, note that these wheels DO NOT accept inner tubes and tubed tyres MUST NOT be fitted.

NOTE: Emergency soft pressures should only be used in extreme conditions where extra floatation is required. Max speed 40km/h (25mph).

WHEELS AND TYRES

Type and size ...................................................................

Tyre size ..........................................................................

Alloy 7.00J X 16

205R16 (tubeless)

Type and size ...................................................................

Tyre size ..........................................................................

Steel 6.00JK X 16

205R16 (tubed)

’Freestyle’ choice tyre specification

Tyre size ..........................................................................

Tyre pressure ...................................................................

235/70 R16

Front

26 lbf/in

NOTE: Petrol vehicles must be fitted with ’S’ or ’T’ rated tyres.

Rear

34 lbf/in

INFORMATION

GENERAL SPECIFICATION DATA

300 Tdi ENGINE

Type .................................................................................

Number of cylinders .........................................................

Bore .................................................................................

Stroke ...............................................................................

Capacity ...........................................................................

Compression ratio ............................................................

Valve operation ................................................................

Direct injection, turbocharged, intercooled

90,47 mm

97,00 mm

2495 cc

19.5:1

0.5:1

O.H.V. pushrod operated

Crankshaft

Main bearing journal diameter ..........................................

Regrind dimensions .........................................................

Crankpin journal diameter ................................................

Regrind dimensions .........................................................

Crankshaft end thrust .......................................................

Crankshaft end float .........................................................

63,475 - 63,487 mm

63,2333 - 63,246 mm

Use 0.010 in U/S bearings

58,725 - 58,744 mm

58,4708 - 58,48985 mm

Use 0.010 in U/S bearings

Taken on thrust washers at centre main bearing

0,05 - 0,15 mm

Main bearings

Number and type ..............................................................

Diametrical clearance .......................................................

5 halved shells with oil grooves

0,0792 - 0,0307 mm

Connecting rods

Length between centres ...................................................

Diametrical clearance (big-end bearings)

End float on crankpin

........................

.......................................................

175,38 - 175,43 mm

0,025 - 0,075 mm

0,15 - 0,356 mm

Pistons

Type .................................................................................

Aluminium alloy, combustion chamber in crown.

Graphite coating on sidewalls.

Skirt diametrical clearance

(at right angle to gudgeon pin) .........................................

Maximum height above combustion face .........................

0,025 - 0,05 mm

0,8 mm

Gudgeon pins

Type .................................................................................

Fit in piston .......................................................................

Diameter ..........................................................................

Clearance in connecting rod ............................................

Floating

Hand push fit

30,1564 - 30,1625 mm

0,0025 - 0,0163 mm

INFORMATION

GENERAL SPECIFICATION DATA

Piston rings

Type:

- Top ........................................................................

- Second ..................................................................

- Oil control ..............................................................

Gap in bore:

- Top ........................................................................

- Second ..................................................................

- Oil control ..............................................................

Clearance in piston grooves:

- Second ..................................................................

- Oil control ..............................................................

Barrel edge, chrome plated

Taper faced

Expander and rails

0,40 - 0,60 mm

0,30 - 0,50 mm

0,3 - 0,6 mm

0,050 - 0,085 mm

Camshaft

Drive .................................................................................

Location

End float

...........................................................................

Number of bearings ..........................................................

Material ............................................................................

30 mm wide dry toothed belt

Right hand side (thrust side)

0,1 - 0,2 mm

Steel shell, white metal lined

Valves

Tappet clearance:

- Inlet and exhaust ...................................................

Seat angle:

- Inlet .......................................................................

- Exhaust .................................................................

Head diameter:

- Inlet .......................................................................

- Exhaust .................................................................

Stem diameter:

- Inlet .......................................................................

- Exhaust .................................................................

Valve lift:

- Inlet .......................................................................

- Exhaust .................................................................

Cam lift:

- Inlet .......................................................................

- Exhaust .................................................................

Valve head stand down

- Inlet .......................................................................

- Exhaust .................................................................

0,20 mm

38,75 - 39,05 mm

36,35 - 36,65 mm

7,960 - 7,975 mm

7,940 - 7,960 mm

9,67 mm

9,97 mm

6,81 mm

7,06 mm

0,81 - 1,09 mm

0,86 - 1,14 mm

Valve springs

Type .................................................................................

Length, free ......................................................................

Length, under 21 kg load .................................................

Single coil

46,28 mm

40,30 mm

INFORMATION

GENERAL SPECIFICATION DATA

Lubrication

System .............................................................................

Pressure, engine warm at normal operating speeds ........

Oil pump:

- Type

- Drive

......................................................................

.....................................................................

Oil pressure relief valve ....................................................

Relief valve spring:

- Full length ......................................................................

- Compressed length at 7.71Kg load ................................

Oil filter .............................................................................

Engine oil cooler ...............................................................

Wet sump, pressure fed

25 - 55lbf/in

= 1,76 - 3,87Kgf cm

G-rotor integral with front cover.

off crankshaft nose

Non-adjustable

51,6mm

31mm

Screw-on disposable canister

Combined with coolant radiator and intercooler

FUEL SYSTEM - 300 Tdi

Fuel lift pump type ............................................................

Fuel lift pump pressure .....................................................

Fuel filter ..........................................................................

Air cleaner ........................................................................

Mechanical with hand primer

42 - 55 kpa at 1800 rpm

Paper element in disposable canister

Paper element type

COOLING SYSTEM - 300 Tdi

System type

Cooling fan

.....................................................................

.......................................................................

Pump type ........................................................................

Thermostat opening .........................................................

Expansion tank cap pressure ...........................................

Pressurised, spill return, thermostatically controlled water and anti freeze mixture. Pump assisted thermo syphon. Coolant radiator combined with oil cooler and turbo intercooler.

11 blade axial flow 433 mm diameter. 1.29:1 drive ratio. Viscous coupling.

Centrifugal, impellor, belt driven.

15lbf/in

= 1,06Kgf cm

(system pressure)

CLUTCH - 300 Tdi

Type .................................................................................

Centre plate diameter .......................................................

Facing material .................................................................

Release bearing ...............................................................

Valeo diaphragm spring

235 mm

Verto F202 grooved

Ball journal

INFORMATION

GENERAL SPECIFICATION DATA

TRANSMISSION - 300 Tdi

Manual gearbox

Type R380 .......................................................................

Speeds .............................................................................

Single helical constant mesh

5 forward 1 reverse all synchromesh

Automatic gearbox

Type ZF4HP .....................................................................

Four speed and reverse with fluid torque converter

Transfer box

Type LT230T ....................................................................

Two speed reduction on main gearbox output. Front and rear drive permanently engaged via a lockable differential

INFORMATION

GENERAL SPECIFICATION DATA

ENGINE - Mpi - 2.0 LITRE

Type .................................................................................

Cylinder arrangement .......................................................

Bore .................................................................................

Stroke ...............................................................................

Capacity ...........................................................................

Firing order .......................................................................

Compression ratio ............................................................

20 T4 - 16 valve twin overhead camshaft

4 in line

84.45 mm

3.325 in

89.00 mm

3.504 in

1994 cm

121.68 in

1-3-4-2

10 : 1

Oil pump

Outer rotor to body clearance

Inner rotor tip clearance

..........................................

...................................................

Outer rotor end float .........................................................

0.05 to 0.10 mm

0.025 to 0.12 mm

0.03 to 0.08 mm

Oil pressure relief valve

Spring free length .............................................................

42.0 mm

Cooling system

Starts to open ...................................................................

Thermostat fully open .......................................................

Open travel A ...................................................................

82 to 86

9 mm

Camshaft

Camshaft end-float ...........................................................

Bearing clearance ............................................................

Service limit .............................................................

0.06 to 0.25 mm

0.060 to 0.094 mm

0.15 mm

Timing belt tensioner

Spring free length .............................................................

57.5 to 58.5 mm

Cylinder head

Longitudinal warp - maximum .................................

Transverse warp - maximum ...................................

Diagonal warp - maximum

Cylinder head height

......................................

...............................................

0.1 mm

135.0 to 135.1 mm

Valve springs

Free length .......................................................................

Fitted length .....................................................................

Load at fitted length ..........................................................

Load at valve open length ................................................

46.25 mm

37.0 mm

255

12 N

560

22.5 N

INFORMATION

GENERAL SPECIFICATION DATA

Valves

Valve stem diameter:

Inlet .........................................................................

Exhaust ...................................................................

Valve head diameter:

Inlet .........................................................................

Exhaust ...................................................................

Valve installed height - maximum

Valve stem to guide clearance:

....................................

Inlet .........................................................................

Service limit .............................................................

Exhaust ...................................................................

Service limit .............................................................

7.09 to 7.10 mm

7.07 to 7.09 mm

31.7 to 31.95 mm

29.2 to 29.43 mm

43.4 mm

0.04 to 0.06 mm

0.09 mm

0.06 to 0.07 mm

0.10 mm

Valve guides

Internal diameter - Inlet and Exhaust ...............................

Overall length:

Inlet .........................................................................

Exhaust ...................................................................

7.137 to 7.162 mm

48.5 mm

52.9 mm

Valve seats

Valve seat angle - Inlet and Exhaust ................................

Valve seat width - Inlet and Exhaust ................................

Valve face angle:

Inlet and Exhaust .............................................................

1.5 to 2.0 mm

° to 45

15’

Crankshaft

End-float ...........................................................................

Thrust washer halves thickness .......................................

Main journal diameter .......................................................

Maximum out of round ............................................

Main bearing diametric clearance ....................................

Big-end journal diameter ..................................................

Maximum out of round ............................................

Big-end bearing diametric clearance ................................

0.03 to 0.2 mm

2.31 to 2.36 mm

54.005 to 54.026 mm

0.010 mm

0.03 to 0.07 mm

47.648 to 47.661 mm

0.010 mm

0.04 to 0.08 mm

Piston rings

New ring to groove clearance:

Top compression

Oil control rails - expander fitted

Ring fitted gap:

.............................................................

2nd compression ..............................................................

......................................

Top compression .............................................................

2nd compression ..............................................................

Oil control rails .................................................................

0.06 to 0.09 mm

0.05 to 0.07 mm

0.03 to 0.05 mm

0.25 to 0.35 mm

0.3 to 0.5 mm

0.38 to 1.14 mm

Pistons

Piston diameter:

Grade A ...................................................................

Grade B ...................................................................

Clearance in bore .............................................................

84.409 to 84.422 mm

84.423 to 84.436 mm

0.01 to 0.03 mm

Cylinder bore

Grade A ...................................................................

Grade B ...................................................................

84.442 to 84.455 mm

84.456 to 84.469 mm

INFORMATION

GENERAL SPECIFICATION DATA

FUEL SYSTEM - Mpi

Electronic fuel injection data ............................................

See ENGINE TUNING DATA, Information, Engine

- Mpi - 2.0 Litre

Fuel Pump:

Make/Type .......................................................................

Pump pressure .................................................................

Delivery at 3 bar pressure & 12V (min) ............................

Regulated pressure range ................................................

Fuel pump delivery pressure ............................................

Fuel filter ..........................................................................

A.C. Rochester/Electric immersible

3.2 bar

64 litre/h

3.0 æ 0.2 bar

2.3 - 2.5 kgf/cm

Bosch in-line filter ’canister’ type

COOLING SYSTEM - Mpi

Pressure cap ....................................................................

Thermostat .......................................................................

15lbf/in

88 ˚C

(1.03 bar) (system pressure)

CLUTCH - Mpi

Type .................................................................................

Adjustment .......................................................................

Clutch plate diameter .......................................................

Diaphragm spring, hydraulically operated

Self adjusting

215.13 mm

TRANSMISSION - Mpi

Manual gearbox

Type R380 .......................................................................

Speeds .............................................................................

Single helical constant mesh

5 forward 1 reverse all synchromesh

Transfer box

Type LT230T ....................................................................

Two speed reduction on main gearbox output. Front and rear drive permanently engaged via a lockable differential

Overall ratios (final drive):

Fifth ..................................................................................

Fourth

Third

...............................................................................

.................................................................................

Second .............................................................................

First ..................................................................................

Reverse ............................................................................

In high transfer

4.146:1

4.989:1

7.518:1

11.479:1

17.884:1

18.463:1

In low transfer

9.761:1

11.746:1

17.701:1

27.109:1

42.109:1

43.472:1

INFORMATION

GENERAL SPECIFICATION DATA

VEHICLE DIMENSIONS

Dimensions

Overall length (including spare wheel)

Overall length (including tow hitch)

.............................

..................................

Overall width

Overall height

....................................................................

...................................................................

Wheelbase .......................................................................

Track front/rear .................................................................

Width between wheel boxes ............................................

Seating capacity ...............................................................

4538 mm

4581 mm

2189 mm

1914 mm

2540 mm

1486 mm

1080 mm

5 to 7

Performance

Tyre size fitted ..................................................................

Max. gradient (EEC kerb weight) .....................................

Approach angle (EEC kerb weight) ..................................

Departure angle with tow hitch (EEC kerb weight) ...........

Departure angle without tow hitch

(EEC kerb weight) ............................................................

Ramp break over angle ....................................................

Min. ground clearance (unladen)

Wading depth

.....................................

...................................................................

205 R16 radial

235/70 R16 radial

204 mm

500 mm

Towing weights

Unbraked trailers ..............................................................

Trailers with overrun brakes - Mpi ....................................

Trailers with overrun brakes - V8i & Tdi

4 wheel trailers with coupled brakes

...........................

(FULLY BRAKED)* ..........................................................

On road

750 kg

2750 kg

3500 kg

4000 kg

NOTE: * Only applies to vehicles modified to accept coupled brakes.

NOTE: All weight figures are subject to local restrictions.

Off road

500 kg

1000 kg

INFORMATION

ENGINE TUNING DATA

ENGINE 3.9 V8i

Type

.................................................................................

3.9 Litre V8i

Firing order

.....................................................................

1-8-4-3-6-5-7-2

Cylinder Numbers

Left bank ..........................................................................

Right bank ........................................................................

1-3-5-7

2-4-6-8

No 1 Cylinder location

...................................................

Pulley end of left bank

Timing marks

..................................................................

On crankshaft vibration damper

Spark plugs

Make/type(8.13:1 Compression)

Gap

......................................

..................................................................................

Make/type(9.35:1 Compression) ......................................

Gap ..................................................................................

Champion RN11YCC

0.84-0.96mm

Champion RN11YCC

0.84-0.96mm

Coil

Make/type ........................................................................

Bosch 0-221-122-392,

Compression ratio

.........................................................

8.13:1 or 9.35:1

Fuel injection system

.....................................................

Lucas 14 CUX Hot-wire air flow sensor system electronically controlled

Valve Timing

Opens ..............................................................................

Closes ..............................................................................

Duration ...........................................................................

Valve peak .......................................................................

Inlet

BTDC

ABDC

285

104

ATDC

Exhaust

BBDC

ATDC

285

114

BTDC

Idle speed - controlled by MFI system

- all loads off in neutral .....................................................

- auto gearbox in gear, air con operating

- auto gearbox in gear, air con off

.........................

....................................

- manual gearbox .............................................................

- manual gearbox, air con operating ................................

665 to 735 rev/min

650

28 rev/min

600

28 rev/min

700

28 rev/min

750

28 rev/min

Base idle speed

..............................................................

525

25 rev/min

See FUEL SYSTEM, Fault diagnosis, Base idle speed setting.

Ignition Timing - dynamic at 800 rev/min max, vacuum disconnected

8.13:1 compression, non catalyst .....................................

9.35:1 compression, non catalyst .....................................

9.35:1 compression, catalyst ............................................

BTDC

Exhaust gas

CO content at idle ............................................................

0.5 to 1.0% max.

INFORMATION

ENGINE TUNING DATA

Distributor

Make/type ........................................................................

Rotation ............................................................................

Air gap ..............................................................................

Lucas 35DLM8 electronic

Clockwise

0.20-0.35mm

Part number

8.13:1, non catalyst

9.35:1, non catalyst

..........................................................

9.35:1, catalyst .................................................................

Lucas

42584A

42582A

42583A

Centrifugal Advance

Decelerating check-vacuum hose disconnected

Distributor rpm decelerating speeds

Rover

ERR 4753

ERR 4754

ERR 4755

8.13:1 non catalyst

2000 .................................................................................

1400 .................................................................................

800 ...................................................................................

Distributor advance 5

30’ to 8

30’

18’ to 8

30’

° to 4

9.35:1 non catalyst

2200 .................................................................................

1400 .................................................................................

650 ...................................................................................

Distributor advance 7

° to 10

48’ to 10

° to 3

9.35:1 catalyst

2200 .................................................................................

1400 .................................................................................

800 ...................................................................................

Distributor advance 5

30’ to 8

30’

18’ to 8

30’

° to 4

Fuel

8.13:1, non catalyst

9.35:1, non catalyst

..........................................................

9.35:1, catalyst .................................................................

USA-Premium unleaded (PUG) .......................................

91 RON minimum unleaded

95 RON minimum unleaded

CLC or AKI 90 octane minimum

95 RON minimum

Australian market variations

Fuel ..................................................................................

Compression ratio ............................................................

Spark plug ........................................................................

Spark plug gap .................................................................

Ignition Timing at 800 rev/min max

(vacuum pipe disconnected) ............................................

Exhaust gas idle CO ........................................................

91 RON minimum unleaded

8.13:1

Champion RN12YC

0.84-0.96mm (0.033-0.038 in)

BTDC

1% max (hot)

INFORMATION

ENGINE TUNING DATA

ENGINE 4.0 V8

Type

.................................................................................

4.0 Litre V8

Firing order

.....................................................................

1-8-4-3-6-5-7-2

Cylinder Numbers

Left bank ..........................................................................

Right bank ........................................................................

1-3-5-7

2-4-6-8

No 1 Cylinder location

...................................................

Pulley end of left bank

Spark plugs

Make/type ........................................................................

Gap ..................................................................................

Champion RN11YCC

0.90 - 1.00 mm 0.035 - 0.040 in

Coils

Make

Type

................................................................................

.................................................................................

Compression ratio ............................................................

Lucas 2D1S2

Twin coils, bank of 4

High Compression

9.35:1

Low Compression

8.2:1

Fuel injection system

.....................................................

Sagem - Lucas GEMS8 Hot-wire air flow sensor system electronically controlled

Valve Timing

Opens ..............................................................................

Closes ..............................................................................

Duration ...........................................................................

Valve peak .......................................................................

Inlet

BTDC

ABDC

285

108

ATDC

Exhaust

BBDC

ATDC

285

110

BTDC

Idle speed - controlled by GEMS system

all loads off ..............................................................

700

20 rev/min

Base idle speed

..............................................................

Not adjustable

Idle air control valve position, checked via TestBook

CO at idle

vehicles without heated oxygen sensors .................

1.5% æ 0.5%

Fuel

9.35:1 catalyst .................................................................

USA vehicles - Premium unleaded (PUG) .......................

8.2:1 catalyst .................................................................

Non catalyst .........................................................

95 RON minimum unleaded

95 RON minimum

91 RON minimum unleaded

91 RON minimum unleaded or leaded

INFORMATION

ENGINE TUNING DATA

300 Tdi ENGINE

Type

.................................................................................

2.5 Litre Turbo diesel intercooled

Firing order

.....................................................................

1-3-4-2

Injection timing

...............................................................

1,54 mm lift at T.D.C.

Injection timing with electronic EGR

............................

1,40 mm lift at T.D.C.

Injection timing with EDC

..............................................

0,45 mm lift at T.D.C.

Timing marks:

Valve timing - manual .......................................................

Valve timing - automatic ...................................................

Injection timing .................................................................

Tappet clearances inlet and exhaust ...............................

Slot for pin in flywheel and TDC mark on front pulley.

Slot for pin in ring gear. Access through rear engine plate. TDC mark on front pulley

Timing pin (service tool)

0,20 mm cold

Valve timing:

- Opens

- Closes

- Peak

- Lift

............................................................................

...............................................................................

..................................................................................

Inlet

B.T.D.C.

A.B.D.C.

103

A.T.D.C.

9,67 mm

Exhaust

B.B.D.C.

A.T.D.C.

109

B.T.D.C.

9,97 mm

Maximum governed speeds:

- No load (neutral/full throttle) ...........................................

- Idle speed at running temperature .................................

- Die-down time ................................................................

4600 + 40 - 120 rev/min

720

20 rev/min

4 seconds

INJECTION PUMP

Make & type - standard ....................................................

Bosch rotary R509 type with boost control and two speed mechanical governor with auto advance and solenoid electrical shut-off. Tamper proof sealing on, no load governed speed and fuel adjustment screws.

Constant volume delivery valves

Make & type - Electronic EGR .........................................

Bosch rotary R509/1 type with boost control and two speed mechanical governor with auto advance and solenoid electrical shut-off. Tamper proof sealing on flight speed and fuel adjustment screws. Constant volume delivery valves. Throttle position sensor for

EGR control.

Make & type - Electronic diesel control - EDC .................

Bosch rotary R500 type with full electronic control of fuelling and timing. Constant pressure delivery valves.

INFORMATION

ENGINE TUNING DATA

GLOW PLUGS

Make & type .....................................................................

Time to reach operating temperature of 850

C ................

Probe type, No.0100226129A Beru 12 volts

8 seconds

INJECTORS

Make & type - standard

Nozzle type

....................................................

......................................................................

Opening pressure (working pressure) ..............................

Make & type - EDC feedback 1 in each engine

Nozzle type

...............

......................................................................

Opening pressure (working pressure) ..............................

Bosch KBAL 90 P37

DSLA 145P366

Initial pressure 200 atmospheres

Secondary 280 atmospheres

Bosch KBAL 90 P38

DSLA 145P365

Initial pressure 200 atmospheres

Secondary 300 atmospheres

Make & type - EDC standard injector 3 in each engine ....

Bosch KBAL 90 P36

Nozzle type ......................................................................

Opening pressure (working pressure) ..............................

DSLA 145P365

Initial pressure 200 atmospheres

Secondary 300 atmospheres

TURBOCHARGER

Make & type .....................................................................

Maximum boost pressure .................................................

Allied signal

0.8-1.0 bar (12-15lbf/in

) measured at wastegate actuator ’T’ piece

INFORMATION

ENGINE TUNING DATA

ENGINE - Mpi - 2.0 LITRE

Type/Capacity ..................................................................

Firing order .......................................................................

Compression ration ..........................................................

Idle speed:

Controlled by ECM ...........................................................

Exhaust gas Co content:

- Catalyst .................................................................

- Non Catalyst .........................................................

20 T4/1994 cm

1-3-4-2

10 : 1

875

50 rev/min

0.5% Max. Not adjustable.

1,0

25% adjustable using Testbook

Ignition

Knock sensor ...................................................................

Crankshaft sensor ............................................................

ADU 8229

ADU 7340

Ignition Coils

Type .................................................................................

Primary resistance at 20

C ..............................................

Consumption - engine idling .............................................

NEC 10049

0.4 to 0.61 ohm

0.25 to 0.75 amp

Spark Plugs

Type/Gap .........................................................................

GSP 6662 -0,85 mm

Multipoint Fuel Injection

Type .................................................................................

Fuel pressure regulator ....................................................

Fuel pump delivery pressure ............................................

Throttle potentiometer voltage

- Throttle closed ......................................................

- Throttle open .........................................................

MEMS engine control module ..........................................

Indirect multipoint injection with engine control module using speed/density method of air flow measurement.

MKW 10011

2.3 - 2.5 bar

0 - 1 Volt

4 - 5 Volts

MKC 10121

95 RON minimum - UNLEADED fuel

CAUTION: Do not use LEADED fuel as it will damage the catalyst. Serious damage to the engine may occur if a lower octane number fuel than that recommended is used.

INFORMATION

GENERAL FITTING REMINDERS

WORKSHOP SAFETY IS YOUR RESPONSIBILITY!

The suggestions, cautions and warnings in the section are intended to serve as reminders for trained and experienced mechanics. This manual is not a course in automotive mechanics or workshop safety.

Shop equipment, shop environment, and the use and disposal of solvents, fluids, and chemicals are subject to government regulations which are intended to provide a level of safety. It is your responsibility to know and comply with such regulations.

PRECAUTIONS AGAINST DAMAGE

1. Always fit covers to protect fenders before commencing work in engine compartment.

2. Cover seats and carpets, wear clean overalls and wash hands or wear gloves before working inside vehicle.

3. Avoid spilling hydraulic fluid or battery acid on paint work. Wash off with water immediately if this occurs. Use Polythene sheets to protect carpets and seats.

4. Always use a recommended Service Tool, or a satisfactory equivalent, where specified.

5. Protect temporarily exposed screw threads by replacing nuts or fitting plastic caps.

SAFETY PRECAUTIONS

1. Whenever possible use a lift or pit when working beneath vehicle, in preference to jacking. Chock wheels as well as applying parking brake.

WARNING: Do not use a pit when removing fuel system components.

2. Never rely on a jack alone to support vehicle.

Use axle stands carefully placed at jacking points to provide rigid support.

3. Ensure that a suitable form of fire extinguisher is conveniently located.

4. Check that any lifting equipment used has adequate capacity and is fully serviceable.

5. Disconnect battery negative lead.

WARNING: Do not disconnect any pipes in air conditioning refrigeration system, unless trained and instructed to do so. A refrigerant is used which can cause blindness if allowed to contact eyes.

6. Ensure that adequate ventilation is provided when volatile degreasing agents are being used.

7. Do not apply heat in an attempt to free stiff nuts or fittings; as well as causing damage to protective coatings, there is a risk of damage to electronic equipment and brake linings from stray heat.

INFORMATION

GENERAL FITTING REMINDERS

PREPARATION

1. Before removing a component, clean it and its surrounding areas as thoroughly as possible.

2. Blank off any openings exposed by component removal, using greaseproof paper and masking tape.

3. Immediately seal fuel, oil or hydraulic lines when separated, using plastic caps or plugs, to prevent loss of fluid and entry of dirt.

4. Close open ends of oilways, exposed by component removal, with tapered hardwood plugs or readily visible plastic plugs.

5. Immediately a component is removed, place it in a suitable container; use a separate container for each component and its associated parts.

6. Before dismantling a component, clean it thoroughly with a recommended cleaning agent; check that agent is suitable for all materials of component.

7. Clean bench and provide marking materials, labels, containers and locking wire before dismantling a component.

INSPECTION-GENERAL

1. Never inspect a component for wear or dimensional check unless it is absolutely clean; a slight smear of grease can conceal an incipient failure.

2. When a component is to be checked dimensionally against figures quoted for it, use correct equipment (surface plates, micrometers, dial gauges, etc.) in serviceable condition.

Makeshift checking equipment can be dangerous.

3. Reject a component if its dimensions are outside limits quoted, or if damage is apparent. A part may, however, be refitted if its critical dimension is exactly limit size, and is otherwise satisfactory.

4. Use ’Plastigauge’ 12 Type PG-1 for checking bearing surface clearances. Directions for its use, and a scale giving bearing clearances in

0,0025 mm steps are provided with it.

DISMANTLING

1. Observe scrupulous cleanliness when dismantling components, particularly when brake, fuel or hydraulic system parts are being worked on. A particle of dirt or a cloth fragment could cause a dangerous malfunction if trapped in these systems.

2. Blow out all tapped holes, crevices, oilways and fluid passages with an air line. Ensure that any

O-rings used for sealing are correctly replaced or renewed, if disturbed.

3. Use marking ink to identify mating parts, to ensure correct reassembly. If a centre punch or scriber is used they may initiate cracks or distortion of components.

4. Wire together mating parts where necessary to prevent accidental interchange (e.g. roller bearing components).

5. Wire labels on to all parts which are to be renewed, and to parts requiring further inspection before being passed for reassembly; place these parts in separate containers from those containing parts for rebuild.

6. Do not discard a part due for renewal until after comparing it with a new part, to ensure that its correct replacement has been obtained.

INFORMATION

GENERAL FITTING REMINDERS

BALL AND ROLLER BEARINGS

CAUTION: Never refit a ball or roller bearing without first ensuring that it is in a fully serviceable condition.

1. Remove all traces of lubricant from bearing under inspection by washing in a suitable degreaser; maintain absolute cleanliness throughout operations.

2. Inspect visually for markings of any form on rolling elements, raceways, outer surface of outer rings or inner surface of inner rings. Reject any bearings found to be marked, since any marking in these areas indicates onset of wear.

3. Holding inner race between finger and thumb of one hand, spin outer race and check that it revolves absolutely smoothly. Repeat, holding outer race and spinning inner race.

4. Rotate outer ring gently with a reciprocating motion, while holding inner ring; feel for any check or obstruction to rotation, and reject bearing if action is not perfectly smooth.

5. Lubricate bearing generously with lubricant appropriate to installation.

6. Inspect shaft and bearing housing for discoloration or other marking suggesting that movement has taken place between bearing and seatings. (This is particularly to be expected if related markings were found in operation 2).

7. Ensure that shaft and housing are clean and free from burrs before fitting bearing.

8. If one bearing assembly of a pair shows an imperfection it is generally advisable to replace both with new bearings; an exception could be made if the faulty bearing had covered a low mileage, and it could be established that damage was confined to it only.

9. When fitting bearing to shaft, apply force only to inner ring of bearing, and only to outer ring when fitting into housing. (Refer to ST1042M).

10. In the case of grease lubricated bearings (e.g.

hub bearings) fill space between bearing and outer seal with recommended grade of grease before fitting seal.

11. Always mark components of separable bearings

(e.g. taper roller bearings) in dismantling, to ensure correct reassembly. Never fit new rollers in a used outer ring, always fit a complete new bearing assembly.

INFORMATION

GENERAL FITTING REMINDERS

OIL SEALS

NOTE: Ensure that the seal running track is free from pits, scores, corrosion and general damage prior to fitting replacement seal.

1. Always fit new oil seals when rebuilding an assembly.

2. Carefully examine seal before fitting to ensure that it is clean and undamaged.

3. Coat the sealing lips with clean grease; pack dust excluder seals with grease, and heavily grease duplex seals in cavity between sealing lips.

4. Ensure that seal spring, if provided, is correctly fitted.

5. Place lip of seal towards fluid to be sealed and slide into position on shaft, using fitting sleeve when possible to protect sealing lip from damage by sharp corners, threads or splines. If fitting sleeve is not available, use plastic tube or tape to prevent damage to sealing lip.

7. If correct service tool is not available, use a suitable drift approximately 0.4mm (0.015 in) smaller than outside diameter of seal. Use a hammer VERY GENTLY on drift if a press is not suitable.

8. Press or drift seal in to depth of housing if housing is shouldered, or flush with face of housing where no shoulder is provided. Ensure that the seal does not enter the housing in a tilted position.

NOTE: Most cases of failure or leakage of oil seals are due to careless fitting, and resulting damage to both seals and sealing surfaces. Care in fitting is essential if good results are to be obtained. NEVER use a seal which has been improperly stored or handled, such as hung on a hook or nail.

6. Grease outside diameter of seal, place square to housing recess and press into position, using great care and if possible a ’bell piece’ to ensure that seal is not tilted. (In some cases it may be preferable to fit seal to housing before fitting to shaft). Never let weight of unsupported shaft rest in seal.

INFORMATION

GENERAL FITTING REMINDERS

JOINTS AND JOINT FACES

1. Always use correct gaskets where they are specified.

2. Use jointing compound only when recommended. Otherwise fit joints dry.

3. When jointing compound is used, apply in a thin uniform film to metal surfaces; take great care to prevent it from entering oilways, pipes or blind tapped holes.

4. Remove all traces of old jointing materials prior to reassembly. Do not use a tool which could damage joint faces.

5. Inspect joint faces for scratches or burrs and remove with a fine file or oil stone; do not allow removed material or dirt to enter tapped holes or enclosed parts.

6. Blow out any pipes, channels or crevices with compressed air, fit new ’O’ rings or seals displaced by air blast.

FLEXIBLE HYDRAULIC PIPES, HOSES

1. Before removing any brake or power steering hose, clean end fittings and area surrounding them as thoroughly as possible.

2. Obtain appropriate plugs or caps before detaching hose end fittings, so that ports can be immediately covered to exclude dirt.

3. Clean hose externally and blow through with airline. Examine carefully for cracks, separation of plies, security of end fittings and external damage. Reject any hose found faulty.

4. When refitting hose, ensure that no unnecessary bends are introduced, and that hose is not twisted before or during tightening of union nuts.

5. Containers for hydraulic fluid must be kept absolutely clean.

6. Do not store brake fluid in an unsealed container. It will absorb water, and fluid in this condition would be dangerous to use due to a lowering of its boiling point.

7. Do not allow brake fluid to be contaminated with mineral oil, or use a container which has previously contained mineral oil.

8. Do not re-use brake fluid bled from system.

9. Always use clean brake fluid to clean hydraulic components.

10. Fit a cap to seal a hydraulic union and a plug to its socket after removal to prevent ingress of dirt.

11. Absolute cleanliness must be observed with hydraulic components at all times.

12. After any work on hydraulic systems, inspect carefully for leaks underneath the vehicle while a second operator applies maximum pressure to the brakes (engine running) and operates the steering.

INFORMATION

GENERAL FITTING REMINDERS

FUEL SYSTEM HOSES

CAUTION: All fuel hoses are made up of two laminations, an armoured rubber outer sleeve and an inner viton core. If any of the fuel system hoses have been disconnected, it is imperative that the internal bore is inspected to ensure that the viton lining has not become separated from the amoured outer sleeve. A new hose must be fitted if separation is evident.

METRIC NUT IDENTIFICATION

1. A nut with an ISO metric thread is marked on one face or on one of the flats of the hexagon with the strength grade symbol 8, 12 or 14.

Some nuts with a strength 4, 5 or 6 are also marked and some have the metric symbol M on the flat opposite the strength grade marking.

2. A clock face system is used as an alternative method of indicating the strength grade. The external chamfers or a face of the nut is marked in a position relative to the appropriate hour mark on a clock face to indicate the strength grade.

3. A dot is used to locate the 12 o’clock position and a dash to indicate the strength grade. If the grade is above 12, two dots identify the 12 o’clock position.

METRIC BOLT IDENTIFICATION

1. An ISO metric bolt or screw, made of steel and larger than 6 mm in diameter can be identified by either of the symbols ISO M or M embossed or indented on top of the head.

2. In addition to marks to identify the manufacture, the head is also marked with symbols to indicate the strength grade, e.g. 8.8, 12.9 or 14.9, where the first figure gives the minimum tensile strength of the bolt material in tens of kgf/mm

3. Zinc plated ISO metric bolts and nuts are chromate passivated, a gold-bronze colour.

KEYS AND KEYWAYS

1. Remove burrs from edges of keyways with a fine file and clean thoroughly before attempting to refit key.

2. Clean and inspect key closely; keys are suitable for refitting only if indistinguishable from new, as any indentation may indicate the onset of wear.

TAB WASHERS

1. Fit new washers in all places where they are used. Always fit a new tab washer.

2. Ensure that the new tab washer is of the same design as that replaced.

INFORMATION

GENERAL FITTING REMINDERS

COTTER PINS

1. Fit new cotter pins throughout when replacing any unit.

2. Always fit cotter pins where cotter pins were originally used. Do not substitute spring washers: there is always a good reason for the use of a cotter pin.

3. All cotter pins should be fitted as shown unless otherwise stated.

SCREW THREADS

1. Both UNF and Metric threads to ISO standards are used. See below for thread identification.

2. Damaged threads must always be discarded.

Cleaning up threads with a die or tap impairs the strength and closeness of fit of the threads and is not recommended.

3. Always ensure that replacement bolts are at least equal in strength to those replaced.

4. Do not allow oil, grease or jointing compound to enter blind threaded holes. The hydraulic action on screwing in the bolt or stud could split the housing.

5. Always tighten a nut or bolt to the recommended torque value. Damaged or corroded threads can affect the torque reading.

6. To check or re-tighten a bolt or screw to a specified torque value first loosen a quarter of a turn, then re-tighten to the correct value.

7. Oil thread lightly before tightening to ensure a free running thread, except in the case of threads treated with sealant/lubricant, and self-locking nuts.

NUTS

1. When tightening a slotted or castellated nut never loosen it back to insert cotter pin or locking wire except in those recommended cases where this forms part of an adjustment. If difficulty is experienced, alternative washers or nuts should be selected, or washer thickness reduced.

2. Where self-locking nuts have been removed it is advisable to replace them with new ones of the same type.

NOTE: Where bearing pre-load is involved nuts should be tightened in accordance with special instructions.

UNIFIED THREAD IDENTIFICATION

1. Bolts

A circular recess is stamped in the upper surface of the bolt head.

2. Nuts

A continuous line of circles is indented on one of the flats of the hexagon, parallel to the axis of the nut.

3. Studs, Brake Rods, etc.

The component is reduced to the core diameter for a short length at its extremity.

LOCKING WIRE

1. Fit new locking wire of the correct type for all assemblies incorporating it.

2. Arrange wire so that its tension tends to tighten the bolt heads, or nuts, to which it is fitted.

INFORMATION

LUBRICANTS, FLUIDS AND CAPACITIES

RECOMMENDED LUBRICANTS AND FLUIDS -

USA VEHICLES

COMPONENT

Engine

SPECIFICATION VISCOSITY

5W/20 ) Use oils to API service level

SGSH or

RES.22.OL.G4

CCMC G4

5W/30 )

5W/40 )

10W/30

10W/40 )

10W/50 )

15W/40 )

15W/50 )

20W/40 )

20W/50 )

Automatic gearbox ATF Dexron IID

Final drive units API or GL5

Swivel pin housings MIL - L - 2105 or

MIL - L - 2105B, C or D

90 EP

80W EP

Power steering

LT 230T transfer gearbox

Brake reservoir

Lubrication nipples

(hubs, ball joints, etc.)

ATF Dexron IID

API GL4 or GL5

MIL - L - 2105 or

MIL - L - 2105B

Brake fluid must have a minimum boiling point of 260

C (500˚F) and comply with FMVSS/116/DOT 4

NLGI-2 multipurpose lithium based grease

See table on page 3 for remaining vehicle components

AMBIENT TEMPERATURE

-30 -20 -10 0 10 20 30 40 50

INFORMATION

LUBRICANTS, FLUIDS AND CAPACITIES

RECOMMENDED LUBRICANTS AND FLUIDS

All climates and conditions

COMPONENT

Petrol models

Engine sump

Diesel

Engine sump

Main Gearbox

Automatic

Main Gearbox manual

SPECIFICATION VISCOSITY

Oils must meet: 5W/30

RES.22.OL.G-4 or

5W/40

5W/50

10W/30 CCMC G-4 or

API SG or SH 10W/40

10W/50

15W/40

15W/50

20W/40

20W/50

25W/40

25W/50

RES.22.OL.PD-2 15W/40 or CCMC PD-2 or API CD

ATF Dexron IID

Final drive units API or GL5

Swivel pin housings MIL - L - 2105 or

MIL - L - 2105B

C or D

ATF Dexron IID Power steering

Transfer box

LT230T

API GL4 or GL5

MIL - L - 2105 or

MIL - L - 2105B

C or D

90 EP

80 EP

90 EP

80 EP

AMBIENT TEMPERATURE

-30 -20 -10 0 10 20 30 40 50

INFORMATION

LUBRICANTS, FLUIDS AND CAPACITIES

Propeller shaft Front and Rear

Lubrication nipples

(hubs, ball joints etc.)

Seat slides

Door lock striker

NLGI - 2 Multi-purpose Lithium based GREASE

Brake and clutch reservoirs

Brake fluids having a minimum boiling point of 260

C (500

F) and complying with

FMVSS 116 DOT4

Engine coolant

V8i, Tdi, Mpi

Battery lugs,

Earthing surfaces where paint has been removed

Use an ethylene glycol based anti-freeze (containing no methanol) with non-phosphate corrosion inhibitors suitable for use in aluminium engines to ensure the protection of the cooling system against frost and corrosion in all seasons. Use one part anti-freeze to one part water for protection down to -36

C (-33

F).

IMPORTANT: Coolant solution must not fall below proportions one part anti-freeze to three parts water, i.e. minimum 25% anti-freeze in coolant otherwise damage to engine is liable to occur. Or a maximum of 60%.

Petroleum jelly.

NOTE: Do not use Silicone Grease

Air Conditioning

System Refrigerant Use only refrigerant R134a

Compressor Oil Nippon Denso ND-oil8 Unipart ND-oil8

ABS Sensor bush-rear

Silicone grease: Staborags NBU - Wabco 830 502,0634

Wacker chemie 704 - Wabco 830 502,0164

Kluber GL301

LUBRICATION PRACTICE

Use a high quality oil of the correct viscosity range and service classification in the engine during maintenance and when topping up. The use of oil not to the correct specification can lead to high oil and fuel consumption and ultimately to damaged components.

Oil to the correct specification contains additives which disperse the corrosive acids formed by combustion and prevent the formation of sludge which can block the oilways. Additional oil additives should not be used. Always adhere to the recommended servicing intervals.

WARNING: Many liquids and other substances used in motor vehicles are poisonous. They must not be consumed and must be kept away from open wounds. These substances, among others, include anti-freeze windscreen washer additives, lubricants and various adhesives.

INFORMATION

LUBRICANTS, FLUIDS AND CAPACITIES

CAPACITIES

The following capacity figures are approximate and are provided as a guide only.

Imp.Unit

Capacities (approx.)*

Engine sump oil

- 300Tdi models ......................................................

- V8i petrol models 3.9

............................................

- Mpi petrol models ..................................................

Extra when refilling after fitting new filter

- 300Tdi models ......................................................

- V8i petrol models ..................................................

- Mpi ........................................................................

Manual gearbox ...............................................................

Automatic gearbox ...........................................................

Transfer gearbox oil

Front differential

.........................................................

...............................................................

Rear differential ................................................................

Power steering box and reservoir LHD ............................

Power steering box and reservoir RHD ............................

Swivel pin housing oil (each) ............................................

Fuel tank usable fuel ........................................................

Cooling system

- 300Tdi models ......................................................

- V8i petrol models ..................................................

- Mpi ........................................................................

Washer bottle ...................................................................

Litres

5,8

6,1

4,90

0,85

0,56

0,4

2,67

9,1

2,30

1,70

2,90

3,40

0,35

89,0

11,50

11,30

10,00

7,0

10.20 pt

10.70 pt

8.70 pt

1.50 pt

1.00 pt

0.70 pt

4.70 pt

16.00 pt

4.00 pt

3.00 pt

5.00 pt

6.00 pt

0.60 pt

19.5 gall

20.20 pt

20.00 pt

17.60 pt

12.30 pt

US unit

12.30 pt

12.90 pt

10.40 pt

1.80 pt

1.20 pt

0.85 pt

5.70 pt

19.20 pt

4.90 pt

3.60 pt

6.00 pt

7.20 pt

0.75 pt

23 gall

24.30 pt

23.90 pt

21.00 pt

14.80 pt

NOTE: * All levels must be checked by dipstick or level plugs as applicable. When draining oil from the ZF automatic gearbox, oil will remain in the torque converter, refill to high level on dipstick only.

INFORMATION

LUBRICANTS, FLUIDS AND CAPACITIES

ANTI-FREEZE

ENGINE TYPE MIXTURE STRENGTH PERCENTAGE

CONCENTRATION

PROTECTION

LOWER

TEMPERATURE

LIMIT

V8i Engine

Diesel Engine

One part anti-freeze

One part water

Complete protection

Vehicle may be driven away immediately from cold

50%

Safe limit protection

Coolant in mushy state. Engine may be started and driven away after warm-up period

Lower protection

Prevents frost damage to cylinder head, block and radiator. Thaw out before starting engine

- 33

- 36

- 41

- 42

- 47

- 53

CAUTION: Anti-freeze content must never be allowed to fall below 25% otherwise damage to the engine is liable to occur. Also, anti-freeze content should not exceed 60% as this will greatly reduce the cooling effect of the coolant.

FUEL REQUIREMENTS

Catalyst vehicles

Vehicles equipped with catalytic converter are designed to use ONLY unleaded fuel. Unleaded fuel must be used for the emission control system to operate properly. Its use will also reduce spark plug fouling, exhaust system corrosion and engine oil deterioration.

Using fuel that contains lead will result in damage to the emission control system and could result in loss of warranty coverage. The effectiveness of the catalysts in the catalytic converters will be seriously impaired if leaded fuel is used. The vehicle is equipped with an electronic fuel injection system, which includes two oxygen sensors.

Leaded fuel will damage the sensors, and will deteriorate the emission control system.

Regulations require that pumps delivering unleaded fuel be labelled UNLEADED. Only these pumps have nozzles which fit the filler neck of the vehicle fuel tank.

INFORMATION

LUBRICANTS, FLUIDS AND CAPACITIES

RECOMMENDED FUEL

Petrol engines

- with catalytic converter ................................................

- non catalytic, 9.35:1 compression ratio .......................

- non catalytic, 8.13:1 compression ratio .......................

- Australia ......................................................................

unleaded only, 95 RON (USA 90 CLC or AKI) leaded 97 RON/unleaded 95 RON leaded 90 RON/unleaded 95 RON minimum 91 RON unleaded

Diesel engines

300Tdi ...........................................................................

Diesel fuel oil,distillate,diesel fuel, automotive gas or

Derv to British standard 2869, Class A1 or A2

Using fuel with an octane rating lower than stated above could seriously impair vehicle performance.

CAUTION: Do not use oxygenated fuels such as blends of methanol/ gasoline or ethanol/gasoline

(e.g. ’Gasohol’). Take care not to spill fuel during refuelling.

INFORMATION

MAINTENANCE

SERVICE SCHEDULE

This section gives information on the range of service procedures.

Where required, instructions are given for carrying out each service procedure, or a cross reference is given, where the procedure can be found in this manual.

Service Schedule sheets are published separately to reflect the maintenance needs and intervals for each vehicle variant and model year. The procedures given must be used in conjunction with the Service

Schedule sheets.

The Service Schedule sheets are available from:-

Land Rover Merchandising

PO Box 534

Erdington

Birmingham B24 0QS.

England.

VEHICLE INTERIOR

CHECK SEATS & BELTS

Check condition and security of seats, seat belt mountings, seat belts, buckles and opertion of inertia seat belts. Lubricate seat tilt pivots.

CHECK OPERATION OF FOOT BRAKE AND

CLUTCH

If pedal feels ’spongy’ bleed system.

See BRAKES,

Repair, Brake System Bleed or. See CLUTCH,

Repair, Bleed hydraulic system

Check all hoses and pipes for security, fractures and leaks. Fit new hoses and pipes as necessary.

CHECK OPERATION OF LAMPS

Check operation of all lamps, horns and warning indicators.

CHECK OPERATION OF WIPERS

Check operation of front/rear screen wipers and washers and condition of wiper blades.

AIR BAG MODULE(S)

Check air bag module covers.

Check visually for signs of damage.

Renew every ten years.

MAINTENANCE

MAINTENANCE

CHECK SECURITY AND OPERATION OF PARK

BRAKE

Parking brake adjust

1. Select a gear or ’P’ in main gearbox.

2. Chock road wheels.

3. Release parkbrake lever.

4. Remove switch panel from centre console.

5. Underneath vehicle, rotate brake adjuster clockwise until brake shoes are fully expanded against drum.

6. Back off adjuster until drum is free to rotate.

7. Rotate adjustment thumbwheel below parkbrake lever until parking brake is fully operational on third notch of ratchet.

NOTE: Cable adjustment must ONLY be used for initial setting and to compensate for cable stretch. It MUST NOT be used to take up brake shoe wear, which MUST be adjusted at brake drum.

8. Operate parking brake to settle shoes. Recheck parkbrake is fully operational on third notch of ratchet. Readjust if necessary.

9. Refit switch panel.

MAINTENANCE

MAINTENANCE

VEHICLE EXTERIOR

CHECK/ADJUST HEADLAMP ALIGNMENT

Check/adjust headlamp and auxiliary alignment.

CHECK FRONT WHEEL ALIGNMENT

Use recognised wheel alignment equipment to perform this check and adjustment.

See STEERING,

Adjustment, Front Wheel Alignment

REMOVE WHEELS, CHECK TYRES

Check tyres (including spare) for compliance with manufacturers’ specification.

Check visually for cuts, lumps, bulges, uneven tread wear and tread depth. Check road wheels for damage.

Check/adjust tyre pressures.

INSPECT BRAKE PADS FOR WEAR, CALIPERS

FOR LEAKS AND CONDITION

Check thickness of brake pads, fit new pads if minimum thickness is less than 3,0mm. Check brake pads for oil contamination. If new brake pads required.

See BRAKES, Repair, Front Brake Pads

or.

See BRAKES, Repair, Rear Brake Pads

WARNING: When renewing brake pads, it is essential that only genuine components with correct grade of lining are used.

Always fit new pads as complete axle sets, NEVER individually or as a single wheel set. Serious consequences could result from out of balance braking due to mixing of linings.

Refit road wheels

Fit road wheels in original hub position. Secure in position with wheel nuts, do not fully tighten wheel nuts at this stage, lower vehicle and finally tighten wheel nuts to correct torque.

Alloy wheels:

130 Nm.

Steel wheels:

130 Nm.

CHECK/TIGHTEN TOWING BRACKET FITTINGS

LUBRICATE ALL HINGES, DOOR CHECK

MECHANISMS, BONNET [HOOD] CATCHES AND

FUEL FILLER FLAP

MAINTENANCE

MAINTENANCE

UNDER BONNET [HOOD] MAINTENANCE

CHECK COOLING/HEATER SYSTEMS

Check cooling/heater systems for leaks and hoses for security and condition.

Cooling system hoses should be changed at first signs of deterioration.

CHECK CONDITION OF ENGINE MOUNTING

RUBBERS

CLEAN DISTRIBUTOR CAP - V8i

The electronic ignition employs a Lucas 35DLM8 distributor.

Internal operating parts of distributor are pre-set at factory and do not normally require resetting.

Adjustments should only be made if unit is known to be faulty or damaged. Distributor maintenance consists of following items.

1. Clean outer surfaces of distributor cap to remove dirt, grease etc.

2. Unclip cap, check cap for cracks.

3. Wipe inside cap with lint free cloth.

4. Check rotor arm, cap and flash shield tracking.

DO NOT DISTURB clear plastic insulating cover (flash shield) which protects magnetic pick-up module.

CHECK BRAKE SERVO HOSE FOR SECURITY

AND CONDITION

CHECK FUEL EVAPORATIVE LOSS CONTROL

SYSTEM FOR LEAKS - V8i CATALYST, Mpi

LUBRICATE DISTRIBUTOR ROTOR SPINDLE - V8i

Apply a spot of clean engine oil into rotor spindle after rotor arm has been removed.

CHECK FUEL FILLER CAP SEAL FOR LEAKS - V8i

- CATALYST, Mpi

CLEAN/ADJUST SPARK PLUGS - V8i CATALYST

CHECK CONDITION OF HEATER PLUG WIRING

FOR FRAYING, CHAFING AND DETERIORATION -

Tdi

RENEW SPARK PLUGS V8i - V8i CATALYST

Clean, adjust and renew

1. Take great care when fitting spark plugs not to cross-thread plug, otherwise costly damage to cylinder head will result.

CHECK IGNITION WIRING

Check ignition wiring and high tension leads for fraying, chafing and deterioration.

MAINTENANCE

MAINTENANCE

2. Clean or replace spark plugs as applicable.

3. It is essential that correct type of spark plugs are fitted.

4. Incorrect grade of plugs may lead to piston overheating and engine failure.

Remove

5. Disconnect battery negative lead. Remove H.T.

leads from spark plugs.

6. Remove plugs and washers.

Fitting H.T. leads

8. Ensure replacement H.T. leads are correctly refitted as illustrated.

Failure to observe this instruction may result in cross-firing between two closely fitted leads which are consecutive in firing order.

3.9 V8

7. When pushing leads onto plugs, ensure that shrouds are firmly seated.

4.0 V8

MAINTENANCE

MAINTENANCE

RENEW SPARK PLUGS - Mpi

Spark plugs - Mpi

Remove

1. Release 4 screws and remove spark plug cover.

Refit

5. Inspect spark plugs.

6. Set plug gaps.

CAUTION: Use correct type and grade of plug.

7. Apply anti-seize to plug threads. Fit spark plugs.

8. Connect and route spark plug leads as illustrated.

2. Disconnect 4 plug leads.

3. Release plug leads from securing clips.

4. Remove spark plugs from cylinder head.

9. Refit spark plug cover.

MAINTENANCE

MAINTENANCE

CHECK/ADJUST VALVE CLEARANCES. - Tdi

Valve adjustment.

See GENERAL SPECIFICATION

DATA, Information, 300 Tdi Engine

RENEW FUEL FILTER ELEMENT - Tdi

Drain off water and sediment

CAUTION: It is essential that any water and sediment in fuel filter is drained off, as water in fuel can result in damage to injection pump.

1. Hold a small receptacle beneath drain cock.

Unscrew the drain cock half a turn.

2. Drain off water and sediment.

3. Tighten the drain cock immediately fuel starts to flow from drain cock.

NOTE: Any delay in tightening drain cock when fuel starts to flow could possibly mean bleeding fuel system.

Renew fuel filter element

1. Clean area around filter, place a container beneath.

2. Unscrew filter, a quantity of fuel will be released, and discard filter.

3. Wet seal of new filter with fuel.

4. Screw new filter into position.

5. Ensure that drain cock is secure.

RENEW AIR CLEANER ELEMENT V8i CATALYST

Mpi - Tdi - V8i NON CATALYST

To renew air cleaner element - V8i, Mpi,Tdi

See FUEL SYSTEM, Repair, Air Cleaner

MAINTENANCE

MAINTENANCE

CLEAN PLENUM CHAMBER VENTILATION

PASSAGEWAY - V8i

Cleaning plenum chamber ventilation passageway can be carried out without removing plenum chamber from ram housing.

CAUTION: Care must be taken to prevent debris from passageway passing beyond throttle butterfly disc.

WARNING: Safety glasses must be worn when performing this operation. Ensure that debris is not blown into atmosphere which could be harmful to other persons closeby.

1. Disconnect battery negative lead.

2. Release hose clamp and remove hose from plenum chamber inlet.

3. Remove crankcase ventilation hose from side of plenum chamber.

4. Insert a piece of lint free cloth down throttle butterfly bore to prevent debris passing throttle butterfly.

5. Place a cloth over tube protruding from side of plenum from which ventilation hose was removed to prevent debris from passageway being blown into atmosphere.

6. Use a compressed air line with a slim bent nozzle to enable passageway to be cleaned out from within throttle butterfly bore.

7. Any remaining matter can be dislodged using soft bent wire or pipe cleaner. Finally blow out passageway again to remove remaining debris.

8. Remove small ’T’ piece between crankcase ventilation hoses and check it is free from blockages, clean as necessary.

9. Refit ’T’ piece and hoses, tighten hose clamps securely.

RENEW CHARCOAL CANISTER - V8i- Mpi

Charcoal canister

Remove

1. Disconnect battery negative lead.

2. Pry out purge valve.

3. Disconnect pipe.

4. Loosen bolt.

5. Remove charcoal canister.

MAINTENANCE

Refit

6. Reverse removal procedure.

MAINTENANCE

CHECK CONDITION OF DRIVE BELT - V8i - Tdi -

Mpi

RENEW - V8i - Tdi

Renew drive belt V8i.

See ENGINE, Repair, Drive

Belt Renew

Renew drive belt Tdi.

See ENGINE, Repair, Drive

Belt Renew

RENEW - Mpi

1. Check condition of drive belt, renew a belt that shows signs of wear, splitting or oil contamination.

2. Check belt length indicator, belt must be renewed before indicator reaches R.H. end of slot.

3. Use 15mm ring wrench on bolt and hold tensioner pulley fully clockwise.

4. Release drive belt from tensioner pulley and remove ring wrench.

5. Remove belt from between pulleys.

6. Clean drive belt pulley grooves and ensure grooves are not damaged.

7. Fit new drive belt around pulley, except tensioner pulley, ensuring all grooves are correctly engaged.

8. Hold tensioner pulley fully clockwise and fit drive centrally around tensioner pulley.

RENEW ANCILLARY DRIVE BELTS

CHECK/TOP UP AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION

FLUID LEVEL

NOTE: Transmission fluid level is checked when fluid is cold with engine idling in neutral.

1. Ensure vehicle is on level ground.

2. Check fluid level registers between MAX and

MIN marking on dipstick.

MAINTENANCE

MAINTENANCE

CHECK/TOP UP COOLING SYSTEM

1. To prevent corrosion of aluminium alloy engine parts it is imperative that cooling system is filled with a solution of water and phosphate free anti-freeze, winter or summer. Never fill or top up with plain water.

result.

WARNING: Do not remove filler cap when engine is hot because cooling system is pressurised and personal scalding could

2. When removing filler cap, turn cap slowly anti-clockwise, pause and allow all pressure to escape.

3. Continue to turn until cap is removed.

4. When engine is cold expansion tank coolant should be level with top of indicator post, visible inside tank through filler hole.

5. If necessary, top up cooling system with premixed coolant. Use soft water whenever possible, if local water supply is hard, rainwater should be used.

CHECK/ TOP UP POWER STEERING FLUID

RESERVOIR

1. Remove fluid reservoir cap. Check that fluid is up to high mark on dipstick.

CHECK/ TOP UP CLUTCH AND BRAKE FLUID

RESERVOIRS

CAUTION: Brake fluid can damage paintwork. If spillage occurs, wash affected area IMMEDIATELY with a large quantity of water.

CHECK/TOP UP WASHER RESERVOIR

Top up washer reservoir to within 25 mm of filler neck.

Use a screen washer solvent/anti-freeze solution to assist removing mud, flies and road film and protect against freezing.

LUBRICATE ACCELERATOR AND CRUISE

CONTROL LINKAGES

6. When replacing filler cap it is important that it is tightened down fully. Failure to tighten filler cap properly may result in water loss, with possible damage to engine

The cooling system should be drained and flushed at

2 year intervals or at onset of second winter. Refer to

Coolant Requirements.

See COOLING SYSTEM,

Adjustment, Coolant Requirements

CHECK/ADJUST IGNITION TIMING - V8i

CATALYST

Check ignition timing.

See ENGINE TUNING

DATA, Information, Engine 3.9 V8i

MAINTENANCE

MAINTENANCE

CHECK/ADJUST ENGINE IDLE SPEED - Tdi

For idle speed.

See ENGINE TUNING DATA,

Information, 300 Tdi Engine

CHECK ENGINE IDLE SPEED - Mpi

For idle speed.

See ENGINE TUNING DATA,

Information, Engine - Mpi - 2.0 Litre

RENEW CAMSHAFT DRIVE BELT - Tdi

Renew camshaft drive belt.

See ENGINE, Repair,

Camshaft Drive Belt and Gears

The engine timing gears are driven by a flexible rubber belt which must be renewed at intervals determined by the severity of operating conditions.

In reasonable, temperate climate operation, renew the belt every 120,000 km (72,000 miles) or every 6 years whichever occurs earlier.

In adverse operating conditions such as work in dusty atmospheres, high ambient temperatures and desert and tropical zones, renew the belt every 60,000 km

(36,000 miles) or every 3 years whichever occurs earlier.

CAUTION: If the drive belt is not renewed at the correct interval, it could fail, resulting in serious damage.

CHECK/ADJUST STEERING BOX V8i - Tdi - Mpi

Check steering box for fluid leaks.

Check that there is no backlash in steering box in straight ahead position. Adjust steering box if necessary.

See STEERING, Adjustment, Power

Steering Box

CLEAN BATTERY CONNECTIONS

NOTE: Some 96 models are fitted with battery backed-up sounder

See

ELECTRICAL, Repair, Battery

Remove battery terminals, clean and coat with petroleum jelly.

A low maintenance battery is installed in vehicle.

Dependent upon climate conditions electrolyte levels should be checked as follows:

Temperate climates every three years.

Hot climates every year.

RENEW CAMSHAFT DRIVE BELT - Mpi

Renew every 160,000 km (96,000 miles) or every 6 years. In adverse conditions every 80,000 km (48,000 miles).

For details of renewing camshaft drive belt.

See

ENGINE, Repair, Camshaft Drive Belt - Mpi

CHECK CAMSHAFT DRIVE BELT - Mpi

For details of checking camshaft drive belt.

See

ENGINE, Repair, Check Camshaft Drive Belt - Mpi

MAINTENANCE

MAINTENANCE

EXTERNALLY CHECK INTERCOOLER FOR

OBSTRUCTION - Tdi

Clear any trapped dirt or flies from vanes of intercooler

UNDER VEHICLE MAINTENANCE

Vehicles operating under severe conditions of dust, sand, mud and water should have oils changed and lubrication carried out at more frequent intervals than is recommended in maintenance schedules.

CLEAN INTERCOOLER ELEMENT - Tdi

Remove

1. Remove intercooler element.

2. Flush intercooler with ICI ’GENKLENE’or

ˆoD-SOLVE’ propriety cleaner, following the manufacturer’s instructions.

3. Dry the intercooler completely ensuring that no liquid remains in the element.

Refit

4. Refit intercooler element.

RENEW ENGINE OIL AND FILTER - Tdi

CAUTION: Serious damage to the turbocharger will result if engine is run above idling speed before oil pressure is restored.

RENEW ENGINE OIL - V8i

RENEW ENGINE OIL AND FILTER - V8i

CAUTION: To prevent an airlock occuring after removing filter, fill new filter with oil and fit immediately after removing old filter. If airlock does occur fill oil pump with petroleum jelly.

RENEW ENGINE OIL AND FILTER - Mpi

CHECK/TOP UP MANUAL GEARBOX OIL - V8i

1. Site vehicle on lift or level ground.

2. Remove oil filler level plug. If necessary, inject new oil into the gearbox until it runs out of filler hole. Fit plug. Tighten to

30 Nm.

RENEW MANUAL GEARBOX OIL - Tdi - Mpi

RENEW MANUAL GEARBOX OIL - V8i

MAINTENANCE

MAINTENANCE

RENEW AUTOMATIC GEARBOX FLUID AND OIL

SCREEN

1. Site vehicle on lift or level ground. Place container to drain gearbox fluid into. Disconnect battery negative lead.

2. Remove gearbox dipstick, located at rear of right hand rocker cover, to aid oil drainage. Release plug from bottom of sump and allow fluid to drain completely.

3. Refit plug using a new sealing washer. Tighten to

10 Nm

6. Start and run engine. Apply footbrake, select position 1 then back to park. Check fluid level, this must be between the two marks on the dipstick.

Refill ZF Automatic Gearbox and Check Fluid

Level.

NOTE: The fluid level must checked when fluid is cold and engine idling in park.

4. Ensure vehicle is on level ground.

5. Refill or top-up with correct quantity and grade of fluid.

See LUBRICANTS, FLUIDS AND

CAPACITIES, Information, Recommended

Lubricants and Fluids

Oil screen replacement ZF automatic gearbox.

See AUTOMATIC GEARBOX, Repair, Oil Screen

MAINTENANCE

MAINTENANCE

RENEW TRANSFER GEARBOX OIL

1. Site vehicle on lift or level ground.

2. Disconnect battery negative lead.

3. Clean immediate area around filler/level and drain plugs.

WARNING: When draining gearbox care should be taken to ensure that oil is not hot as personal scalding could result.

4. Place a container under gearbox to drain oil into.

5. Remove filler/level plug to vent gearbox and assist draining.

6. Remove drain plug and allow oil to drain.

CHECK/TOP UP TRANSFER GEARBOX OIL

1. Site vehicle on lift or level ground.

2. Disconnect battery negative lead.

3. Clean immediate area around filler/level plug.

4. Remove plug and fill gearbox with recommended grade of oil, until oil starts to seep from filler/level hole.

5. Clean any previously applied sealant from filler/level plug.

6. Apply Hylomar sealant to threads of plug and refit plug. Tighten to

30 Nm.

7. Wipe away any surplus oil.

8. Reconnect battery negative lead.

7. Thoroughly clean drain plug threads prior to applying fresh ’Hylomar’ sealant. Fit plug

Tighten to

30 Nm.

8. Fill gearbox with correct quantity and grade of oil until oil seeps from filler level hole. Wipe away any surplus oil.

9. Thoroughly clean filler/level plug threads prior to applying fresh ’Hylomar’ sealant. Fit plug

Tighten to

30 Nm.

10. Reconnect battery negative lead.

MAINTENANCE

MAINTENANCE

RENEW FRONT AND REAR AXLE OIL

1. Site vehicle on lift or level ground. Place container under axle to be drained.

2. Using a 13mm square drive wrench, remove drain and filler/level plugs from axle. Allow oil to drain completely. Clean and refit drain plug.

3. Inject new oil of recommended make and grade until it reaches level hole. Clean and refit filler/level plug and wipe away surplus oil.

CHECK/TOP UP SWIVEL PIN HOUSING OIL

RENEW SWIVEL PIN HOUSING OIL

1. Site vehicle on lift or level ground. Place container under swivel to be drained.

2. Remove drain and level plugs, allow oil to drain completely, clean and refit drain plug.

3. Remove filler plug and inject recommended make and grade of oil it reaches level hole.

4. Clean and refit level and filler plugs, wipe away any surplus oil.

CHECK/TOP UP FRONT AND REAR AXLE OIL

1. Site vehicle on lift or level ground.

2. Using a 13mm square drive wrench, remove filler/level plug from axle.

3. If necessary inject new oil of recommended make and grade until it reaches level hole. Clean and refit filler/level plug and wipe away surplus oil.

MAINTENANCE

MAINTENANCE

LUBRICATE PROPELLER SHAFT SLIDING , AND

UNIVERSAL JOINTS

1. Clean all grease nipples on front and rear propeller shafts.

2. Using a low pressure hand grease gun, apply recommended grease, to grease nipples at front and rear propeller shaft universal and sliding joints.

NOTE: The rear propeller shaft flexible coupling is not fitted with a grease nipple.

CHECK VISUALLY BRAKE, FUEL, CLUTCH

PIPES/UNIONS FOR CHAFING LEAKS AND

CORROSION

CHECK EXHAUST SYSTEM FOR LEAKS,

SECURITY AND DAMAGE

CHECK FOR FLUID LEAKS FROM POWER

STEERING AND SUSPENSION SYSTEMS,

HYDRAULIC PIPES AND UNIONS FOR CHAFING

AND CORROSION

CHECK/TIGHTEN STEERING UNIT AND STEERING

ROD BALL JOINT FIXINGS, CHECK CONDITION

OF OF BALL JOINTS AND DUST COVERS

Ball joints are lubricated for their normal life during manufacture and require no further lubrication. This applies ONLY if rubber boot has not been dislodged or damaged. Joints should be checked at specified mileage intervals but more frequently if vehicle is used under arduous conditions.

1. Check for wear in joints by moving ball joint up and down vigorously. If free movement is apparent fit a new joint assembly.

MAINTENANCE

MAINTENANCE

CHECK/TIGHTEN FRONT AND REAR AXLE

SUSPENSION LINK FIXINGS, CHECK CONDITION

OF MOUNTING RUBBERS

DRAIN FUEL SEDIMENTER - Tdi

Fuel sedimenter

The sedimenter is attached to left-hand side of chassis frame near fuel tank. It increases the working life of the fuel filter by removing larger droplets of water and larger particles of foreign matter from fuel.

Drain off water

1. Loosen drain plug, allow water to run out.

Tighten plug immediately pure diesel fuel starts to flow.

RENEW FUEL FILTER

WARNING: Ensure that fuel handling precautions given in Section 01 -

Introduction regarding fuel handling are strictly adhered to when carrying out following instructions.

See INTRODUCTION, Information,

Fuel Handling Precautions

WARNING: The spilling of fuel is unavoidable during this operation. Ensure that all necessary precautions are taken to prevent fire and explosion.

1. Depressurise fuel system.

See FUEL SYSTEM,

Repair, Depressurising Fuel System

2. The fuel line filter is located on right hand chassis side member forward of fuel tank filler neck. Access to filter is gained through right hand rear wheel arch.

3. Thoroughly clean area around hose connections to prevent ingress of foreign matter into fuel system.

4. Loosen two fuel unions and remove hoses from filter canister.

5. Release securing bolt and bracket, remove filter from chassis side member.

6. Fit a new filter observing direction of flow arrow on canister.

7. Fit inlet and outlet hoses. Tighten to

30 Nm.

8. Refit fuel pump relay.

9. Reconnect battery negative lead.

10. Recode radio.

11. Start engine and inspect hose connections for fuel leaks.

MAINTENANCE

MAINTENANCE

ABS VEHICLES - CHECK ROAD WHEEL SPEED

SENSOR ELECTRICAL HARNESS FOR DAMAGE

RENEW OXYGEN SENSORS

See EMISSION CONTROL, Repair, Heated

Oxygen Sensor (HO2S)

RENEW CATALYTIC CONVERTERS

See MANIFOLD AND EXHAUST SYSTEM, Repair,

Exhaust System Complete

REPORT ANY UNUSUAL FEATURES OF VEHICLE

CONDITION AND ADDITIONAL WORK REQUIRED

CARRY OUT ROAD TEST

For details of dynamometer testing.

See

INTRODUCTION, Information, Dynamometer

Testing - Non Anti-lock brake vehicles See

INTRODUCTION, Information, Dynamometer

Testing - Vehicles with Anti-lock brakes (ABS)

Check following items:

1. Inhibitor switch only operates in P and N.

2. Engine for excessive noise.

3. Clutch for slip, judder or spin.

4. Automatic gear selection/shift speeds.

5. Gear selection/noise - high/low range.

6. Steering for abnormal noise/effort.

7. Steering for free play.

8. All instruments, gauges and warning indicators.

9. Heater and air conditioning systems.

10. Heated rear screen.

11. Shock absorbers - ride irregularities.

12. Foot brake, on emergency stop, pulling to one side, binding, pedal effort.

13. Parkbrake efficiency.

14. Seat reclining and latching.

15. Fully extend seat belt, check operation of retraction and latching. Inertia belts lock when snatched or vehicle on slope.

16. Road wheel balance.

17. Transmission for vibrations.

18. Body noises, squeaks and rattles.

19. Excessive exhaust smoke.

20. Engine idle speed.

21. Endorse service record.

22. Report any unusual features of vehicle condition and additional work required.

ENDORSE SERVICE RECORD

MAINTENANCE

MAINTENANCE

RESET EMISSION MAINTENANCE REMINDER -

USA

The emission maintenance reminder is designed to activate at 52,500 and 105,000 miles respectively and will illuminate a ’Service Engine’ red warning light in instrument binnacle.

The emission maintenance reminder must be reset after required maintenance has been carried out and a new tamperproof label fitted by a Land Rover of

North America dealer. This emission maintenance reminder is part of the Emission Control System

Reset

1. The control unit is located in the passenger footwell.

2. Identify control unit and remove from plug.

3. Remove tamperproof label to reveal access hole for resetting.

4. Place a thin metallic probe into access hole and momentarily electrically short between reset pins inside unit.

RECOMMENDED SERVICE ITEMS

Refer Service Schedule sheets for intervals.

Clean sunroof drain tubes, clean and lubricate guide rails and slides.

Renew the hydraulic brake fluid.

See BRAKES,

Repair, Brake System Bleed

Renew all hydraulic brake fluid, seals, brake servo filter and flexible hoses.

All working surfaces of the master cylinder and caliper cylinders should be examined and renewed where necessary.

ABS vehicles only - renew hydraulic brake fluid and flexible hoses examine the working surfaces of the caliper cylinders and renew the seals or cylinders where necessary.

Air cleaner - When the vehicle is used in dusty or field conditions or deep wading, frequent attention to the air cleaner may be required.

ABS vehicles used extensively in arduous off-road conditions - check the rear wheel road speed sensor for abrasive wear.

MAINTENANCE

Tdi

DRIVE BELT INFORMATION

A single ’serpentine drive belt’ drives all the ancilliaries bar the air conditioning compressor, which has a separate drive belt. It is essential that the belts are fitted exactly as shown. It should also be noted that the water pump/viscous fan is driven in a clockwise direction.

Off road driving

Regular examination of the drive belt is essential if the vehicle is used off road. The vehicle driver should be requested to identify the type of mileage the vehicle has covered.

After every off road session the owner should inspect the belt for cuts and possible damage caused by stones. If belt has jumped, reposition belt correctly. A new belt must be fitted at the next service or before, dependant on the type of damage sustained.

Fan cowl

To ensure easy access to the drive belt the top portion of the fan cowl is detachable.

Check condition

Check condition of drive belt. Renew a belt that shows signs of wear, splitting or oil contamination.

A drive belt tensioner automatically tensions the drive belt, eliminating the need for tensioning individual drive belts. Turning the tensioner pulley in a clockwise direction will release drive belt tension.

Under normal highway use the belt must be changed at 160,000 kilometres, 96,000 miles or eight years whichever occurs first.

The drive belt must be examined at every service and replaced if necessary.

REPAIR

ENGINE

DRIVE BELT RENEW

Service repair no - 86.10.03

Remove

NOTE: If cast lines on tensioner arm and tensioner spring case are aligned, a new drive belt must be fitted.

1. Remove fan cowl upper.

2. Apply ring spanner to tensioner pulley retaining bolt.

3. Turn spanner to release pulley tension from belt.

4. Detach belt from pulley.

5. Release tensioner.

6. Complete removal of belt. Mark direction on belt if refitting.

COMPRESSOR DRIVE BELT

Service repair no - 86.10.02

Remove

1. Remove auxiliary drive belt.

See Drive Belt

Renew

2. Remove compressor shield.

3. Loosen tensioner retaining bolts.

4. Remove compressor drive belt. Mark direction on belt if refitting.

Refit

7. Reverse removal procedure.

Refit

5. Fit compressor drive belt.

6. Fit torque meter to centre of tensioner and apply and hold a torque of

35 Nm. Tighten 3 tensioner retaining bolts.

7. Rotate crankshaft 2 full turns.

8. Reapply and hold a torque of

35 Nm to tensioner, then fully loosen and retighten 3 tensioner retaining screws to

25 Nm.

REPAIR

Tdi

ENGINE

Service repair no - 12.41.01

Remove

CAUTION: Seal all exposed pipe ends against ingress of dirt after disconnection.

1. Park vehicle on level ground and apply park brake.

2. Disconnect battery negative lead.

3. Remove bonnet [hood].

See CHASSIS AND

BODY, Repair, Bonnet [Hood]

4. If air conditioning is fitted, remove RH footwell side trim panel and disconnect harness multiplug from relay.

6. Remove engine harness grommet from bulkhead and move harness into engine bay.

7. Release battery positive lead from retaining clip at base of suspension turret.

8. Remove Radiator Assembly.

See COOLING

SYSTEM, Repair, Radiator

9. Discharge air conditioning system.

See AIR

CONDITIONING, Adjustment, Refrigerant

Recovery Recycling Recharging

Remove retaining bolts and disconnect both pipe adaptors from rear of compressor.

10. Remove rocker cover insulation.

11. Disconnect cyclone hose from air cleaner hose.

12. Remove air cleaner hose from turbocharger.

13. Remove feed pipe/hose from turbocharger and intercooler.

14. Disconnect heater hoses from cylinder head and heater rails.

15. Remove bolt securing transmission breather pipe clip to cylinder head; move breather pipes aside.

16. Disconnect inlet and outlet hoses from power steering pump.

17. Disconnect bypass hose from thermostat housing.

18. Release bypass hose from retaining clips on front timing cover.

19. Remove split pin securing inner throttle cable to injector pump.

20. Depress tags on outer cable adjusting nut, remove cable from mounting bracket, and move aside.

21. If automatic transmission is fitted, release kickdown cable from injector pump and mounting bracket.

5. Disconnect the two engine harness multiplugs on LH side of footwell.

REPAIR

ENGINE

22. Disconnect feed pipe and spill return pipe from injector pump.

23. Disconnect both pipes from fuel lift pump.

24. Disconnect servo hose from vacuum pump.

25. Remove three retaining nuts and disconnect exhaust down pipe.

26. Remove oil cooler pipes from oil filter adaptor.

27. If automatic transmission is fitted, disconnect feed and return pipes at gearbox oil cooler.

Remove retaining bracket from LH side of cylinder block and release both oil cooler pipes.

28. Support gearbox.

29. Disconnect ground strap from starter motor.

30. On vehicles with automatic transmission, remove fixings and detach drive plate housing access panel and gasket.

31. Working through drive plate housing aperture mark the torque convertor and drive plate to facilitate reassembly.

32. Remove the four convertor to flexible drive securing bolts, rotating crankshaft to gain access to each individual bolt.

33. Fit engine lifting bracket to the two RH rear cylinder head fixing bolts.

34. Using suitable hoist, fit lifting chains to engine.

35. Remove four bolts, from both sides, securing front engine mounting brackets to cylinder block.

36. Remove two bolts, from both sides, securing front engine mounting bracket to bell housing.

REPAIR

Tdi

37. Remove nuts and plain washers securing front engine mountings to chassis,and lift both engine mounting bracket assemblies from vehicle.

38. Remove engine to bell housing fixings. Leave starter motor attached.

39. Raise engine to separate from transmission.

40. Check all connections to engine have been disconnected.

41. Remove engine.

Refit

42. Apply Hylomar to mating faces of bell housing.

Lubricate splines of gearbox primary pinion with

Rocol MV 3.

If automatic transmission, coat the four drive plate to torque convertor bolts with Loctite 290.

Tighten to

39 Nm.

43. Lower engine and locate with transmission.

If manual transmission locate primary pinion into clutch and engage bell housing dowels. Fit engine to bell housing fixings. Tighten to

40 Nm.

If automatic transmission fixings. Tighten to

Nm.

44. Raise engine, refit front engine mounting brackets to cylinder block and bell housing.

45. Remove gearbox support and lower engine.

46. Tighten front engine mountings to chassis fixings. Tighten to

45 Nm.

47. Reverse removal procedure. 1 to 37.

REPAIR

ENGINE

CRANKSHAFT PULLEY

Service repair no - 12.21.01

Remove

1. Disconnect battery negative lead.

2. Drain coolant.

3. Remove top hose from radiator.

4. Remove intercooler to induction manifold hose.

5. Remove viscous fan and coupling.

See

COOLING SYSTEM, Repair, Viscous

Coupling, Fan Blades, Pulley and Fan Cowl

6. Remove fan cowl.

7. Remove drive belt.

See Drive Belt Renew

8. Fit crankshaft pulley retainer LRT-12-080 and secure with four bolts.

9. Remove crankshaft pulley retaining bolt using socket and suitable long bar.

Refit

12. Refit in reverse order, lightly greasing pulley spigot. Tighten to

80 Nm + 90

10. Remove pulley retainer.

11. Remove pulley, if necessary using extractor

LRT-12-049 with thrust pad from LRT-12-031.

REPAIR

Tdi

FRONT COVER PLATE

Service repair no - 12.65.01

Remove

1. Disconnect battery negative lead.

2. Drain coolant.

3. Remove top hose from radiator.

4. Remove inter-cooler to induction manifold hose.

5. Remove viscous coupling and fan.

See

COOLING SYSTEM, Repair, Viscous

Coupling, Fan Blades, Pulley and Fan Cowl

6. Remove fan cowl.

7. Remove drive belt.

See Drive Belt Renew

8. Remove crankshaft pulley.

See Crankshaft

Pulley

9. Remove 14 bolts securing front cover plate, noting top two bolts also retain thermostat hose clips.

10. Remove cover plate complete with gasket.

11. Remove small gasket from centre bolt boss.

Seal replacement

12. Remove worn seal from cover and clean recess.

13. Support cover and fit new seal, open side fitted into recess, using special tool LRT-12-077.

Refit

14. Refit in reverse order to removal using new gaskets, fitting the securing bolts as shown in illustration ST3475. Tighten to

25 Nm.

REPAIR

ENGINE

CAMSHAFT DRIVE BELT AND GEARS

Service repair no - 12.65.18

TIMING BELT

Remove

1. Remove front cover plate.

See Front Cover

Plate

2. Position engine at TDC on No. 1 cylinder.

3. If manual gearbox: Remove blanking plug from flywheel housing and insert timing tool

LRT-12-044. If EDC - timing tool LRT-12-085 must be used.

If automatic gearbox:Sited to the rear of the engine sump on engine backplate is a blanking plate. Remove 2 blanking plate bolts and insert timing tool LRT-12-044 into the larger bolt hole.

6. Insert pin from special tool LRT-12-045 in injection pump gear and through into pump flange.

NOTE: If the camshaft gear is to be removed during these operations its retaining bolt should be slackened before the timing belt is removed.

4. Engage timing tool pin with slot in flywheel.

5. Check correct alignment of timing mark on camshaft gear and that crankshaft key aligns with cast arrow on housing.

7. Slacken belt tensioner bolt.

8. Remove idler pulley.

9. Remove timing belt.

NOTE: During use, a belt develops a wear pattern relative to its running direction, if the original belt is to be re-used it must be refitted so that it rotates in the original direction.

CAUTION: Belts must be stored on edge on a clean surface and in such a manner that bends are not less than 50 mm radius.

Do not bend belts at an acute angle or radius of less than 50 mm, otherwise premature failure could result.

10. Mark belt direction of rotation, using soft chalk, to ensure correct refitment.

REPAIR

Tdi

Belt tensioner

NOTE: The belt tensioner need only be removed if it is being replaced or for access purposes to remove front cover.

11. Remove securing bolt and withdraw tensioner complete with spacer.

Crankshaft gear/front cover oil seal

12. If the crankshaft gear cannot be removed by hand, use special tool LRT-12-078 with main body and thrust button from special tool

LRT-12-031 as illustrated ST3478M. Withdraw gear complete with ’O’ ring seal.

16. Lubricate new ’O’ ring seal with petroleum jelly and slide onto shaft, taking care not to damage seal on the woodruff keys.

17. Fit crankshaft gear, tap fully home ensuring ’O’ ring seal is properly seated.

13. If necessary prise out oil seal from front cover.

14. Lubricate a new crankshaft oil seal with clean engine oil.

15. With lip side leading, drive-in seal squarely using special tool LRT-12-079.

CAMSHAFT GEAR/FRONT COVER OIL SEAL

Service repair no - 12.13.05

18. Remove centre bolt from camshaft gear and withdraw gear.

19. Remove existing oil seal from front cover using special tool LRT-12-038.

20. Lubricate a new camshaft oil seal with clean engine oil.

REPAIR

ENGINE

24. Remove special tool pin from gear.

25. Remove three bolts and withdraw plate and gear.

21. With lip side leading, drive-in seal squarely using special tool LRT-12-082.

22. Refit gear.

FUEL INJECTION PUMP GEAR

Service repair no - 19.30.06

Remove

23. Slacken the three bolts on front of gear.

CAUTION: It is important to ensure that when the injection pump is locked no attempt must be made to rotate it. Take care not to allow the crankshaft to be turned.

Refit

26. Fit gear and plate and secure with three bolts.

27. Insert pin from special tool LRT-12-045 in injection pump gear and through into pump flange.

REPAIR

Tdi

Timing belt fitting and tensioning

NOTE: It is important that belt tensioning is carried out carefully and accurately. The following procedure involves tensioning the belt twice to ensure that it is equally tensioned between each gear. New and original belts are tensioned to different figures.

28. Ensure timing marks are correctly aligned, pin from special tool LRT-12-045 is correctly inserted in injection pump gear and timing tool

LRT-12-044 (LRT-12-085 if EDC) is fitted to flywheel housing with pin located in flywheel slot.

Or if automatic: Timing tool LRT-12-044 is fitted to engine backplate and pin located in ring gear.

29. Fit belt observing rotational marks made during removal. Feed belt over gears keeping it tight on drive side.

30. Fit idler pulley.

31. Slacken injection pump gear retaining bolts.

32. Adjust belt to correctly sit in gears.

33. Slacken belt tensioner securing bolt to finger tight.

34. Insert 13 mm square drive extension bar in tensioner plate.

NOTE: Belt tensioning should be carried out using a dial type torque meter having a range not exceeding

60 Nm. The torque meter should be used in the almost vertical position.

35. Apply a tension of

14 to 16 Nm for a new belt or

11 to 13 Nm for an original belt. When tension is correct tighten clamp bolt.

36. Tighten injection pump gear bolts.

37. Remove pin from injection pump gear.

38. Disengage timing pin from timing slot in flywheel or ring gear.

39. Rotate crankshaft one and three quarter turns in a clockwise direction; then continue rotation until timing pin in timing tool can be engaged with slot in flywheel or ring gear.

40. Disengage timing pin.

41. Insert pin from special tool LRT-12-045 in injection pump gear and through into pump flange.

42. Slacken injection pump gear retaining bolts.

43. Slacken tensioner and retension belt.

44. Tighten injection pump gear retaining bolts.

45. Remove pin from injection pump gear.

46. Remove timing tool and refit plug.

47. Fit front cover plate using new gaskets.

See

Front Cover Plate

REPAIR

ENGINE

FRONT COVER/TIMING GEAR HOUSING GASKET

Service repair no - 12.65.10

Remove

1. Remove timing belt and gears.

See Camshaft

Drive Belt and Gears

2. Remove fuel injection pump.

See FUEL

SYSTEM, Repair, Fuel Injection Pump and

Timing

3. Remove engine oil sump.

See Oil Sump

4. Remove oil pick up strainer.

See Oil Pick-Up

Strainer

5. Remove bolts securing timing gear housing to block.

6. Withdraw timing gear housing complete with gasket.

7. Clean all gasket material from mating faces.

Refit

8. Fit slave guide studs to locate gasket.

9. Fit new gasket, over slave studs, to cylinder block.

10. Align flats on oil pump with flats on crankshaft.

11. Fit front cover to block taking care not to damage oil seal.

12. Secure with bolts of correct length in locations where slave studs are not fitted (ST3482).

13. Remove slave studs and fit correct length bolts.

14. Tighten to

25 Nm.

15. Fit oil pick-up strainer.

See Oil Pick-Up

Strainer

16. Fit oil sump.

See Oil Sump

17. Refit fuel injection pump.

See FUEL SYSTEM,

Repair, Fuel Injection Pump and Timing

REPAIR

Tdi

OIL SUMP

Service repair no - 12.60.44

Remove

1. Disconnect battery negative lead.

2. Drain engine oil.

3. Slacken sump securing bolts and, using a sharp knife, break sealant around sump flange.

4. Remove bolts and withdraw sump.

OIL PICK-UP STRAINER

Service repair no - 12.60.20

Remove

1. Disconnect battery negative lead.

2. Drain engine oil.

3. Remove engine oil sump.

See Oil Sump

4. Remove bolts securing pipe support bracket.

5. Remove bolts from pipe flanges.

6. Withdraw pick-up strainer assembly.

Refit

5. Clean mating faces of sump, timing gear housing and cylinder block.

6. Apply a 2,0 mm bead of ’Hylosil RTV102’ to the sump flange, ensuring bead is applied inboard of the bolt holes.

7. Secure sump to block with bolts. Tighten to

Nm.

8. Refill engine oil.

See LUBRICANTS, FLUIDS

AND CAPACITIES, Information,

Recommended Lubricants and Fluids

9. Reconnect battery negative lead.

Refit

7. Refit pick-up strainer assembly, fitting a new ’O’ ring seal at oil pump connection.

8. Apply Loctite 242E to the two screws at the bearing cap. Tighten to

9 Nm.

9. Fit bolts to pipe flanges. Tighten to

25 Nm.

10. Refit engine oil sump.

See Oil Sump

11. Reconnect battery negative lead.

REPAIR

ENGINE

FLYWHEEL

Service repair no - 12.53.07

Remove

1. Disconnect battery negative lead.

2. Remove gearbox.

See MANUAL GEARBOX,

Repair, R380 Manual Gearbox

3. Remove clutch.

See CLUTCH, Repair, Clutch

Assembly

4. Fit two long 8mm bolts into the clutch bolt holes, diametrically opposite, to use as handles when lifting the flywheel off the crankshaft.

5. Remove fan cowl

6. Fit crankshaft pulley retainer LRT-12-080 and secure with four bolts, to restrain crankshaft while removing flywheel retaining bolts.

7. Remove the bolts and lift off flywheel.

Refit

8. Locate the flywheel on the crankshaft and secure with new patched retaining bolts, progressively tighten to

147 Nm.

NOTE: To prevent excessive flywheel run-out, ensure that the mating faces of the flywheel and crankshaft are clean.

9. Check the flywheel for possible run-out by mounting a dial test indicator with the stylus in a loaded condition resting on the flywheel face at a radius of 114mm from the centre.

10. Turn the flywheel and check that run-out does not exceed 0,05 to 0,07mm. Should run-out be excessive, remove the flywheel and check again for irregularities on the crankshaft and flywheel mating faces and the dowel.

11. Reverse removal procedure. 1 to 6.

REPAIR

Tdi

CRANKSHAFT REAR OIL SEAL

Service repair no - 12.21.20

Remove

NOTE: The crankshaft rear oil seal is retained in its own housing, if the seal requires replacing the housing and seal assembly (1) must be renewed complete with the housing seal (3). Housing and seal assemblies are supplied with their own former/seal guide (2) already fitted. This former must not be removed before fitting the assembly to the engine. If a seal and housing assembly is received without a former/guide fitted it must be returned to the supplier. Used formers/guides must be discarded immediately after use, under no circumstances should they be reused on other assemblies.

3. Remove clutch.

See CLUTCH, Repair, Clutch

Assembly

4. Remove flywheel.

See Flywheel

5. Remove five bolts and withdraw seal housing and seal assembly complete with gasket.

Refit

6. Insert slave studs to seal housing mounting face.

7. Position new seal housing gasket over slave studs and crankshaft flange onto cylinder block.

1. Disconnect battery negative lead.

2. Remove gearbox.

See MANUAL GEARBOX,

Repair, R380 Manual Gearbox

REPAIR

ENGINE

8. Ensure housing seal is correctly seated in its groove in new housing and seal assembly.

9. Fit new assembly, with former/guide in-situ, over crankshaft flange, this action will eject former/guide.

10. Secure assembly to cylinder block with five bolts tightened to correct torque, removing slave studs individually and inserting bolts.

11. Refit flywheel.

See Flywheel

12. Refit clutch.

See CLUTCH, Repair, Clutch

Assembly

13. Refit gearbox.

See MANUAL GEARBOX,

Repair, R380 Manual Gearbox

14. Reconnect battery negative lead.

CRANKSHAFT BEARING BUSH

Service repair no - 12.21.45

1. Disconnect battery negative lead.

2. Remove gearbox.

See MANUAL GEARBOX,

Repair, R380 Manual Gearbox

3. Remove clutch.

See CLUTCH, Repair, Clutch

Assembly

4. Remove flywheel.

See Flywheel

5. Remove bearing bush.

NOTE: The bearing bush can be removed by using one of the following methods.

Method 1.

Obtain a short length of steel rod of a diameter having a good slide fit in the bore of the bush. Pack the bore with grease and insert the steel rod into the end of the bore, give a sharp blow with a hammer and the grease should drive out the bush. It is recommended that the bush and rod be covered by a suitable cloth or rag to prevent grease from splashing.

REPAIR

Tdi

Method 2.

Thread the bore of the existing bush and using a suitable bolt extract the bush. Thoroughly clean bush location ensuring all swarf is removed.

Fitting

6. Fit new bush using a suitable shouldered drift, inserting bush flush with end of crankshaft.

7. Refit flywheel.

See Flywheel

8. Refit clutch.

See CLUTCH, Repair, Clutch

Assembly

9. Refit gearbox.

See MANUAL GEARBOX,

Repair, R380 Manual Gearbox

10. Reconnect battery negative lead.

FLYWHEEL HOUSING

Service repair no - 12.53.01

Remove

1. Disconnect battery negative lead.

2. Remove gearbox.

See MANUAL GEARBOX,

Repair, R380 Manual Gearbox

3. Remove clutch.

See CLUTCH, Repair, Clutch

Assembly

4. Remove flywheel.

See Flywheel

5. Remove starter motor.

6. Remove two bolts from top of flywheel housing.

7. Remove four bolts from bottom of flywheel housing.

8. Remove six inner bolts and lift off flywheel housing.

Refit

9. Clean rear face of housing and mating face on block, ensuring all old sealant is removed.

REPAIR

ENGINE

10. Apply sealant to flywheel housing mating face on cylinder block (Fig. J5944).

OIL FILTER

Service repair no - 12.60.01

Remove

1. Place drain tray under filter.

2. Unscrew filter anti-clockwise, using a strap or spanner.

11. Fit housing to cylinder block and secure with bolts as removed. Tighten to

45 Nm.

12. Remove surplus sealant from block.

13. Refit starter motor.

14. Refit flywheel.

See Flywheel

15. Refit clutch.

See CLUTCH, Repair, Clutch

Assembly

16. Refit gearbox.

See MANUAL GEARBOX,

Repair, R380 Manual Gearbox

17. Reconnect battery negative lead.

Refit

3. Smear clean engine oil on seal of new filter.

4. Screw on filter until sealing ring touches machined face, then tighten a further half turn by hand only. Do not over tighten.

REPAIR

Tdi

OIL TEMPERATURE CONTROL VALVE

Service repair no - 12.60.69

Remove

1. Disconnect oil cooler pipes.

2. Remove two bolts and carefully withdraw thermostat extension housing (1) complete with

O ring seal (2), thermostat (3), two washers (4) and spring (5).

OIL FILTER HEAD GASKET

Service repair no - 12.60.03

Renew

1. Disconnect oil cooler pipes.

2. Disconnect pressure switch lead.

3. Remove securing bolts and withdraw head complete with gasket.

4. Clean mating faces.

3. Clean adaptor housing.

4. Inspect all parts and renew as necessary.

Refit

5. Fit thermostat to extension housing ensuring pin locates in hole.

6. Fit two washers and spring to thermostat.

7. Fit a new ’O’ ring to extension housing.

8. Insert spring into adaptor and secure extension housing to adaptor with bolts. Tighten to

9 Nm.

5. Refit head with new gasket.

6. Secure with bolts. Tighten to

45 Nm.

7. Refit pipes and reconnect pressure switch.

REPAIR

ENGINE

CYLINDER HEAD GASKET

Service repair no - 12.29.02

Remove

1. Disconnect battery negative lead.

2. Remove bonnet [Hood].

See CHASSIS AND

BODY, Repair, Bonnet [Hood]

3. Drain coolant.

4. Remove air cleaner assembly.

See FUEL

SYSTEM, Repair, Air Cleaner

5. Detach crankcase ventilation valve and side breather hose from rocker cover and move to one side.

6. Remove injection pipes.

11. Remove top hose, radiator to thermostat.

12. Disconnect by-pass hose from thermostat.

13. Disconnect hose, thermostat to water pump.

14. Disconnect water temperature sensor lead.

7. Disconnect spill rail from fuel injectors.

8. Remove fuel injectors and sealing washers.

Identify each injector to the location from which it is removed.

See FUEL SYSTEM, Repair,

Injectors

9. Remove inter-connecting harness from glow plugs.

10. Remove glow plugs.

See FUEL SYSTEM,

Repair, Glow Plugs

15. Remove hose inter-cooler to induction manifold.

16. Remove induction manifold.

See MANIFOLD

AND EXHAUST SYSTEM, Repair, Exhaust

Manifold - Tdi

17. Remove exhaust manifold and turbocharger assembly.

See MANIFOLD AND EXHAUST

SYSTEM, Repair, Exhaust Manifold - Tdi

18. Disconnect heater hose from water pump and move heater rail aside.

19. Disconnect heater hose from rear of cylinder head.

20. Remove bolt securing air cleaner mounting bracket to support strut.

21. Remove bolt securing harness bracket to cylinder head.

22. Remove rear lifting bracket, this will also release clips securing transmission and engine breather pipes and multiplug. Note loose spacer under clip securing engine breather pipe and multiplug.

REPAIR

23. Remove rocker cover.

24. Remove nuts and bolts and withdraw rocker shaft assembly.

Tdi

26. Remove valve stem caps.

27. Evenly slacken, then remove, bolts retaining cylinder head to block. Two of the bolts also secure the air cleaner mounting bracket.

28. Lift off cylinder head and remove gasket.

Refit

29. Ensure face of cylinder block is thoroughly clean.

30. Select new gasket of correct thickness.

CAUTION: Three thicknesses of gasket are available, different thicknesses are identified by the number of small holes punched in the right hand side of the gasket. One hole identifies the thinnest gasket and three holes the thickest. When renewing gaskets the gasket being fitted must be of the same thickness as the one removed. Therefore if the removed gasket had two holes punched in the side the replacement gasket must also have two holes punched in the side.

31. Place gasket on cylinder block with identification holes positioned towards rear on right hand side and side marked TOP uppermost.

25. Remove push rods, store as an identified set to allow refitment to same location.

32. Clean mating face of cylinder head.

33. Lower cylinder head onto block ensuring correct location with dowels.

REPAIR

ENGINE

NOTE: Cylinder head retaining bolts can be used up to a maximum of five times.

34. Lubricate threads of bolts with light oil and fit to positions illustrated.

Bolt sizes:

M10 x 117mm locations 3, 5, 12, and 13.

M12 x 140mm locations 1, 2, 7, 8, 9, 10, 15, 16, 17, and 18.

M12 x 100mm locations 4, 6, 11, 14.

35. Tighten bolts so that underside of heads just make contact with cylinder head.

36. Following the sequence illustrated tighten all bolts to

40 Nm.

37. Attach degree disc special tool LRT-12-007 to a power bar.

38. Make a suitable pointer from welding rod and attach to a bolt screwed into a rocker shaft securing bolt hole.

39. Tighten all bolts through 60

° strictly in sequence illustrated.

40. Repeat 60

° tightening procedure, again strictly in sequence illustrated.

41. Tighten the ten longer bolts (M12 x 140mm) a further 20

, again following the sequence illustrated.

NOTE: Repositioning of the pointer will be necessary to reach all bolts, the pointer can be fitted to the rocker shaft securing studs using two nuts.

CAUTION: The double tightening procedure must be carried out, on no account should tightening be performed in one operation, otherwise damage to the cylinder head may occur.

42. Fit valve stem caps.

43. Fit push rods to locations from which they were removed.

44. Fit rocker shaft assembly evenly tightening securing nuts and bolts to correct torque.

45. Fit rocker cover ensuring oil seal is satisfactory for continued use.

NOTE: Rocker cover seals can be re-used up to a maximum of five times.

46. Secure rocker cover with special seal washers and nuts tightened to correct torque.

47. Refit remainder of items by reversing operations

1 to 22 tightening securing bolts to correct torque where applicable.

REPAIR

Tdi

VACUUM PUMP

Service repair no - 70.50.19

Remove

NOTE: To ease pump removal set engine to T.D.C. on No.1 cylinder.

1. Disconnect battery negative lead.

2. Detach servo hose from vacuum pump.

GENERATOR

Service repair no - 86.10.02

Remove

1. Disconnect battery negative lead.

2. Remove drive belt.

See Drive Belt Renew

3. Disconnect electrical leads from rear of generator.

4. Remove securing bolt from bottom of generator.

5. Remove long through bolt from top fixing and withdraw generator.

3. Remove six bolts securing vacuum pump.

4. Detach pump complete with harness bracket.

Note location of bracket for refitting.

Refit

5. Clean mating faces of pump and block.

6. Loosely assemble pump to block with a new gasket and with harness bracket located under head of bolt noted during removal.

7. Evenly tighten bolts, to depress pump plunger, finally tightening to

25 Nm.

8. Connect vacuum hose and secure with clip.

9. Reconnect battery negative lead.

Refit

6. Reverse removal procedure.

REPAIR

Tdi

TORQUE VALUES

NOTE: Torque wrenches should be regularly checked for accuracy to ensure that all fixings are tightened to the correct torque.

Engine block

Bearing cap ...............................................................................................

Blanking plug, oil gallery, rear ....................................................................

133

Oil squirt jet assembly ................................................................................

Drain plug, cylinder block ...........................................................................

Oil squirt jet, vacuum pump cam .................................................................

Connecting rod to cap ................................................................................

Oil pick up assembly to bearing cap

Oil pick up assembly to front cover

...........................................................

............................................................

Camshaft thrust plate ..................................................................................

Oil drain pipe to block (internal) .................................................................

Oil drain pipe to block (external) ................................................................

Sump to cylinder block and front cover ......................................................

Drain plug, oil sump

Tappet guide

...................................................................................

..............................................................................................

Breather side cover assembly ....................................................................

Baffle plate to breather side cover ..............................................................

Vacuum pump ............................................................................................

Fuel lift pump .............................................................................................

Flywheel housing .......................................................................................

Flywheel housing clutch cover stud

Plug, flywheel housing

Rear oil seal assembly

...........................................................

...............................................................................

Oil filter adaptor ..........................................................................................

Waxstat adaptor to oil filter adaptor ............................................................

Oil pressure switch .....................................................................................

Oil filter, spin on

Oil cooler unions to filter adaptor

Oil level tube

.........................................................................................

...............................................................

..............................................................................................

Engine mounting foot to cylinder block ......................................................

Engine mounting foot to flywheel housing .................................................

Engine mounting foot rubber to mounting foot (bolt and nut) .....................

Flywheel to crankshaft ..............................................................................

Clutch cover plate to flywheel ....................................................................

146

Flex drive plate to crankshaft (auto)

Flex drive plate to ring gear (auto)

..........................................................

.............................................................

146

Flex drive plate to torque converter (auto) .................................................

SPECIFICATIONS, TORQUE

ENGINE

Cylinder head

Cylinder head to cylinder block

Stub pipe heater feed

......................................................

See repair section

.................................................................................

Water temperature sensor

Blanking plug cylinder head

.........................................................................

.......................................................................

Engine lifting brackets ................................................................................

Electrical harness clip bracket ...................................................................

Exhaust manifold stud ................................................................................

Exhaust manifold nut

Inlet manifold stud

.................................................................................

.......................................................................................

Inlet manifold nut and bolt ..........................................................................

Air temperature sensor, inlet manifold

Blanking plug, inlet manifold

.......................................................

......................................................................

Heatshield to inlet manifold .........................................................................

Glow plug ...................................................................................................

Glow plug terminal nut ................................................................................

Injector clamp (stud)

Injector clamp (nut)

...................................................................................

....................................................................................

Thermostat housing ...................................................................................

Water outlet elbow to thermostat housing ..................................................

Water temperature switch, thermostat housing ..........................................

Plug thermostat housing .............................................................................

Rocker shaft pedestal bolt .....................................................................

5 + 50

Rocker cover (stud) .....................................................................................

Rocker cover (fixing nut) ............................................................................

Breather cyclone to rocker cover ................................................................

Tappet adjusting nut ..................................................................................

Front cover to cylinder block ......................................................................

Front cover plate to front cover

Static idler - timing belt (stud)

..................................................................

.....................................................................

Static idler - timing belt (nut)

Tensioner (timing belt)

Camshaft hub bolt

......................................................................

...............................................................................

......................................................................................

Timing pulley to camshaft hub ...................................................................

Fuel injection pump (stud) ...........................................................................

Fuel injection pump (nut) ...........................................................................

Abutment bracket to injection pump ...........................................................

Fan and viscous coupling to hub ...............................................................

Auto tensioner, auxiliary drive (stud) ..........................................................

Auto tensioner, auxiliary drive (nut) ...........................................................

Support bracket injection pump to cylinder block .......................................

Fuel injection pump access plte to front cover plate ..................................

Timing pulley to injection pump hub

TV Damper pulley bolt to crankshaft

...........................................................

.....................................................

80 + 90

Fan pulley to hub .......................................................................................

Auxiliary mounting bracket to cylinder block (stud) .....................................

Auxiliary mounting bracket to cylinder block (bolt and nut) ........................

Water pump to block and mounting plate

Water pump pulley to hub

..................................................

..........................................................................

SPECIFICATIONS, TORQUE

Tdi

Turbo charger oil drain adaptor to block

Oil drain pipe to turbocharger

....................................................

....................................................................

Turbocharger oil drain pipe to adaptor .......................................................

Turbocharger oil feed pipe adaptor to block ...............................................

Turbocharger oil feed pipe to adaptor ........................................................

Oil feed pipe to turbocharger .....................................................................

Turbocharger to cylinder head (stud) .........................................................

Turbocharger to cylinder head (nut) ...........................................................

Turbocharger to blanking plate

Turbocharger to EGR valve

..................................................................

.......................................................................

EGR delivery tube to valve ........................................................................

EGR delivery tube to mixing tube ..............................................................

Fuel lift pump to filter (union) .....................................................................

Fuel filter from lift pump (banjo bolt) ...........................................................

Fuel filter to fuel injection pump (banjo bolt) ..............................................

Fuel injection pump from fuel filter (banjo bolt) ..........................................

Injector pipes to injectors and fuel injection pump

Spill rail to injectors (banjo bolt)

.....................................

.................................................................

Spill rail to injection pump (banjo bolt)

Boost pipe injection pump (banjo bolt)

.......................................................

Plug, rear of injection pump

PAS pump to mounting plate

.......................................................................

.....................................................................

PAS pump mounting plate to auxiliaries mounting bracket ........................

PAS pump pulley to hub ............................................................................

Generator to auxiliaries mounting bracket

Starter motor (bolt and nut) ........................................................................

Tachometer electrical connection

.................................................

...............................................................

Air conditioning compressor

Compressor mounting bracket to front cover .............................................

Compressor to mounting bracket (stud) ......................................................

Compressor to mounting bracket (nut)

Belt tensioner pulley to tensioner arm

......................................................

........................................................

Belt tensioner assembly to front cover plate ..............................................

Idler pulley to front cover plate ...................................................................

Compressor belt guard (nut) ......................................................................

Sensors to water outlet elbow (air/con) ......................................................

Blanking plug, water outlet elbow (air/con) ................................................

Generator mounting bracket to front cover

Generator to mounting bracket

................................................

..................................................................

Generator pulley to hub .............................................................................

Generator belt guard ..................................................................................

SPECIFICATIONS, TORQUE

ENGINE

METRIC

M10

M12

M14

M16

......................................................................................................

.....................................................................................................

...................................................................................................

..................................................................................................

105

180

UNC / UNF

1/4 ......................................................................................................

5/16 ...................................................................................................

3/8

7/16

.....................................................................................................

...................................................................................................

1/2

5/8

.....................................................................................................

....................................................................................................

136

NOTE: Torque values above are for all screws and bolts used except for those specified.

SPECIFICATIONS, TORQUE

DESCRIPTION

The V8i engine has cast aluminium cylinder heads and cylinder block. The two banks of steel cylinder liners which are pressed down to stops in the block, are set at 90

° to one another. The three ringed aluminium pistons transmit the power through the connecting rods to a cast iron five bearing crankshaft, which drives the centrally located camshaft via a duplex type chain.

The electronic ignition distributor is driven by a gear off the front of the camshaft and the lubrication oil pump is driven by a gear off the front of the crankshaft. The overhead inlet and exhaust valves are operated by rocker shafts, pushrods and self adjusting hydraulic tappets.

Multiport fuel injection ensures that engine performance, economy and exhaust emissions are automatically correct for the demands of highway and off road operation.

V8i

DESCRIPTION AND OPERATION

ENGINE

1. Cylinder block

2. Pistons and gudgeon pins (8)

3. Connecting rods (8)

4. Core plugs

5. Camshaft

6. Dipstick

7. Camshaft key

8. Timing chain

9. Camshaft sprocket

10. Distance piece

11. Distributor drive gear

12. Distributor

13. Front cover

14. Front cover oil seal

15. Coolant pump

16. Crankshaft damper / pulley

DESCRIPTION AND OPERATION

17. Crankshaft sprocket

18. Crankshaft sprocket key

19. Crankshaft

20. Centre main bearing shells (2)

21. Crankshaft rear oil seal

22. Spacer

23. Adaptor plate

24. Rear main bearing cap, shell and side seals

25. Connecting rod caps

26. Main bearing caps and shell bearings

27. Oil filter

28. Oil pump suction pipe/strainer

29. Oil sump

30. Oil sump drain plug

31. Oil pump drive key

V8i

1. Cylinder heads (2)

2. Rocker covers (2)

3. PCV filter

4. Rocker shafts (2)

5. Hydraulic tappets (8)

6. Pushrods (8)

7. Rocker brackets (8)

8. Rocker arms (4) left and (4) right

9. Rocker shaft springs (6)

10. Inlet manifold

11. Plenum chamber lower

12. Ram pipes (8)

13. Plenum chamber upper

14. PCV air intake filter

15. Oil filler

16. Thermostat

17. Thermostat cover

18. Inlet valve seal, spring, cap and collets (8)

19. Exhaust valve seal, spring, cap and collets (8)

20. Inlet valve and seat (8)

21. Exhaust valve and seat (8)

22. Inlet manifold gasket and seals

23. Cylinder head gaskets (2)

24. Valve guides (16)

DESCRIPTION AND OPERATION

ENGINE

Lubrication system

The V8i full flow lubrication system uses a gear type oil pump which is driven from the front of the crankshaft. The oil pump gears are housed in the front cover and the pressure relief valve, warning light switch and filter are also fitted to the front cover.

Oil drawn through the centrally located steel gauze strainer in the sump, is pumped under pressure through oil cooler located in the lower half of the main coolant radiator. The cooled oil then passes through the filter, before being distributed from the main gallery via drillings, to the various components in the engine.

Lubrication to the thrust side of the cylinders is by oil grooves machined in each connecting rod big end joint face, which are timed to align with holes in the big end journals on the power and exhaust strokes.

Lubrication system

1. Oil to cooler

2. Oil from cooler

DESCRIPTION AND OPERATION

Distributor and timing chain lubrication

The distributor and timing chain are lubricated from the camshaft front bearing. The feed to the timing chain is channelled along the camshaft sprocket, key and spacer where it sprays onto the chain.

Hydraulic tappets

V8i

1. Bearing

2. Camshaft

3. Key

4. Camshaft timing chain sprocket

5. Spacer

6. Distributor drive gear

1. Clip

2. Pushrod seat

3. Inner sleeve

4. Upper chamber

5. Non-return ball valve

6. Spring

7. Outer sleeve

8. Lower chamber - high pressure

The purpose of the hydraulic tappet is to provide maintenance free and quiet operation of the inlet and exhaust valves. It achieves its designed purpose by utilizing engine oil pressure to eliminate the mechanical clearance between the rockers and the valve stems.

During normal operation, engine oil pressure present in the upper chamber 4, passes through the non-return ball valve 5 and into the lower (high pressure) chamber 8.

When the cam begins to lift the outer sleeve 7, the resistance of the cylinder valve spring felt through the pushrod seat 2, causes the inner sleeve 3, to move downwards inside the outer. This slight downward movement of the inner sleeve closes the ball valve 5 and increases the hydraulic pressure in the high pressure chamber, sufficient to ensure that the push rod opens the valve fully.

As the tappet assembly moves off the peak of the cam the ball valve 5 opens to equalize the pressure in both chambers which ensures that the valve fully closes when the tappet is on the back of the cam.

DESCRIPTION AND OPERATION

V8i

ENGINE OIL PRESSURE TEST

Service tools:

LRT-12-052: Pressure test equipment

WARNING: If vehicle has been running, engine oil will be hot, care must be taken when fitting equipment to prevent personal injury due to scalding.

Test

WARNING: Use suitable exhaust extraction equipment, if test is being carried out in workshop.

1. Check lubricant is to correct level.

2. Place vehicle on a ramp [hoist].

3. Disconnect battery negative lead. Remove oil pressure switch.

4. Fit the test gauge.

5. Reconnect battery negative lead.

6. Start and run engine to normal operating temperature.

7. At a steady engine speed of 2500 rev/min engine oil pressure reading should be - 2.75 bar

(40 lbf/in

8. If the pressure is low - Remove and overhaul oil pump

CYLINDER COMPRESSION - TEST

Equipment:

Compression pressure gauge

Test

1. Start and run engine until normal engine operating temperature is achieved (thermostat open).

2. Remove all spark plugs.

3. Disconnect both coil negative (WB) leads

4. Insert compression gauge, crank engine until reading stabilises.

5. Expected readings, throttle fully open, battery fully charged:

8.31:1 = 10.2-10.9 bar, 150-160lbf/in

9.35:1 = 11.5-12.2 bar, 170-180lbf/in

FAULT DIAGNOSIS

ENGINE

ENGINE NOISES

Excessive or obtrusive noise from the engine compartment originates from three main sources:

The exhaust system, which makes an unmistakable and easy to diagnose noise.

External components emit the greatest variety of noises, but are also easy to diagnose by simply removing the drive belt.

Engine internal mechanical noises which can vary in volume and pitch and may be a combination of, tapping - knocking or rumbling, are the most difficult to diagnose. The following is therefore a guide to diagnosis of engine internal mechanical noises only.

Engine internal mechanical noises.

Single or multiple, light tapping noise, particularly when engine is cold.

See Description and operation, Description

1. Is engine oil level correct?

NO Top up to correct level.

See

LUBRICANTS, FLUIDS AND

CAPACITIES, Information,

Recommended Lubricants and Fluids

YES - Continue.

2. Is the lubricating pressure correct?

NO -

See Engine Oil Pressure Test

YES - Suspect valve operating mechanism.

3. To confirm diagnosis, remove the rocker covers and with the engine idling, insert a feeler gauge of 0,015mm between each rocker and valve stem. A faulty valve operating mechanism will emit a different noise when the feeler gauge is inserted.

See Repair, Rocker Shaft Renew

Heavy knocking noise (particularly on load and when engine is hot).

See Description and operation, Description

1. Is engine oil level correct?

NO Top up to correct level.

See

LUBRICANTS, FLUIDS AND

CAPACITIES, Information,

Recommended Lubricants and Fluids

YES - Continue.

2. Is the lubricating pressure correct?

NO -

See Engine Oil Pressure Test

YES - Drain engine oil and filter, and examine for metallic contamination.

3. Is the oil contaminated with metal particles?

YES - Suspect faulty big end bearings. To confirm diagnosis, short out the ignition to each spark plug in turn. The noise will disappear or be reduced when the cylinder with the faulty big end is shorted out.

4. If noise is not conclusively diagnosed, check the security of the flywheel and crankshaft front pulley. Temporarily release the drive belt to reduce general noise level and use a stethoscope to locate source of noise.

Heavy rumbling noise (particularly during hard acceleration).

See Description and operation,

Description

1. Is engine oil level correct?

NO Top up to correct level.

See

LUBRICANTS, FLUIDS AND

CAPACITIES, Information,

Recommended Lubricants and Fluids

YES - Continue.

2. Is the lubricating pressure correct?

NO -

See Engine Oil Pressure Test

YES - Drain engine oil and filter, and examine for metallic contamination.

3. Is the oil contaminated with metal particles?

YES - Suspect faulty main bearings. If noise is not conclusively diagnosed, check the security of the flywheel and crankshaft front pulley. Temporarily release the drive belt to reduce general noise level and use a stethoscope to locate source of noise.

FAULT DIAGNOSIS

V8i

ENGINE STARTING PROBLEMS

Engine fails to crank in park or neutral (Automatic

Transmission)

1. Is battery in good state of charge?

NO -

See INTRODUCTION, Information,

Jump Starting

YES - Continue.

2. Is automatic transmission inhibitor switch faulty or gear selection linkage incorrectly adjusted?

YES -

See AUTOMATIC GEARBOX, Repair,

Inhibitor Switch ,

NO -

See Electrical Trouble Shooting

Manual.

If problem is not diagnosed repeat tests, starting at 1.

Engine fails to crank (Manual Transmission)

1. Is battery in good state of charge?

NO -

See INTRODUCTION, Information,

Jump Starting

YES -

See Electrical Trouble Shooting

Manual.

If problem is not diagnosed repeat tests, starting at 1.

Engine cranks but fails to start

1. Is the cranking speed fast enough (120 rpm)?

NO -

See INTRODUCTION, Information,

Jump Starting

If necessary also.

See Electrical Trouble

Shooting Manual.

YES - Continue.

2. Is there combustion in any cylinder?

NO -

See ELECTRICAL, Fault diagnosis,

Lucas Constant Energy Ignition

System - V8i See Electrical Trouble

Shooting Manual.

YES - Continue.

3. Are the fuel supply, tank, pump, ventilation and emission control systems in correct working order or the fuel contaminated?

NO -

See FUEL SYSTEM, Repair, Fuel

Filter See FUEL SYSTEM, Repair,

Fuel Tank See FUEL SYSTEM, Repair,

Fuel pump and Sender Unit See

EMISSION CONTROL, Description and operation, Emission control

If problem is not diagnosed repeat tests, starting at 2.

ENGINE RUNNING PROBLEMS

Engine runs at high speed but will not idle (stops)

Engine idle speed erratic Engine starts but stops immediately

Engine stalls Engine misfires/hesitation

1. Multiport fuel injection.

See Electrical Trouble

Shooting Manual. See ELECTRICAL, Fault diagnosis, Lucas Constant Energy Ignition

System - V8i

Check brake vacuum connections.

See

BRAKES, Description and operation, Brake

Servo Unit

Check heater/ventilation unit vacuum connections.

See HEATING AND

VENTILATION, Description and operation,

Heating and Ventilation Unit

If problem is not diagnosed continue.

2. Are HT leads correctly routed and clipped?

NO -

See ELECTRICAL, Repair, Distributor

- V8i

YES - Continue.

3. Is fuel supply, tank, pump, ventilation and emission control systems in correct working order or the fuel contaminated?

NO -

See FUEL SYSTEM, Repair, Fuel

Filter See FUEL SYSTEM, Repair,

Fuel Tank See FUEL SYSTEM, Repair,

Fuel Pump and Sender Unit See

EMISSION CONTROL, Description and operation, Emission Control

If problem is not diagnosed repeat tests, starting at 1.

Engine lacks power/poor performance

1. Is throttle travel restricted or cable incorrectly adjusted?

YES - Check thickness of carpets.

See FUEL

SYSTEM, Repair, Throttle Cable See

FUEL SYSTEM, Repair, Accelerator

Pedal

NO Continue.

2. Are the Ignition and Multiport Fuel Injection systems in order?

NO -

See Electrical Trouble Shooting

Manual.A1 See ELECTRICAL, Fault diagnosis, Lucas Constant Energy

Ignition System - V8i See

ELECTRICAL, Repair, Distributor - V8i

YES - Continue.

FAULT DIAGNOSIS

ENGINE

3. Are fuel supply, tank, pump, ventilation and emission control systems in correct working order or the fuel contaminated?

NO -

See FUEL SYSTEM, Repair, Fuel

Filter See FUEL SYSTEM, Repair,

Fuel Tank See FUEL SYSTEM, Repair,

Fuel Pump and Sender Unit

YES - Suspect valves held open by hydraulic tappets due to high oil pressure.

See

Engine Oil Pressure Test

4. Is oil pressure high?

YES - Remove oil filter and cooler adaptor and check pressure relief valve strainer gauze for blockage and that the relief valve is not stuck closed.

See Description and operation, Description

NO Carry out cylinder compression tests to determine condition of head gaskets and valves.

See Cylinder Compression -

Test

5. Are cylinder compressions satisfactory?

NO -

See Repair, Cylinder Heads - Renew

YES - Check brake vacuum connections.

See

BRAKES, Description and operation,

Brake Servo Unit

Check heater/ventilation unit vacuum connections.

See HEATING AND VENTILATION, Description and operation, Heating and Ventilation Unit

If problem is not diagnosed: Continue.

6. Are the brakes binding?

YES - Investigate cause of binding.

NO Continue.

7. Automatic Transmission only. Is the Torque

Converter and Transmission operating correctly?

Carry out Road test, Static tests and Stall tests to determine condition of Automatic transmission.

If problem is not diagnosed: repeat tests starting at 1.

Engine backfires into exhaust system

1. Are there any leaking joints/connections or holes in the exhaust system?

YES -

See MANIFOLD AND EXHAUST

SYSTEM, Repair, Exhaust System

Complete

NO Continue.

2. Is distributor fitted correctly, HT leads in correct firing order and routed correctly?

NO -

See ELECTRICAL, Repair, Distributor

- V8i

YES - Continue.

3. Is air fuel ratio correct?

NO Check multiport fuel injection.

See

Electrical Trouble Shooting Manual.

Check brake vacuum connections.

See

BRAKES, Description and operation, Brake

Servo Unit

Check heater/ventilation unit vacuum connections.

See HEATING AND

VENTILATION, Description and operation,

Heating and Ventilation Unit

Check the crank case and fuel tank ventilation system.

See EMISSION CONTROL,

Description and operation, Emission Control

YES - Continue.

4. Are cylinder compressions satisfactory?

NO Carry out compression test to check for leaking gaskets valves etc.

See

Cylinder Compression - Test

See Repair, Cylinder Heads - Renew

If problem is not diagnosed: repeat tests starting at 1.

FAULT DIAGNOSIS

Engine backfires into inlet system

1. Is the Distributor, HT connections and routing correct?

NO -

See ELECTRICAL, Repair, Distributor

- V8i

YES - Continue.

2. Is air fuel ratio correct?

NO Check multiport fuel injection.

See

Electrical Trouble Shooting Manual.

Check brake vacuum connections.

See

BRAKES, Description and operation, Brake

Servo Unit

Check heater/ventilation unit vacuum connections.

See HEATING AND

VENTILATION, Description and operation,

Heating and Ventilation Unit

Check the crank case and fuel tank ventilation system.

See EMISSION CONTROL,

Description and operation, Emission Control

YES - Continue.

3. Are cylinder compressions satisfactory?

NO Carry out compression test to check for leaking gaskets valves etc.

See

Cylinder Compression - Test

For repair

See Repair, Cylinder Heads -

Renew

If problem is not diagnosed: repeat tests starting at 1.

V8i

FAULT DIAGNOSIS

V8i

DRIVE BELT

A single ’serpentine drive belt’ is introduced for 1995 model year. This belt drives the water pump and all the ancilliaries. It is essential that the belt is fitted exactly as shown in illustrations RR3956 and RR3957.

It should also be noted that the water pump/viscous fan is driven in a counter clockwise direction.

Under normal highway use the belt must be changed at 120,000 kilometres, 75,000 miles or five years whichever occurs first.

The drive belt must be examined at every service and replaced if necessary.

Off road driving

Regular examination of the drive belt is essential if the vehicle is used off road. The vehicle driver should be requested to identify the type of mileage the vehicle has covered.

Fan cowl

To ensure easy access to the drive belt the top portion of the fan cowl is detachable.

Check condition

Check condition of drive belt. Renew a belt that shows signs of wear, splitting or oil contamination.

DRIVE BELT RENEW

Service repair no - 86.10.03

Air conditioning

Non air conditioning

REPAIR

ENGINE

Remove

1. Remove fan cowl upper.

2. Release drive belt tension by turning tensioner clockwise.

3. With tension released, remove belt from generator pulley.

4. Release tensioner pulley.

5. Remove drive belt. Mark direction of rotation on belt if refitting

Refit

6. Clean drive belt pulley grooves and ensure grooves are not damaged.

7. Position belt correctly around all pulleys except generator. Illustrations RR3956 and RR3957 show correct drive belt run.

8. Turn drive belt tensioner clockwise.

9. Locate drive belt on generator pulley.

10. Ensure drive belt is squarely located on pulleys with all grooves engaged.

11. Release tensioner to tension drive belt.

12. Fit upper fan cowl section.

DRIVE BELT - CHECK TENSION

As the drive belt is automatically tensioned, no tension check or adjustment should be necessary. If the drive belt is believed to be slack carry out the following checks:

1. Visually check drive belt tension.

2. Watch movement of tensioner with engine running, 5 mm ’bounce’ is normal. If tensioner movement is 12 mm or more, fit a new tensioner.

See Drive Belt Tensioner

3. Inspect tensioner. Is the tensioner arm and spring case in contact? If so fit a new tensioner.

4. Using a recognised drive belt tensioning gauge, check belt tension several times, running engine between checks. The checks should be made at the same point on the belt, away from the tensioner.

Drive belt tension, with used tensioner and used drive belt should be more than:-

270N. Non air conditioning or

295N with air conditioning.

REPAIR

DRIVE BELT TENSIONER

Service repair no - 86.10.09

Remove

1. Remove drive belt from tensioner.

See Drive

Belt Renew

2. Loosen tensioner centre bolt.

3. Remove bolt and tensioner.

V8i

Refit

4. Reverse removal procedure.

REPAIR

ENGINE

CYLINDER HEAD GASKETS - RENEW

Service repair no - 12.29.01

1. Drain cooling system.

See COOLING SYSTEM,

Adjustment, Coolant

2. Remove inlet manifold.

See FUEL SYSTEM,

Repair, Intake Manifold

3. Remove generator.

4. If fitted, remove compressor.

See AIR

CONDITIONING, Repair, Compressor

5. Remove rocker shafts.

See Rocker Shaft

Renew

6. Remove push rods.

7. Remove both exhaust manifolds.

See

MANIFOLD AND EXHAUST SYSTEM, Repair,

Exhaust Manifold - V8i

8. Remove air cleaner assembly.

See FUEL

SYSTEM, Repair, Air Cleaner Assembly

9. Remove air flow sensor.

See FUEL SYSTEM,

Repair, Air Flow Sensor

10. Remove ground leads from rear of left hand cylinder head

11. Right hand cylinder head - remove breather pipe from lifting bracket.

12. Loosen cylinder head bolts, reversing tightening sequence.

13. Remove cylinder heads.

14. Remove cylinder head gaskets.

15. Clean exhaust mating faces.

16. Clean head and block faces.

17. Fit new cylinder head gaskets, word TOP uppermost. DO NOT use sealant.

18. Oil cylinder bores.

19. Clean threads of head bolts and lightly oil.

20. Locate cylinder heads on block.

21. Locate cylinder head bolts in position illustrated.

96 mm long bolts - 2, 4, 6, 7, 8, 9, 10

66 mm long bolts - 1, 3, 5

NOTE: There are no bolts fitted in the four lower holes in each cylinder head.

NOTE: Left hand cylinder head illustrated, arrow points to front of vehicle.

22. Tighten bolts progressively in sequence, shown to 20 Nm then a further 180

° ±

23. Reverse removal procedure. 1 to 11.

REPAIR

V8i

CYLINDER HEADS - RENEW

Service repair no - 12.29.15

1. Remove cylinder heads and gaskets.

See

Cylinder Head Gaskets - Renew

2. Remove spark plugs.

3. Using spring compressor LRT-12-034, remove seals, valves, collets, springs and caps.

CAUTION: Keep components in fitted order

ROCKER COVER - RIGHT HAND - RENEW

Service repair no - 12.29.41

1. Disconnect battery negative lead.

2. Disconnect purge pipe from charcoal canister at plenum.

3. Remove breather pipe from rocker cover.

4. Remove coolant pipes from inlet manifold.

5. Remove spark plug leads from plugs and retaining clips.

6. Remove four rocker cover bolts. Moving fuel pipes aside, remove rocker cover.

7. Discard rocker cover gasket.

8. Remove plug lead retaining clips from rocker cover, fit to new rocker cover.

9. Clean and dry rocker cover and cylinder head mating faces, using Bostik cleaner 6001.

NOTE: Gasket fits one way round only. It must be fitted accurately, first time.

Subsequent movement will destroy bonding.

4. From left hand cylinder head, remove earth lead studs.

5. Remove three bolts securing power steering pump mounting bracket to cylinder head.

6. Remove four bolts securing generator mounting bracket to cylinder head.

7. Right hand cylinder head, remove rear lifting bracket.

8. Fit lifting bracket to new right hand cylinder head.

9. Fit mounting brackets and earth lead studs to new cylinder head. Tighten bolts to

30 Nm.

10. Regrind valves- refer to engine overhaul publication

11. Lubricate valve stems, fit valves, springs, and caps. Fit new inlet and exhaust valve stem seals.

12. Using spring compressor LRT-12-034, compress springs, fit collets. Tap valve to check correct collet seating.

13. Fit spark plugs.

14. Fit cylinder heads with new gaskets.

See

Cylinder Head Gaskets - Renew

10. Apply Bostik 1775 impact adhesive to rocker cover seal face and gasket, using a brush to ensure an even film. Allow adhesive to become touch dry.

REPAIR

ENGINE

11. Place one end of gasket into cover recess with edge firmly against recess wall, holding remainder of gasket clear. Work around cover, pressing gasket into place ensuring edge firmly contacts recess wall.

12. Allow cover to stand for thirty minutes before fitting.

13. Fit rocker cover to cylinder head with four screws, short screws inboard, tighten to

9 Nm.

14. Position fuel pipes.

15. Fit breather pipe to rocker cover, tighten clip.

16. Fit coolant pipes to inlet manifold, tighten bolts.

17. Fit spark plug leads to plugs and retaining clips.

18. Connect purge pipe from charcoal canister at plenum, tighten clip.

ROCKER COVER - LEFT HAND - RENEW

Service repair no - 12.29.40

1. Remove air flow sensor.

See FUEL SYSTEM,

Repair, Air Flow Sensor

2. Remove plenum chamber.

See FUEL SYSTEM,

Repair, Plenum Chamber

3. Remove dipstick.

4. Remove spark plug leads from plugs and retaining clips.

5. Disconnect HT lead from coil.

6. Remove generator heat shield securing nut from rocker cover.

7. Remove air flow meter harness clip.

8. Remove bolt securing dipstick tube clip.

9. Remove four rocker cover bolts, remove rocker cover.

10. Discard gasket

11. Remove plug lead retaining clips from rocker cover, fit to new rocker cover.

12. Clean and dry rocker cover and cylinder head mating faces, using Bostik cleaner 6001.

NOTE: Gasket fits one way round only. It must be fitted accurately, first time.

Subsequent movement will destroy bonding.

13. Apply Bostik 1775 impact adhesive to rocker cover seal face and gasket, using a brush to ensure an even film. Allow adhesive to become touch dry, approximately fifteen minutes.

14. Place one end of gasket into cover recess with edge firmly against recess wall, holding remainder of gasket clear. Work around cover, pressing gasket into place ensuring edge firmly contacts recess wall.

15. Allow cover to stand for thirty minutes before fitting.

16. Fit rocker cover to cylinder head with four screws, short screws inboard. Tighten to

9 Nm.

17. Position dipstick tube clip. Fit and tighten bolts.

18. Fit and tighten air flow meter harness clip.

19. Fit generator heat shield to rocker cover.

20. Connect HT lead to coil.

21. Connect spark plug leads to plugs and retaining clips.

22. Fit dipstick.

23. Fit plenum chamber.

24. Fit air flow meter.

REPAIR

V8i

ROCKER SHAFT RENEW

Service repair no - 12.29.29

1. Remove rocker covers as required.

See

Rocker Cover - Right Hand - Renew or. See

Rocker Cover - Left Hand - Renew

2. Loosen four rocker shaft fixings.

HYDRAULIC TAPPETS RENEW

Service repair no - 12.29.57

1. Remove rocker shafts.

See Rocker Shaft

Renew

2. Remove intake manifold.

See FUEL SYSTEM,

Repair, Intake Manifold

3. Remove push rods, retain in removal sequence.

3. Remove rocker shaft assembly.

NOTE: Each rocker shaft is notched at

ONE end. Notch must be uppermost and towards front of engine on right hand side, towards rear on left hand side.

4. Clean rocker pedestal locations on cylinder head.

5. Fit rocker shaft assembly, locating push rods to rockers.

6. Tighten rocker shaft fixings to

38 Nm.

7. Fit rocker covers.

4. Remove hydraulic tappets

5. Fit tappets, push rods and rocker assemblies.

See V8i Overhaul Manual.

6. Fit inlet manifold.

7. Reverse removal procedure.

REPAIR

ENGINE

CRANKSHAFT PULLEY ASSEMBLY

Service repair no - 12.21.01

1. Remove viscous coupling.

See COOLING

SYSTEM, Repair, Viscous Coupling, Fan

Blades, Pulley and Fan Cowl

2. Remove drive belt.

See Drive Belt

3. Raise vehicle on ramp [hoist].

4. Remove bell housing bottom cover.

5. Remove engine undertray.

6. With assistance to stop flywheel rotation, remove crankshaft pulley assembly retaining bolt.

7. Remove crankshaft pulley assembly.

8. If required: Place assembly in vice and remove pulley.

9. Fit pulley to torsional vibration damper.

10. Lubricate seal face of assembly.

11. Fit pulley assembly.

12. With assistance to stop flywheel rotation, fit retaining bolt. Tighten to

280 Nm.

13. Reverse removal procedure. 1 to 5.

FRONT COVER OIL SEAL - RENEW

Service repair no - 12.21.14

1. Remove crankshaft pulley.

See Crankshaft

Pulley Assembly. Do not remove pulleys.

2. Remove eight screws and remove mud excluder.

3. Fit button of 18G1328 to crankshaft, fit extractor to seal.

4. Turn centre bolt of extractor to remove seal.

5. Remove seal from extractor.

6. Clean seal seating.

7. Lubricate outside diameter of seal.

8. Locate seal in front cover.

9. Fit adaptor 18G1291/5 to 18G1291/4.

10. Fit tool to seal.

11. Fit and tighten centre bolt to crankshaft, tighten centre locknut to seat seal.

12. Slacken locknut and remove tool.

13. Lubricate seal lip.

14. Fit mud excluder and tighten screws.

15. Fit crankshaft pulley assembly.

REPAIR

V8i

FRONT COVER GASKET

Service repair no - 12.65.04

1. Remove crankshaft pulley.

See Crankshaft

Pulley Assembly. Do not remove pulleys

2. Remove water pump pulley.

3. Release distributor cap clips.

4. Release plug leads from plugs and clips.

5. Place cap and leads to one side.

6. Turn engine until No. 1 piston is at T.D.C.

7. Check position of rotor arm.

8. Remove fixings securing power steering pump bracket to water pump bracket.

9. Remove power steering pump bracket from water pump.

10. Remove clips securing wiring to generator tensioner.

11. Disconnect distributor feed wire.

12. Pivot power steering pump away from front cover, tighten pivot to retain in position.

13. Disconnect vacuum pipe from distributor.

14. Remove water pump bottom hose.

15. Disconnect oil pressure switch.

16. Disconnect heater hose at water pump.

17. Remove generator tensioner from water pump, move tensioner aside.

18. Mark distributor position to front cover.

19. Remove distributor clamp, remove distributor.

See ELECTRICAL, Repair, Distributor - V8i

20. Remove fixings sump to front cover.

21. Loosen four adjacent sump fixings.

22. Remove generator support strut from front cover, move strut aside.

23. Loosen remaining front cover fixings and remove front cover.

24. Remove front cover gasket.

Refit

25. Clean timing cover, clean block face.

26. Lightly grease gasket faces.

27. Fit new gasket to block face.

28. Apply hylosil to sump gasket.

29. Clean threads of cover fixing bolts, apply Loctite

372 to threads.

30. Fit timing cover, fit fixing bolts. Tighten to

Nm.

31. Fit generator support strut to front cover.

32. Tighten sump to timing cover fixings to

10 Nm.

33. Tighten sump fixings to

10 Nm.

34. Lubricate distributor O ring.

35. Fit distributor in position marked.

36. Align oil pump drive, if distributor does not seat correctly.

37. Fit distributor clamp. Tighten to

20 Nm.

38. Locate generator tensioner on water pump bracket.

39. Connect heater hose, tighten clip.

40. Connect oil pressure switch.

41. Connect bottom hose, tighten clip.

42. Connect vacuum pipe to distributor.

43. Loosen power steering pump pivot, lower pump.

44. Connect distributor feed wire.

45. Connect wire ties to generator tensioner.

46. Fit power steering pump bracket to water pump.

Tighten to

28 Nm.

47. Fit power steering pump to bracket.

48. Position distributor cap. Fit plug leads to plugs and clips.

49. Clip distributor cap in position.

50. Fit water pump pulley. Tighten to

10 Nm.

51. Fit crankshaft pulley.

See Crankshaft Pulley

Assembly

52. Tension drive belts correctly.

53. Check ignition timing.

54. Refill cooling system.

REPAIR

ENGINE

TIMING CHAIN AND CHAINWHEELS

Service repair no - 12.65.12

Remove

1. Remove front cover.

See Front Cover Gasket

2. Remove retaining bolt and washer, remove distributor drive gear and spacer.

3. Ensure number one piston is at TDC.

4. Remove chainwheels and chain as an assembly.

See V8i Overhaul Manual.

Refit

5. Clean chainwheels and chain.

6. Fit chainwheels to chain, aligning timing marks.

7. Ensure camshaft key is fitted parallel to shaft axis to ensure adequate lubrication to distributor drive gear.

8. Engage chainwheel assembly on camshaft and crankshaft keys, ensure chain wheels are fully located.

9. Check alignment of timing marks with straight edge.

10. Fit spacer with flange to front,

11. Fit distributor drive gear with groove towards spacer.

12. Fit retaining bolt and washer. Tighten to

58 Nm.

13. Fit front cover.

See Front Cover Gasket

FLYWHEEL

Service repair no - 12.53.07

Remove

1. Remove gearbox and clutch.

See CLUTCH,

Repair, Clutch Assembly

2. Loosen starter motor bolts.

3. Lock flywheel, remove flywheel bolts and flywheel.

Refit

4. Clean components for reassembly.

5. Fit flywheel.

6. Clean threads, apply Loctite 270 to threads.

7. Lock flywheel, fit flywheel bolts. Tighten to

Nm.

REPAIR

V8i

FLEXIBLE DRIVE PLATE AND RING GEAR

Service repair no - 12.53.13

Remove

1. Remove transmission.

See AUTOMATIC

GEARBOX, Repair, LT230T Transfer Gearbox with Automatic Gearbox Assembly - V8i

2. Remove flexible drive plate and ring gear assembly.

See V8i Overhaul Manual.

Refit

3. Clean all components for reassembly.

4. Fit ring gear and flexible drive plate assembly.

See V8i Overhaul Manual.

5. Fit transmission.

CRANKSHAFT REAR OIL SEAL

Service repair no - 12.21.20

1. Automatic transmission, remove drive plate.

See Flexible Drive Plate and Ring Gear

OR manual transmission, remove flywheel.

See

Flywheel

2. Remove sump.

See Oil Sump

3. Remove rear main bearing cap.

4. Remove cross seals from cap.

5. Remove crankshaft rear oil seal.

6. Clean main bearing cap and oil seal area of block.

7. Fit new cross seals to bearing cap.

8. Apply Hylomar SQ32M to block as illustrated.

9. Lubricate bearing shell and cross seals using clean engine oil.

10. Fit bearing cap, do not tighten bolts.

11. Ensure cap is fully home and seated squarely on the block.

REPAIR

ENGINE

12. Ensure service tools LRT-12-010 and

LRT-12-091 are scrupulously clean. Coat seal guide and oil seal journal with clean engine oil.

CAUTION: Do not handle oilseal lip, check it is not damaged. Ensure outside diameter remains clean and dry.

13. Position oil seal guide LRT-12-010 on crankshaft flange.

NOTE: Lubricant coating must cover seal guide outer surface completely to ensure that oil seal lip is not turned back during assembly. Position oil seal, lipped side towards engine, on seal guide. Seal outside diameter

MUST be clean and dry.

14. Fit oil seal using tool LRT-12-091. Remove seal guide.

15. Tighten rear main bearing cap to

90 Nm.

16. Fit sump.

17. Fit flywheel or flexible drive plate and ring gear.

ENGINE

Service repair no - 12.41.01

Remove

1. Park vehicle on level ground and apply park brake.

2. De-pressurise fuel system.

See FUEL

SYSTEM, Repair, Depressurising Fuel

System

3. Remove bonnet [hood].

See CHASSIS AND

BODY, Repair, Bonnet [Hood]

4. Remove battery.

See ELECTRICAL, Repair,

Battery

5. Remove radiator/oil coolers.

See COOLING

SYSTEM, Repair, Radiator/Oil Coolers

6. Place an absorbent cloth around fuel feed hose at fuel rail and release compression nut.

Remove feed hose from rail, seal end of pipes with masking tape to prevent ingress of dirt.

7. Release fuel return hose clamp and remove hose from pressure regulator, seal both openings with masking tape to prevent ingress of dirt.

8. Remove vacuum hose from rear of regulator.

9. Manual vehicles: Disconnect throttle cable from bracket. Automatic vehicles: Detach throttle bracket from plenum chamber and lay assembly to one side.

See FUEL SYSTEM, Repair,

Plenum Chamber DO NOT DISTURB KICK

DOWN CABLE SETTING.

10. Remove ram housing.

See FUEL SYSTEM,

Repair, Ram Housing

11. Remove air flow sensor.

See FUEL SYSTEM,

Repair, Air Flow Sensor

12. Remove air cleaner assembly.

See FUEL

SYSTEM, Repair, Air Cleaner Assembly

13. Remove Generator.

See ELECTRICAL,

Description and operation, Generator

14. Release air conditioning compressor from its mounting and lay to one side. DO NOT discharge air conditioning system.

See AIR

CONDITIONING, Repair, Compressor

REPAIR

V8i

NOTE: Release bolts securing compressor mounting bracket to engine and remove bracket to enable temporary lifting eye

ETC 5964 to be fitted. Secure lifting eye to mounting bracket fixing points with suitable bolts of equivalent size, pitch and thread. Leave lifting eye attached until engine is reinstalled in vehicle.

15. Place drain tray underneath vehicle.

16. Disconnect hose from reservoir to power steering pump. Secure hose end above level of fluid reservoir to avoid unnecessary loss of fluid.

17. Disconnect power steering pump to power steering box hose. Seal hose and pump openings with masking tape to prevent ingress of dirt. Wipe away any fluid spillage from chassis or steering box.

18. Disconnect fuel temperature and coolant temperature sensor multi-plugs.

19. Disconnect leads from coil.

20. Identify each injector multi-plug for re-assembly and disconnect plugs from injectors.

21. Manoeuvre harness from behind fuel rails and place to one side clear of engine assembly.

22. Remove two clamps securing gearbox oil cooler pipes to engine block.

23. Remove engine mounting fixings on both sides of cylinder block.

24. Fit lifting chains to engine lifting eyes as shown in illustration RR1780E.

NOTE: All chain dimensions are measured from end of lifting hook to end of last link in chain.

25. Fit chain lifting eye to a suitable engine hoist.

Raise hoist high enough to enable engine mountings to be removed, and withdraw rubber mountings.

26. Lower hoist until engine rests securely on engine mounting brackets. Remove lifting chains and hoist.

27. Disconnect two heater hoses located on top of right hand rocker cover.

28. Remove ground strap from rear of left hand cylinder head. DO NOT remove from retaining clip.

29. Remove all electrical harnesses from retaining clips at rear of engine.

30. Remove transmission breather pipes from retaining clip on rear lifting eye.

31. Remove top two bolts securing bell housing to cylinder block.

32. Raise front of vehicle, lower vehicle on to axle stands.

33. Remove bell housing bottom cover. Remove gasket from bell housing face.

34. Remove nuts securing exhaust downpipes to manifolds, remove heat shield from right hand side downpipe.

35. Remove electrical leads from starter motor solenoid. Disconnect multi-plug from oil level sensor on side of sump, if fitted.

NOTE: Instructions 37, 38 and 39 refer to automatic vehicles only.

36. With assistance rotate engine at crankshaft pulley until two access holes in drive plate/ring gear assembly are visible.

37. Remove two bolts visible through access holes.

Mark one access hole and one bolt hole to ensure unit is reassembled in its original position

38. Rotate crankshaft 180˚ until two remaining access holes are visible, remove two bolts.

1. L/H Front chain 356mm total overall length.

2. R/H Front chain 330mm total overall length.

3. R/H Rear chain 457mm total overall length.

REPAIR

ENGINE

39. Remove remaining bell housing to cylinder block bolts.

40. Remove starter motor ground strap from chassis.

41. Remove stands and lower vehicle.

42. Position hydraulic trolley jack under bell housing to support gearbox when engine and gearbox are separated.

43. Fit lifting chains to engine. Carefully raise hoist a little, ease engine and gearbox apart, steady engine on hoist.

44. Ensure no components remain that will prevent engine being removed.

45. Slowly raise engine clear of engine compartment. Move engine away from vehicle and place on a suitable engine stand.

Refit

46. Fit lifting chains to engine. Raise engine using hoist.

47. Lower engine into engine compartment. Ensure all components are clear of engine assembly.

48. Automatic vehicles: With assistance, manoeuvre engine until bottom two engine and bellhousing bolt holes align. Ensure that two cylinder block dowels locate in bell housing.

Manual vehicles: Lower engine into position.

Locate primary pinion into clutch. Engage bell housing dowels.

49. Fit two bolts and partially tighten.

50. Remove jack and lower hoist until engine rests securely on engine mounting brackets.

51. Fit top two bell housing securing bolts. Tighten to

40 Nm.

52. Fit remaining bell housing to cylinder block bolts.

Tighten to

40 Nm.

53. Automatic vehicles: With assistance, rotate crankshaft pulley, line up marked holes in drive plate and torque converter. Fit two bolts.

Tighten to

40 Nm.

54. Rotate crankshaft 180

° and fit remaining two bolts tighten to correct torque,

40 Nm.

55. Fit new gasket and refit bottom cover, tighten bolts to

9 Nm.

56. Fit new exhaust flange gaskets, fit exhaust to manifold.

57. Refit all harnesses, ground straps breather pipes and hoses at rear of engine.

58. Raise engine and refit engine mounting rubbers, tighten nuts to

20 Nm.

59. Remove temporary lifting eye ETC 5964 and reverse instructions 1 to 23, ensuring that all electrical plugs and harnesses are fitted in correct locations.

REPAIR

V8i

OIL SUMP

Service repair no - 12.60.44

Remove

1. Drain engine oil

See SECTION 10,

Maintenance, Under Vehicle Maintenance

2. Fit drain plug. Tighten to

40 Nm.

3. If fitted, disconnect low oil level sensor multiplug.

Refit

8. Apply RTV Hylosil White sealant to mating surface of sump.

9. Position sump, tighten bolts finger tight.

4. Remove bolt securing dipstick tube to rocker cover.

5. Working form the centre outwards, progressively loosen and remove 17 bolts securing sump.

Remove sump.

6. Remove all traces of sealant from mating surfaces of sump, cylinder block and front cover, using a suitable solvent or plastic scraper.

7. Degrease mating surfaces of sump, cylinder block and front cover.

10. Tighten bolts progressively in sequence shown.

Tighten to

18 Nm.

11. Fit bolt securing dipstick tube to rocker cover.

12. If fitted, connect low oil level sensor multiplug.

REPAIR

V8i

TORQUE VALUES

NOTE: Torque wrenches should be regularly checked for accuracy to ensure that all fixings are tightened to the correct torque.

Engine

Adaptor plate to crankshaft ........................................................................

Generator and power steering mounting bracket to cylinder head ............

Cylinder head:

Stage 1: .............................................................................................

Stage 2: - Further 180

° ±

Drive plate to converter ..............................................................................

Engine mountings to engine and chassis

Engine mounting rubbers to brackets

..................................................

........................................................

Flexible drive plate to crankshaft adaptor plate ..........................................

41 **

Flywheel to crankshaft bolts .......................................................................

78 **

Lifting eye to cylinder heads

Main bearing cap rear bolts

......................................................................

.......................................................................

92 *

Oil sump drain plug ....................................................................................

Oil sump to cylinder block ..........................................................................

Rocker cover to cylinder head ....................................................................

Rocker shaft bracket to cylinder head

Spark plug

Starter motor attachment

........................................................

..................................................................................................

...........................................................................

* These bolts must have threads coated in lubricant EXP16A before assembly.

** These bolts must have threads coated in sealant Loctite 270

METRIC

M10

M12

M14

M16

......................................................................................................

.....................................................................................................

...................................................................................................

..................................................................................................

105

180

UNC / UNF

1/4 ......................................................................................................

5/16 ...................................................................................................

3/8

7/16

.....................................................................................................

...................................................................................................

1/2

5/8

.....................................................................................................

....................................................................................................

136

NOTE: Torque values above are for all screws and bolts used except for those specified.

SPECIFICATIONS, TORQUE

ENGINE

V8i

LRT-12-034 Spring compressor

MS1519A

LRT-12-010 Crankshaft rear seal guide

RO1014

LRT-12-052 Oil pressure test kit

SERVICE TOOLS

DESCRIPTION

For description and operation refer to overhaul manual 4.0/4.6 V8 engine.

CONTENT OF THIS SECTION

Only service repair operations not covered in engine section V8i or unique to 4.0 V8 engines appear in the repair sub-section of this section.

4.0 V8

DESCRIPTION AND OPERATION

4.0 V8

CRANKSHAFT PULLEY

Service repair no - 12.21.01 - Crankshaft Pulley

Remove

1. Disconnect battery negative lead.

2. Remove cooling fan.

See COOLING SYSTEM,

Repair, Viscous Coupling, Fan Blades,

Pulley and Fan Cowl

3. Slacken 3 water pump pulley securing bolts.

4. Remove drive belt.

See ENGINE 3.9 V8,

Repair, Drive Belt Renew

5. Remove water pump pulley bolts. Remove water pump pulley.

6. Raise and support front of vehicle.

9. Remove crankshaft pulley bolt. Collect pulley and tool.

Refit

10. Clean seal running surface on pulley.

11. Clean key and keyway.

12. Fit crankshaft pulley.

NOTE: It will be necessary to have an assistant position a large flat ended screwdriver between ring gear and adaptor plate to prevent ring gear rotating.

13. Refit crankshaft pulley bolt. Tighten to

270 Nm.

14. Ensure mating faces between bell housing access cover and mating face are clean.

15. Fit access cover.

16. Fit cover bolts. Tighten to

10 Nm.

17. Remove supports and lower vehicle.

18. Ensure mating faces between water pump pulley and pump are clean.

19. Refit water pump pulley. Fit bolts finger tight.

20. Fit drive belt.

See ENGINE 3.9 V8, Repair,

Drive Belt Renew

21. Tighten water pump pulley bolts to Tighten to

Nm.

22. Refit cooling fan.

See COOLING SYSTEM,

Repair, Viscous Coupling, Fan Blades,

Pulley and Fan Cowl

23. Reconnect battery negative lead.

7. Remove 9 bolts securing bell housing access cover (2 dowel bolts).

8. Remove access plate.

NOTE: It will be necessary to have an assistant position a large flat ended screwdriver between ring gear and adaptor plate to prevent ring gear rotating.

REPAIR

ENGINE

CRANKSHAFT FRONT OIL SEAL

Service repair no - 12.21.14 - Crankshaft Front Oil

Seal

Remove

1. Remove crankshaft pulley.

See ENGINE 3.9 V8,

Repair, Crankshaft Pulley Assembly

2. Screw tool LRT-12-088 into oil seal.

3. Turn centre bolt of tool to extract oil seal.

4. Remove oil seal from tool.

Refit

5. Clean seal seating and pulley seal register.

6. Lubricate seal with oil.

7. Locate oil seal in housing and drive into place using LRT-12-089.

8. Lubricate oil seal lip.

9. Locate seat in front cover.

10. Drift seat into position using tool LRT-12-089.

11. Refit crankshaft pulley.

See ENGINE 3.9 V8,

Repair, Crankshaft Pulley Assembly; Refit

REPAIR

ENGINE ASSEMBLY

Service repair no - 12.41.01/99

Remove

1. Position vehicle on ramp.

2. Remove bonnet.

See CHASSIS AND BODY,

4.0 V8

Repair, Bonnet [Hood]

3. Remove radiator.

See COOLING SYSTEM,

Repair, Radiator

4. Remove plenum chamber.

See FUEL SYSTEM

SFI, Repair, Plenum Chamber

5. Remove mass air flow sensor.

See FUEL

SYSTEM SFI, Repair, Mass Air Flow Sensor

(MAF Sensor)

6. Slacken hose clip securing bottom hose to expansion tank.

7. Disconnect hose.

8. Remove 2 nuts securing expansion tank.

9. Remove nut and bolt securing expansion tank.

10. Remove expansion tank.

11. Disconnect servo vacuum hose from ram housing.

12. Disconnect battery sensing lead Lucar from generator.

13. Remove generator terminal cover.

14. Remove 2 terminal nuts and release leads from terminals.

15. Release purge hose from ram pipe housing.

16. Position cloth to absorb fuel spillage.

17. Slacken clip securing fuel return hose to fuel rail.

18. Disconnect hose.

19. Plug connections.

20. Disconnect fuel feed hose union.

21. Plug connections. Position hoses aside.

22. Slacken clip securing heater return hose to pipe.

23. Disconnect hose.

24. Slacken clip securing heater feed adaptor hose to inlet manifold.

25. Remove bolt securing pipe bracket.

26. Disconnect feed hose from inlet manifold.

27. Disconnect hose/pipe assembly.

28. Disconnect leads from spark plugs and remove ignition coils.

See FUEL SYSTEM SFI, Repair,

Ignition Coils

29. Disconnect fuel temperature sensor multiplug.

30. Disconnect coolant sensor multiplug.

31. Disconnect temperature gauge sensor lead.

32. Release camshaft sensor multiplug from bracket and disconnect multiplug.

33. Disconnect oil pressure switch Lucar.

34. Disconnect air intake temperature sensor multiplug.

35. Disconnect 8 injector multiplugs.

36. Remove 4 nuts securing harness brackets to inlet manifold.

37. Release harness brackets.

38. Remove bolts securing gearbox breather pipes to engine lifting bracket.

REPAIR

ENGINE

39. Release battery positive lead terminal cover.

40. Remove terminal nut

41. Release terminal from battery.

42. Release fusebox main feed lead.

43. Position battery cable over engine.

44. Pivot jockey pulley downwards to release drive belt tension.

45. Release belt from pulleys.

46. Remove drive belt.

47. Disconnect compressor multiplug

48. Remove 4 bolts securing compressor.

49. Remove heatshield.

50. Release compressor from bracket and tie aside.

51. Slacken clip securing PAS hose to pump.

52. Disconnect hose.

53. Plug hose and pump.

54. Disconnect PAS hose connection at pump and steering box.

55. Release unions and remove hose.

56. Remove and discard ’O’ rings.

57. Plug pump and steering box.

66. Remove 9 bolts securing bell housing bottom cover. Note position of 2 dowel bolts.

67. Remove cover.

68. Remove locknut securing transfer box tie bar.

69. Remove 2 bolts securing tie bar to tranmission.

70. Remove tie bar.

58. Remove LH and RH engine mounting nuts.

59. Position lifting chains and attach hooks to engine lifting eyes.

60. Raise engine sufficiently to release engine mountings.

61. Release engine mountings and remove.

62. Lower engine until it just rests on engine mounting brackets.

63. Disconnect chains.

64. Raise ramp.

65. Remove catalytic converter/front pipe assembly.

See EMISSION CONTROL, Repair, Catalytic

Converter/Front Pipe - 4.0 V8

71. Remove 2 and slacken 1 bolt, securing bell housing access plate and position aside.

72. Mark drive plate to torque converter relationship.

73. With assistance, rotate crankshaft for access to first bolt (torque converter to drive plate).

74. Remove first bolt.

75. Repeat steps for the remaining 3 bolts.

76. Remove 2 bolts securing crankshaft sensor shield to engine backplate.

See FUEL SYSTEM

SFI, Repair, Crankshaft Position Sensor

(CKP Sensor)

REPAIR

77. Release sensor/shield and remove.

78. Disconnect sensor multiplug.

79. Remove sensor.

80. Remove starter motor heatshield.

See

ELECTRICAL, Repair, Starter Motor

Heatshield - 4.0 V8

81. Disconnect solenoid Lucar.

82. Disconnect RH and LH knock sensor multiplugs.

See FUEL SYSTEM SFI, Repair, Knock

Sensor

83. Release harness from engine.

4.0 V8

sump. Collect spacer.

92. Remove 3 bolts from top of bell housing.

93. Collect 2 harness brackets.

94. Remove 2 bolts, LH and RH side of bell housing.

95. Remove centre LH bell housing bolt using long extension.

96. Remove 2 lower bolts from bell housing.

84. Remove nut securing handbrake cable heatshield.

85. Release speed sensor lead from clip on heatshield.

86. Remove heatshield.

87. Disconnect top oil cooler pipe union from transmission.

88. Release union.

89. Remove ’O’ ring and discard.

90. Plug pipe and transmission.

97. Fit suitable wooden block in access plate hole to retain torque converter.

98. Secure block with cover plate and tighten one cover plate bolt.

99. Support gearbox on a jack.

100. Lower ramp.

101. Position lifting chains and attach hooks to engine lifting eyes.

102. Raise engine.

103. Raise jack.

104. Break engine to gearbox joint.

105. Raise engine.

91. Remove bolt securing oil cooler pipe bracket to

REPAIR

ENGINE

106. Remove top starter bolt securing engine earth cable.

107. Remove nut securing kick-down cable clip to LH cylinder head.

108. With assistance, raise engine, move aside all pipes and wires. Move engine clear of vehicle.

109. Lower engine onto bench.

Refit

110. Clean engine and gearbox mating faces.

111. Clean dowel and dowel holes.

112. With assistance raise engine off bench. Lower and guide engine into engine compartment ensuring no wires or pipes become trapped.

113. Position clip securing kick-down cable to LH cylinder head.

114. Fit and tighten nut.

115. Position engine earth cable and secure to starter with top bolt. Tighten to

45 Nm.

116. Lower engine.

117. With assistance, engage engine with gearbox.

118. Fit 3 bottom bell housing bolts. Tighten to

Nm.

119. Lower jack supporting gearbox.

120. Lower engine onto mounting brackets.

121. Fit centre RH bell housing bolt.

122. Fit centre LH bell housing bolt.

123. Fit harness brackets to 2 top bell housing bolts.

124. Fit bolts. Tighten to

46 Nm.

125. Remove plugs from tranmission and oil cooler pipe.

126. Clean pipe, lubricate NEW ’O’ ring and fit to pipe.

127. Connect pipe to transmission and secure with union. Tighten to

30 Nm.

128. Align pipe bracket to sump, position spacer and fit bolt. Tighten to

18 Nm.

129. Fit heatshield and secure with nut.

130. Secure transducer lead to clip on heatshield.

131. Slacken bell housing access plate bolt.

132. Move plate aside.

133. Remove block.

134. Align drive plate and torque converter.

135. Fit 2 torque converter bolts.

136. Rotate engine and fit second 2 bolts. Tighten to

45 Nm.

137. Rotate engine and tighten first 2 bolts to Tighten to

45 Nm.

138. Clean cover plate and mating face.

139. Position cover plate and fit bolts. Tighten to

Nm.

140. Position access plate.

141. Fit 2 remaining bolts and tighten all bolts to

Tighten to

9 Nm.

142. Position engine harness around engine.

143. Connect knock sensor multiplug.

144. Connect starter solenoid Lucar.

145. Position starter motor heatshield and secure clip to solenoid.

146. Align shield bracket to engine mounting bracket and fit bolt. Tighten to

9 Nm.

147. Clean crankshaft sensor mating faces.

148. Position sensor and connect multiplug.

149. Position/align sensor and shield to backplate. Fit bolts. Tighten to

6 Nm.

150. Fit tie bar, align to transmission and fit bolts.

Tighten to

25 Nm.

151. Fit tie bar securing nut. Tighten to

45 Nm.

152. Fit catalytic converter/front pipe assembly.

See

EMISSION CONTROL, Repair, Catalytic

Converter/Front Pipe - 4.0 V8

153. Raise engine.

154. Fit RH mounting rubber.

155. Move engine over.

156. Fit LH mounting rubber.

157. Lower engine.

158. Disconnect hoist.

159. Fit engine mounting nuts. Tighten to

55 Nm.

160. Remove plugs from steering pump and steering box.

161. Clean PAS hose unions.

162. Lubricate ’O’ rings and fit to hose unions.

163. Position hose.

164. Align unions to pump and steering box. Tighten

14mm thread to

15 Nm , 16mm thread to

Tighten to

20 Nm.

165. Remove plugs from feed hose and PAS pump.

166. Connect hose to pump and tighten clip.

167. Untie compressor and position to engine bracket.

168. Position heatshield and fit bolts. Tighten to

Nm.

169. Connect compressor multiplug.

170. Position drive belt.

REPAIR

4.0 V8

171. Route drive belt around pulleys.

172. Pivot tensioner downwards.

173. Align belt to tensioner and release tensioner.

174. Connect battery positive lead and tighten.

175. Secure terminal cover.

176. Align gearbox breather pipe, clip to engine lifting eye and fit bolt. Tighten to

9 Nm.

177. Align and secure engine harness brackets to inlet manifold and fit nuts. Tighten to

9 Nm.

178. Connect injector multiplugs.

179. Connect air intake temperature sensor multiplug.

180. Connect fuel temperature sensor multiplug.

181. Connect coolant temperature multiplug.

182. Connect temperature gauge connector.

183. Connect oil pressure switch Lucar.

184. Connect camshaft sensor multiplug and secure to bracket.

185. Fit ignition coil bracket.

See FUEL SYSTEM

SFI, Repair, Ignition Coils

186. Position heater hose/pipe assembly.

187. Connect hose to inlet manifold.

188. Align pipe to bracket and fit bolt. Tighten to

Nm.

189. Tighten hose clip.

190. Connect heater return hose and tighten clip.

191. Remove plugs from fuel feed and return hose connections.

192. Clean feed unions.

193. Connect return hose and tighten clip.

194. Connect feed hose union and tighten.

195. Remove cloth.

196. Connect purge hose.

197. Connect leads to generator, tighten terminal nuts and fit cover.

198. Connect sensing Lucar.

199. Connect servo vacuum hose.

200. Position expansion tank and secure with fixings.

201. Connect hose and tighten clip.

202. Lower ramp.

203. Fit mass air flow sensor.

See FUEL SYSTEM

SFI, Repair, Mass Air Flow Sensor (MAF

Sensor)

204. Fit plenum chamber.

See FUEL SYSTEM SFI,

Repair, Plenum Chamber

205. Fit radiator.

See COOLING SYSTEM, Repair,

Radiator

206. Fit bonnet.

See CHASSIS AND BODY, Repair,

Bonnet [Hood]

207. Reconnect battery negative lead.

208. Bleed power steering system.

See STEERING,

Repair, Power Steering System - Bleed

209. Drain engine oil and refill.

See LUBRICANTS,

FLUIDS AND CAPACITIES, Information,

Recommended Lubricants and Fluids - USA

Vehicles

210. Start engine. Check for fuel, coolant and oil leaks.

FRONT COVER GASKET

Service repair no - 12.65.04 - Front Cover Gasket

Remove

1. Disconnect battery negative lead.

2. Drain cooling system.

See COOLING SYSTEM

V8, Adjustment, Coolant

3. Remove radiator

See COOLING SYSTEM,

Repair, Radiator

4. Remove water pump pulley.

See COOLING

SYSTEM, Repair, Viscous Coupling, Fan

Blades, Pulley and Fan Cowl

5. Slacken bottom hose clip. Remove hose from water pump.

6. Raise vehicle on ramp.

7. Disconnect oil cooler hoses from front cover and position aside. Plug hoses and connections.

8. Disconnect Lucar from oil pressure switch.

REPAIR

ENGINE

9. Disconnect multiplug from camshaft sensor.

See FUEL SYSTEM SFI, Repair, Camshaft

Position Sensor (CMP Sensor)

10. Remove 9 bolts securing front cover.

Refit

16. Clean sealant from threads of cover bolts.

17. Clean old sealant from front cover and block joint face.

CAUTION: Use a plastic scraper.

18. Apply Hylosil jointing compound to gasket position on cover and block.

19. Fit new gasket to block face.

20. Ensure oil seal register in cover is clean.

21. Lubricate outer face of NEW oil seal.

11. Remove 2 bolts securing sump to front cover.

12. Loosen 4 bolts securing sump adjacent to front cover (2 each side).

13. Release front cover assembly.

14. Remove oil seal.

15. Remove and discard gasket.

22. Using LRT-12-089, fit seal to cover.

23. Lubricate oil pump drive gear and position in pump with groove away from engine.

24. Locate alignment tool LRT-12-090 on front cover and oil pump drive gear.

25. Position front cover over crankshaft.

26. Press and rotate tool to engage drive gear until drive gear keyway aligns with Woodruff key.

27. Fit cover to cylinder block.

REPAIR

28. Remove alignment tool LRT-12-090.

29. Apply a small amount of Loctite 242 to threads and refit front cover bolts. Tighten to

22 Nm.

30. Fit sump bolts. Tighten to

23 Nm.

31. Connect camshaft sensor multiplug.

32. Connect Lucar to oil pressure switch terminal.

33. Remove plugs from oil cooler pipes and cover.

34. Fit new ’O’ ring seals, reconnect oil cooler pipes.

Tighten to

15 Nm.

CAUTION: Over tightening of oil cooler pipe unions can crack front cover.

35. Refit bottom hose to water pump. Tighten clip.

36. Refit water pump pulley.

See COOLING

SYSTEM, Repair, Viscous Coupling, Fan

Blades, Pulley and Fan Cowl

37. Refit radiator assembly.

See COOLING

SYSTEM, Repair, Radiator

38. Refill cooling system.

See COOLING SYSTEM

V8, Adjustment, Coolant

39. Check/top-up engine oil.

40. Lower ramp.

41. Reconnect battery negative lead.

4.0 V8

REPAIR

ENGINE

ROCKER COVER GASKET - LEFT HAND

Service repair no - 12.29.40 - LH Cover Gasket

Service repair no - 12.29.41 - RH Cover Gasket

Remove

1. Disconnect battery negative lead.

2. Remove plenum chamber.

See FUEL SYSTEM

SFI, Repair, Plenum Chamber

3. Remove screw securing dipstick tube to rocker cover.

4. Release plug leads from guide clips and disconnect from 4 spark plugs.

5. Remove 4 bolts securing rocker cover to cylinder head.

6. Remove rocker cover.

7. Remove and discard rocker cover gasket.

Refit

8. Clean mating faces between rocker cover and cylinder head using Bostick cleaner 6001 or equivalent. Allow to dry.

NOTE: Gasket fits one way round only. It must be fitted accurately, first time.

Subsequent movement will destroy bonding.

9. Apply a thin coating of impact adhesive (Bostick

1775 or equivalent) to mating faces of rocker cover seal face and new gasket. Use a brush to ensure an even film. Allow adhesive to become touch dry.

10. Place one end of gasket into cover recess with edge firmly against recess wall, holding remainder of gasket clear. Work around cover, pressing gasket into place ensuring edge firmly contacts recess wall.

CAUTION: Allow cover to stand for thirty minutes before fitting.

11. Fit rocker cover to cylinder head, ensure short screws are inboard. Tighten to

9 Nm.

12. Connect leads to spark plugs and secure to guide clips on rocker cover.

13. Secure dipstick tube to rocker cover.

14. Refit plenum chamber.

See FUEL SYSTEM

SFI, Repair, Plenum Chamber

15. Reconnect battery negative lead.

REPAIR

4.0 V8

ROCKER COVER GASKET - RIGHT HAND

Service repair no - 12.29.41 - RH Cover Gasket

1. Depressurise fuel system.

See FUEL SYSTEM

SFI, Repair, Fuel System - Depressurise

2. Disconnect battery negative lead.

3. Drain cooling system.

See COOLING SYSTEM

V8, Adjustment, Coolant

NOTE: Leave hose disconnected.

4. Disconnect purge pipe from plenum chamber hose.

5. Disconnect breather pipe from rocker cover.

6. Remove bolt securing coolant pipe brackets and nut securing bracket to manifold.

7. Loosen hose clip and disconnect coolant return hose from pipe.

CAUTION: Plug connection.

8. Loosen clip and disconnect fuel return hose from pipe.

9. Disconnect fuel hose from injector pipe.

CAUTION: Use 2 spanners.

10. Remove 2 nuts securing engine harness brackets to manifold.

11. Release 4 ht leads from 2 brackets on rocker cover.

REPAIR

ENGINE

12. Remove 4 bolts securing rocker cover to cylinder head.

13. Remove rocker cover.

14. Remove and discard rocker cover gasket.

Refit

15. Clean mating faces between rocker cover and cylinder head using Bostick cleaner 6001 or equivalent. Allow to dry.

NOTE: Gasket fits one way round only. It must be fitted accurately, first time.

Subsequent movement will destroy bonding.

16. Apply a thin coating of impact adhesive (Bostick

1775 or equivalent) to mating faces of rocker cover seal face and new gasket. Use a brush to ensure an even film. Allow adhesive to become touch dry.

17. Place one end of gasket into cover recess with edge firmly against recess wall, holding remainder of gasket clear. Work around cover, pressing gasket into place ensuring edge firmly contacts recess wall.

CAUTION: Allow cover to stand for thirty minutes before fitting.

18. Fit rocker cover to cylinder head, ensure short screws are inboard. Tighten to

9 Nm.

19. Connect fuel feed and return hoses.

20. Refit ht leads into retaining brackets.

21. Secure engine harness to brackets.

22. Connect coolant pipes to hoses and secure brackets.

23. Connect breather hose to rocker cover.

24. Connect purge hose to plenum chamber.

25. Connect bottom hose to radiator.

26. Refill cooling system.

See COOLING SYSTEM

V8, Adjustment, Coolant

27. Reconnect battery negative lead.

REPAIR

4.0 V8

CRANKSHAFT REAR OIL SEAL

Service repair no - 12.21.20

Remove

1. Manual vehicles: Remove flywheel.

See

ENGINE 3.9 V8, Repair, Flywheel

2. Automatic vehicles: Remove drive plate.

See

ENGINE 4.0 V8, Repair, Drive Plate -

Automatic

3. Remove oil seal from location.

CAUTION: Do not damage seal location or running surface on crankshaft.

Refit

4. Ensure both seal location and running surface on crankshaft are clean.

5. Ensure mating faces of flywheel and crankshaft are clean.

6. Lubricate seal guide LRT-12-095 with clean engine oil. Position over crankshaft boss.

7. Lubricate oil seal lip.

8. Position seal squarely. Remove guide.

9. Drift seal into location using LRT-12-091.

10. Manual vehicles: Fit flywheel.

See ENGINE 3.9

V8, Repair, Flywheel

11. Automatic vehicles: Fit drive plate.

See

ENGINE 4.0 V8, Repair, Drive Plate -

Automatic

REPAIR

ENGINE

DRIVE PLATE - AUTOMATIC

Service repair no - 12.53.13

Remove

1. Remove automatic gearbox and torque converter.

See AUTOMATIC GEARBOX,

Repair, LT230T Transfer Gearbox with

Automatic Gearbox Assembly - V8i

Refit

6. Ensure all mating surfaces are clean.

7. Fit shim and hub aligner to crankshaft.

8. Fit hub aligner screws. Tighten to

85 Nm.

9. Fit drive plate and clamp ring.

10. Fit clamp ring bolts. Tighten to

45 Nm.

NOTE: It is only necessary to reshim the drive plate when a new crankshaft or hub aligner is fitted.

11. Fit automatic gearbox and converter assembly.

See AUTOMATIC GEARBOX, Repair, LT230T

Transfer Gearbox with Automatic Gearbox

Assembly - V8i

ROCKER SHAFT - OVERHAUL

Service repair no - 12.29.29 - Rocker shaft overhaul

See Overhaul Manual 4.0/4.6 V8 Engine

TAPPETS - ENGINE SET

Service repair no - 12.29.57 - Tappets - engine set

See Overhaul Manual 4.0/4.6 V8 Engine

2. Remove 4 clamp ring bolts. Collect clamp ring.

3. Remove flexible drive plate/starter ring gear assembly from hub aligner.

4. Remove 6 screws from hub aligner. Remove hub aligner from crankshaft. Collect shim.

5. Check drive plate for distortion or cracks. Check starter ring gear for chipped or broken teeth. If either component shows signs of damage, fit a new assembly.

REPAIR

Mpi

DESCRIPTION

The ’T’ Series engine is a four cylinder, water cooled unit comprising a cast iron cylinder block, aluminium alloy cylinder head and twin aluminium alloy camshaft carriers.

The cylinder block incorporates direct bored, siamesed cylinder bores which provide good structural rigidity. The crankshaft is carried in five main bearings, end-float being controlled by thrust washers positioned each side of the centre main bearing.

The main bearing caps are located to the cylinder block by dowels; the bearing shells fitted to Nos. 1, 3 and 5 bearings are fully grooved whilst those fitted to

Nos. 2 and 4 bearings are plain.

The cylinder head carries twin camshafts operating four valves per cylinder via hydraulic tappets. Both camshafts are driven by the timing belt and run directly in journals line bored in the cylinder head and camshaft carriers. The plastic camshaft covers are bolted to the camshaft carriers.

DESCRIPTION AND OPERATION

ENGINE

The aluminium alloy, tin coated pistons have two compression and an oil control ring and are secured to the connecting rods by semi-floating gudgeon pins which are an interference fit in the small-end bush.

Gudgeon pins are offset towards the thrust side of the pistons to reduce frictional drag.

Plain, big-end bearing shells are fitted to each connecting rod.

The internally toothed timing belt is driven from a gear which is keyed to the crankshaft, belt tension being controlled by a semi-automatic tensioner.

The trochoidal type oil pump is mounted on the front of the engine and carries the crankshaft front oil seal.

Drive to the pump is via a Woodruff key inserted in the crankshaft.

DESCRIPTION AND OPERATION

Mpi

Lubrication

Oil is drawn from the pressed steel sump through a strainer (1) and into the oil pump (2); excess pressure being relieved by a pressure relief valve (3) integral with the pump. The low oil pressure sensor (4) registers the oil pressure in the main oil gallery on the outflow side of the filter. Pressurised oil passes through the full flow oil filter (5) to internal drillings in the crankshaft where it is directed to each main bearing and to the big end bearings via Nos. 1, 3 and

5 main bearings (6). An internal drilling in the cylinder block directs oil, via a restrictor (7) to the cylinder head where it passes through further internal drillings to the hydraulic tappets and camshaft journals (8).

Gudgeon pin and small-end bush lubrication is by splash from the big-end bearings.

Crankcase ventilation

With the exception of two hoses connected from the inlet camshaft cover to the inlet manifold and throttle housing all crankcase ventilation is via internal voids in the cylinder head and block. The inlet camshaft cover carries a wire gauze flame trap located over the breather pipe connections.

DESCRIPTION AND OPERATION

ENGINE

CYLINDER BLOCK COMPONENTS

1. Cylinder block

2. Knock sensor

3. Crankshaft sensor

4. Bolt - crankshaft sensor

5. Locating dowel - cylinder head

6. Bolt - connecting rod

7. Piston

8. Piston ring - top compression

9. Piston ring - 2nd compression

10. Piston ring - oil control

11. Gearbox adapter plate

12. Bearing shell - big end - upper

13. Flywheel

14. Bolt - flywheel

15. Torx screw - gearbox adapter plate

16. Blanking plate

17. Bolt - blanking plate

18. Gasket

19. Bolt - crankshaft rear oil seal housing

20. Crankshaft rear oil seal and housing

21. Bolt - coolant pump cover

22. Coolant pump cover

23. Impeller

24. Sealing rings

25. ’O’ ring

26. Bolts - coolant pump

27. ’O’ ring

28. Coolant pump body

29. Thrust washer halves - upper

30. Bearing shell - main bearing - upper

31. Locating dowel - oil pump

32. Locating dowel - flywheel

33. Gudgeon pin

34. Crankshaft

35. Bearing shell - big end - lower

36. Bearing cap - big end

37. Nut - big end bearing cap

38. Locating dowel - main bearing cap

39. Bearing caps - main bearings

40. Bolt - main bearing cap

41. Thrust washer halves - lower

42. Bearing shell - main bearing - lower

43. Woodruff keys

44. Dipstick

45. Bolt - dipstick tube

46. Dipstick tube

47. Bolts - sump

48. Gasket - sump

49. ’O’ ring

50. Oil strainer

51. Bolts - oil strainer

52. Sump

53. Washer - drain plug

54. Drain plug

55. Oil filter element

56. Crankshaft front oil seal

57. Bolts - oil pump

58. Gasket - oil pump

59. Oil pump

60. Oil pressure switch

61. Crankshaft spigot bush

62. Crankshaft spigot bearing

63. Locating dowel - coolant pump

64. Connecting rod

65. Bolts belt tensioner mounting plate

66. Belt tensioner mounting plate

67. Bolt - gearbox adapter plate

DESCRIPTION AND OPERATION

Mpi

DESCRIPTION AND OPERATION

ENGINE

CYLINDER HEAD COMPONENTS

1. Engine oil filler cap

2. Filler cap seal

3. Screw - spark plug cover

4. Spark plug cover

5. h.t. lead plate

6. Screw - h.t. lead plate

7. Inlet camshaft cover

8. Exhaust camshaft cover

9. Bolt - exhaust camshaft cover

10. Exhaust camshaft cover gasket/baffle plate

11. Bolt - exhaust camshaft carrier

12. Exhaust camshaft carrier

13. Exhaust camshaft

14. Cylinder head bolt

15. Blanking plate

16. Bolt - blanking plate

17. Locating dowel - camshaft carrier

18. Coolant outlet elbow

19. Gasket

20. Bolt - coolant outlet elbow

21. Stud - exhaust manifold

22. Cylinder head gasket

23. Guide - exhaust valve

24. Insert - exhaust valve seat

25. Exhaust valves

26. Inlet valves

27. Insert - inlet valve seat

28. Guide - inlet valve

29. Cylinder head

30. Stud - inlet manifold

31. Valve stem oil seal

32. Valve spring

33. Valve spring cap

34. Collets

35. Tappet

36. Camshaft oil seals

37. Drive pins - camshaft timing gears

38. Inlet camshaft

39. Inlet camshaft carrier

40. Bolt - inlet camshaft carrier

41. Inlet camshaft cover gasket/baffle plate

42. Bolt - inlet camshaft cover

43. Spark plug

44. Coolant temperature sensor

NOTE: Items 15,16 & 36 on current engines replaced by an oil plug.

See Repair, Inlet -

Exhaust Camshaft Rear Oil Plug

DESCRIPTION AND OPERATION

Mpi

DESCRIPTION AND OPERATION

ENGINE

TIMING BELT COMPONENTS

1. Bolt - timing belt upper cover

2. Timing belt upper cover

3. Bolt - camshaft timing gear

4. Plain washer

5. Timing belt

6. Inlet camshaft timing gear

7. Exhaust camshaft timing gear

8. Bolt - upper timing cover backplate

9. Upper timing cover backplate

10. Lower timing cover backplate

11. Tensioner spring sleeve

12. Anchorage bolt

13. Tensioner spring

14. Tensioner pulley

15. Tensioner clamp bolt

16. Crankshaft timing gear

17. Timing belt lower cover

18. Bolt - timing belt lower cover

19. Timing belt centre cover

20. Crankshaft pulley

21. Crankshaft pulley/timing gear bolt

22. Crankshaft pulley bolt

DESCRIPTION AND OPERATION

CAMSHAFT FRONT OIL SEAL

Service repair no - 12.13.07 - Exhaust

Service repair no - 12.13.09 - Inlet

Remove

1. Disconnect battery negative lead.

2. Remove drive belt.

See SECTION 10,

Maintenance, Under Bonnet [Hood]

Maintenance

3. Remove 5 bolts, timing belt upper cover.

4. Remove timing belt upper cover.

5. Remove 5 bolts, timing belt centre cover.

6. Remove timing belt centre cover.

Mpi

10. Loosen camshaft belt tensioner bolt.

11. Move tensioner away from belt and tighten tensioner bolt.

12. Remove belt from camshaft gears.

7. Rotate crankshaft to align camshaft gear timing marks - 90

B.T.D.C.

8. Fit tool LRT-12-058 to lock flywheel.

9. Fit tool LRT-12-060 to lock camshaft gears.

REPAIR

ENGINE

13. Remove 2 bolts securing camshaft gears to camshafts.

14. Remove tool LRT-12-060.

CAUTION: Do not rotate camshafts.

15. Remove gears noting the ’IN’ and ’EXHAUST’ identifying marks.

18. Remove seals using tool LRT-12-063 fit thrustpad as shown.

16. Remove 5 bolts securing timing belt upper backplate.

17. Remove belt upper backplate.

Refit

1. Clean sealing area of cylinder head and camshaft, ensure all traces of rubber are removed - do not scrape.

2. Using tool LRT-12-064 and LRT-12-072 fit new camshaft oil seals.

CAUTION: Ensure sealing lip of seal is not distorted.

REPAIR

Mpi

INLET - EXHAUST CAMSHAFT REAR OIL PLUG

Remove

1. Remove cylinder head.

2. Lever out, camshaft rear oil seal plug.

For torque values.

See Specifications, torque,

Torque Values

3. Fit timing belt upper backplate and tighten bolts to the correct torque.

4. Fit camshaft gears noting the ’IN’ and

’EXHAUST’ identifying marks.

5. Fit, but do not tighten, camshaft gear centre bolts.

6. Ensure timing marks are aligned.

7. Fit camshaft locking tool LRT-12-060.

8. Tighten camshaft gear bolts to the correct torque.

9. Fit timing belt.

See Camshaft Drive Belt

10. Adjust timing belt tension.

11. Remove tool LRT-12-058 from flywheel.

12. Fit timing belt centre cover and tighten bolts to correct torque.

13. Fit timing belt upper cover and tighten bolts to correct torque.

14. Fit drive belt.

See SECTION 10, Maintenance,

Under Bonnet [Hood] Maintenance

15. Reconnect battery negative lead.

Refit

1. Clean plug housing.

2. Fit new plug applying force to outer edge only.

3. Refit cylinder head.

REPAIR

ENGINE

CRANKSHAFT FRONT OIL SEAL

Service repair no - 12.21.14

Remove

1. Remove timing belt.

See Camshaft Drive Belt

2. Slide timing gear off crankshaft and remove drive key.

Refit

1. Use lint free cloth and thoroughly clean seal recess and running surface on crankshaft. Clean crankshaft gear and pulley.

2. Lubricate oil seal sealing surfaces with engine oil.

3. Fit tool LRT-12-070 onto crankshaft.

4. Position new oil seal on crankshaft, drift into place using LRT-12-069 and remove protector.

3. Ensure bore of tool is burr free, fit and tighten tool LRT-12-073 into crankshaft front oil seal.

4. Using thrustpad, tighten centre screw of tool to remove oil seal.

5. Remove thrust button from crankshaft.

5. Fit drive key to crankshaft and slide timing gear onto crankshaft.

6. Fit and tension timing belt.

See Camshaft

Drive Belt

REPAIR

Mpi

CRANKSHAFT REAR OIL SEAL

Service repair no - 12.21.20

Remove

1. Remove gearbox.

2. Remove clutch assembly.

3. Remove flywheel.

4. Drain engine oil.

5. Fit sump plug, replacing sealing washer if damaged and tighten to the correct torque.

6. Loosen 15 sump bolts by approximately 3 turns, allowing sump to drop away from rear oil seal housing. Do not loosen 3 bolts A around oil pump housing.

Refit

1. Clean seal seating area of block and accessible area of sump gasket. Sump gasket must be replaced if damaged.

2. Lubricate oil seal sealing surfaces with engine oil.

3. Fit tool LRT-12-061 over crankshaft boss and fit oil seal and housing assembly.

4. Remove tool.

5. Fit and tighten seal housing bolts to correct torque in sequence shown.

10Nm

7. Remove bolts securing oil seal housing, remove seal and housing assembly.

6. Tighten sump bolts to correct torque and in the correct sequence.

See Engine Sump Gasket

7. Fit flywheel.

8. Fit clutch assembly.

9. Fit gearbox.

REPAIR

ENGINE

Service repair no - 12.41.01

Remove

1. Site vehicle onto ramp [hoist].

2. Remove the drive belt.

See SECTION 10,

Maintenance, Under Bonnet [Hood]

Maintenance

3. Remove radiator.

See COOLING SYSTEM,

Repair, Radiator - Mpi

4. Remove bonnet [hood].

See CHASSIS AND

BODY, Repair, Bonnet [Hood]

5. Drain engine oil.

6. Position absorbent cloth around fuel pipe to fuel rail union.

Unscrew union to relieve pressure.

CAUTION: Plug the connections

8. Release clip and disconnect hose from heater rail.

7. Release clip and disconnect hose from coolant pump.

REPAIR

Mpi

NOTE: On current models the generator cover is omitted.

9. Remove 3 nuts securing generator rear cover.

10. Remove rear cover.

11. Remove 3 nuts securing harness to generator.

12. Remove harness.

16. Disconnect 2 coolant temperature sensor multiplugs.

17. Release clips and disconnect the bypass and top hose.

18. Release harness lead from cable tie.

13. Disconnect oxygen sensor multiplug.

14. Release multiplug from bracket.

15. Release harness from cable tie.

19. Release clip and disconnect breather hose from inlet manifold.

20. Feed harness between inlet manifold and cam cover.

REPAIR

ENGINE

21. Release clip and disconnect inlet hose from power steering pump.

22. Disconnect outlet pipe union at power steering pump, discard ’O’ ring.

CAUTION: Plug the connections

23. Release throttle cable from abutment bracket.

24. Release throttle cable from cam. Also remove coolant bypass hose from throttle housing.

27. Release clip and disconnect brake servo hose from manifold.

28. Disconnect fuel temperature sensor multiplug.

25. Disconnect stepper motor and throttle potentiometer multiplugs.

26. Release clip and disconnect hose, air cleaner to throttle housing.

REPAIR

Mpi

29. Disconnect oil pressure switch multiplug.

30. Disconnect air conditioning compressor multiplug.

34. Disconnect crankshaft sensor multiplug.

31. Remove 3 bolts securing engine harness to manifold and fuel pipe.

32. Disconnect knock sensor multiplug.

33. Remove 2 nuts securing harness to starter motor solenoid, remove harness.

35. Disconnect fuel injection harness multiplug.

36. Disconnect inlet manifold air temperature sensor multiplug.

37. Release clip and disconnect fuel hose from pressure regulator.

CAUTION: Plug the connections.

REPAIR

ENGINE

40. Release cover and remove bolt securing earth lead to cylinder block.

41. Move earth lead aside.

38. Disconnect 2 ignition coil multiplugs.

42. Remove 4 bolts securing air conditioning compressor, move compressor aside.

39. Disconnect 3 vacuum hoses from manifold.

REPAIR

Mpi

43. Remove engine mounting heat shield. Remove upper nuts from engine L.H. and R.H.

mountings.

46. Raise vehicle.

47. Loosen 2 nuts securing downpipe to silencer.

44. Release 4 screws and remove spark plug cover.

45. Fit tool LRT-12-056, support engine using suitable hoist.

48. Remove 4 nuts securing downpipe to exhaust manifold.

49. Release downpipe from exhaust manifold.

50. Collect gasket.

REPAIR

ENGINE

51. Remove engine L.H. and R.H. mounting lower nuts.

58. Remove 12 remaining bell housing nuts.

52. Lower vehicle.

53. Raise engine.

54. Remove engine mountings.

55. Lower engine.

56. Remove bell housing top nut.

57. Raise engine and support gearbox.

REPAIR

59. Remove engine.

Refit

NOTE: For torque values.

See

Specifications, torque, Torque Values

1. Using assistance, lower engine into position.

2. Fit bell housing nuts, tighten to the correct torque.

3. Remove gearbox support.

4. Lower engine.

5. Fit bell housing top nut, tighten to the correct torque.

6. Raise engine.

7. Position engine mountings, partially tighten nuts.

8. Lower engine.

9. Remove hoist and chains.

10. Tighten L.H. and R.H. mounting nuts to the correct torque. Fit engine mounting heatshield.

11. Fit new gasket to exhaust downpipe.

12. Fit exhaust manifold to downpipe nuts and tighten to the correct torque.

13. Tighten exhaust downpipe to silencer box nuts to the correct torque.

14. Position air conditioning compressor and secure with bolts. Tighten to the correct torque.

15. Connect coil multiplugs.

16. Connect harness to starter solenoid and secure with nuts.

17. Connect earth lead to cylinder block and secure with nut.

18. Position engine harness to manifold, secure with bolts.

Mpi

19. Connect crankshaft sensor, knock sensor, air conditioning compressor, fuel injector harness, inlet manifold air temperature and fuel temperature sensor multiplugs.

20. Connect fuel hose to pressure regulator and secure with clip.

21. Fit and tighten fuel pipe to fuel rail union.

22. Connect multiplugs to throttle housing.

23. Connect vacuum hose to manifold.

24. Connect oil pressure switch multiplug.

25. Connect brake servo hose to manifold, secure with clip.

26. Connect throttle cable to cam.

27. Position engine harness and connect breather hose to inlet manifold, secure with clip.

28. Connect coolant temperature sensor multiplugs, secure harness with cable tie.

29. Connect oxygen sensor multiplug, secure harness with cable tie.

30. Connect alternator harness.

31. Connect heater hose to heater rail and secure with clip.

32. Connect hose to coolant pump and secure with clip.

33. Connect inlet hose to power steering pump and secure with clip.

34. Fit and tighten outlet pipe union to power steering pump.

35. Connect bypass and top hose, secure with clip.

36. Connect air cleaner to throttle housing hose and secure with clip.

37. Remove engine lifting bracket.

38. Position spark plug cover and secure with screws.

39. Fill engine with oil.

40. Fit bonnet [hood].

See CHASSIS AND BODY,

Repair, Bonnet [Hood]

41. Fit radiator.

See COOLING SYSTEM, Repair,

Radiator - Mpi

42. Adjust throttle cable.

See FUEL SYSTEM,

Adjustment, Throttle Cable Adjustment

ENGINE SUMP GASKET

Service repair no - 12.60.43

Remove

1. Drain engine oil.

2. Refit drain plug, use new sealing washer if necessary, tighten to the correct torque.

3. Remove 18 bolts securing sump.

NOTE: 25mm long bolt is fitted at rear L.H.

corner of sump.

4. Release sump from cylinder block.

5. Discard gasket.

REPAIR

ENGINE

Refit

1. Clean sump, remove all traces of gasket from mating faces of sump and cylinder block.

Visually check sump for damage.

2. Apply beads of RTV sealant to front main bearing cap.

CYLINDER HEAD GASKET

Service repair no - 12.29.01

Remove

1. Disconnect battery negative lead.

2. Position absorbent cloth around fuel pipe to fuel rail union. Unscrew union to relieve pressure.

CAUTION: Plug the connections.

3. Position new gasket to sump, ensuring that location pips on gasket are located in sump.

Check gasket lays flat on sump flange.

4. Fit sump. Fit bolts, ensuring that longest bolt is inserted at position 7.

5. Working around the sump in the sequence illustrated, tighten the bolts to the stage 1 torque figure. Then, in the same sequence, tighten the bolts to the stage 2 torque figure.

NOTE: For torque values.

See

Specifications, torque, Torque Values

WARNING: Do not carry out the next instruction until the coolant is cool to avoid personal injury from scalding.

3. Release clip and disconnect radiator bottom hose, allowing coolant to drain into a suitable container.

6. Fill engine with oil.

REPAIR

Mpi

4. Release clip and disconnect hose from heater rail.

10. Release throttle cable from abutment bracket.

11. Release throttle cable from cam. Also remove coolant bypass hose from throttle housing.

5. Disconnect 2 coolant temperature sensor multiplugs.

6. Release clips and disconnect the bypass hose and top hose.

7. Release harness from cable tie.

12. Disconnect stepper motor and throttle potentiometer multiplugs.

13. Release clip and disconnect hose, air cleaner to throttle housing.

8. Disconnect oxygen sensor multiplug.

9. Release harness lead from cable tie.

REPAIR

ENGINE

14. Release clip and disconnect brake servo hose from manifold.

15. Disconnect fuel temperature sensor multiplug.

16. Remove 3 bolts securing engine harness to manifold.

20. Release clips and disconnect 3 hoses from manifold.

17. Disconnect fuel injection harness multiplug.

18. Disconnect inlet manifold air temperature sensor multiplug.

19. Release clip and disconnect fuel hose from pressure regulator.

CAUTION: Plug the connections

21. Remove bolt securing dipstick tube to coolant rail.

REPAIR

Mpi

22. Raise vehicle

23. Remove 4 nuts securing downpipe to exhaust manifold.

24. Release downpipe from exhaust manifold.

25. Collect gasket.

28. Remove camshaft covers.

29. Remove timing belt.

See Camshaft Front Oil

Seal

30. Progressively loosen and remove 10 cylinder head bolts in sequence shown.

26. Release 4 screws and remove spark plug cover.

27. Release spark plug leads from spark plugs and release from clips. Place aside.

31. Remove cylinder head complete with manifold, place on blocks to prevent damage.

32. Remove and discard cylinder head gasket.

33. Remove location dowels from cylinder block.

34. Inspect cylinder head for damage, cracks and burning.

35. Inspect cylinder block. Ensure that the oil restrictor is clear and fitted below the block face.

36. Clean all traces of gasket material from head and block mating faces, using release agent and plastic scraper.

37. Check cylinder head and block faces for warpage:

Longitudinal warp = 0.1 mm max.

Transverse warp = 0.1 mm max.

Diagonal warp = 0.1 mm max.

38. Decarbonize cylinder head and pistons if necessary.

39. Clean cylinder head bolt threads with a wire brush, check for damage, replace if necessary.

40. Check cylinder block threads by running bolts into threads using fingers only. Clean any tight threads using M11 x 1.5 mm tap. Remove all traces of oil from bolt holes.

REPAIR

ENGINE

Refit

1. Fit location dowels to cylinder head.

2. Fit cylinder head gasket to cylinder block.

3. Using assistance fit cylinder head to cylinder block.

4. Lubricate cylinder head bolts.

5. Fit and tighten cylinder head bolts to the correct torque and in the correct sequence.

NOTE: For torque values.

See

Specifications, torque, Torque values

6. Fit timing belt.

7. Fit camshaft covers.

8. Fit spark plug leads to spark plugs and secure to clips.

9. Fit spark plug cover and secure with screws.

10. Fit new gasket and secure downpipe to exhaust manifold with nuts.

11. Fit bolt securing dipstick tube to coolant rail.

12. Connect 3 vacuum hoses to inlet manifold.

13. Connect fuel to pressure regulator, secure with clip.

14. Connect fuel injection harness, inlet manifold air temperature sensor and fuel temperature sensor multiplugs.

15. Secure engine harness to manifold with bolts.

16. Connect brake servo hose to manifold, secure with clip.

17. Connect air cleaner hose to throttle housing, secure with clip.

18. Connect stepper motor and throttle potentiometer multiplugs.

19. Fit and adjust throttle cable.

20. Connect oxygen sensor multiplug, secure with cable tie.

21. Connect the bypass and top hose, secure with clips.

22. Connect coolant temperature sensor multiplugs, secure with cable tie.

23. Connect hose to heater rail and secure with clip.

24. Connect radiator bottom hose and secure with clip.

25. Tighten fuel pipe to fuel rail union.

26. Reconnect battery negative lead.

REPAIR

Mpi

CAMSHAFT COVER GASKET

Service repair no - 12.29.40 - Exhaust

Service repair no - 12.29.41 - Inlet

Remove

1. Release 4 screws from spark plug cover.

2. Remove spark plug cover.

Inlet only

3. Release clips and disconnect 2 breather hoses from camshaft cover.

4. Remove 4 bolts securing support brackets to manifold and cover.

5. Remove support brackets.

6. Remove 12 bolts from camshaft cover.

Exhaust only

7. Remove 13 bolts from camshaft cover.

Inlet and exhaust

8. Remove camshaft cover assemblies.

9. Remove and discard baffle/gasket plate(s).

Refit

1. Place protective cloth over tappets.

2. Using an M8 x 1,25 mm tap, remove all traces of sealing compound from camshaft housing bolt holes.

3. Blow out bolt holes using an airline.

4. Ensure all traces of oil are removed from bolt holes, remove protective cloth.

5. Clean camshaft cover(s) and mating face of camshaft housing(s).

6. Position new baffle/gasket plate to camshaft housing(s).

NOTE: Fit baffle/gasket dry.

7. Fit camshaft cover(s).

Inlet only

8. Position spacers and manifold support brackets.

9. Fit bolts finger tight.

10. Working from the centre outwards, progressively tighten bolts to torque.

10Nm

11. Tighten support bracket to inlet manifold bolts.

12. Connect breather hoses to camshaft cover.

REPAIR

ENGINE

Exhaust only

13. Fit bolts finger tight.

14. Working from the centre outwards, progressively tighten bolts to the correct torque.

10Nm

CAMSHAFT DRIVE BELT

Service repair no - 12.65.17

Remove

NOTE: If the timing belt is to be removed from the camshaft gears only, it is not necessary to remove the drive belt, crankshaft pulley or timing belt lower cover.

1. Remove drive belt.

2. Remove 5 bolts securing timing belt top cover.

3. Remove top cover.

4. Remove 5 bolts securing timing belt centre cover.

5. Remove timing belt centre cover.

Inlet and exhaust

15. Fit spark plug cover to camshaft cover, tighten screws.

REPAIR

6. Rotate crankshaft to align timing marks on camshaft gears - 90

BTDC.

Mpi

CAUTION: Never use the camshaft gears, gear retaining bolts or timing belt to rotate crankshaft.

7. Fit tool LRT-12-058 to lock flywheel.

8. Position tool LRT-12-060 to lock camshaft gears.

13. Fit tool LRT-12-059 to crankshaft pulley, fit 2 pulley bolts to retain tool.

14. Restrain crankshaft pulley using tool LRT-12-059 and remove crankshaft pulley bolt.

15. Remove bolts securing tool LRT-12-059, remove crankshaft pulley.

16. Remove timing belt lower cover.

9. Loosen camshaft belt tensioner pulley bolt.

10. Move tensioner to release timing belt tension.

11. Retighten tensioner pulley bolt.

12. Remove 4 bolts securing crankshaft pulley to crankshaft timing gear.

17. If timing belt is to be refitted, mark direction of rotation of belt.

18. Remove timing belt.

REPAIR

ENGINE

CAUTION: Ease timing belt off gears using fingers only. Metal levers may damage the belt and gears. Do not rotate engine with timing belt removed and cylinder head fitted.

Timing belts must be stored and handled with care. Always store a timing belt on its edge with a bend radius greater than 50 mm. Do not use a timing belt which has been twisted or bent double as this can fracture reinforcing fibres. Do not use an oil contaminated timing belt. Although the belt has a service life of 96,000 miles, 160,000 km, an existing belt should only be refitted if it has completed less than 48,000 miles, 80,000 km.

Refit

NOTE: For torque values.

See

Specifications, torque, Torque values

1. Clean timing belt gears and pulleys.

2. Clean crankshaft pulley.

CAUTION: If original belt is to be refitted, ensure direction of rotation mark is facing correct way.

3. Fit timing belt to gears, starting at the crankshaft gear and working in an anti-clockwise direction.

CAUTION: Ensure the belt run between the crankshaft and exhaust camshaft gear is kept taut during the fitting procedure.

4. Fit timing belt lower cover, tighten 3 bolts to the correct torque.

5. Fit crankshaft pulley to crankshaft timing gear.

6. Fit tool LRT-12-059 to crankshaft pulley, fit 2 bolts to retain tool.

7. Fit crankshaft pulley centre bolt, and using tool

LRT-12-059 to restrain pulley, tighten bolt to the correct torque.

8. Remove tool LRT-12-059

9. Fit bolts securing crankshaft pulley to timing gear, tighten bolts to the correct torque.

10. Remove tool LRT-12-060.

Tension belt

1. Loosen timing belt tensioner pulley bolt.

2. Apply

40Nm anti-clockwise torque to inlet cam pulley bolt and release.

3. Tighten tensioner pulley bolt to the correct torque.

4. Remove tool LRT-12-058 from flywheel.

5. Fit timing belt centre cover, tighten 5 bolts to the correct torque.

6. Fit timing belt upper cover, tighten 5 bolts to the correct torque.

7. Fit drive belt.

REPAIR

Mpi

CHECK CAMSHAFT DRIVE BELT

Service repair no - 12.65.17

CAUTION: This check must be carried out at the service intervals specified and whenever carrying out any repair which requires the timing belt to be disturbed. Pay particular attention for signs of belt splitting at base of teeth.

1. Remove 5 bolts securing timing belt upper cover

2. Remove upper cover.

3. Using a socket and extension bar on the crankshaft pulley bolt, rotate engine to allow the timing belt to be inspected.

CAUTION: Do not use camshaft gears or retaining bolts to rotate engine.

4. Check timing belt condition, renew any belt that shows signs of oil contamination, cracking, fraying or splitting at base of teeth.

CAUTION: Cause of oil contamination, if present, must be rectified.

5. Clean timing belt upper cover.

6. Position upper cover.

7. Fit upper cover securing bolts.

REPAIR

Mpi

TORQUE VALUES

NOTE: Torque wrenches should be regularly checked for accuracy to ensure that all fixings are tightened to the correct torque.

ENGINE

Timing belt upper cover bolts ......................................................................

Timing belt centre cover bolts

Timing belt lower cover bolts

.....................................................................

......................................................................

Crankshaft pulley centre bolt .....................................................................

Crankshaft pulley to timing gear bolts

Tensioner pulley bolt

Spark plugs

Camshaft gear bolts

........................................................

..................................................................................

................................................................................................

Timing belt upper backplate bolts ..............................................................

...................................................................................

Exhaust camshaft rear oil seal cover plate bolts

Inlet camshaft rear oil seal cover plate bolts

Crankshaft rear oil seal housing bolts

Engine sump bolts

........................................

..............................................

........................................................

Stage 1 ...............................................................................................

Stage 2 ..............................................................................................

Bell housing nuts ........................................................................................

L.H. and R.H. engine mounting nuts

Exhaust manifold to downpipe nuts

..........................................................

...........................................................

Exhaust downpipe to silencer box nuts ......................................................

Air conditioning compressor to engine block bolts .....................................

Cylinder head bolts

Stage 1 ..............................................................................................

Stage 2 ..............................................................................................

Stage 3 - Further 90

Camshaft cover bolts .................................................................................

Knock sensor .............................................................................................

Ignition coil bracket bolts ............................................................................

Coolant temperature sensor

Crankshaft sensor bolts

......................................................................

..............................................................................

Fuel temperature sensor .............................................................................

Intake air temperature sensor

Fuel rail to inlet manifold bolts

.....................................................................

...................................................................

Fuel feed hose stiffening bracket bolts

Throttle housing mounting nuts

.......................................................

...................................................................

Fuel pressure regulator steady bracket bolts ..............................................

Oxygen sensor ...........................................................................................

SPECIFICATIONS, TORQUE

ENGINE

Mpi

LRT-12-056 Engine lifting bracket

18G 1644

LRT-12-058 Location pin valve timing

18G 1523

LRT-12-059 Crankshaft pulley locking tool

18G 1641

LRT-12-060 Locking tool crankshaft gear

18G 1524

SERVICE TOOLS

ENGINE

LRT-12-061 Protection sleeve crankshaft rear oil

18G 1108 seal

LRT-12-063 Remover camshaft oil seals

18G 1476

LRT-12-064 Replacer pilot camshaft front

18G 1475

LRT-12-069 Replacer crankshaft front oil seal

18G 1509

SERVICE TOOLS

Mpi

LRT-12-070 Sleeve crankshaft front oil seal

18G 1510

LRT-12-072 Replacer drift camshaft front oil seals

LRT-12-073 Remover crankshaft front oil seal

LRT-12-074 Remover adapter bit

SERVICE TOOLS

ENGINE

LRT-12-076 Replacer needle crankshaft bearing

SERVICE TOOLS

EMISSION CONTROL

Three systems are used to control the vehicle atmospheric emissions these are:

Engine crankcase fume emissions.

Fuel tank Evaporative emissions

Engine exhaust gas emissions.

Crankcase ventilation system - 3.9 MFi models only

The crankcase ventilation system which is an integral part of the air supply to the engine combustion chambers, is often overlooked when diagnosing problems associated with engine performance. A blocked ventilation pipe or filter or excessive air leak into the inlet system through a damaged pipe or leaking gasket can effect the mixture, performance and economy of the engine.

The purpose of the crankcase ventilation system is to ensure that any noxious gas generated in the engine crankcase is rendered harmless by burning in the combustion chambers as follows:

Oil laden noxious gas in the engine crankcase is drawn through an oil separator 3 located on the right cylinder head rocker cover, where the oil is separated and returned to the sump. The gas flows through a restrictor in the three way connection 1 and into the inlet plenum chamber where it is drawn into the combustion chambers and burned. The volume of fresh air which is drawn from the atmospheric side of the throttle butterfly to mix with the gas, depends on the position of the throttle and the engine speed.

The air filter 2 fitted to the left cylinder head rocker cover, must be maintained in clean condition to ensure sufficient air enters the crankcase under varying throttle openings and manifold depression, to prevent excessive crankcase pressure or depression developing.

1. Three way connector

2. Air filter

3. Oil separator

REV: 09/95 DESCRIPTION AND OPERATION

EMISSION CONTROL

Exhaust emission control.

The fuel injection system provides accurately metered quantities of fuel to the combustion chambers to ensure the most efficient air to fuel ratio under all conditions of operation. A further improvement to combustion is made by measuring the oxygen content of the exhaust gases to enable the quantity of fuel injected to be varied, according to conditions, to correct any unsatisfactory composition of the exhaust.

The main components of the exhaust emission system are two Catalytic converters which are an integral part of the front exhaust pipe assembly. The

Catalytic converters are included in the system to reduce the emission, to atmosphere, of carbon monoxide, oxides of nitrogen, and hydrocarbons. The active constituents of the converters are platinum and rhodium. The correct functioning of the converters is dependent upon close control of the oxygen concentration in the exhaust gas entering the catalyst.

The oxygen content of the exhaust gas is monitored by the heated oxygen sensors. Information on the heated oxygen sensors is contained in the relevant

Fuel System section,

See FUEL SYSTEM MFI,

Description and operation, or See FUEL SYSTEM

SFI, Description and operation, The ECM can then make an appropriate adjustment to the fuel supply to correct the composition of the exhaust.

CAUTION: Unleaded fuel only must be used on vehicles fitted with catalytic converters. As a reminder,a label to indicate this is adhered to the inside of the fuel filler flap. Furthermore the filler neck is designed to accommodate only unleaded fuel pump nozzles.

DESCRIPTION AND OPERATION REV: 09/95

EMISSION CONTROL

EXHAUST SYSTEM

1. Manifold to front pipe connection.

2. Heated oxygen sensor - pre-catalytic converter.

3. Front silencer support bracket.

4. Heated oxygen sensor - post-catalytic converter.

5. Front pipe to silencer joint.

6. Silencer rear support bracket.

7. Rear silencer support bracket.

REV: 09/95 DESCRIPTION AND OPERATION

EMISSION CONTROL

Evaporative emission control system - pre advanced EVAPS.

The system is designed to prevent harmful fuel vapour from escaping to the atmosphere. The system consists of a vapour separator tank, connected to the fuel tank and located between the body inner and outer panels on the right hand side of the vehicle near the rear wheel arch. An adsorbtion canister, containing activated charcoal, is positioned in the engine compartment attached to the front right valance. The two components are connected by a pipe running the length of the chassis.

A pressure relief valve is fitted in the hose which is open to atmosphere. This valve acts as a safety valve should a build-up of pressure occur in the system, for example if a hose became blocked or kinked. The volume of vapour emitted, in such an instance, would be acceptable.

A pressure relief valve is also fitted in the hose connected to the adsorbtion canister and releases vapor to the canister when the pressure in the separator reaches between 5 and 7 Kpa.

In the top of the separator a shut-off valve is incorporated in the vapor exit port to prevent the possible presence of any liquid fuel being transmitted to the adsorbtion canister should the vehicle roll over.

The adsorbtion canister, which is connected by a hose to the plenum chamber, absorbs and stores the fuel vapour from the fuel tank while the engine is not running. When the engine is started, the vapour is purged from the canister by air drawn through an orifice in the base of the canister and by the influence of vacuum at the top. The vapour drawn into the plenum chamber through a solenoid operated purge valve is finally burnt in the combustion chambers.

A Pressure relief to atmosphere.

B From fuel tank to separator.

C To adsorbtion canister.

D Pressure relief valve.

E Pressure relief valve.

F Shut-off valve.

G "Speed Fit" connectors.

DESCRIPTION AND OPERATION

The purge valve, which is attached to the adsorbtion canister support bracket, is controlled by the Engine

Control Module ECM which determines the most emission acceptable time at which purging should take place. This will normally be at engine speeds above idle and when the vehicle is in motion. A signal from the ECM to the purge valve operates the solenoid and opens the valve to purge the canister of fuel vapour.

REV: 09/95

EVAPORATIVE CONTROL SYSTEM - PRE

ADVANCED EVAPS

1. Adsorption canister and purge valve.

2. Location of vapour separator and pipes.

3. Fuel tank.

EMISSION CONTROL

REV: 09/95 DESCRIPTION AND OPERATION

EMISSION CONTROL

EVAPORATIVE EMISSION CONTROL SYSTEM -

ADVANCED EVAPS

Component location

1. EVAP canister

2. EVAP canister vent solenoid (ECVS)

3. EVAP canister purge valve

4. Anti-trickle fill valve

5. Liquid/vapour separator

6. Fuel filler neck assembly

7. Fuel tank

8. Fuel pump and gauge sender unit

DESCRIPTION AND OPERATION ADD: 09/95

EMISSION CONTROL

Identification

Fuel filler neck components

A Anti-trickle fill valve

B Liquid/Vapour Separator

C Vent line to pressure sensor

D From fuel tank to liquid/vapour separator

E From EVAP canister to anti-trickle fill valve

F Fuel filler hose, Dual layer, convolute nylon

G Fuel tank internal breather hose

The system was introduced on all North American specification vehicles from October 1996 and the vehicles can be recognised by the information contained in the EVAP. FAMILY entry on the underbonnet Emission label (mounted on the vertical face of the bonnet lock platform).

A - Vehicles with advanced EVAPS

VLR1124AYPFE

B - Vehicles without advanced EVAPS

VLR1060AYPBC

ADD: 09/95 DESCRIPTION AND OPERATION

EMISSION CONTROL

System operation

The system is designed to prevent fuel vapour escaping to atmosphere, and consists of four roll-over valves fitted internally in the fuel tank, connected to the liquid/vapour separator by a nylon line. The separator is mounted to the side of the filler neck. An

EVAP canister is positioned in the engine compartment mounted on the right front side valance.

The liquid/vapour separator and EVAP canister are connected by a nylon line which runs the length of the chassis.

Pressure/vacuum relief valves are incorporated into the fuel filler cap and are designed to protect the fuel tank from permanent deformation in the event of system pressure or vacuum exceeding the system operating parameters. There are no other relief or one-way valves in the system.

A vent line flow restrictor known as an anti-trickle fill valve is fitted to the filler pipe in the line between the tank and EVAP canister. The function of this valve is to prevent overfilling the tank by trickling fuel in, thereby preserving the vapour space in the tank to allow for fuel expansion during hot weather.

The valve achieves this by blocking the vent line during the fuel filling process. The valve is operated by the action of inserting the filler gun so that when the fuel in the tank reaches the level of the filling breather, flow cut off occurs due to fuel filling the filler pipe.

During normal vehicle operation and when the engine is switched off, the venting system between the fuel tank and EVAP canister is open to allow the free passage of vapour.

The EVAP canister, which is connected by a nylon hose to the plenum chamber, absorbs and stores the fuel vapour from the fuel tank when the engine is not running. With the engine running, vapour is purged from the EVAP canister by allowing outside air to be drawn through the EVAP canister vent solenoid and link pipe by the influence of manifold vacuum to the

EVAP canister purge connection on the canister.

Filter pads are fitted above and below the charcoal and in the EVAP canister vent solenoid to prevent the ingress of foreign matter into the purge line.

The EVAP canister purge valve, which is fitted in the line from the EVAP canister to the plenum, is controlled by the ECM which determines the most emission acceptable time at which purging should take place. This will normally be at engine speeds above idle and when the vehicle is in motion.

The EVAP canister vent solenoid is mounted on the side of the EVAP canister bracket and is connected to the EVAP canister by a length of large bore hose. The

ECVS is controlled by the ECM and is normally open.

The function of the ECVS is to block the air intake side of the EVAP canister. When the system receives an ECM signal the valve closes; this allows the system leak check to take place. The leak check only occurs when pre-determined vehicle operating conditions are met.

DESCRIPTION AND OPERATION ADD: 09/95

EMISSION CONTROL

TESTING EVAPORATIVE EMISSION CONTROL -

PRE ADVANCED EVAPS

The following pressure test procedure is intended to provide a method for ensuring that the system does not leak excessively and will effectively control evaporative emissions.

Equipment required.

Nitrogen cylinder (compressed air may be used to pressure the system when there has NEVER been fuel present in the fuel or evaporative control systems).

Water manometer (0 - 30" H2O or more).

Pipework and a "T" piece.

Method.

1. Ensure that there is at least two gallons of fuel in the petrol tank unless there has never been any fuel in the system.

2. Disconnect, at the adsorption canister, the pipe to the vapour separator.

3. Connect this pipe to the nitrogen cylinder and the water manometer using the "T" piece.

4. Pressurize the system to between 26.5 and 27.5

inches of water, allow the reading to stabilize, then turn off the nitrogen supply.

5. Measure the pressure drop within a period of 2 minutes 30 seconds. If the drop is greater than

2.5 inches of water the system has failed the test. Note that a fully sealed system will show a slight increase in pressure.

6. Should the system fail the test, maintain the pressure in the system and apply a soap solution round all the joints and connections until bubbles appear to reveal the source of the leak.

7. Repeat the test and if successful, dismantle the test equipment and reconnect the pipe to the adsorption canister.

LEAK DETECTION PROCEDURE - ADVANCED

EVAPS

1. Connect TestBook to the vehicle and confirm that the fault code(s) displayed relate to an

EVAP system fault.

2. Examine components in fuel and EVAP system for damage or poorly connected joints.

3. Repair or replace components to rectify any faults found, then reset the Check Engine light using TestBook.

4. Carry out Drive Cycle,

See Drive Cycle -

Advanced EVAPS

5. Using TestBook confirm that the Evaporative

Loss Control (ELC) Inspection and Maintenance

(IM) flag has cleared. This procedure should confirm that the ELC test was carried out during the drive cycle and that the fault was cured.

6. If the IM flag is still shown, use TestBook to interrogate the engine management system to ascertain which of the following situations exists:

•

If a fault code is shown then further investigation is required, proceed to the next step.

•

If the IM flag is still shown, but no faults are indicated the conditions for the ELC check have not been met and the drive cycle must be repeated.

7. Connect the Leak Detection/EVAP Diagnostic

Station to the vehicle and carry out the procedures given in the operating instructions supplied with the equipment.

8. Rectify faults indicated by the Leak

Detection/EVAP Diagnostic Station and return to step 4.

REV: 09/95 FAULT DIAGNOSIS

EMISSION CONTROL

DRIVE CYCLE - ADVANCED EVAPS

1. Switch on ignition for 30 seconds.

2. Ensure that coolant temperature is less than 140

F (30

C).

3. Start engine and allow to idle for 2 minutes.

4. Perform 2 light accelerations (0 to 35 mph with light pedal pressure).

5. Perform 2 medium accelerations (0 to 45 mph with moderate pedal pressure).

6. Perform 2 hard accelerations (0 to 55 mph with heavy pedal pressure).

7. Cruise at 60 mph for 5 minutes.

8. Cruise at 50 mph for 5 minutes.

9. Cruise at 35 mph for 5 minutes.

10. Allow engine to idle for 2 minutes.

11. Connect TestBook and check for fault codes.

FAULT DIAGNOSIS ADD: 09/95

EMISSION CONTROL

POSITIVE CRANKCASE VENTILATION AIR

INTAKE FILTER

Service repair no - 17.10.02

The PCV air intake filter is located at the rear of the left hand rocker cover, beneath the throttle linkage bracket.

Remove

1. Pry the filter outer cover upwards to release it from its mounting.

2. Remove the sponge filter from the cover and discard the sponge.

POSITIVE CRANKCASE VENTILATION BREATHER

FILTER

Service repair no - 17.10.03

Remove

1. Release the hose clamp and pull the hose off the canister.

2. Unscrew the canister and remove it from the rocker cover.

3. Remove the large rubber ’O’ ring and inspect for deterioration.

Refit

3. Insert a new filter into the filter cover.

4. Press the filter onto its mounting until it clips firmly into position.

4. Visually inspect the condition of the wire screen within the canister, if in poor condition, replace the whole assembly, if the filter unit is in an acceptable condition, clean as follows.

5. Immerse the canister in a small amount of solvent (mineral spirits) and allow time for the solvent to dissolve or loosen any debris.

6. Remove the canister from the solvent bath and allow to dry in still air.

WARNING: Do not use a compressed air line to dry, clean or remove any remaining particles of debris within the canister as this could cause fire or personal injury.

Refit

7. If the original canister is being refitted, fit a new

’O’ ring.

8. Screw the canister into the rocker cover securely

- hand tight only.

9. Refit the hose and tighten the hose clamp securely.

REPAIR

EMISSION CONTROL

HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR (HO2S)

Service repair no - 19.26.16

Remove

CAUTION: The removal of the sensors from the exhaust system must only be carried out when the engine is cold.

1. Disconnect battery negative lead.

2. Disconnect the electrical plugs from the sensors.

3. Unscrew and remove the sensors from the two exhaust downpipes.

PURGE CONTROL VALVE

Service repair no - 17.15.39

Remove

1. Disconnect battery negative lead.

2. Disconnect multiplug from purge control valve.

3. Release clip and disconnect hose from valve.

4. Release valve from charcoal canister.

5. Remove valve.

Refit

4. Coat the threads of the sensors with anti-seize compound.

CAUTION: To ensure that the efficiency of the sensor is not impaired, DO NOT allow anti-seize compound to come into contact with the sensor nose.

5. Screw in the sensor and tighten to the correct torque using special tool LST134.

6. Connect the electrical plugs and battery lead.

6. Discard ’O’ ring.

Refit

7. Clean valve and valve location.

8. Fit new ’O’ ring to purge valve.

9. Position and secure valve to charcoal canister.

10. Connect hose to purge valve and secure with clip.

11. Connect multiplug to valve.

12. Reconnect battery negative lead.

REPAIR

CHARCOAL CANISTER

Service repair no - 17.15.13

Remove

1. Disconnect battery negative lead.

2. Pry out purge valve.

3. Disconnect pipe.

EMISSION CONTROL

4. Loosen bolt.

5. Remove charcoal canister.

Refit

6. Reverse removal procedure.

REPAIR

EMISSION CONTROL

HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR (HO2S) - 4.0 V8

WARNING: Do not attempt HO2S removal when the exhaust is hot.

Remove

For all sensors:

1. Raise and support front of vehicle.

2. Release sensor lead from clips.

RH front sensor only

3. Remove nuts retaining coil bracket and position bracket aside.

See FUEL SYSTEM SFI, Repair,

Ignition Coils

LH front sensor

7. Disconnect multiplug and release from bracket.

8. Unscrew and remove sensor from exhaust pipe using special tool LRT-12-047 (LST134).

4. Release multiplug from bracket behind cylinder head.

5. Disconnect multiplug and release sensor lead from clip.

6. Unscrew and remove sensor from exhaust pipe.

REPAIR

Rear sensors

9. Release sensor cable from clips.

10. Release multiplug from bracket and disconnect.

EMISSION CONTROL

Refit

12. Ensure mating faces are clean.

NOTE: New HO2S is supplied pre-treated with anti-seize compound.

13. If refitting existing HO2S, coat threads with anti-seize compound.

CAUTION: Do not allow anti-seize compound to come into contact with HO2S nose or enter exhaust system.

14. Position HO2S with new sealing washer on exhaust pipe. Tighten to

20 Nm using special tool LRT-12-047 (not RH front sensor).

15. Reconnect multiplug to engine harness and secure to bracket.

16. RH front sensor only:

Place coil bracket in position and fit nuts. Tighten to

8 Nm.

CAUTION: Ensure sensor leads are secured using clips provided. Failure to correctly secure leads could result in damage to HO2S.

17. Remove stands. Lower vehicle.

11. Unscrew and remove sensor from exhaust pipe using special tool LRT-12-047 (LST134).

REPAIR

EMISSION CONTROL

CATALYTIC CONVERTER/FRONT PIPE - 4.0 V8

Service repair no - 17.50.09

WARNING: The removal of the exhaust system must only be carried out when the engine is cold.

Remove

1. Disconnect battery negative lead.

2. Raise vehicle on ramp.

3. Remove oxygen sensors

See Heated Oxygen

Sensor (HO2S) - 4.0 V8

8. With assistance, release front pipe from intermediate pipe.

9. With assistance, lower anti-roll bar.

10. With assistance, remove exhaust front pipe.

11. Remove flange gaskets and discard.

Refit

12. Reverse removal procedure.

4. Remove 4 nuts/bolts securing front anti-roll bar brackets.

5. Remove 6 nuts securing front pipe flanges to manifolds.

6. Remove 2 nuts securing front pipe to intermediate pipe.

7. With assistance, release front pipe from manifold flanges.

REPAIR

EVAP CANISTER AND PURGE VALVE - 4.0 V8

Service repair no - 17.15.13

Remove

1. Disconnect battery negative lead.

EMISSION CONTROL

2. Disconnect multiplug from EVAP purge valve.

3. Release purge valve rubber mounting from bracket.

4. Release clip and remove hose from EAVP canister.

5. Loosen bolt.

6. Remove EVAP canister and purge valve complete.

Refit

7. Reverse removal procedure.

REPAIR

EMISSION CONTROL

EVAP CANISTER - ADVANCED EVAPS

Service repair no - 17.15.13

Remove

1. Disconnect battery negative lead.

EVAP CANISTER PURGE VALVE - ADVANCED

EVAPS

Service repair no - 17.15.39

Remove

1. Disconnect battery negative lead.

2. Release clip securing vent solenoid hose to canister and disconnect hose.

3. Release vent and purge line quickfit connections from canister.

4. Remove nut and bolt securing canister to mounting bracket, collect fixture clamp.

5. Remove canister.

Refit

6. Fit canister to mounting bracket.

7. Position fixture clamp and secure canister to mounting bracket with nut and bolt.

8. Connect vent and purge line quickfit connections to canister.

9. Connect vent solenoid hose to canister and secure with clip.

10. Reconnect battery negative lead.

2. Disconnect multiplug from purge valve.

3. Release purge valve rubber mounting from bracket.

4. Release quickfit hose connections from throttle body plenum and EVAP canister.

5. Remove purge valve assembly.

Refit

6. Locate purge valve adjacent to bracket.

7. Connect quickfit hose connections to throttle body plenum and EVAP canister.

8. Conmnect multiplug to purge valve and secure purge valve rubber mounting to bracket.

9. Reconnect battery negative lead.

REPAIR ADD: 09/95

EVAP CANISTER VENT SOLENOID - ADVANCED

EVAPS

Service repair no - 17.15.43

Remove

1. Disconnect battery negative lead.

EMISSION CONTROL

2. Release clip securing hose to vent solenoid and disconnect hose.

3. Disconnect multiplug from vent solenoid.

4. Remove vent solenoid from mounting bracket.

Refit

5. Fit vent solenoid to mounting bracket.

6. Connect multiplug to vent solenoid.

7. Connect hose to vent solenoid and secure with clip.

8. Reconnect battery negative lead.

ADD: 09/95 REPAIR

Tdi

DESCRIPTION

Air intake

The air cleaner is positioned to the right of the engine and connected by hoses to a cold air intake duct and the turbocharger inlet. A crankcase breather hose is fitted between the air cleaner and the separator.

A single stage turbocharger, fitted between the exhaust manifold and exhaust pipe, is connected by hoses to the air cleaner and to an intercooler mounted on the right of the radiator. The intercooler is connected by a hose to the inlet manifold.

Fuel system

A 89 litre fuel tank is mounted at the rear of the vehicle beneath the load space floor. The tank is vented by a 2 way valve in the filler cap.

A mechanical lift pump, driven by the camshaft, is mounted on the side of the engine.

A fuel filter, fitted with a replaceable element and incorporating a water separator, is positioned on the

LH side of the bulkhead.

A Bosch Type injection pump, incorporating a cold start advance unit and a high idle setting is mounted on the LH side of the engine and is directly driven by gears from the crankshaft. The pump meters and distributes fuel to 4 pintle type injectors located in pre-combustion chambers in the cylinder heads.

A return line passes excess fuel from the injection pump and injectors back to the fuel tank.

Glow plugs

Four glow plugs are located in the cylinder head, directly below each injector.

Exhaust gas recirculation (EGR)

Exhaust gas recirculation is controlled by the EGR control unit mounted in the passenger compartment on the RH ’A’ post behind the fascia and receives the following inputs: a. Engine temperature from coolant temperature transmitter in No. 4 cylinder head.

b. Throttle position from the sensor on the injection pump.

c. Engine speed from the tachometer.

d. EGR valve lift position.

When all correct signals are received, the EGR solenoid allows vacuum to open the EGR valve and recirculate a portion of the exhaust gas.

DESCRIPTION AND OPERATION

FUEL SYSTEM

FUEL SYSTEM LAYOUT

1. Fuel tank

2. Fuel lift pump

3. Fuel filter

4. Fuel injection pump

5. Spill return line

6. Fuel injectors

7. Sediment plug

FUEL SYSTEM COMPONENT LOCATION

1. Fuel filter bleed screw

2. Fuel filter

3. Turbocharger

4. Wastegate

5. Air cleaner

6. Fuel injector

7. Glow plug

8. Glow plug controller

9. EGR valve and valve lift position sensor

10. Coolant temperature transmitter - EGR and instruments

11. Fuel injection pump

12. EGR throttle position sensor

13. Fuel lift pump

14. Intercooler

15. EGR Control unit

DESCRIPTION AND OPERATION

Tdi

DESCRIPTION AND OPERATION

FUEL SYSTEM

OPERATION

Diesel engines operate by compression ignition. The rapid compression of air in the cylinder during the compression cycle heats the injected fuel, causing it to self ignite. During cold starting, automatically controlled glow plugs assist in raising the temperature of the compressed air to ignition point.

A cold start advance unit advances the injection timing to further assist starting. Idle quality is improved by the high idle setting.

The engine is supplied with pre-compressed air by a single stage turbocharger.

Exhaust gases passing over a turbine cause it to rotate, driving a compressor mounted on the turbine shaft. Air drawn from the cold air intake passes, via the air cleaner, to the turbocharger where it is compressed. The compressed air passes to the cylinders via an intercooler, which reduces the temperature of the compressed air, increasing its density.

Fuel is drawn from the tank by a mechanical lift pump and passes to the injection pump via a filter. In addition to removing particle contamination from the fuel, the filter incorporates a water separator, which removes and stores both bound and unbound water.

The injection pump meters a precisely timed, exact quantity of fuel to the injectors in response to throttle variations, injection timing varying with engine speed.

Any excess fuel delivered to the injection pump is not injected, passing back to the tank via the fuel return line.

Fuel is injected in a finely atomised form into a pre-combustion chamber in the cylinder head where it ignites. The burning fuel expands rapidly into the main combustion chamber, creating extreme turbulence which mixes the burning fuel thoroughly with the compressed air, providing complete combustion.

Cold Starting is assisted by glow plugs, a cold start advance unit and a high idle setting.

Glow plugs

Glow plug operation is controlled by a timer unit, start relay and resistor. When the ignition is turned on the timer unit is energised, the glow plugs start to operate and a warning light on the dashboard illuminates, remaining illuminated until the glow plugs are automatically switched off.

The length of time the glow plugs will operate is dependent on under bonnet temperature, which is monitored by a sensor located in the timer unit.

Starting the engine results in the power supply to the glow plugs passing through the resistor, which reduces their operating temperature. The glow plugs are cut out either by the temperature sensor in the timer, or by a microswitch on the injection pump which operates when the throttle is depressed.

Cold start advance

The cold start advance unit is connected to the engine cooling system via hoses. It contains a temperature sensitive element which is retracted when cold and pulls the advance lever, via cable, towards the rear of the pump against spring pressure. As coolant temperature rises, the cold start element expands releasing tension on the cable and allowing spring pressure to move the advance lever forwards.

DESCRIPTION AND OPERATION

Exhaust Gas Recirculation (EGR)

Operation of the EGR system is dependent on the following: a. Engine temperature - must be between 20

C and 100

C approx.

b. Engine speed - must be between 630 and 2850 rev/min.

c. Engine load - calculated by throttle position sensor.

d. EGR valve lift position.

e. Duration of engine idling.

Under varying engine speed and load conditions the control unit sends a signal to open the vacuum modulator which allows a vacuum to be applied above the EGR valve diaphragm, the vacuum supply being taken from a ’T’ connector in the brake servo hose.

This process is controlled by an engine speed/load map stored in the EGR control unit memory.

Engine speed is measured by monitoring the waveform present on one phase of the generator.

Throttle position is measured via a sensor mounted on the fuel injection pump throttle lever. Closed loop control is achieved by allowing the control unit to continually monitor EGR valve lift via a position sensor mounted on the valve; this valve lift is compared with the actual valve lift required on the control unit map and adjusted if necessary.

With coolant temperature between 20

C and 100

C; the engine having just returned to idle, EGR will shut off after 25-30 seconds idling.

Tdi

DESCRIPTION AND OPERATION

FUEL SYSTEM

DESCRIPTION ELECTRONIC DIESEL CONTROL

The Electronic Diesel Control (EDC) ’drive by wire’ system derives its from the replacement of conventional mechanical controls by electronic components.

The EDC system supplies the exact amount of fuel to the engine according to the prevailing engine operating conditions. To monitor these conditions, sensors are fitted to the engine to measure engine parameters. Data from the sensors is received by the

Engine Control Module (ECM) which determines the exact amount of fuel, injection timing and Exhaust

Gas Recirculation (EGR) required for any running condition.

Safety and emergency features are built into the system which protect the engine against overspeed and overheating damage. In the event of component failure the system is designed to compensate and allow emergency start and limp home facilities to operate. The ECM does this by substituting a default value for the failed component which may result in a noticeable loss in power but keeps the engine running.

FUEL SYSTEM COMPONENT LOCATION EDC

1. Vehicle speed sensor

2. No. 4 injector sensor

3. Coolant temperature sensor

4. Boost pressure sensor

5. Electro-pneumatic modulator

6. Airflow sensor

7. Engine speed sensor

8. Brake/clutch switches

9. Injector pump

10. Throttle position sensor

11. Engine control module

DESCRIPTION AND OPERATION

Tdi

DESCRIPTION AND OPERATION

FUEL SYSTEM

FUEL SYSTEM LAYOUT EDC

1. Fuel injection pump

2. Fuel temperature sensor

3. Air temperature sensor

4. Water temperature sensor

5. No. 4 injector sensor

6. Air flow sensor

7. Engine speed sensor

8. Boost pressure sensor

9. Vehicle speed sensor

10. Clutch switch

11. Brake switch

12. Throttle position sensor

13. Electro-pneumatic modulator

14. Exhaust gas recirculation (EGR) valve

15. Engine control module (ECM)

16. Diagnostic indicator

A. To turbo

B. To air box.

C. To ’T’ piece on brake servo hose position

D. Solenoid operated valve energization timing device.

E. Fuel cut off

F. Actuator current

G. Control collar

DESCRIPTION AND OPERATION

Tdi

OPERATION EDC

Under start up conditions, signals from the crank speed and water temperature sensors are relayed to the ECM to control starting fuel quantity and injection timing. Once the engine has started the ECM initiates a ’closed loop’ monitoring system for fuel quantity, injector timing and EGR relative to the appropriate engine operating conditions.

As driver demand increases, signals from the throttle position sensor are received by the ECM together with crank speed and position pulses. The ECM signals the injection pump to adjust fuel quantity and timing relative to driver demand.

As engine coolant, fuel and air temperature changes the ECM will correct fuel delivery and injection timing for more efficient and accurate running. The ECM will also make corrections for atmospheric pressure on injection timing and EGR.

Electronic Control Unit (ECM)

The EDC system is controlled by the ECM located in the drivers footwell on the ’A’ post beneath the fascia.

The unit consists of a microprocessor with integrated circuits and components and is connected to the main harness by a 55 pin plug.

Inputs to the ECM from engine sensors control start of injection, injected fuel quantity, fuel cut-off and EGR.

The ECM will also make corrections for engine coolant, fuel and air temperature and atmospheric pressure.

Injection pump

The injection pump incorporates actuator controlled injected fuel quantity and solenoid operated timing which operate in response to ECM signals against driver demand, engine speed, temperature and boost pressure.

A fuel cut-off facility and fuel temperature sensor is incorporated in the pump.

Injection timing sensor

An inductive sensor in No 4 injector body monitors needle movement. This forms part of a ’closed loop’ system to control start of injection.

The system measures timing, relating the needle movement signal to crank position (determined by flywheel pulses from the engine speed sensor).

Air flow sensor

The Air Flow Sensor is mounted on a bracket attached to the wheel arch valance, and connected by hose to the air cleaner and turbo charger inlet.

The unit consists of a flap valve airflow sensor which measures the fresh air flow into the engine. The sensor informs the ECM and, provided that the other conditions are met, will implement EGR.

Engine speed sensor

The engine speed sensor is an active inductive sensor mounted on the flywheel housing. Pulses from the sensor activated by radial slots in the flywheel give engine speed and position information to the ECM.

DESCRIPTION AND OPERATION

FUEL SYSTEM

Vehicle speed sensor

The vehicle speed sensor is located on the transfer box behind the transmission brake. The unit has a multirole as the vehicle electronic speedometer sensor and as a sensor for ’surge damping’, (a function which smooths out engine response to sharp accelerator movement and reduces vehicle ’bucking’).

The sensor is an additional input for engine overheat protection.

Brake and clutch switches

The brake and clutch switches are located on the pedal box and serve as safety features to the system.

They return information to the ECM which limits maximum fuel quantity under braking.

Throttle position sensor

The accelerator pedal is connected directly to a sensor mounted in the pedal box. Driver demand is relayed back to the ECM to increase or decrease injected fuel quantity.

Incorporated in the sensor is a backup idle switch which the system will default to in the event of sensor failure.

Boost pressure sensor

The boost pressure sensor is mounted on the bulkhead. It relays boost pressure information to the

ECM which compensates fuel quantity to reduce smoke during acceleration.

Electro-pneumatic modulator

The electro-pneumatic modulator is located on the inner wing just forward of the air cleaner. It regulates vacuum signals from the source to the EGR valve.

The ECM controls the modulator to open the EGR valve according to required airflow.

Exhaust gas recirculation valve

The EGR valve is located on the engine exhaust manifold and is controlled by vacuum from the electro-pneumatic modulator.

Once open the EGR valve directs a quantity of exhaust gas back into the inlet manifold to be burnt inside the engine. This reduces NOx (Oxides of nitrogen) emissions of the engine.

Temperature sensors

Water, Fuel and Air temperature sensors monitor engine conditions and relay their information back to the ECM which makes adjustments to injected fuel quantity, injection timing, EGR and corrections to measured boost pressure and airflow.

DESCRIPTION AND OPERATION

THROTTLE CABLE

Adjust

Tdi

EGR THROTTLE POSITION SENSOR

Check

1. Run engine until normal operating temperature is reached.

1. Loosen throttle cable adjustment ferrule.

2. Hold throttle lever in fully closed position.

3. Adjust outer cable, by rotating ferrule, to give

1.57 mm (0.062 in) of free play in the inner cable.

4. Check that throttle opens fully when the throttle is depressed.

2. Switch off engine and disconnect sensor multiplug.

3. Connect an Ohmmeter across pins 1 and 3 of multiplug. Ohmmeter should read between 1K and 1.05K ohms.

4. Connect an Ohmmeter across pins 1 and 2 of multiplug. Ohmmeter should read between 850 and 900 ohms.

5. If the readings are correct, EGR throttle position sensor is Ok - reconnect multiplug.

6. Loosen 2 Torx screws securing sensor.

7. Rotate sensor to achieve correct Ohmmeter readings, then tighten Torx screws.

8. Re-check Ohmmeter readings, then reconnect multiplug.

ADJUSTMENT

FUEL SYSTEM

LOW AND HIGH IDLE SPEED

Adjust

The high idle speed (cold start idle) is automatically set by the setting of the low idle speed and can not be adjusted individually.

1. Check and adjust throttle cable.

2. Start engine and run it until normal operating temperature is reached.

3. Using a suitable tachometer, check the engine idle speed.

See ENGINE TUNING DATA,

Information, 300 Tdi Engine

CHECK TURBOCHARGER BOOST PRESSURE

For boost pressure.

See ENGINE TUNING DATA,

Information, 300 Tdi Engine

4. If adjustment is necessary, loosen the locknut on the injector pump.

5. Turn the adjustment screw either clockwise to increase the engine speed or anti-clockwise to decrease the speed. Run the engine at an increased speed for a few seconds then check the idle speed again.

6. When the correct speed has been achieved, hold the adjuster screw steady while tightening the locknut.

NOTE: The low idle speed control is the only permitted adjustment in service. Any additional adjustments required must be entrusted to authorised Bosch agents.

1. Disconnect, from turbocharger, hose to actuator.

Insert into a suitable "T" piece.

2. Connect a short length of suitable hose to turbocharger and connect other end to "T" piece.

3. Connect a further length of hose to third leg of the "T" piece and other end to a pressure gauge capable of reading in excess of 61 cm Hg. The pressure gauge hose must be capable of reaching passenger compartment so that gauge may be observed.

4. To check maximum boost pressure, drive vehicle normally but in such a manner that full throttle can be maintained whilst climbing a hill with engine speed held steady between 2,500 and 3,000 rev/min.

ADJUSTMENT

Tdi

TANK SENDER UNIT

Service repair no - 88.25.32

WARNING: Ensure that the WARNINGS and FUEL HANDLING PRECAUTIONS given in Section 01 are adhered to before carrying out the following operations.

Special tool - LST131

Remove

1. Disconnect battery negative lead.

2. Remove the rear carpet retainer.

3. Ease the carpet from under the lower trim panels at the rear of the fold down seats.

4. Raise the carpet to expose the sound insulation.

5. Fold back the sound insulation to reveal the access panel.

6. Remove the securing screws and detach the access panel from the floor.

7. Disconnect the multi-plug from sender unit.

8. Disconnect the fuel pipes from the sender unit.

9. Using special tool LST131 remove the locking ring and withdraw the sender unit from the fuel tank.

Refit

10. Fit the sender unit to the fuel tank and secure with the locking ring. Tighten to

45 to 50 Nm.

11. Connect the fuel pipes to the sender unit.

12. Connect multi-plug to sender unit.

13. Inspect the access panel seal to ensure that it is satisfactory for further use, renew as necessary.

14. Fit the access panel to the aperture in the floor and secure with the screws.

15. Reverse removal procedure. 1 to 5. Refit the sound insulation and carpet.

REPAIR

FUEL SYSTEM

THROTTLE CABLE

Service repair no - 19.20.06

Remove

1. Disconnect battery negative lead.

INTAKE HOSE TURBOCHARGER

Service repair no - 19.42.11

Remove

1. Disconnect battery negative lead.

2. Remove pin and clevis pin securing throttle cable to throttle lever.

3. Pull ferrule from abutment bracket and withdraw throttle cable.

4. Release throttle cable from clip on bulkhead.

5. Remove pin and clevis pin securing throttle cable to throttle lever.

6. Release grommet from bulkhead.

7. Withdraw throttle cable from engine compartment.

Refit

8. Reverse removal procedure. Use new pins to secure clevis pins.

9. Adjust throttle cable.

See Adjustment,

Throttle Cable

2. Loosen clip and disconnect intake hose from turbocharger.

3. Loosen clip and disconnect breather hose from intake hose.

4. Remove clip and disconnect hose from air cleaner, discard clip.

5. Remove intake hose

Refit

6. Reverse removal procedure. Use a new clip to secure intake hose to air cleaner.

REPAIR

Tdi

TURBOCHARGER OIL FEED PIPE

Service repair no - 19.42.14

Remove

1. Disconnect battery negative lead.

2. Remove exhaust front pipe.

See MANIFOLD

AND EXHAUST SYSTEM, Repair, Manifold and Exhaust System - Tdi

TURBOCHARGER OIL DRAIN PIPE

Service repair no - 19.42.12

Remove

1. Disconnect battery negative lead.

2. Remove exhaust front pipe.

See MANIFOLD

AND EXHAUST SYSTEM, Repair, Manifold and Exhaust System - Tdi

3. Remove banjo bolt securing oil feed pipe to turbocharger, discard 2 sealing washers.

4. Unscrew union, disconnect oil feed pipe from cylinder block.

CAUTION: Plug the connections.

5. Move oil feed pipe from behind turbocharger and remove.

Refit

6. Reverse removal procedure. use new sealing washers.

7. Tighten banjo bolt to

20 Nm.

8. Check/top-up engine oil level.

3. Unscrew union and disconnect oil drain pipe from cylinder lock.

4. Remove 2 bolts securing oil drain pipe to turbocharger.

5. Remove oil drain pipe, remove and discard gasket.

CAUTION: Plug the connection.

Refit

6. Ensure mating surfaces of oil pipe, turbocharger and engine block are clean.

7. Reverse removal procedure. Use a new gasket.

8. Tighten oil drain pipe to turbocharger bolts to

Nm.

9. Check/top-up engine oil level.

REPAIR

FUEL SYSTEM

TURBOCHARGER ACTUATOR

Service repair no - 19.42.31

Remove

1. Remove exhaust manifold and turbocharger.

See MANIFOLD AND EXHAUST SYSTEM,

Repair, Exhaust Manifold - Tdi

TURBOCHARGER AND GASKET

Service repair no - Turbocharger - 19.42.01

Service repair no - Gasket - 19.42.25

Remove

1. Disconnect battery negative lead.

2. Remove air cleaner assembly.

See Air Cleaner

3. Remove exhaust manifold assembly.

See

MANIFOLD AND EXHAUST SYSTEM, Repair,

Exhaust Manifold - Tdi

2. Remove 2 nuts securing the actuator to the turbocharger bracket.

3. Release clip and disconnect hose from actuator.

4. Remove and discard clip securing control lever to wastegate spindle.

5. Remove turbocharger actuator.

Refit

6. Fit the replacement actuator and secure with nuts.

7. Push the control lever as far as possible towards the actuator and apply pressure to keep the lever in this position.

8. Pressurise the actuator to 57 - 62 cm Hg and hold this pressure.

complete lever in or out will change the calibration with the possibility of damaging engine boost.

CAUTION: Use only the threaded end of the lever to make adjustments. Forcing the

9. Screw the lever in either direction until the eye on the end will locate easily over the wastegate spindle and secure with a new clip.

10. Release the pressure and tighten the locknut.

11. Refit exhaust manifold and turbocharger.

See

MANIFOLD AND EXHAUST SYSTEM, Repair,

Exhaust Manifold - Tdi

4. Remove and discard clip securing control lever to wastegate spindle.

5. Remove 4 bolts and 2 clamp plates securing turbocharger to exhaust manifold.

6. Remove turbocharger and discard gaskets.

Refit

7. Clean mating faces of turbocharger and exhaust manifold.

8. Reverse removal procedure. Use new clip to secure control lever to wastegate spindle.

Tighten to

45 Nm.

9. Check/top-up engine oil level.

REPAIR

FUEL LIFT PUMP

Service repair no - 19.45.09

Remove

Tdi

Refit

7. Clean mating faces of fuel lift pump and engine block.

8. Using a new gasket, fit fuel pump, ensure correct location of lever with camshaft. Fit securing bolts. Tighten to

25 Nm.

9. Connect fuel hoses to pump and secure unions.

Tighten to

33 Nm.

10. Fit injector pipes to injectors and injection pump, and secure unions. Tighten to

28 Nm.

1. Loosen unions securing fuel injection pipes to injectors and injector pump. Remove injection pipes.

2. Plug the connections to prevent the ingress of foreign material.

3. Loosen unions and disconnect fuel supply and feed hoses from fuel lift pump.

4. Plug the connections to prevent the ingress of foreign material.

5. Remove 2 bolts securing lift pump to engine block.

6. Remove fuel lift pump and discard gasket.

REPAIR

FUEL SYSTEM

FUEL FILTER ELEMENT

Service repair no - 19.25.07

Remove

1. Disconnect battery negative lead.

2. Clean area around filter head.

3. Place a suitable container beneath filter bowl to collect any spillage.

INTERCOOLER

Service repair no - 19.42.15

Remove

1. Disconnect battery negative lead.

4. Loosen bleed screw.

5. Loosen drain tap, allow fuel to drain into container.

6. Unscrew filter element, discard element.

Refit

7. Clean seal and seating in filter head.

8. Lubricate filter element seal with fuel.

9. Position filter element to filter head and hand tighten.

10. Reconnect battery negative lead.

11. Crank engine until fuel is drawn through the system and starts.

2. Release 2 clips securing fan cowl to radiator top cover.

3. Remove 4 bolts securing radiator top cover, remove top cover.

4. Remove nut, bolt and washers securing intercooler side cover bracket to bonnet [hood] platform.

5. Release bracket from side cover lug, position bracket and power steering reservoir aside.

6. Position side cover away from intercooler.

7. Loosen 2 clips and disconnect top hose from intercooler.

8. Loosen 2 clips and disconnect bottom hose from intercooler.

REPAIR

Tdi

GLOW PLUGS

Service repair no - 19.60.31

Remove

1. Disconnect battery negative lead.

No.1 glow plug - air conditioning models

2. Release drive belt from compressor pulley.

See

ENGINE, Repair, Drive Belt Renew

9. Move intercooler upwards and clear of fan cowl.

Refit

10. Ensure locatiing lug grommets are fitted and in good condition.

11. Ensure foam pad is in good condition and attached to intercooler.

12. Move intercooler into position.

13. Reverse removal procedure.

3. Remove 4 bolts securing compressor to front cover, move compressor aside.

No.3 glow plug

4. Remove bolt securing Hummel valve, withdraw valve, remove and discard ’O’ ring.

REPAIR

FUEL SYSTEM

All glow plugs

EGR VALVE

Service repair no - 19.45.01

Remove

5. Remove terminal nut from glow plug, disconnect wire from glow plug terminal.

6. Remove glow plug.

Refit

7. Clean glow plug and seating.

8. Coat threads of glow plug with suitable anti-seize compound operational to a temperature of

1000

9. Fit glow plug. Tighten to

23 Nm.

10. Connect wire to glow plug terminal and secure with nut.

NOTE: Feed wire must be connected to

No. 4 glow plug terminal.

1. Disconnect multiplug from EGR valve.

2. Disconnect vacuum pipe from EGR valve.

3. Remove 2 Allen screws securing EGR valve to exhaust manifold.

4. Remove 2 bolts securing hose to EGR valve.

5. Remove EGR valve and discard gaskets.

Refit

6. Clean mating faces of EGR valve and exhaust manifold.

7. Reverse removal procedure. Tighten bolts to

Nm.

11.

No. 3 glow plug: Lubricate new ’O’ ring with engine oil and fit to Hummel valve. Fit valve and secure with bolt. Tighten to

15 Nm.

No. 1 glow plug - air conditioning models

12. Position compressor to front cover, fit bolts.

Tighten to

25 Nm.

13. Fit drive belt to compressor pulley and adjust tension.

See ENGINE, Repair, Drive Belt

Renew

All models

14. Reconnect battery negative lead.

REPAIR

GLOW PLUG CONTROL UNIT

Service repair no - 19.60.33

Remove

1. Disconnect battery negative lead.

Tdi

EGR CONTROL UNIT

Service repair no - 19.45.06

Remove

2. Remove nut and bolt securing control unit to mounting bracket.

3. Disconnect multiplug and remove control unit.

Refit

4. Reverse removal procedure.

1. Release 2 glovebox stays from fascia and pivot glovebox fully downwards.

2. Remove 2 plastic nuts securing control unit to body.

3. Release control unit from fixings.

4. Disconnect multiplug and remove control unit.

Refit

5. Reverse removal procedure.

REPAIR

FUEL SYSTEM

EGR THROTTLE POSITION SENSOR

Service repair no - 19.30.14

Remove

INJECTORS

Service repair no - 19.60.10

Remove

1. Remove 2 screws securing sensor mounting plate to injection pump.

2. Disconnect sensor multiplug from harness.

3. Remove sensor assembly.

Refit

4. Position sensor assembly on injection pump and fit and tighten screws.

5. Connect multiplug.

6. Adjust sensor.

See Adjustment, EGR Throttle

Position Sensor

1. Remove oil filler cap and remove sound deadening pad from top of engine.

2. Remove high pressure pipe from relevant injector and injection pump.

3. Disconnect spill return hose(s) from injector.

4. Plug pipes and injector connections to prevent the ingress of dirt and foreign matter.

5. Remove nut securing injector clamp plate to cylinder head.

6. Remove injector.

Refit

7. Reverse removal procedure. Renew copper washer on injector. Tighten injector clamp plate nut to

25 Nm.

REPAIR

Tdi

FUEL INJECTION PUMP AND TIMING

Service repair no - 19.30.07

NOTE: The following text refers to a Tdi vehicle with a manual gearbox without electronic diesel control. Where reference is made to the timing tool substitute the following information for automatic and EDC variants.

If manual gearbox: Timing tool LRT-12-044 fits into the base of the flywheel housing

If manual gearbox with EDC: Timing tool

LRT-12-085 must be used and also fits into the base of the flywheel housing.

If automatic gearbox: Timing tool LRT-12-044 fits into the larger bolt hole of coverplate on engine backplate, sited near to the rear of sump. Pin locates in ring gear.

8. Continue rotating crankshaft clockwise until centre pin engages with timing slot in flywheel.

9. Remove injection pump access plate, complete with gasket, from front cover plate.

10. Fit pin from LRT-12-045 to injection pump gear.

Remove

1. Disconnect battery negative lead.

2. Remove injection pipes, pump to injector.

3. Remove oil filler cap from rocker cover.

4. Viewing valve mechanism through filler aperture, turn crankshaft clockwise until No. 1 cylinder is just before TDC.

5. Refit oil filler cap.

6. Remove blanking plug from flywheel housing.

7. Fit timing tool LRT-12-044 to flywheel housing, do not engage centre pin.

11. Remove drive gear to pump hub fixing bolts and plate.

REPAIR

FUEL SYSTEM

12. Remove pin from pump gear.

15. Disconnect stop control solenoid connector.

16. Remove banjo bolts securing spill return, main fuel and boost signal pipes, refit banjo bolts after disconnecting pipes.

13. Fit gear retaining tool LRT-12-045 with an 8 mm washer, 1.5 to 2 mm thick, under each bolt head in addition to the existing washer.

14. Remove throttle cable and hand throttle cable if fitted.

17. Remove pump mounting bracket bolts 2 off.

18. Loosen pump support bracket bolts to block, sufficient for bracket to just move.

19. Remove pump securing nuts at flange and withdraw pump and gasket.

20. Fit blanks to pipe connections.

REPAIR

Tdi

Refit

21. Remove blanks from pump.

22. Remove special tool pin from pump.

23. Clean mating faces of pump and front cover.

24. Fit pump to cover with a new gasket and secure with nuts. Tighten to

25 Nm.

25. Attach pump to bracket and finger tighten nuts and bolts

26. First tighten bolts securing bracket to block and then bolts securing pump to bracket.

27. Connect spill return, main fuel pipes. Tighten to

25 Nm.

28. Connect boost signal pipe and secure with banjo bolts. Tighten to

10 Nm.

29. Connect stop control solenoid lead.

30. Connect throttle cable and where applicable hand throttle cable.

31. Remove special tool LRT-12-045.

32. Fit gear lock plate.

33. Fit pin from special tool LRT-12-045.

34. Secure gear with bolts.

35. Remove special tool pin.

36. Turn crankshaft two complete revolutions, check timing pin from LRT-12-045 can be fully and easily inserted into the pump. At the same time check flywheel timing pin LST-12-044 can also be inserted in the flywheel slot.

37. If, with the flywheel timing pin located, the timing pin cannot be inserted cleanly into the injection pump, carry out the following:

(a) Ensure flywheel timing pin is disengaged from slot in flywheel.

(b) Turn the crankshaft the small amount necessary to enable the timing pin to be inserted into the pump.

(d) Turn the crankshaft to T.D.C..

(e) Check that the timing pin is an easy fit in the pump and that the flywheel timing pin locates.

(f) Tighten the pump gear retaining bolts to the correct torque.

(g) Remove the timing pin from the pump and the timing tool from the flywheel housing.

38. Using antisieze compound, fit the blanking plug to flywheel housing. Tighten to

12 Nm.

39. Fit access plate with gasket to front cover plate.

Tighten to

25 Nm.

40. Refit injector pipes. Tighten to

29 Nm.

REPAIR

FUEL SYSTEM

ENGINE CONTROL MODULE (ECM)

Service repair no - 18.30.03

Remove

NOTE: The ECM is not a serviceable item, in the event of failure it must be renewed.

1. Disconnect battery negative lead.

2. Remove ’A’ post trim pad.

AIRFLOW METER

Service repair no - 18.30.15

NOTE: The air flow meter is not a serviceable item, in the event of failure it must be renewed.

Remove

1. Disconnect battery negative lead.

3. Loosen multi-plug screw to ECM.

4. Disconnect multi-plug from ECM.

5. Secure multi-plug and harness aside.

6. Remove retaining nuts from ECM.

7. Manoeuvre ECM from its mounted position.

Refit

8. Refitting is the reverse of removal procedure.

9. Reconnect harness plug. Ensure plug is pushed firmly into location and retaining clip secures plug in position.

10. Tighten screw securing multi-plug.

2. Release vacuum tube from EGR vacuum capsule.

3. Disconnect airflow meter multi-plug.

4. Loosen air cleaner hose to air flow meter retaining clip.

5. Disconnect hose from airflow meter.

6. Loosen turbo charger hose to airflow meter retaining clip.

7. Disconnect hose from airflow meter.

8. Remove meter to mounting bracket bolts.

9. Remove airflow meter.

Refit

10. Reverse removal procedure. Ensure multi-plug is firmly reconnected and hose clamps are securely tightened to prevent unmetered air entering the engine.

REPAIR

Tdi

BOOST PRESSURE SENSOR

Service repair no - 18.30.63

Remove

1. Disconnect battery negative lead.

2. Disconnect sensor multi-plug.

3. Disconnect spill return pipe to injector.

4. Disconnect injector union.

2. Disconnect sensor multi-plug.

3. Disconnect pressure tube union.

4. Retrieve and discard union copper washers.

5. Place pressure tube aside.

6. Remove sensor to mounting bracket bolts.

7. Remove sensor.

Refit

8. Renew all copper washers.

9. Reverse removal procedure.

INJECTION TIMING SENSOR

Service repair no - 18.30.64

Remove

1. Disconnect battery negative lead.

5. Remove copper washers.

6. Remove injector clamp fixing.

7. Remove clamp.

8. Remove injector.

9. Remove injector copper washers.

Refit

10. Renew all copper washers.

11. Reverse removal procedure.

12. Check for leaks when running.

REPAIR

FUEL SYSTEM

ENGINE SPEED SENSOR

Service repair no - 18.30.65

Remove

1. Disconnect battery negative lead.

2. Disconnect sensor multi-plug.

3. Place vehicle on ramp and apply handbrake.

4. Raise ramp.

5. Remove sensor retaining nut.

6. Remove sensor from housing.

7. Clean housing mating faces.

Refit

8. Reverse removal procedure.

REPAIR

Tdi

VEHICLE SPEED SENSOR

Service repair no - 18.30.22

Remove

NOTE: The following procedure is carried out with the ramp still raised.

1. Disconnect battery negative lead.

CLUTCH PEDAL SWITCH

Service repair no - 18.30.67

Remove

1. Disconnect battery negative lead.

2. Disconnect sensor multi-plug.

3. Remove sensor retaining screw.

4. Remove sensor retaining plate.

5. Remove sensor from transfer box.

Refit

6. Reverse removal procedure.

2. Disconnect switch wiring lucars.

3. Turn rear body of switch to release locknut

4. Remove locknut.

5. Remove switch from mounting bracket.

Refit

6. Reverse removal procedure.

REPAIR

FUEL SYSTEM

BRAKE PEDAL SWITCH

Service repair no - 18.30.66

Remove

1. Disconnect battery negative lead.

COOLANT TEMPERATURE SENSOR

Service repair no - 18.30.68

Remove

1. Disconnect battery negative lead.

2. Disconnect switch wiring Lucars.

3. Loosen rear locknut.

4. Remove front locknut.

5. Remove switch from mounting bracket.

Refit

6. Reverse removal procedure.

2. Disconnect sensor multi-plug.

3. Remove sensor.

4. Clean off water spillage from sensor area.

Refit

5. Fit a new copper washer.

6. Fit sensor and tighten securely.

7. Refill cooling system.

8. Run engine, check for water leaks around sensor.

REPAIR

Tdi

THROTTLE POSITION SENSOR

Service repair no - 18.30.17

NOTE: The throttle position sensor is not a serviceable item, in the event of failure it must be renewed.

Remove

1. Disconnect battery negative lead.

2. Disconnect multiplug from sensor.

ELECTRO-PNEUMATIC MODULATOR

Service repair no - 18.30.69

Remove

1. Disconnect battery negative lead.

3. Remove nut securing throttle pedal quadrant to sensor. Remove throttle pedal quadrant.

4. Remove two screws securing sensor to pedal box.

5. Remove sensor.

Refit

6. Reverse removal procedure.

track.

CAUTION: DO NOT operate throttle mechanism while sensor is loosely fitted, damage may be caused to sensor wiper

2. Disconnect multi-plug from modulator.

3. Remove three vacuum pipes from modulator.

4. Remove nut securing modulator to inner wing.

5. Remove modulator.

Refit

6. Reverse removal procedure.

REPAIR

MFI

DESCRIPTION

Hot Wire Multiport Fuel Injection

The ’Hot Wire’ Multiport fuel injection system derives its name from the mass air flow sensor which uses one cold wire and one electrically heated wire to measure the volume of air entering the engine.

The function of the system is to supply the exact amount of fuel directly into the intake manifold according to the prevailing engine operating conditions.

To monitor these conditions, various sensors are fitted to the engine to measure engine parameters. Data from the sensors is received by the Engine control module (ECM), the ECM will then determine the exact amount of fuel required at any condition.

The ECM having received data from the sensors produces pulses, the length of which will determine the simultaneous open time of each bank of injectors in turn, which will govern the amount of fuel injected.

Engine control module - ECM

The Multiport fuel injection system is controlled by the

14 CUX Engine Control Module comprising of a microprocessor with integrated circuits and components mounted on printed circuit boards. The

ECM is connected to the main harness by a 40 pin plug.

Injectors

The eight fuel injectors are fitted between the pressurized fuel rail and inlet manifold. Each injector comprises a solenoid operated needle valve with a movable plunger rigidly attached to the nozzle valve.

When the solenoid is energized the plunger is attracted off its seat and allows pressurized fuel into the intake manifold.

Engine coolant temperature sensor

The engine coolant temperature sensor is located in the front of the thermostat housing. The sensor provides engine coolant information to the ECM. The

ECM increases the injector opening time when cold to provide improved driveability, and reduces the opening time as the engine reaches normal operating temperature.

Engine fuel temperature sensor

The engine fuel temperature sensor is located in the rail on the RH side of the ram housing. The sensor sends fuel temperature data to the ECM, the ECM on receiving the data will adjust the injector open time accordingly to produce good hot starting in high ambient temperatures.

Idle air control valve

The idle air control valve is screwed into a housing attached to the rear of the plenum chamber, between the plenum chamber and bulkhead. The idle air control valve has two windings which enable the motor to be energised in both directions thus opening or closing the air valve as required by the ECM.

The idle air control valve will open and allow extra air into the plenum chamber to maintain engine idle speed when the engine is under increased (Electrical and Mechanical) loads.

The idle air control valve will control engine idle speed when the vehicle is stationary.

Heated oxygen sensors (0

2 vehicles sensors) - Catalyst

The two heated oxygen sensors are located forward of the catalysts mounted in the exhaust downpipes.

The sensors monitor the oxygen content of the exhaust gases and provide feedback information of the air/fuel ratio to the ECM. Each sensor is heated by an electrical element to improve its response time when the ignition is switched on.

DESCRIPTION AND OPERATION

FUEL SYSTEM

Fuel pressure regulator

The fuel pressure regulator is mounted in the fuel rail at the rear of the plenum chamber. The regulator is a mechanical device controlled by plenum chamber vacuum, it ensures that fuel rail pressure is maintained at a constant pressure difference of 2.5

bar above that of the manifold.

When pressure exceeds the regulator setting excess fuel is returned to the fuel tank.

Fuel pump

The electric fuel pump is located in the fuel tank, and is a self priming ’wet’ pump, the motor is immersed in the fuel within the tank.

Air flow sensor

The hot-wire air flow sensor is mounted on a bracket attached to the left hand valance, rigidly connected to the air cleaner and by hose to the plenum chamber inlet neck.

The air flow sensor consists of a cast alloy body through which air flows. A proportion of this air flows through a bypass in which two wire elements are situated: one is a sensing wire and the other is a compensating wire. Under the control of an electronic module which is mounted on the air flow sensor body, a small current is passed through the sensing wire to produce a heating effect. The compensating wire is also connected to the module but is not heated, but reacts to the temperature of the air taken in, as engine intake air passes over the wires a cooling effect takes place.

The electronic module monitors the reaction of the wires in proportion to the air stream and provides output signals in proportion to the air mass flow rate which are compatible with the requirements of the

ECM.

Throttle position sensor

The throttle position sensor is mounted on the side of the plenum chamber inlet neck and is directly coupled to the throttle butterfly shaft.

The throttle position sensor is a resistive device supplied with a voltage from the ECM. Movement of the accelerator pedal causes the throttle valve to open, thus rotating the wiper arm within the throttle position sensor which in turn varies the resistance in proportion to the valve position. The ECM lengthens the injector open time when it detects a change in output voltage (rising) from the throttle position sensor.

In addition the ECM will weaken the mixture when it detects the throttle position sensor output voltage is decreasing under deceleration and will shorten the length of time the injectors are open.

When the throttle is fully open, the ECM will detect the corresponding throttle position sensor voltage and will apply full load enrichment. This is a fixed percentage and is independent of temperature. Full load enrichment is also achieved by adjusting the length of the injector open time.

When the throttle is closed, overrun fuel cut off or idle speed control may be facilitated dependant on other inputs to the ECM.

The throttle position sensor is ’self adaptive’, which means that adjustment is not possible. It also means the throttle position sensor setting is not lost, for example, when throttle stop wear occurs.

CAUTION: Do not attempt to adjust throttle position sensor.

DESCRIPTION AND OPERATION

MFI

Tune select resistor -

To suit individual market requirements a tune select resistor is connected across pins 5 and 27 of the

ECM.

It is located adjacent to the ECM, and strapped to the

MFI cable assembly. The value of the resistor is dependent on the market application:

Red wire, 180 ohms, Australia, Rest of world.

Green wire, 470 Ohms, UK and Europe - non catalyst.

Yellow wire 910 Ohms, Saudi non catalyst.

White wire, 3K9 Ohms, European catalyst

Condenser fans

It should be noted that under high coolant temperatures, when the engine is switched off, the condenser fans will be activated and will run for approximately ten minutes.

Vehicle speed sensor

The vehicle speed sensor is located on the side of the

Transfer box adjacent to the parking brake. The sensor provides road speed data to the ECM. The

ECM in turn detects vehicle movement from the road speed input and ensures that idle air control mode is disengaged. Should the vehicle speed sensor fail in service the ECM idle air control would become erratic.

The sensor also provides road speed data to the electric speedometer and cruise control ECU.

Inertia fuel shutoff switch

The inertia fuel shutoff switch is a mechanically operated switch, located on the bulkhead adjacent to the washer reservoir under bonnet [hood].

The switch is normally closed and is in line with the fuel pump. In the event of a sudden impact the switch opens, and disconnects the electrical feed to the fuel pump. The switch is reset by pressing down the button.

WARNING: Check the integrity of the fuel system before the inertia switch is reset.

Relay modules

The two multiport fuel injection relays are located in the RH footwell area behind the ’A’ post panel. The main relay module is energized via the ECM when the ignition is switched on and supplies current to the multiport fuel injection system. The fuel pump relay module is energized by the ECM which in turn operates the fuel pump to pressurize the fuel system.

DESCRIPTION AND OPERATION

FUEL SYSTEM

ENGINE MOUNTED COMPONENTS

1. By-pass air valve (stepper motor).

2. Fuel pressure regulator.

3. Air flow meter.

4. Throttle potentiometer.

5. Fuel temperature sensor.

6. Coolant temperature sensor.

7. Fuel injector.

DESCRIPTION AND OPERATION

CHASSIS MOUNTED COMPONENTS

1. Fuel filter.

2. Fuel pump (in fuel tank).

MFI

DESCRIPTION AND OPERATION

FUEL SYSTEM

BODY MOUNTED COMPONENTS

1. Engine control module (ECM).

2. Main relay and fuel pump relay.

3. Inertia switch.

4. Ignition coil.

5. Charcoal canister.

6. Purge control valve.

DESCRIPTION AND OPERATION

MFI

MICRO PROCESSOR POWER CHECK

(Instrument binnacle - Service use only)

As part of the engine starting procedure, this symbol will illuminate momentarily.

FUEL INJECTION SYSTEM

CAUTION: The fuel system incorporates fine metering components that would be affected by any dirt in the system; therefore it is essential that working conditions are scrupulously clean. If it is necessary to disconnect any part of the fuel injection system, the system MUST be depressurized. All openings left open after the removal of any component from the fuel system, MUST be sealed off to prevent ingress of dirt.

ENGINE SETTING PROCEDURE

If a major overhaul has been undertaken of the fuel injection/engine system, the following check and adjustments must be carried out before attempting to start the engine.

1. Spark plug gaps.

See ENGINE TUNING DATA,

Information, Engine 3.9 V8i

2. Ignition timing.

See ELECTRICAL,

Adjustment, Ignition Timing

CAUTION: Catalyst vehicle - if the engine is misfiring, it should be immediately shut down and the cause rectified. Failure to do so will result in irreparable damage to the catalysts.

NOTE: If the previous checks and adjustments are satisfactory but the engine will not start, the ignition and fuel injection electrical circuits must be checked using the appropriate recommended equipment.

DESCRIPTION AND OPERATION

MFI

ENGINE TUNING

Circuit fault diagnosis may be carried out on all V8i vehicles, using Testbook. Testbook will guide the operator by visual prompts through a series of diagnostic checks.

Before commencing any fault diagnosis, the following preminary checks must be carried out.

Preliminary checks

CAUTION: Catalyst exhaust: If engine is misfiring or fails to start within 12 seconds the cause must be rectified. Failure to do so will result in irreparable damage to the catalysts. After rectification the engine must be run at 1500 rev/min (no load) for 3 minutes to purge any accumulation of fuel in the system.

1. Check that the inertia fuel shut off switch is not tripped.

2. Check fuse in main fuse panel.

3. Check for ample fuel in tank.

4. Check air inlet system for possible leaks into the intake manifold.

5. Check HT cables for correct firing order and routing.

6. Check ignition timing.

Only when the above checks have been carried out, should circuit diagnosis begin.

See Electrical

Trouble Shooting Manual.

INJECTOR TESTS

NOTE: Before removing any of the injectors, remove and examine the spark plugs, check for consistent colouration of plugs. A leaking injector will result in the appropriate spark plug being ’sooted up’.

The following test may only be carried out using suitable injector test equipment.

Leak Test

Leak test with the injectors closed but pressurise to

2.54 Kgf/cm

. No injector should leak more than 2 drops of fuel per minute.

Fuel Delivery Test

Fuel delivery test with the injector open and pressurised as above, fuel delivery from each injector should be 160-175cc per minute using white spirit, or

180-195cc per minute using petrol at 20

FAULT DIAGNOSIS

FUEL SYSTEM

BASE IDLE SPEED SETTING

NOTE: Base idle speed is set at factory. It should not require further adjustment unless plenum chamber is changed. The adjustment screw is sealed with a plug to prevent unauthorised alteration. Check ignition timing before attempting following procedure, since this will affect idle speed.

Equipment required

Two blanking hoses. these are manufactured using a new air by-pass valve hose - Part No.ETC7874. Cut two equal pieces 90mm long from hose and seal one end of each, using 13mm diameter bar. Use a suitable clamp to ensure an air tight seal.

Checking procedure

1. Drive vehicle at least two miles until engine and transmission are hot. Switch off engine.

2. Check all electrical loads are OFF, including air conditioning.

3. Remove air by-pass valve hose.

5. Start engine and check idle speed is within limits.

See ENGINE TUNING DATA,

Information, Engine 3.9 v8i

Adjusting base idle speed

6. Drill tamper proof plug and insert a self tapping screw to enable plug to be extracted.

7. Start engine, adjust idle screw clockwise to decrease or counter-clockwise to increase idle speed.

8. Stop engine, remove blanking hoses. Reconnect hose to plenum.

9. Fit new tamper proof plug.

4. Fit blanking hoses to both plenum chamber and air by-pass valve. Ensure hoses are securely fitted to prevent air leaks. Note throttle cable and cruise control actuator have been omitted from illustration.

FAULT DIAGNOSIS

MFI

FUEL PRESSURE CHECK

In order to check the fuel pressure it is necessary to first depressurise the fuel system as follows:

WARNING: Under normal operating conditions the multiport fuel injection system is pressurised by a high pressure fuel pump, operating at up to 2.3 to 2.5 bar. When engine is stationary pressure is maintained within system. To prevent pressurised fuel escaping and to avoid personal injury it is necessary to depressurise multiport fuel injection system before any service operations are carried out.

If vehicle has not been run there will be a small amount of residual pressure in fuel line. The depressurising procedure must still be carried out before disconnecting any component within the fuel system.

The spilling of fuel is unavoidable during this operation. Ensure that all necessary precautions are taken to prevent fire and explosion.

1. Remove fuel pump relay module.

See Repair,

Multiport Fuel Injection Relay

2. Start and run engine.

3. When sufficient fuel has been used to cause fuel line pressure to drop, injectors will become inoperative, resulting in engine stall. Switch off ignition.

4. Disconnect battery negative lead. .

NOTE: Fuel at low pressure will remain in system. To remove low pressure fuel, place absorbent cloth around fuel pipe at the filter during disconnection.

5. Connect the pressure gauge on the outlet from the filter, located on the chassis under the right rear wheel arch.

6. Reconnect the battery and turn the ignition to position II while observing the pressure gauge.

Results

Expected reading 2,39-2,672 kgf/cm

Pressure drop-max 0.7 kgf/cm

2 in one minute.

If pressure is low check that filter is not blocked and pump is operating satisfactorily. Then recheck pressure. If pressure is still low renew regulator.

See Repair, Fuel Pressure

Regulator

A Pressure gauge 18G1500

B Fuel tank and pump

C Fuel filter

D Fuel injectors x 8

E Regulator

FAULT DIAGNOSIS

AIR CLEANER ASSEMBLY

Service repair no - 19.10.01

Remove

MFI

AIR CLEANER ELEMENT

Service repair no - 19.10.08

Remove

1. Release four clips retaining air cleaner cover.

2. Release two clips to air flow meter.

3. Remove air cleaner cover, retain air flow meter

’O’ring.

4. Remove element.

3.9 V8 vehicle illustrated

1. Release 2 clips securing air cleaner to air flow sensor.

2. 3.9 V8 only: Release clip and disconnect hose from air cleaner.

4.0 V8 only: Release clip and disconnect multiplug from intake air temperature sensor.

See FUEL SYSTEM SFI, Repair, Intake Air

Temperature Sensor

3. From below wheel arch, release 2 rubber mountings securing bottom of air cleaner to body.

4. Slide air cleaner backwards and release from mounting bracket.

5. Remove air cleaner assembly.

Do not carry out further dismantling if component is removed for access only.

6. Release 4 clips securing top of air cleaner and remove.

7. Withdraw air cleaner element and discard.

8. 4.0 V8 only: Remove intake air temperature sensor from cover.

9. Remove rubber mountings.

Refit

10. Fit rubber mountings to new body.

11. 4.0 V8 only: Fit intake air temperature sensor to new cover. Tighten to

8Nm.

12. Fit new air cleaner element and secure in position.

13. Reverse removal procedure.

NOTE: Pull rubber mountings from below to secure unit to wheel arch.

Refit

5. Fit new element.

6. Fit O ring.

7. Position air cleaner cover, secure two clips to air flow meter.

8. Secure four air cleaner cover clips.

REPAIR

FUEL SYSTEM

AIR FLOW SENSOR

Service repair no - 19.22.25

Remove

NOTE: The air flow sensor is not a serviceable item. In event of failure or damage the complete unit must be replaced.

1. Disconnect battery negative lead.

2. Release intake hose clamp, disconnect from sensor.

3. Disconnect multi-plug.

4. Release two clips securing air cleaner to air flow sensor. Remove sensor from engine compartment.

THROTTLE POSITION SENSOR

Service repair no - 19.22.49

Remove

1. Disconnect battery negative lead.

2. Disconnect multi-plug from harness.

3. Remove two screws securing sensor to plenum chamber and carefully pull sensor off throttle shaft.

Refit

5. Reverse removal procedure. Ensure multi-plug is firmly reconnected, and hose clamp at the rear of sensor is securely tightened, to prevent unmetered air entering engine.

4. Remove old gasket.

Refit

5. Fit new gasket.

6. Align sensor and shaft flats, slide sensor on to throttle shaft. Secure sensor to plenum chamber.

CAUTION: DO NOT operate throttle mechanism while throttle position sensor is loosely fitted, damage may be caused to throttle position sensor wiper track.

REPAIR

IDLE AIR CONTROL VALVE

Service repair no - 19.22.54

Remove

1. Disconnect battery negative lead.

2. Disconnect multi-plug.

3. Unscrew valve from rear plenum chamber.

4. Remove washer.

MFI

VEHICLE SPEED SENSOR

Service repair no - 88.30.14

The vehicle speed sensor is located in the LH side of the transfer box.

Remove

1. Place vehicle on lift, apply parking brake.

2. Disconnect battery negative lead.

3. Raise lift, disconnect multiplug from vehicle speed sensor.

4. Remove screw securing sensor to transfer box.

5. Remove vehicle speed sensor

Refit

5. Fit NEW sealing washer.

NOTE: If same idle air control valve is being refitted clean sealing compounds from threads. Apply Loctite 241 to threads of valve before reassembly.

6. Tighten valve to

20 Nm.

7. Reverse removal procedure.

Refit

6. Reverse removal procedure.

REPAIR

FUEL SYSTEM

MULTIPORT FUEL INJECTION RELAYS

Service repair no - 19.22.08

The two Multiport fuel injection relays are located in the RH footwell area behind the ’A’ post trim panel.

The fuel injection relays can be identified as follows:

A. Fuel pump relay - Blue base

B. Main relay - Black base

ENGINE CONTROL MODULE (ECM)-14 CUX

Service repair no - 19.22.34

Remove

NOTE: The ECM is not serviceable, in event of unit failure it must be replaced.

1. Remove the fascia right-hand closing panel.

2. Remove the right-hand footwell side panel trim.

3. Disconnect battery negative lead.

4. Release ECM plug retaining clip.

5. Maneouvre the front of the plug (in the direction of the bold arrow) and detach the other end of the plug from the retaining peg.

6. Release the two screws securing the ECM to the right-hand footwell side panel.

7. Withdraw the ECM from the clip.

Remove

1. Release front door seal from ’A’ post.

2. Remove lower ’A’ post trim panel.

3. Pull relay from base.

Refit

4. Reverse removal procedure.

Refit

8. Refit the ECM securely in the clip and fit the two screws.

9. Reconnect the ECM harness plug. Ensure that the plug is pushed firmly into its location and that the retaining clip secures the plug in position.

10. Reverse removal procedure.

REPAIR

MFI

INERTIA FUEL SHUTOFF SWITCH

Service repair no - 18.30.35

The inertia fuel shutoff switch is located on the bulkhead next to the washer reservoir under bonnet

[hood].

Remove

1. Disconnect battery negative lead.

2. Disconnect multiplug from inertia switch.

3. Remove 2 screws securing inertia switch to mounting bracket.

4. Remove inertia switch.

ENGINE FUEL TEMPERATURE SENSOR

Service repair no - 19.22.08

Remove

NOTE: Fuel leakage will not occur when sensor is removed from fuel rail, therefore system.

it is not necessary to depressurise the fuel

1. Disconnect battery negative lead.

2. Disconnect multi-plug from sensor.

3. Release sensor from fuel feed rail.

Refit

5. Position inertia switch to mounting bracket and secure with screws.

6. Connect multiplug to inertia switch.

7. Reconnect battery negative lead.

Refit

4. Reverse removal procedure. Ensure sensor is tightened securely in fuel rail.

REPAIR

FUEL SYSTEM

ENGINE COOLANT TEMPERATURE SENSOR

Service repair no - 19.22.18

Remove

1. Position drain tray to collect coolant spillage.

2. Disconnect multiplug from coolant sensor.

3. Remove sensor from thermostat housing.

4. Remove and discard copper washer.

Refit

5. Fit a new copper washer.

6. Fit sensor and tigten securely.

7. Top-up cooling system.

8. Run engine, check for water leaks around sensor.

DEPRESSURISING FUEL SYSTEM

WARNING: Under normal operating conditions the Multiport fuel injection system is pressurised by a high pressure fuel pump, operating at up to 2.3 to 2.5 bar When engine is stationary pressure is maintained within system. To prevent pressurised fuel escaping and to avoid personal injury it is necessary to depressurise multiport fuel injection system before any service operations are carried out.

The spilling of fuel is unavoidable during this operation. Ensure that all necessary precautions are taken to prevent fire and explosion.

1. Remove fuel pump relay module.

See

Multiport Fuel Injection Relays

2. Start and run engine.

3. When sufficient fuel has been used to cause fuel line pressure to drop, injectors will become inoperative, resulting in engine stall. Switch off ignition.

4. Disconnect battery negative lead.

NOTE: Fuel at low pressure will remain in system. To remove low pressure fuel, place absorbent cloth around fuel feed hose at fuel rail.

5. Disconnect either: a) Nut and olive at fuel rail

OR b) Hose at inlet end of fuel filter.

Refit

6. Refit fuel feed hose.

7. Refit fuel pump relay module, reconnect battery.

8. Crank engine (engine will fire in approximately 6 to 8 seconds).

REPAIR

MFI

FUEL PRESSURE REGULATOR

Service repair no - 19.45.06

Remove

1. Depressurise fuel system.

See Depressurising

Fuel System

2. Disconnect battery negative lead.

3. Remove plenum chamber.

See Plenum

Chamber

4. Release clip and disconnect fuel return hose from regulator.

5. Disconnect vacuum hose from regulator.

6. Remove 2 bolts securing pressure regulator to fuel rail.

7. Release regulator from fuel rail and withdraw.

8. Remove and discard ’O’ ring.

FUEL RAIL-INJECTORS R/H AND L/H

Service repair no - 19.60.04 - Rail

Service repair no - 19.60.01 - Injectors

Remove

1. Depressurise fuel system.

See Depressurising

Fuel System

2. Disconnect battery negative lead.

3. Remove plenum chamber.

See Plenum

Chamber

4. Remove ram housing.

See Ram Housing

NOTE: Place cloth over ram tube openings to prevent ingress of dirt.

5. Loosen clip and disconnect fuel return hose from regulator.

6. Loosen union and disconnect fuel supply hose from fuel rail.

7. Disconnect multi-plug from fuel temperature sensor.

8. Disconnect multi-plugs from injectors.

9. Remove four bolts securing fuel rail support brackets to intake manifold. Lay injector harnesses to one side.

Refit

9. Lightly coat ’O’ ring with silicon grease 300 and fit to regulator.

10. Reverse removal procedure.

11. Reconnect battery and pressurise fuel system.

Check there are no fuel leaks around regulator connections.

REPAIR

FUEL SYSTEM

10. Remove fuel rail and injectors.

11. Remove injector retaining clips, ease injectors from rail. Remove and discard ’O’ rings from injectors.

12. Remove fuel pressure regulator if required.

Refit

13. Fit NEW ’O’ rings, to injectors. Lightly coat ’O’ rings with silicon grease 300. Insert injectors into fuel rail, multi-plug connections facing outwards.

14. Refit retaining clips.

CAUTION: Care must be taken when refitting the fuel rail and injectors to intake manifold to prevent damage to ’O’ rings.

15. Fit a NEW ’O’ ring to pressure regulator lightly coat ’O’ ring with silicon grease 300 and secure regulator to the fuel rail.

16. Fit fuel rail and heater pipe assemblies to intake manifold. Secure rail and pipes in position with five bolts.

17. Reverse removal procedure. 2 to 7.

18. Pressurise fuel system and check for fuel leaks around injectors and pressure regulator.

PLENUM CHAMBER

Service repair no - 19.22.46

Includes throttle levers and throttle disc

Remove

1. Disconnect battery negative lead.

2. Disconnect electrical multi-plug from bypass air valve.

3. Disconnect vacuum hose adjacent to bypass air valve.

4. Mark an identification line on throttle cable outer to assist re-assembly.

5. Remove clevis pin from throttle cable.

6. Pry adjustment thumb wheel from throttle bracket. Lay cable aside.

7. Remove retaining clip and clevis pin from kick down cable (automatic vehicles).

8. Apply adhesive tape behind rear adjustment nut on kick down cable to prevent nut moving.

9. Remove front lock nut. Remove cable and lay aside.

10. Remove cruise control vacuum hose.

11. Remove intake hose from neck of plenum chamber.

12. Disconnect throttle position sensor multi-plug.

13. Remove PCV breather hose.

14. Disconnect two coolant hoses and plug each hose to prevent excessive loss of coolant.

Identify each hose for re-assembly.

REPAIR

15. Remove distributor vacuum hose.

16. Release two screws and remove throttle position sensor.

17. Remove six screws securing plenum chamber.

Remove plenum chamber.

18. Remove air idle air control valve hose.

MFI

Throttle lever assembly - remove

19. If fitted - unclip cruise control actuator link. Hold throttle fully open, release link from countershaft assembly. Carefully return lever assembly to close throttle.

20. Release tension on inboard throttle spring.

21. Bend back lock washer tabs.

22. Hold throttle stop lever in closed position, release nut from throttle shaft.

23. Release tension on outboard throttle spring.

24. Remove overtravel spring.

REPAIR

FUEL SYSTEM

KEY

1. Spherical bush/housing

2. Retaining clips (2)

3. Countershaft assembly

4. Overtravel spring

5. Throttle shaft nut

6. Throttle return spring (2)

7. Tab washer

8. Throttle stop lever

9. Throttle bracket assembly

10. Pop rivets (2)

REPAIR

MFI

25. Remove three bolts securing throttle bracket to plenum chamber, withdraw bracket assembly.

26. Remove tab washer and throttle stop lever from throttle shaft.

31. Grease new bush with Admax L3 or Energrease

LS3. Assemble bush into housing. Assemble to throttle bracket using two 4.7 mm (3/16 in) diameter domed head rivets.

32. Examine bearing surface of countershaft assembly. If worn fit new assembly, otherwise wind throttle return spring off levers.

Throttle lever assembly - inspect and overhaul

27. Remove two retaining clips from spherical bush.

28. Remove the countershaft assembly.

29. If spherical bush worn, drill out two securing rivets (4,7 mm, (3/16 in) diameter drill).

30. Split assembly, discard worn bush.

33. Wind new spring onto countershaft assembly, small hooked end of spring is wound on first.

34. Grease shaft with Admax L3 or Energrease LS3, fit countershaft assembly to spherical bearing, secure with two clips.

35. Examine throttle stop lever for wear, fit a new lever if necessary.

REPAIR

FUEL SYSTEM

Throttle disc - inspect and overhaul

36. Examine throttle shaft for excessive wear between bushes in plenum chamber and shaft.

A small amount of clearance is permissible. If excessive wear is evident fit new shaft and bushes as follows.

37. Remove two split screws securing throttle disc and withdraw disc.

CAUTION: Take care not to damage shaft.

39. Using suitable drift, drive out bushes.

CAUTION: Take care not to damage plenum chamber bores

40. Press in new bushes until flush with throttle disc bore.

CAUTION: Ensure that bushes do not protrude into bore, as they will interfere with movement of throttle disc.

38. Remove shaft and air seal from plenum chamber.

41. Fit throttle shaft and disc, secure with two split screws. Do not fully tighten screws.

42. Rotate throttle shaft 360˚ once or twice to centralise disc in bore. Tighten split screws.

43. Rotate shaft. Use screw driver to spread split.

REPAIR

MFI

44. Grease new air seal with Admax L3 or

Energrease LS3. Push seal down shaft, into counterbore until seal is 6.0 mm (0.236 in) below face of plenum.

Throttle levers and bracket - assemble

45. Fit stop lever to throttle shaft, a new tab washer and secure with throttle shaft nut.

46. Holding stop lever on stop, tighten throttle shaft nut securely, bend over tabs to lock nut in position.

47. Fit inboard throttle return spring noting that small hooked end of spring is nearest plenum.

48. Locate hooked end of inboard spring on stop lever. Wind up straight end one full turn and locate in appropriate slot.

49. Fit countershaft to interconnecting nut of throttle valve shaft.

50. Secure throttle bracket assembly to plenum.

Secure with three retaining bolts.

51. Ensure hooked end of outboard spring is retained by lever, wind spring up one full turn and locate free end in appropriate slot.

52. Fit overtravel spring.

Lightly grease throttle return and overtravel springs with Admax L3 or Energrease LS3.

53. Using a depth vernier or depth micrometer, check dimension from mouth of bore to top and bottom of valve disc. Dimension must be within

0.5 mm (0.019 in) total indicator reading across diameter of disc.

54. If dimension is out of limits, adjust small set screw below stop lever.

Refit

55. Reconnect and adjust cruise control actuator link.

See Actuator Link Setting

56. Clean joint faces of plenum and ram housing.

Apply ’Hylomar’ sealant, refit plenum chamber.

Tighten bolts to

26 Nm.

57. Reverse removal procedure.

bore.

NOTE: If new throttle levers have been fitted, minimum throttle setting of disc must be checked to ensure it is 90˚ to

REPAIR

FUEL SYSTEM

RAM HOUSING

Service repair no - 19.70.04

Remove

1. Disconnect battery negative lead.

2. Remove plenum chamber.

See Plenum

Chamber

3. Release hoses from ram housing.

4. Remove six through bolts (with plain washers) securing ram housing to intake manifold.

INTAKE MANIFOLD

Service repair no - 30.15.08

Remove

1. Depressurise fuel system.

See Depressurising

Fuel System

2. Disconnect battery negative lead.

3. Drain cooling system.

See COOLING SYSTEM,

Repair, Radiator

4. Remove plenum chamber.

See Plenum chamber

5. Remove ram housing.

See Ram Housing

CAUTION: Place a protective cover over intake manifold openings to prevent the ingress of dirt.

6. Disconnect the fuel temperature sensor and injector multiplugs.

7. Remove fuel pressure regulator.

See Fuel

Pressure Regulator

5. Remove ram housing from intake manifold.

6. Place a protective cover over inlet bores to prevent ingress of dirt.

Refit

7. Clean all mating faces.

8. Apply ’Hylomar’ sealant to intake manifold face.

9. Fit ram housing. Tighten bolts, working from two centre bolts, diagonally towards outer four bolts.

10. Tighten to

26 Nm.

8. Disconnect multiplug from coolant temperature sensor.

9. Disconnect instrument pack temperature thermistor.

10. Disconnect coolant sensor multiplug.

REPAIR

MFI

11. Loosen clip and disconnect top hose from thermostat housing.

12. Disconnect multiplug from distributor amplifier module.

13. Loosen clip and disconnect hose from heater valve.

14. Remove injector harnesses from behind fuel rail and lay to one side.

15. Loosen union and disconnect fuel return hose from fuel rail.

NOTE: The intake manifold can be removed from the cylinder block without removing the fuel rail and injectors.

16. Using the sequence shown, remove 12 bolts securing the intake manifold to cylinder block.

17. Remove the intake manifold.

18. Noting their fitted position, remove bolts and clamps securing intake manifold gasket to cylinder block.

19. Remove and discard gasket.

20. Remove and discard gasket seals.

Do not carry out further dismantling if component is removed for access only.

21. Remove 5 nuts securing fuel rail support brackets to intake manifold.

22. Remove fuel rail and injectors.

23. Remove 2 bolts securing thermostat housing to intake manifold.

24. Remove thermostat housing.

25. Remove bolt securing coolant pipe to intake manifold. Loosen union and remove coolant pipe. Remove and discard ’O’ ring.

26. Fit new ’O’ ring to coolant pipe. Position coolant pipe to intake manifold. Fit bolt securing coolant pipe support bracket to intake manifold and tighten pipe union.

27. Clean mating faces of thermostat housing and intake manifold.

28. Fit thermostat housing to intake manifold using a new gasket, fit and tighten bolts.

29. Position fuel rail to intake manifold, fit and tighten retaining bolts.

REPAIR

FUEL SYSTEM

Refit

1. Clean mating faces of cylinder heads, cylinder block and intake manifold.

2. Locate NEW seals in position with ends engaged in notches formed between the cylinder heads and block.

3. Apply RTV sealant between ends of seals, cylinder head and block.

4. Fit intake manifold gasket with the word

’FRONT’ to the front and open bolts hole to the front RH side.

5. Fit gasket clamps and tighten bolts finger tight.

9. Tighten the gasket clamp bolts to

18 Nm.

10. Reverse removal procedure.

11. Fill cooling system.

See COOLING SYSTEM,

Repair, Radiator

12. Start engine check for water and fuel leaks.

6. Locate intake manifold onto cylinder heads, clean threads of manifold securing bolts.

7. Allow 10 minutes for RTV sealant to cure.

8. Fit manifold bolts finger tight. Working in the sequence shown tighten the bolts to

38 Nm.

REPAIR

MFI

FUEL FILTER

Service repair no - 19.25.02

Remove

WARNING: Spilling of fuel is unavoidable during this operation. Ensure all necessary precautions are taken to prevent fire and explosion.

WARNING: Ensure fuel handling precautions given in Section 01 -

Introduction are strictly adhered to when carrying out following instructions.

1. Depressurise fuel system.

See Depressurising

Fuel System

2. Access to filter is gained through right hand rear wheel arch.

3. Clean area around hose connections to prevent ingress of foreign matter into fuel system. Clamp inlet and outlet hoses to prevent fuel spillage when disconnecting hoses.

4. Loosen two fuel line unions and remove hoses.

Plug ends of hoses to prevent ingress of dirt.

5. Release securing bolt and bracket and remove filter from chassis side member.

Refit

6. Fit a new filter observing direction of flow arrows stamped on canister.

7. Tighten securing nut and bolt.

8. Fit inlet and outlet hoses. Tighten to

30Nm.

9. Refit fuel pump relay module, reconnect battery.

10. Start engine and inspect for fuel leaks around hose connections.

REPAIR

FUEL SYSTEM

FUEL PIPES

Service repair no - 19.40.92

WARNING: Depressurise fuel system.

See

Depressurise Fuel System before disconnecting any fuel pipes ensure that all necessary precautions are taken against fuel spillage

WARNING: Ensure fuel handling precautions given in Section 01 introduction are strictly adhered to when carrying out following instructions.

KEY

1. Fuel feed hose to fuel rail.

2. Fuel return hose to fuel tank.

3. Rigid fuel feed pipe.

4. Rigid fuel return pipe.

5. Fuel filter.

6. Rigid fuel feed pipe to filter.

7. Breather hose.

8. In-tank fuel pump.

9. Fuel filler neck.

10. Fuel tank.

REPAIR

MFI

THROTTLE CABLE

Service repair no - 19.20.06

Remove

1. Remove clevis pin securing cable to lever.

2. Carefully pry throttle cable adjustment nut out of mounting bracket.

3. Remove cable from mounting bracket.

4. Release outer cable from retaining clips in engine compartment.

5. Remove lower dash panel.

6. Disconnect cable from accelerator pedal and release cable locknut.

7. Feed cable through bulkhead grommet into engine compartment.

Refit

8. Feed new cable from engine compartment through bulkhead grommet.

9. Connect cable to accelerator pedal.

10. Connect cable to throttle linkage, using a new cotter pin.

11. Clip outer cable adjustment nut into mounting bracket.

12. Adjust outer cable to give 1.57 mm free play in inner cable. Check throttle operation.

REPAIR

FUEL SYSTEM

ACCELERATOR PEDAL

Service repair no - 18.30.35

Remove

1. Remove lower dash panel.

2. Remove clevis pin securing throttle cable to accelerator pedal.

3. Release tension from pedal return spring.

4. Remove circlip from pedal pivot pin.

5. Withdraw pivot pin.

NOTE: It may be necessary to lower steering column to gain access to pivot pin circlip.

6. Remove accelerator pedal.

Refit

7. Lightly grease pivot and clevis pins.

8. Fit clevis pin using a NEW cotter pin.

9. Reverse removal procedure.

FUEL PUMP AND SENDER UNIT

Service repair no - 19.45.03

A plastic fuel tank with a combined fuel pump/sender unit is fitted. The fuel pump/sender unit is accessed through a panel in the load space floor.

Fuel pump/sender unit

WARNING: Ensure that fuel handling precautions given in Section 01 -

Introduction are strictly adhered to when carrying out following instructions.

CAUTION: Before disconnecting any part of fuel system, it is imperative that all dust, dirt and debris is removed from around components to prevent ingress of foreign matter into fuel system.

Service Tools:

LRT-19-001 wrench - pump retaining ring

LRT-19-002 ’Speedfit’ disconnector

Remove

1. Depressurise fuel system.

See Depressurising

Fuel System

2. Disconnect battery negative lead.

3. Syphon at least 9 litres (2 gallons) of fuel from fuel tank into a suitable container that can be sealed.

4. Remove carpet from loadspace floor and tailgate.

5. Fold back loadspace sound insulation to reveal access panel.

REPAIR

MFI

6. Remove access panel from floor.

7. Disconnect multi-plug from fuel sender unit.

8. Disconnect two fuel line unions from fuel pump.

9. Using service tool no. LRT-19-001, remove pump unit retaining ring. Withdraw unit from fuel tank.

WARNING: A quantity of fuel will be retained in body of unit, care must be taken to prevent fuel spillage when unit is removed.

Refit

10. Insert fuel pump into tank. Fit retaining ring.

Tighten to

48 Nm.

11. Connect fuel lines to pump.

12. Connect multi-plug to sender unit.

13. After assembly, check all fuel pipes, sealing rings and hose connections are secure.

14. Run engine to check for fuel leaks.

15. Inspect access panel seal, fit a new seal if necessary.

16. Fit access panel and tighten screws.

17. Reverse removal procedure. 4 - 5. Fit insulation and carpet.

REPAIR

FUEL SYSTEM

FUEL TANK

Service repair no - 19.55.01

WARNING: Ensure that fuel handling precautions given in Section 01 introduction are strictly adhered to when carrying out following instructions.

CAUTION: Before disconnecting any part of fuel system, it is imperative that all dust, dirt and debris is removed from around components to prevent ingress of foreign matter into fuel system.

Remove

1. Depressurise fuel system. Disconnect battery negative lead.

2. Syphon fuel tank into a suitable container that can be sealed afterwards.

ENSURE TANK IS DRAINED COMPLETELY.

(refer to Warning concerning fuel vapour and spillage at start of procedure).

3. Remove carpet loadspace floor and tailgate.

4. Fold back sound insulation to reveal access panel.

10. Remove tank filler and vent hoses at fuel tank.

11. Remove nut and bolt securing right hand side fuel tank strap.

12. Disconnect evaporative control pipe at green end of ’speedfit’ connector.

5. Remove access panel.

6. Disconnect electrical multi-plug.

7. Disconnect two fuel line unions from fuel pump.

8. Working underneath vehicle mark location of anti-roll [sway] bar straps.

9. Remove rear anti-roll [sway] bar straps, and allow bar to swing down clear of tank.

NOTE: To disconnect ’speedfit’ connector, insert forked end of LRT-19-002 into slots of connector see illustration. Press down on collet and simultaneously pull pipe from connector.

REPAIR

13. Remove back two bolts and nut plates securing fuel tank cradle.

14. Remove front nuts, bolts and washers. Remove fuel tank cradle.

15. With assistance, tilt right hand side of tank upwards and manoeuvre tank through chassis to remove.

Refit

16. Reverse removal procedure. Ensuring sealing ring, fuel pipe and hose connections are secure.

17. Run engine, check all connections for fuel leaks.

MFI

REPAIR

MFI

TORQUE VALUES

NOTE: Torque wrenches should be regularly checked for accuracy to ensure that all fixings are tightened to the correct torque.

Air-Bypass valve (stepper motor) ...............................................................

All flexible hose securing clamps ...............................................................

Fuel feed pipe - hose to fuel rail .................................................................

1,3

Fuel filter ....................................................................................................

EVAPORATIVE LOSS CONTROL SYSTEM

All flexible hose securing clamps ...............................................................

1,7

METRIC

...........................................................................

M8 ...........................................................................

M10 .........................................................................

M12 .........................................................................

M14 .........................................................................

M16 .........................................................................

105

180

UNC / UNF

1/4 ...........................................................................

5/16 .........................................................................

3/8 ...........................................................................

7/16 .........................................................................

1/2 ...........................................................................

5/8 ...........................................................................

136

NOTE: Torque values above are for all screws and bolts used except for those specified.

SPECIFICATIONS, TORQUE

FUEL SYSTEM

MFI

LRT-19-004 Test equipment fuel pressure

18G 500

LRT-19-003 MFI pressure test adaptor

LST 143

LRT-19-002 Connector splitter

LST 144

LRT-19-001 Fuel pump remover

LST 131

SERVICE TOOLS

SFI

ENGINE MANAGEMENT SYSTEM

Description

The engine management system (EMS) maintains optimum engine performance over the entire operating range. The correct amount of fuel is metered into each cylinder inlet tract and the ignition timing is adjusted at each spark plug.

The system is controlled by the ENGINE CONTROL

MODULE (ECM) which receives data from sensors located on and around the engine. From this information it provides the correct fuel requirements and ignition timing at all engine loads and speeds.

The fuel injection system uses a hot wire Mass Air

Flow Sensor to calculate the amount of air flowing into the engine.

The ignition system does not use a distributor. It is a direct ignition system (DIS), using four double ended coils. The circuit to each coil is completed by switching inside the ECM.

The on board diagnostic system detects any faults which may occur within the EMS. Fault diagnosis includes failure of all EMS sensors and actuators, emissions related items, fuel supply and exhaust systems.

The system incorporates certain default strategies to enable the vehicle to be driven in case of sensor failure. This may mean that a fault is not detected by the driver. The fault is indicated by illumination of the malfunction indicator light (MIL) on North American specification vehicles.

A further feature of the system is ’robust immobilisation’.

Crankshaft position sensor (CKP Sensor)

The crankshaft position sensor is the most important sensor on the engine. It is located in the left hand side of the flywheel housing and uses a different thickness of spacer for manual and automatic gearboxes. The signal it produces informs the ECM:

- the engine is turning

- how fast the engine is turning

- which stage the engine is at in the cycle.

As there is no default strategy, failure of the crankshaft sensor will result in the engine failing to start. The fault is indicated by illumination of the malfunction indicator light (MIL) on North American specification vehicles.

Camshaft position sensor (CMP Sensor)

The camshaft position sensor is located in the engine front cover. It produces one pulse every two revolutions. The signal is used in two areas, injector timing corrections for fully sequential fuelling and active knock control.

If the camshaft sensor fails, default operation is to continue normal ignition timing. The fuel injectors will be actuated sequentially, timing the injection with respect to top dead centre. Injection will either be correct or one revolution out of synchronisation. The fault is not easily detected by the driver. The fault is indicated by illumination of the malfunction indicator light (MIL) on North American specification vehicles.

Mass air flow sensor (MAF Sensor)

The ’hot wire’ type mass air flow sensor is mounted rigidly to the air filter and connected by flexible hose to the plenum chamber inlet. The sensing element of the

MAF Sensor is a hot wire anenometer consisting of two wires, a sensing wire which is heated and a compensating wire which is not heated. Air flows across the wires cooling the heated one, changing its resistance. The ECM measures this change in resistance and calculates the amount of air flowing into the engine.

As there is no default strategy, failure will result in the engine starting, and dying when it reaches 550 rev/min, when the ECM detects no MAF Sensor signal. The fault is indicated by illumination of the malfunction indicator light (MIL) on North American specification vehicles.

DESCRIPTION AND OPERATION

FUEL SYSTEM

ENGINE MANAGEMENT SYSTEM COMPONENT

LOCATION - PRE ADVANCED EVAPS

1. Engine control module

2. Ignition coils

3. Fuel pressure regulator

4. Mass air flow sensor

5. Relay module

- Main relay

- Fuel pump relay

6. Engine coolant temperature sensor

7. Camshaft position sensor

8. Throttle position sensor

DESCRIPTION AND OPERATION REV: 09/95

SFI

1. EVAP purge valve

2. Inertia switch

3. Engine fuel temperature sensor

4. Crankshaft position sensor

5. Oxygen sensor (4 off)

6. Injectors

7. Idle air control

8. Knock sensors (2 off)

9. Intake air temperature sensor

DESCRIPTION AND OPERATION

FUEL SYSTEM

Throttle position sensor (TP Sensor)

The throttle position sensor is mounted on the plenum chamber and connected directly to the throttle shaft.

The sensor is a variable resistor, the signal from which (0 - 5V) informs the ECM of the actual position of the throttle disc. As there is no default strategy, failure of the sensor will result in poor idle and lack of throttle response. If failure occurs in the closed position the engine will only reach 1750 rev/min when the ECM will initiate overrun fuel cut off. The fault is indicated by illumination of the malfunction indicator light (MIL) on North American specification vehicles.

Engine coolant temperature sensor (ECT Sensor)

This sensor consists of a temperature dependant resistive metal strip. The resistance of the strip varies considerably with coolant temperature, i.e. from 28K ohms at - 30

C to 90 ohms at 130

C, and 300 Ohms at 85

C. The ECT Sensor signal is vital to engine running, as the correct fuelling is dependant upon engine temperature i.e. richer mixture at low temperatures. If the sensor is disconnected or failure occurs a default value will be supplied to the system.

The initial default value selected will be based on the value of the air intake temperature. This will increase to a nominal warmed up value over an individual time, programmed for each default value. The fault may not be evident to the driver, there may be a hot restart problem. The fault is indicated by illumination of the malfunction indicator light (MIL) on North American specification vehicles.

Intake air temperature sensor (IAT Sensor)

This is another resistive sensor, located in the body of the air cleaner. The resistance varies with changes in air temperature. The signal from the IAT Sensor is used to retard the ignition timing if the air temperature rises above 55

C. If the sensor is disconnected or failure occurs a default value will be supplied to the system. The default value selected will represent normal operating conditions. The fault may not be evident to the driver, there may be slight power loss in high ambient temperatures. The fault is indicated by illumination of the malfunction indicator light (MIL) on

North American specification vehicles.

DESCRIPTION AND OPERATION

SFI

Engine fuel temperature sensor (EFT Sensor)

This is another resistive sensor. Located on the fuel rail it measures temperature of the rail rather than the fuel. The resistance varies with changes in temperature. The signal is used to increase the injection pulse time when undergoing hot restarts.

When the fuel is hot, vapourisation occurs in the rail and bubbles can occur in the injectors. Increasing the pulse time flushes the bubbles away, and cools the fuel rail with fuel from the tank. The fault may not be evident to the driver, there may be a hot restart problem. The fault is indicated by illumination of the malfunction indicator light (MIL) on North American specification vehicles.

Knock sensors

The knock sensor produces an output voltage in proportion to mechanical vibration caused by the engine. A sensor is located in each cylinder bank between 2/4 and 3/5 cylinders. The ECM calculates if the engine is knocking due to camshaft and crankshaft sensor signals regarding the position of the engine in the cycle. The ECM can also work out exactly which cylinder is knocking and retards the ignition on that particular cylinder until the knock disappears. It then advances the ignition to find the optimum ignition timing for that cylinder. The ECM can adjust the timing of each cylinder for knock simultaneously. It is possible that all eight cylinders could have different advance angles at the same time.

If the camshaft sensor fails, the knock sensor will continue to work, but as the engine may be running one revolution out of sychronisation the ECM may retard the wrong cylinder of the pair e.g. 1 instead of

6. If the knock sensor fails engine knock will not be detected and corrected. The fault is indicated by illumination of the malfunction indicator light (MIL) on

North American specification vehicles.

Ignition coils

The electronic ignition system uses four double ended coils. They are mounted on a bracket fitted to the rear of the engine. The circuit to each coil is completed by switching within the ECM, allowing each coil to charge up and fire. Sparks are produced in two cylinders simultaneously, one on compression stroke, the other on exhaust stroke. Note that coil 1 feeds cylinders 1 and 6, coil 2 feeds cylinders 5 and 8, coil 3 feeds cylinders 4 and 7, and coil 4 feeds cylinders 2 and 3.

Due to the ease of combustion in the cylinder on the compression stroke, more energy is dissipated in that cylinder. Coil failure will result in a lack of sparks and misfire in the affected cylinders. The fault is indicated by illumination of the malfunction indicator light (MIL) on North American specification vehicles.

Injectors

A multiport fuel injection system (MFI) is used, one injector per cylinder. Each injector consists of a small solenoid which is activated by the ECM to allow a metered amount of fuel to pass into the combustion chamber. Due to the pressure in the fuel rail and the shape of the injector orifice, the fuel squirts into the cylinder in a fine spray to aid combustion. In the unlikely event of injector failure a misfire will occur as there will be no fuel to the affected cylinder. The fault is indicated by illumination of the malfunction indicator light (MIL) on North American specification vehicles.

REV: 09/95 DESCRIPTION AND OPERATION

FUEL SYSTEM

Idle air control (IAC)

Idle speed is controlled by a stepper motor which consists of two coils. When energised in the correct sequence the coils move a plunger which opens and closes the throttle bypass controlling the quantity of idle air. The stepper motor controls idle speed by moving the plunger a set distance called a step. Fully open is zero steps and fully closed 180 steps. Failure of the stepper motor will result in low or high idle speed, poor idle, engine stall or non start. The fault is indicated by illumination of the malfunction indicator light (MIL) on North American specification vehicles.

Heated oxygen sensor (HO2S)

The oxygen sensors consist of a titanium metal sensor surrounded by a gas permeable ceramic coating. Oxygen in the exhaust gas diffuses through the ceramic coating on the sensor, and reacts with the titanium wire altering the resistance of the wire. From this resistance change the ECM calculates the amount of oxygen in the exhaust gas. The injected fuel quantity is then adjusted to achieve the correct air/fuel ratio, thus reducing the emissions of carbon monoxide (CO), hydrocarbons (HC),and oxides of nitrogen (NO

). Two HO2 sensors are fitted, one in each exhaust downpipe just ahead of the catalyst.

Note that if the wiring to these sensors is crossed, the vehicle will start and idle correctly until the sensors reach operating temperature. Then the ECM will read the signals from them and send one bank of cylinders very rich and the other very weak. The engine will misfire, have a rough idle and emit black smoke, with possible catalyst damage.

In the event of sensor failure, the system will default to

’open loop’. Operation and fuelling will be calculated using signals from the remaining ECM inputs.

The fault is indicated by illumination of the malfunction indicator light (MIL). ECM diagnostics also uses HO2 sensors to detect catalyst damage, misfire and fuel system faults.

North American vehicles have two extra HO2 sensors mounted one after each catalyst. These are used to determine whether the catalysts are operating efficently.

CAUTION: Although robust within the vehicle environment, HO2 sensors are easily damaged by dropping, excessive heat and contamination. Care must be exercised when working on the exhaust system not to damage the sensor housing or tip.

DESCRIPTION AND OPERATION REV: 09/95

SFI

Fuel pressure regulator

The fuel pressure regulator is located at the rear of the engine in the fuel rail. It consists of a fuel inlet, outlet, vacuum port and internal diaphragm.

When the engine is under high manifold depression, the applied vacuum sucks the diaphragm of its seat, allowing fuel to return to the tank, resulting in a lower fuel pressure. This is necessary because the high depression will try to suck the fuel from the injector, resulting in overfuelling if the pressure remained constant. Failure will result in a rich mixture at idle but normal at full load, or a rich mixture resulting in engine flooding, or a weak mixture. Although the fault will not illuminate the MIL, faults caused by the failure may be indicated.

Relay module

The engine management system employs a relay module, which houses the main relay and the fuel pump relay.

Main relay

The main relay supplies the power feed to the ECM with a tap off to feed the fuel injectors (8 amps) and air flow sensor (4 amps). This relay is controlled by the engine management ECM. This enables the ECM to remain powered up after ignition is switched off.

During this ’ECM power down routine’ the ECM records all temperature readings and powers the stepper motor to the fully open position. Failure of this relay will result in the engine management ECM not being switched on resulting in engine not starting due to absence of fuel and ignition.

Fuel pump relay

The fuel pump relay is fed from the ignition relay and controlled by the engine management ECM. The relay is activated in ignition key position 2 to prime the fuel system for a period of time controlled by the ECM.

Failure of this relay will result in no fuel pressure.

Inertia switch

The inertia switch isolates the power supply to the fuel pump in the event of sudden deceleration. The inertia switch is located in the engine compartment. It is reset by depressing the central plunger at the top of the switch.

REV: 09/95 DESCRIPTION AND OPERATION

FUEL SYSTEM

ENGINE MANAGEMENT SYSTEM COMPONENT

LOCATION - ADVANCED EVAPS

1. Engine control module (ECM)

2. Ignition coils

3. Fuel pressure regulator

4. Mass air flow (MAF) sensor

5. Relay module

- Main relay

- Fuel pump relay

6. Engine coolant temperature (ECT) sensor

7. Camshaft position (CMP) sensor

8. Throttle position (TP) sensor

DESCRIPTION AND OPERATION ADD: 09/95

SFI

1. EVAP canister purge valve

2. EVAP canister vent solenoid (ECVS)

3. Inertia fuel shut-off (IFS)

4. Engine fuel temperature (EFT) sensor

5. Crankshaft position (CKP) sensor

6. Heated oxygen (HO2) sensor (4 off)

7. Fuel injectors

8. Idle air control valve (IACV)

9. Knock sensors (2 off)

10. Intake air temperature (IAT) sensor

ADD: 09/95 DESCRIPTION AND OPERATION

FUEL SYSTEM

DESCRIPTION AND OPERATION - ADVANCED

EVAPS

1. Fuel filter

2. Fuel pump and gauge sender unit

3. Fuel feed hose

4. Fuel return hose

5. Fuel filler neck assembly

Fuel Tank Assembly

The fuel tank consists of a moulded High Density

Polyethylene (HDPE) fuel cell into which is fitted an electric fuel pump and four roll-over valves. The pump is a self priming æwet" type where the motor is immersed in fuel. The pump assembly is sealed to the tank with a rubber seal and secured in place using a coated steel locking ring. The pump also incorporates a fuel tank pressure sensor in the top flange.

NOTE: If the pump is removed, a new seal must always be fitted.

DESCRIPTION AND OPERATION ADD: 09/95

SFI

Fuel Filler Neck Assembly

The filler neck consists of a stainless steel upper section and a convolute nylon lower section. The nylon lower is joined at one end to the tank and at the other to the stainless upper section where both joints utilise a short piece of rubber hose. The joint at the fuel tank is secured using a spring assisted hose clip which has a shear off cap.

NOTE: The spring assisted clip must never be re-used, if removed a new clip of the same type must be fitted.

Tank vent connections are achieved using serviceable plastic quickfit connectors. The filler cap is tethered to the body of the vehicle. Only a cap of this type must be used as a replacement.

Fuel Lines

The fuel lines consist of two coated steel lines fitted along the length of the chassis from the fuel pump at the rear of the vehicle to the connections at the fuel rail on the engine, via a fuel filter on the feed line.

Connections at the pump are metal quickfits, while those at the filter and fuel rail are threaded unions utilising "O" rings for effective sealing.

NOTE: When the fuel filter is serviced or the fuel rail joints are disconnected, new

"O" rings must always be fitted.

Connections at the fuel rail are made using "Saginaw" screw thread type connectors with "O" rings as the sealing medium. The fuel lines in the engine compartment are made from a braided nylon material.

NOTE: This material must not be clamped or kinked as this impairs its performance.

ADD: 09/95 DESCRIPTION AND OPERATION

ENGINE TUNING

Service repair no - 19.22.13

The position of the Idle Air Control (IAC) valve can be checked using TestBook and adjusted if necessary through the by-pass screw in the plenum chamber.

The bypass screw is covered by a tamper proof plug which can be extracted using a self tapping screw.

All vehicles:

1. Ensure air conditioning and all electical loads are off. Vehicle must be in neutral or park with air suspension in kneel and disabled.

2. Carry out tuning or base idle setting procedure as applicable using TestBook.

SFI

ADJUSTMENT

SFI

CAMSHAFT POSITION SENSOR (CMP SENSOR)

Service repair no - 19.22.07

Remove

1. Disconnect battery negative lead.

2. Raise vehicle on a ramp.

Refit

8. Clean sensor and mating face on front cover.

9. Lubricate NEW ’O’ ring and fit to sensor.

10. Engage CMP sensor in front cover location.

Secure with bolt. Tighten to

8 Nm.

11. Connect sensor multiplug and secure to bracket.

12. Lower ramp.

13. Reconnect battery negative lead.

3. Release sensor mutiplug from clip located on front cover.

4. Disconnect multiplug.

5. Remove bolt securing sensor.

6. Remove sensor from front cover.

7. Remove ’O’ ring from sensor and discard.

REPAIR

FUEL SYSTEM

ENGINE COOLANT TEMPERATURE SENSOR (ECT

SENSOR)

Service repair no - 18.30.10

Remove

1. Disconnect battery negative lead.

CRANKSHAFT POSITION SENSOR (CKP SENSOR)

Service repair no - 18.30.12

Remove

1. Disconnect battery negative lead.

2. Raise vehicle on ramp.

2. Remove spring clip and disconnect ECT sensor multiplug.

3. Position cloth around ECT sensor to absorb coolant spillage.

4. Remove ECT sensor.

5. Remove sealing washer and discard.

Refit

6. Clean sealing washer, sensor threads and sensor location.

7. Coat sensor threads with Loctite 577 and fit new sealing washer.

8. Fit ECT sensor. Tighten to

20 Nm.

9. Fit spring clip to multiplug and connect multiplug to ECT sensor.

10. Top up cooling system.

11. Run engine to normal operating temperature.

Check for leaks around ECT sensor.

3. Remove 2 bolts securing sensor/shield to engine backplate.

4. Remove sensor/shield.

5. Remove shield.

6. Disconnect sensor multiplug and remove sensor.

7. Remove spacer from sensor.

CAUTION: All vehicles have a spacer fitted to the sensor. Ensure spacer is correctly refitted.

Refit

8. Clean mating faces.

9. Fit spacer to sensor.

10. Position sensor and connect multiplug.

11. Position shield to sensor and align sensor/shield to engine backplate.

12. Fit bolts. Tighten to

6 Nm.

13. Lower ramp.

14. Reconnect battery negative lead.

REPAIR

FUEL SYSTEM - DEPRESSURISE

WARNING: Fuel pressure of up to 2.5 bar will be present in the system, even if the engine has not been run for some time.

Always depressurise the system before disconnecting any components in the fuel feed line (between fuel pump and pressure regulator).

The spilling of fuel is unavoidable during this operation. Ensure that all necessary precautions are taken to prevent fire and explosion.

NOTE: Fuel pressure can be relieved at fuel rail feed union or fuel filter unions.

1. Position cloth around relevant union to protect against fuel spray.

2. Carefully slacken union.

3. Tighten union to correct torque once pressure has relieved.

SFI

REPAIR

FUEL SYSTEM

ENGINE CONTROL MODULE (ECM)

Service repair no - 18.30.01

Remove

1. Disconnect battery negative lead.

MASS AIR FLOW SENSOR (MAF SENSOR)

Service repair no - 19.22.25

Remove

1. Disconnect battery negative lead.

2. Release and move washer reservoir aside.

See

WIPERS AND WASHERS, Repair, Washer

Reservoir

3. Remove 2 studs securing ECM cover.

4. Remove cover.

5. Disconnect 3 ECM multiplugs.

6. Remove 2 bolts securing ECM.

7. Release ECM from 2 lower retainers.

8. Remove ECM.

Refit

9. Reverse removal procedure.

NOTE: Ensure ECM is correctly located by lower retainers.

2. Loosen clip and disconnect intake hose from

MAF sensor.

3. Disconnect multiplug from MAF sensor.

4. Release 2 clips and remove MAF sensor from air cleaner.

5. Collect ’O’ ring seal.

Refit

6. Ensure mating faces of air cleaner, MAF sensor and intake hose are clean.

7. Fit ’O’ ring to MAF sensor.

8. Fit MAF sensor to air cleaner and secure with clips.

9. Connect multiplug to MAF sensor.

10. Connect intake hose and secure with clip.

CAUTION: Failure to connect intake hose securely will allow unmetered air to enter the engine, causing running problems.

11. Reconnect battery negative lead.

REPAIR

SFI

FUEL RAIL AND INJECTORS

Service repair no - 19.60.04 - Fuel Rail

Service repair no - 19.60.12 - Injectors

Remove

1. Disconnect battery negative lead.

2. Depressurise fuel system.

See Fuel System -

Depressurise

3. Release plenum chamber and place aside.

See

Plenum Chamber

6. Place small packing block on inlet manifold.

Lever between packing block and ram pipe housing to break seal.

CAUTION: Do not lever against fuel rail.

7. Remove ram housing.

8. Place cloth over inlet manifold to prevent ingress of foreign matter.

4. Disconnect purge hose, crankcase breather hose, servo vacuum hose and fuel regulator hose from ram housing.

5. Remove 6 bolts securing ram housing to inlet manifold.

9. Disconnect 8 injector multiplugs.

10. Disconnect fuel temperature sensor multiplug.

11. Position cloth around fuel feed pipe union to absorb fuel spillage.

12. Disconnect fuel feed pipe from fuel rail.

13. Plug fuel pipe and rail.

14. Slacken clip securing fuel return hose.

REPAIR

FUEL SYSTEM

15. Disconnect hose, plug return hose and rail.

Remove cloth.

16. Remove 6 nuts securing fuel rail and ignition coil bracket to inlet manifold.

17. Release ignition coil bracket from inlet manifold studs. Place aside.

18. Release fuel rail and injectors from inlet manifold.

Do not carry out further dismantling if component is removed for access only.

19. Remove fuel rail and injectors.

Refit

26. Ensure mating surfaces between inlet manifold and ram pipe housing are clean.

27. Ensure all locations in fuel rail and inlet manifold are clean.

28. Lubricate and fit new ’O’ rings to injectors and fuel pressure regulator.

29. Fit fuel pressure regulator to fuel rail. Secure with bolts. Tighten to

10 Nm.

30. Fit injectors to fuel rail. Secure with clips.

31. Position fuel rail to inlet manifold. Engage injectors, one bank at a time.

32. Position ignition coil bracket on inlet manifold studs.

33. Secure ignition coil bracket and fuel rail to inlet manifold with nuts. Tighten to

8 Nm.

34. Remove plugs from fuel feed and return pipes and rail.

35. Connect hose and tighten clip.

36. Clean feed pipe union and connect fuel feed pipe to fuel rail. Tighten union to

16 Nm.

37. Connect multiplugs to fuel injectors and fuel temperature sensor.

38. Remove cloth from inlet manifold.

39. Apply a thin, uniform coating of Loctite 577 sealant to mating face of inlet manifold.

40. Fit ram housing to inlet manifold. Secure with bolts. Tighten to

24 Nm.

41. Connect purge hose, crankcase breather hose, servo and pressure regulator vacuum hoses to ram housing.

42. Fit plenum chamber.

See Plenum Chamber

43. Reconnect battery negative lead.

44. Start engine. Check for leaks around fuel rail and injectors.

20. Remove 2 bolts securing fuel pressure regulator to fuel rail.

21. Remove pressure regulator assembly.

22. Remove ’O’ ring from fuel pressure regulator and discard.

23. Remove 8 clips securing injectors to fuel rail.

24. Remove injectors from fuel rail.

25. Remove 2 ’O’ rings from each injector and discard.

REPAIR

FUEL TEMPERATURE SENSOR

Service repair no - 19.22.08

Remove

NOTE: Because fuel leakage will not occur when sensor is removed, it is not necessary to depressurise the fuel system for this operation.

1. Disconnect battery negative lead.

SFI

2. Disconnect multiplug from fuel temperature sensor.

3. Remove sensor from fuel rail.

Refit

4. Ensure sensor and location in fuel rail are clean.

5. Fit sensor. Tighten to

17 Nm.

6. Connect multiplug.

7. Reconnect battery negative lead.

REPAIR

FUEL SYSTEM

IGNITION COILS

Service repair no - 18.20.45 - Set

Service repair no - 18.20.43 - Each

Service repair no - 18.20.44 - Extra - Each

Remove

1. Disconnect battery negative lead.

Refit

12. Fit ignition coil to bracket. Secure with screws.

13. Connect leads to terminals. Secure with nuts.

14. Fit terminal cover.

15. Position ignition coil bracket on inlet manifold studs.

16. Secure fuel rail and ignition coil bracket with nuts. Tighten to

8 Nm.

17. Connect multiplug.

18. Connect H.T. leads to respective coil towers.

19. Reconnect battery negative lead.

2. Disconnect H.T. leads from ignition coils. Note positions of leads.

3. Place H.T. leads aside.

4. Disconnect ignition coil multiplug.

5. Remove 4 nuts securing coil bracket.

6. Release ignition coil bracket from inlet manifold studs.

7. Manoeuvre coil/bracket assembly from behind plenum chamber and remove.

8. Remove terminal cover. Note lead positions.

9. Remove 2 nuts securing leads to coil terminals.

10. Remove leads from terminals.

11. Remove 3 Torx screws securing ignition coil to bracket and remove coil.

REPAIR

INTAKE AIR TEMPERATURE SENSOR (IAT

SENSOR)

Service repair no - 18.30.09

Remove

SFI

THROTTLE POSITION SENSOR (TP SENSOR)

Service repair no - 19.22.49

Remove

1. Disconnect multiplug from IAT sensor.

2. Remove IAT sensor from air cleaner.

Refit

3. Clean sensor and mating face.

4. Fit IAT sensor. Tighten to

8 Nm.

5. Connect multiplug.

1. Disconnect multiplug from TP sensor.

2. Remove 2 Torx screws securing TP sensor.

Collect clamp plate.

3. Remove TP sensor.

Refit

4. Clean mating faces.

5. Fit TP sensor. Ensure drive engages correctly with throttle spindle.

6. Position clamp plate. Secure TP sensor with

Torx screws. Tighten to

2 Nm.

7. Connect multiplug.

REPAIR

FUEL SYSTEM

KNOCK SENSOR

Service repair no - 18.30.28 - Sensor - LH

Service repair no - 18.30.30 - Sensor - RH

CAUTION: Due to the sensitivity of the sensors, do not apply tape or sealant to sensor threads.

Remove

1. Raise vehicle on ramp.

2. RH Sensor only: Remove bolt securing starter motor heatshield to RH engine mounting.

3. Release heatshield clip from starter solenoid.

4. Move heatshield aside for access to knock sensor.

5. Both sensors:

Disconnect sensor multiplug.

6. Remove sensor.

Refit

7. Clean sensor and mating face.

8. Fit sensor. Tighten to

16 Nm.

9. Connect sensor multiplug.

10. RH Sensor only: Manoeuvre heatshield into position.

11. Secure clip to solenoid.

12. Align bracket to mounting and fit bolt. Fit and tighten bolt.

13. Lower ramp.

CAUTION: Failure to tighten sensor to correct torque will result in malfunction or sensor damage.

REPAIR

SFI

FUEL PRESSURE REGULATOR

Service repair no - 19.45.06

Remove

1. Disconnect battery negative lead.

2. Depressurise fuel system.

See Fuel System -

Depressurise

9. Disconnect vacuum hose from fuel pressure regulator.

10. Remove 2 bolts securing fuel pressure regulator to fuel rail.

11. Remove fuel pressure regulator assembly.

3. Position cloth over fuel feed union, slacken union to release fuel pressure, then re-tighten union.

4. Release fuel return hose clip. Remove fuel return hose from regulator connecting pipe.

5. Plug connections.

6. Remove 4 nuts ignition coil bracket to inlet manifold.

7. Release ignition coil bracket from inlet manifold studs and place aside.

8. Release regulator connecting pipe from clip.

12. Remove ’O’ ring and spacer ring from fuel pressure regulator. Discard ’O’ ring.

13. Release clip and remove connecting pipe from regulator.

14. Fit plugs to regulator and rail.

REPAIR

FUEL SYSTEM

Refit

15. Ensure locations on fuel pressure regulator and fuel rail are clean.

16. Fit new spacer ring and ’O’ ring to fuel pressure regulator. Lubricate ’O’ ring with silicone grease.

17. Fit pressure regulator assembly to fuel rail.

18. Secure regulator connecting pipe in clip.

19. Secure with bolts. Tighten to

10 Nm.

20. Align ignition coil bracket to inlet manifold studs.

21. Secure ignition coil bracket and fuel rail to inlet manifold with nuts. Tighten to

8 Nm.

22. Remove plugs.

23. Connect return pipe to regulator connecting pipe.

Secure with clip.

24. Connect vacuum hose to fuel pressure regulator.

25. Remove cloth.

26. Reconnect battery negative lead.

27. Start engine. Check for leaks around fuel pressure regulator, fuel feed and fuel return unions.

IDLE AIR CONTROL (IAC)

Service repair no - 19.22.54

Remove

1. Disconnect battery negative lead.

2. Disconnect IAC multiplug.

3. Remove 2 bolts securing IAC to plenum.

4. Remove IAC.

5. Remove gasket and discard.

Refit

6. Ensure all mating faces are clean.

7. Using a new gasket, fit IAC to plenum. Secure with bolts. Tighten to

2.3 Nm.

8. Connect multiplug.

9. Reconnect battery negative lead.

REPAIR

SFI

PLENUM CHAMBER

Service repair no - 19.22.46

Remove

1. Disconnect battery negative lead.

2. Slacken clip securing intake hose to plenum chamber and release hose.

3. Remove split pin from throttle cable clevis pin.

4. Remove clevis pin.

5. Release and remove kick down cable clevis pin.

6. Disconnect vacuum hose from cruise actuator.

7. Release throttle cable from abutment bracket.

8. Remove front locknut from kick down cable.

9. Release cable from bracket.

10. Disconnect breather hose from plenum.

11. Release clip and disconnect multiplug from throttle position sensor (TP Sensor).

12. Disconnect multiplug from idle air control (IAC).

13. Remove 6 bolts securing plenum chamber.

14. Release plenum chamber from ram pipe housing.

15. Fit approved hose clamp to water jacket coolant hoses.

16. Tighten clamp.

17. Position cloth to absorb coolant spillage.

Do not carry out further dismantling if component is removed for access only.

18. Slacken clips securing coolant hoses to plenum.

REPAIR

FUEL SYSTEM

19. Disconnect hoses and remove plenum chamber.

20. Place cloth over ram pipes to prevent ingress of foreign matter.

21. Remove 4 bolts securing water jacket to plenum chamber. Remove water jacket. Remove gasket and discard.

23. Remove 2 Torx bolts securing TP sensor.

Collect clamp plate. Remove TP sensor.

24. Remove 2 bolts securing IAC. Remove motor.

Remove gasket and discard.

22. Remove 3 bolts securing throttle linkage bracket to plenum chamber. Remove bracket. Collect return spring.

REPAIR

SFI

Refit

25. Ensure all mating surfaces are clean.

26. Fit TP sensor. Ensure drive engages correctly with throttle spindle.

27. Position clamp plate. Secure TP sensor with bolts. Tighten to

2 Nm.

28. Using a new gasket, fit IAC. Secure with bolts.

Tighten to

2.3 Nm.

29. Ensure mating faces of water jacket and plenum chamber are clean.

30. Using a new gasket, fit water jacket. Secure with bolts. Tighten to

13 Nm.

31. Position throttle linkage bracket, fit and engage return spring.

32. Secure linkage bracket to plenum chamber with bolts. Tighten to

8 Nm.

33. Remove cloth from ram housing.

34. Ensure mating faces of plenum chamber and ram pipe housing are clean.

35. Position plenum chamber. Connect coolant hoses to water jacket. Secure with clips.

36. Remove clamp from coolant pipes. Remove cloth.

37. Apply a thin, uniform coating of Loctite 577 sealant to sealing face of plenum chamber.

38. Fit plenum chamber.

39. Fit plenum chamber bolts. Tighten to

24 Nm.

40. Connect multiplugs to TP sensor and IAC.

41. Connect breather hose to plenum chamber.

42. Fit kick down cable to abutment bracket and fit locknut.

43. Connect throttle cable to abutment bracket.

44. Connect vacuum hose to actuator.

45. Align throttle cable to lever. Fit clevis pin. Secure clevis pin with split pin.

46. Align kick down cable to lever.

47. Fit clevis pin and secure clip.

48. Connect intake hose and secure with clip.

49. Reconnect battery negative lead.

50. Top up cooling system.

RELAY MODULE - PRE ADVANCED EVAPS

Service repair no - 18.30.71

Remove

1. Release module from bracket.

2. Disconnect 2 multiplugs.

3. Remove module.

Refit

4. Reverse removal procedure.

REV: 09/95 REPAIR

FUEL SYSTEM

RELAY MODULE - ADVANCED EVAPS

Service repair no - 18.30.71

Remove

1. Release module from bracket.

2. Disconnect 2 multiplugs from module.

3. Remove module.

Refit

4. Position module, connect multiplugs and secure to bracket.

FUEL FILTER - ADVANCED EVAPS

Service repair no - 19.25.02

Remove

WARNING: Spilling of fuel is unavoidable during this operation. Ensure all necessary precautions are taken to prevent fire and explosion.

WARNING: Ensure fuel handling precautions given in section 1 -

Introduction are strictly adhered to when carrying out following instructions.

1. Depressurise fuel system.

See fuel system depressurise - advanced evaps

2. Raise rear of vehicle.

WARNING: Support on safety stands.

3. Clean area around hose connections to prevent ingress of foreign matter into fuel system. Clamp inlet and outlet hoses to prevent fuel spillage when disconnecting hoses.

REPAIR

4. Loosen 2 fuel line unions and disconnect hoses.

Remove and discard ’O’ rings. Plug ends of hoses to prevent ingress of dirt.

CAUTION: Use two spanners when loosening or tightening unions.

5. Remove nut and bolt securing fuel filter bracket to chassis and remove filter from bracket.

ADD: 09/95

SFI

Refit

6. Fit a NEW filter to bracket.

NOTE: Ensure direction of flow arrow stamped on canister is correct.

7. Position filter mounting bracket to chassis and secure with nut and bolt.

8. Remove plugs from fuel hose ends.

9. Lubricate NEW ’O’ rings with clean fuel and fit to fuel hoses.

10. Connect fuel hoses to filter and tighten unions to

18 Nm .

CAUTION: Use two spanners when loosening or tightening unions.

11. Remove stand(s) and lower vehicle.

12. Run the engine to check for any fuel leaks.

FUEL PUMP AND GAUGE SENDER UNIT -

ADVANCED EVAPS

Service repair no - 19.45.03

A plastic fuel tank with a combined fuel pump and gauge sender unit is fitted. The top flange of the pump also houses a pressure sensor which is not removable from the pump. The fuel pump is accessed through a panel in the load space floor.

WARNING: Ensure that fuel handling precautions given in 01 - Introduction are strictly adhered to when carrying out following instructions.

CAUTION: Before disconnecting any part of fuel system, it is imperative that all dust, dirt and debris is removed from around components to prevent ingress of foreign matter into fuel system.

Remove

1. Depressurise fuel system.

See fuel system depressurise - advanced evaps

2. Disconnect battery negative lead.

3. Check the amount of fuel in the tank. If the tank is full, drain 2.4 US gallons (9 litres) minimum.

See fuel tank - draining - advanced evaps

ADD: 09/95

4. Remove 6 screws securing tail door tread strip and remove tread strip.

5. Remove RH luggage compartment side panel.

See CHASSIS AND BODY, Repair, rear compartment lower trim panels

REPAIR

FUEL SYSTEM

6. Fold back loadspace carpet and sound insulation to reveal access panel.

7. Remove 6 screws securing fuel pump access panel.

8. Remove access panel.

9. Disconnect multiplugs from fuel pump and pressure sensor.

10. Release vent hose from pressure sensor body.

11. Noting their fitted positions, disconnect both fuel connections by pressing the black release latches on each connector and pushing the connector back down the line. Care must be taken to catch any excess fuel which may spill from the fuel lines once removed.

REPAIR ADD: 09/95

12. Using service tool LRT-19-009 loosen and remove the metal locking ring.

13. Prise the pump from the tank opening using a blunt instrument under the edge of the pump flange. Once clear of the seal, tip the pump to the right to allow fuel contained in the body of the pump to drain into the tank.

CAUTION: Do not lift the pump from the tank using the feed and return stubs.

14. Remove and discard seal.

SFI

Refit

15. Fit NEW pump seal to tank opening.

16. Carefully lower pump into tank opening, pressing firmly on the pump top flange to allow correct positioning.

NOTE: Ensure location tag on pump top flange is engaged correctly to tank opening lip.

17. Fit locking ring and tighten to

35 Nm using service tool LRT-19-009.

18. Connect both fuel lines to the pump by pushing the connectors down each line square to the pump connection until the connectors positively latch.

19. Connect vent hose to pressure sensor body.

20. Connect multiplugs to fuel pump and pressure sensor.

21. Reconnect battery negative lead.

22. Refill tank with drained fuel.

23. Run the engine to check for any fuel leaks.

24. Fit access panel and secure with screws.

25. Reposition loadspace sound insulation and carpet.

26. Fit RH luggage compartment side panel.

See

CHASSIS AND BODY, Repair, rear compartment lower trim panels

27. Fit tail door tread strip and secure with screws.

ADD: 09/95 REPAIR

FUEL SYSTEM

FUEL SYSTEM - DEPRESSURISE - ADVANCED

EVAPS

Service repair no - 19.50.02

WARNING: Fuel pressure of up to 2.5 bar will be present in the system, even if the engine has not been run for some time.

Always depressurise the system before disconnecting any components in the fuel feed line (between fuel pump and pressure regulator).

The spilling of fuel is unavoidable during this operation. Ensure that all necessary precautions are taken to prevent fire and explosion.

NOTE: Fuel pressure can be relieved at fuel filter unions.

1. Position cloth around relevant union to protect against fuel spray.

2. Carefully loosen union.

CAUTION: Use two spanners when loosening or tightening unions.

3. Tighten union once fuel pressure is relieved.

4. Remove cloth.

FUEL TANK - ADVANCED EVAPS

Service repair no - 19.55.01

WARNING: Ensure fuel handling precautions given in section 01

Introduction are strictly adhered to when carrying out following instructions.

CAUTION: Before disconnecting any part of fuel system, it imperative that all dust, dirt and debris is removed from around components to prevent ingress of foreign matter into fuel system.

Remove

1. Disconnect battery negative lead.

2. Drain fuel tank completely.

See fuel tank draining - advanced evaps

3. Remove 6 screws securing tail door tread strip and remove tread strip.

4. Remove RH luggage compartment side panel.

See CHASSIS AND BODY, Repair, rear compartment lower trim panels

REPAIR ADD: 09/95

SFI

5. Fold back loadspace carpet and sound insulation to reveal access panel.

6. Remove 6 screws securing fuel pump access panel.

7. Remove access panel.

8. Disconnect multiplugs from fuel pump and pressure sensor

9. Noting their fitted positions, disconnect both fuel connections by pressing the black release latches on each connector and pushing the connector back down the line.

10. Care must be taken to catch any excess fuel which may spill from the fuel lines once removed.

11. Raise rear of vehicle.

WARNING: Support on safety stands.

ADD: 09/95 REPAIR

FUEL SYSTEM

12. Mark location of anti-roll [sway] bar straps.

13. Remove nuts and bolts securing anti-roll [sway] bar straps, and allow bar to swing down clear of tank.

14. Disconnect pressure sensor breather pipe connection.

15. Disconnect vent line quickfit connector from liquid/vapour separator.

16. Remove torque screw cap from hose to tank filler neck clip.

17. Loosen clip screw securing hose to tank filler neck.

18. Release hose from filler neck and internal filler neck breather hose from fuel tank.

19. Remove and discard fuel filler neck clip.

REPAIR ADD: 09/95

SFI

20. Remove nut and bolt securing RH side of upper fuel tank strap to chassis.

21. Remove 4 nuts and bolts securing fuel tank cradle.

22. Remove fuel tank cradle.

23. With assistance, tilt right hand side of tank upwards and manoeuvre through chassis to remove.

Do not carry out further dismantling if component is removed for access only.

24. Release vent hose from tank pressure sensor.

25. Remove vent hose from 3 fuel tank clips.

26. Using service tool LRT-19-009 loosen and remove the metal locking ring.

27. Prise the pump from the tank opening using a blunt instrument under the edge of the lip of the pump flange.

CAUTION: Do not lift the pump from the tank using the feed and return stubs.

28. Remove and discard seal.

ADD: 09/95 REPAIR

FUEL SYSTEM

Refit

29. Fit NEW pump seal to tank opening.

30. Carefully lower pump into tank opening, pressing firmly on the pump top flange to allow correct positioning.

NOTE: Ensure location tag on pump top flange is engaged correctly to tank opening lip.

31. Fit locking ring and tighten to

35 Nm using service tool LRT-19-009.

32. Fit vent hose to fuel tank clips and connect to pressure sensor.

33. With assistance, fit fuel tank into position.

34. Fit fuel tank cradle and secure with nuts and bolts.

35. Align upper fuel tank strap and secure with nut and bolt.

36. Fit NEW clip to fuel filler neck hose.

37. Connect fuel filler neck internal breather to tank.

38. Connect fuel filler neck hose to tank.

39. Position fuel filler neck hose clip and tighten until head shears.

40. Connect vent line quickfit connector to liquid/vapour separator.

41. Connect vent line hose connection.

42. Position anti-roll [sway] bar straps and secure with nuts and bolts.

43. Remove stand(s) and lower vehicle.

44. Connect both fuel lines to the pump by pushing the connectors down each line square to the pump connection until the connectors positively latches.

45. Connect multiplugs to fuel pump and pressure sensor.

46. Reconnect battery negative lead.

47. Refill tank with drained fuel.

48. Run the engine to check for any fuel leaks.

49. Fit access panel and secure with screws.

50. Reposition loadspace sound insulation and carpet.

51. Fit RH luggage compartment side panel.

See

CHASSIS AND BODY, Repair, rear compartment trim panels

52. Fit tail door tread strip and secure with screws.

FUEL TANK - DRAINING - ADVANCED EVAPS

Service repair no - 19.55.02

WARNING: Before removing the fuel tank it must be drained.

WARNING: Petrol/gasoline vapour is highly flammable and in confined spaces is also explosive and toxic. Always have a fire extinguisher containing FOAM, CO2, GAS or

POWDER close at hand when handling or draining fuel. See Introduction

CAUTION: Before disconnecting any part of fuel system, it is imperative that all dust, dirt and debris is removed from around components to prevent ingress of foreign matter into fuel system.

NOTE: Assuming the fuel tank is FULL drain the following quantities:

Renew Fuel pump = 9 Litres (2.4 US Gallons)

Renew Fuel filler neck = 22 Litres (6 US Gallons)

Renew Fuel tank = COMPLETE DRAIN

1. Depressurise fuel system.

See fuel system depressurise - advanced evaps

2. Disconnect battery negative lead.

3. Remove 6 screws securing tail door tread strip and remove tread strip.

4. Remove RH luggage compartment side panel.

See CHASSIS AND BODY, Repair,

REPAIR ADD: 09/95

SFI

5. Fold back loadspace carpet and sound insulation to reveal access panel.

6. Remove 6 screws securing fuel pump access panel.

7. Remove access panel.

8. Disconnect the fuel return connection by pressing the black release latch on connector and pushing the connector back down the line.

Care must be taken to catch any excess fuel which may spill from the fuel line once removed.

9. Using a bowser, with a 7 mm inside diameter hose connection attach to fuel pump return stub, drain fuel into a sealed container. Follow the manufacturers instructions for the connection and safe use of the bowser.

10. Continue draining until air bubbles appear and fuel ceases to flow.

11. Disconnect bowser from fuel pump return stub.

12. Connect fuel return line to pump by pushing the connector down line square to the pump connection until the connector positively latches.

13. Fit access panel and secure with screws.

14. Reposition loadspace sound insulation and carpet.

15. Fit RH luggage compartment side panel.

See

CHASSIS AND BODY, Repair, rear compartment trim panels

16. Fit tail door tread strip and secure with screws.

17. Reconnect battery negative lead.

ADD: 09/95 REPAIR

FUEL SYSTEM

FUEL FILLER NECK - ADVANCED EVAPS

Service repair no - 19.55.07

WARNING: Ensure that fuel handling precautions given in 1 - Introduction are strictly adhered to when carrying out following instructions.

CAUTION: Before disconnecting any part of fuel system, it is imperative that all dust, dirt and debris is removed from around components to prevent ingress of foreign matter into fuel system.

Remove

1. Depressurise fuel system.

See fuel system depressurise - advanced evaps

2. Disconnect battery negative lead.

3. Check the amount of fuel in the tank. If the tank is full drain 6 US gallons (22 litres) minimum.

See fuel tank - draining.

8. Remove nut and bolt securing filler neck support bracket to mud flap bracket.

NOTE: This fixing also retains the filler neck earth strap.

9. Remove 5 nuts and bolts securing mud flap to body.

10. Remove mud flap.

4. Remove 6 screws securing tail door tread strip and remove tread strip.

5. Remove RH luggage compartment side panel.

See CHASSIS AND BODY, Repair, rear compartment trim panels

6. Fold back loadspace carpet and sound insulation to gain access to RH mudflap fixing.

7. Raise rear of vehicle.

WARNING: Support on safety stands.

REPAIR ADD: 09/95

SFI

11. Disconnect vent line quickfit connector from liquid/vapour separator.

12. Remove torque screw cap from hose to tank filler neck clip.

13. Loosen clip screw securing hose to tank filler neck.

14. Release hose from filler neck and internal filler neck breather hose from fuel tank.

15. Remove and discard fuel filler neck clip.

16. Disconnect the pressure sensor breather pipe connection.

17. Disconnect the vent line hose connection.

18. Fit ignition key to fuel filler flap lock and open flap.

19. Release fuel filler cap from filler neck.

20. Remove filler neck assembly from vehicle.

Do not carry out further dismantling if component is removed for access only.

21. Remove torque screw cap from hose to filler neck clip.

22. Loosen clip screw securing hose to filler neck.

23. Remove hose from filler neck.

24. Remove and discard fuel filler hose clip.

25. Remove vent line from filler neck.

ADD: 09/95 REPAIR

FUEL SYSTEM

Refit

26. Fit vent line to filler neck.

27. Fit NEW clip to filler neck hose.

28. Fit hose to filler neck.

29. Position filler neck hose clip and tighten until head shears.

30. Fit filler neck assembly to vehicle.

NOTE: To aid fitment of filler neck through body grommet apply a soap solution to lip of grommet.

31. Fit NEW clip to fuel filler neck hose.

32. Connect fuel filler neck internal breather to tank.

33. Connect fuel filler neck hose to tank.

34. Position fuel filler neck hose clip and tighten until head shears.

35. Connect vent line quickfit connector to liquid/vapour separator.

36. Connect the pressure sensor breather pipe connection.

37. Connect the vent line hose connection.

38. Fit mud flap and secure with nuts and bolts.

39. Position filler neck support bracket and earth strap to mud flap bracket and secure with nut and bolt.

40. Remove stand(s) and lower vehicle.

41. Reposition loadspace sound insulation and carpet.

42. Fit RH luggage compartment side panel.

See

CHASSIS AND BODY, Repair,

43. Fit tail door tread strip and secure with screws.

44. Refill tank with drained fuel.

45. Fit fuel filler cap to filler neck.

46. Close filler flap, lock with ignition key and remove key.

47. Reconnect battery negative lead.

FUEL TANK FILLER CAP - ADVANCED EVAPS

Service repair no - 19.55.08

Remove

1. Fit ignition key to fuel filler flap lock and open flap.

2. Remove screw securing cap retaining strap to body.

3. Remove fuel filler cap.

Refit

4. Fit fuel filler cap.

5. Position cap retaining strap to body and secure with screw.

6. Close filler flap, lock with ignition key and remove key.

REPAIR ADD: 09/95

SFI

ANTI-TRICKLE FILL VALVE - ADVANCED EVAPS

Service repair no - 19.55.31

Remove

1. Remove the fuel filler neck.

See fuel filler neck

- advanced evaps

Refit

6. Fit a new ’O’ ring to the recess in the stub pipe.

7. Fit the valve and hose assembly to the filler neck stub pipe, ensuring that the ’O’ ring is fitted around the body of the valve as it is pushed into the filler neck stub pipe.

8. Hand tighten the nut, then tighten to

3 Nm.

9. Tighten the grub screw to

2 Nm.

10. Connect the hose to the liquid/vapour separator and secure with the cobra clip.

11. Fit the fuel filler neck.

See fuel filler neck advanced evaps;refit

2. Release the cobra clip securing the hose to the liquid/vapour separator and disconnect the hose.

3. Loosen the grub screw on the valve nut, two complete turns.

4. Loosen the valve nut completely.

NOTE: The nut is held captive by the stub pipe on the filler neck.

5. Carefully remove the valve and hose assembly from the filler neck

ADD: 09/95 REPAIR

Mpi

DESCRIPTION

The Mpi Modular Engine Management System

(MEMS) controls the fuel injection and programmed ignition systems.

The main features are as follows:

•

The Engine Control Module (ECM) controls programmed ignition and fuel injection. The ECM incorporates short circuit protection and can store intermittent faults on certain inputs.

Testbook can interrogate the ECM for these stored faults.

•

The ECM uses the speed/density method of air flow measurement to calculate fuel delivery. This method measures the inlet air temperature and inlet manifold pressure and assumes that the engine is a calibrated vacuum pump with its characteristics stored in the ECM

•

If certain system inputs fail, the ECM implements a back-up facility to enable the system to continue functioning, although at a reduced level of performance.

•

A separate diagnostic connector allows engine tuning or fault diagnosis to be carried out using

Testbook without disconnecting the ECM harness connector.

•

The ECM harness multiplug incorporates specially plated pins to minimise oxidation and give improved reliability.

•

The throttle potentiometer requires no adjustment in service. The following components supply data for both fuelling and ignition:

Ignition system

The ECM determines the optimum ignition timing based on the signals it receives from the following sensors:

1. Crankshaft sensor - Engine speed and crankshaft position.

2. Manifold absolute pressure sensor - Engine load

3. Coolant temperature sensor - Engine temperature.

4. Manifold absolute pressure sensor - Throttle closed.

5. Knock sensor - Engine noise and vibration.

MEMS uses no centrifugal or vacuum advance, timing being controlled by the ECM which is energised by the main relay, within the relay module. Spark distribution is achieved by 2 coils mounted at the rear of the engine and controlled by the ECM.

DESCRIPTION AND OPERATION

FUEL SYSTEM

Basic ignition timing

MEMS provides the optimum ignition timing for the relevant engine speed and load. The speed and position of the engine is detected by the crankshaft sensor which is bolted to, and projects through the engine adapter plate.

The sensor incorporates an armature which runs adjacent to a reluctor insert in the flywheel, the insert consisting of 34 poles spaced at 10

° intervals, with two missing poles 180

° apart to identify the T.D.C.

positions.

The sensor ’reads’ these poles to provide a constant up-date of engine speed and crankshaft position to the ECM

The load signal is provided by the manifold absolute pressure sensor mounted inside the ECM casing which detects manifold pressure via a hose connected to the manifold chamber. The sensor converts pressure variations into graduated electrical signals which can be read by the ECM

Ignition timing compensation

Coolant temperature sensor

When the ECM receives a low engine temperature signal from the coolant sensor, it provides optimum driveability and emissions by advancing or retarding the ignition timing.

Knock sensor

The knock sensor is a capacitive device mounted in the cylinder block between nos. 2 and 3 cylinders below the inlet manifold. The sensor monitors noise and vibration in the engine and passes this information to the ECM which is able to identify the characteristics of the knocking and make the necessary corrections to the ignition timing of individual cylinders.

Idle speed control

When the throttle pedal is released and the engine is at idle, the ECM uses the fast response of ignition timing to assist idle speed control.

When loads are placed on, or removed from the engine the ECM senses the change in engine speed and in conjuction with the opening of the throttle disc by the stepper motor, advances or retards the ignition timing to maintain the specified idle speed. When load is removed from the engine and the stepper motor returns to it’s original position, the ignition timing returns to the idle setting.

NOTE: Due to the sensitivity of this system the ignition timing will be constantly changing at idle speed.

DESCRIPTION AND OPERATION

Mpi

Fuel system

ECM

The MEMS system is controlled by the ECM which is located in the engine compartment.

The ECM is an adaptive unit and can learn the load and wear characteristics of a particular engine.

The ECM remembers and updates two main engine requirements when the engine is fully warm:

1. The idle stepper position required to achieve the specified idle speed.

2. The fuelling change or offset required to achieve a set oxygen sensor voltage.

The stepper position is used as a reference to update the amount of stepper motor movement required to achieve the specified idle speed under all conditions.

The fuelling offset is required to enable the system when not in closed loop control to provide the correct fuelling and while in closed loop control to prevent having to apply excessive adjustments to the fuelling which can adversely affect the emissions and driveability.

NOTE: After fitting a different ECM, a full tune procedure must be carried out using

Testbook.

The ECM inputs and outputs are shown in the table.

INPUTS TO MEMS ECM

Crankshaft sensor

Manifold absolute pressure

Coolant temperature sensor

Inlet air temperature sensor

Knock sensor

Oxygen sensor

Throttle potentiometer

Throttle closed

Battery supply

Ignition supply

Diagnostic input

Power earth

Sensor earth

Fuel temperature sensor

Oxygen sensor

Air conditioning switch

OUTPUTS FROM MEMS ECM

Ignition coil

Injectors

Aircon relays

Stepper motor

Temperature gauge

Fuel pump relay (inside relay module)

Main relay (inside relay module)

Diagnostic output

DESCRIPTION AND OPERATION

FUEL SYSTEM

Injectors

The four fuel injectors are fitted between the pressurised fuel rail and inlet manifold. Each injector comprises of a solenoid operated needle valve and a specially designed nozzle to ensure good fuel atomisation.

Engine coolant temperature sensor

The coolant temperature sensor is mounted in the thermostat housing and is immersed in the engine coolant. The sensor is a resistive device in which the resistance varies with temperature

Throttle housing

The throttle housing is attached to the inlet manifold via a rubber sandwich plate and incorporates a throttle disc which is connected to the throttle pedal via the throttle lever and a cable.

There are two breather pipes; one either side of the throttle disc. When the engine is running with the throttle disc open, both pipes are subject to manifold depression and draw crankcase fumes into the manifold. When the throttle disc is closed, only the pipe on the inlet manifold side of the disc is subject to manifold depression. This pipe incorporates a restrictor to prevent engine oil being drawn into the engine by the substantially greater manifold depression.

Also incorporated in the throttle housing are the throttle potentiometer and stepper motor.

Throttle potentiometer

The throttle potentiometer is mounted in front of the throttle housing and is directly coupled to the throttle disc shaft.

Three wires connect the throttle potentiometer to the

ECM; a 5 volt supply to the potentiometer, an earth return to the ECM and an output voltage to the ECM which indicates the rate of throttle disc movement.

Stepper motor

The stepper motor is contained within the throttle housing and operates a cam and push rod via a reduction gear. The push rod is in direct contact with the throttle lever and moves the throttle disc to control idle and fast idle speed. The stepper motor maximum movement is 3.75 revolutions accomplished in steps of 7.5

. The reduction gear converts this into 180

° of cam movement.

The throttle lever has a throttle position setting screw which rests on the stepper motor operating pin when the throttle pedal is released and is used to set the relationship between engine speed and stepper motor position.

In the side of the throttle housing is a throttle air bypass bleed screw to provide easier and more sensitive setting of the stepper motor position at idle.

The stepper motor position is checked using Testbook and should be within the range of 20 to 40 steps when the engine is run in. If it is identified as being outside this range it can be adjusted to within range by turning the throttle air bypass bleed screw. It is important to follow Testbook setting procedure when adjusting this screw to prevent mismatching of throttle body settings. This ensures that the stepper motor is at the optimum position within its range for providing further movement to compensate for changes in engine load or temperature in accordance with signals from the

ECM

NOTE: The stepper motor and throttle position setting screws must only be adjusted when Testbook identifies the requirement.

DESCRIPTION AND OPERATION

Mpi

Fuel pump

The electric fuel pump, located inside the fuel tank, is a self-priming centrifugal ’wet’ pump, the motor and pump are filled with fuel.

The fuel pump supplies more fuel than the maximum load requirement for the engine, so that pressure in the fuel system can be maintained under all conditions.

Fuel pressure regulator

The pressure regulator is a mechanical device controlled by manifold depression and is mounted in the fuel rail. The regulator ensures that fuel rail pressure is maintained at a constant pressure difference to that in the inlet manifold, as manifold depression increases the regulated fuel pressure is reduced in direct proportion.

When pressure exceeds the regulator setting excess fuel is spill returned to the fuel tank swirl pot which contains the fuel pick-up strainer.

Relay module

The relay module contains the main relay, fuel pump relay, starter relay and oxygen sensor relay and is mounted on the ECM mounting bracket.

The main relay is energised when the ignition is switched on and supplies current to the ECM

The fuel pump relay is energised by the ECM for a short period when the ignition is switched on, during cranking and while the engine is running.

The starter relay is energised by the cranking signal from the ignition switch.

This oxygen sensor relay is energised when the ignition is switched on and supplies current to the

ECM

Intake air temperature sensor

The intake air temperature sensor is fitted in the side of the inlet manifold and sends the ECM a signal relating to air temperature. The ECM uses this signal in its calculations on air flow.

Inertia switch

The fuel pump circuit incorporates an inertia switch which in the event of sudden deceleration isolates the power supply to the fuel pump. The inertia switch is situated in the engine compartment on the bulkhead and can, if tripped, be reset by depressing the central plunger.

WARNING: Check the integrity of the fuel system before the inertia switch is reset.

Diagnostic connector

A diagnostic connector is provided to enable diagnosis to be carried out without disturbing the system electrical connections and to allow the ECM’s ability to store certain faults to be utilised.

Oxygen sensor - Closed-loop emission control

The MEMS Mpi system operates a closed loop emission system to ensure the most efficient level of exhaust gas conversion.

An oxygen sensor fitted in the exhaust manifold monitors the exhaust gases. It then supplies a small voltage proportional to exhaust oxygen content to the

ECM As the air/fuel mixture weakens, the exhaust oxygen content increases and so the voltage to the

ECM decreases. If the mixture becomes richer so the oxygen content decreases and the voltage increases.

The ECM uses this signal voltage to determine the air/fuel mixture being delivered to the engine, and adjusts the injector duration to maintain the ratio necessary for efficient gas conversion by the catalyst.

The oxygen sensor has an integral heating element to ensure an efficient operating temperature is quickly reached from cold. The electrical supply for the heater element is controlled by the oxygen sensor relay.

Fuel temperature sensor

The fuel temperature sensor is inserted in the fuel rail and measures fuel and fuel rail temperatures. During engine cranking at high temperatures, the ECM increases fuel supply, and opens the throttle disc via the stepper motor to aid hot starting.

DESCRIPTION AND OPERATION

FUEL SYSTEM

Non - evaporative loss equipment

1. Throttle disc

2. Fuel cut-off valve

3. Two way valve

Charcoal canister

A charcoal canister is used for the temporary storage of fuel vapour from the fuel tank until the vapour can be purged from the canister into the engine and burned.

The charcoal canister is purged when the purge control valve is open, fresh air is drawn through the purge air hose, through the charcoal canister and into a port in the inlet manifold.

4. Charcoal canister

5. Purge control valve

6. Fuel filler cap

7. ECM

8. One way valve

Purge control valve

A purge control valve is operated by the ECM The valve remains closed when the engine is cold and at idling speed to protect engine tune and catalyst performance. If the charcoal canister was purged during cold running or at idling speed, the additional enrichment in fuel mixture would delay catalyst light off time and cause erratic idle. When the engine temperature is above 75

C, the purge control valve will be operational (modulated ON and OFF) whenever the engine speed is above approximately

1600 rev/min. When the purge valve is opened, fuel vapour from the charcoal canister is drawn into the inlet manifold for combustion.

DESCRIPTION AND OPERATION

MEMS COMPONENTS & LOCATION ON VEHICLE

Mpi

Components

Fuel pump

Fuel filter

...............................................................

.................................................................

Fuel inertia switch

Relay module ..........................................................

Purge control valve

Diagnostic connector

MEMS ECM.

...................................................

.................................................

...............................................

...........................................................

Location

Fuel tank

Right chassis rear

Bulkhead

Under bonnet [hood]

On charcoal canister

Right inner wing [fender]

DESCRIPTION AND OPERATION

FUEL SYSTEM

MEMS COMPONENTS & LOCATION ON ENGINE

Components Location

Fuel pressure regulator

Intake air temperature sensor

Crankshaft sensor

Twin ignition coils

...........................................

.................................

...................................................

....................................................

Oxygen sensor ........................................................

Coolant temperature sensor ....................................

Injectors

Stepper motor

Throttle potentiometer

Fuel temperature sensor

Knock sensor

.........................................

..........................................................

Engine rear

Inlet manifold

Under starter motor on flywheel housing

Engine rear

Exhaust manifold

Coolant chamber

Fuel rail

Engine block

DESCRIPTION AND OPERATION

Mpi

SYSTEM OPERATION

Ignition on

When the ignition is switched on, voltage is applied to

ECM pin 11. The ECM then switches on the main relay by supplying an earth path at pin 4. This allows battery voltage to pass to ECM pin 28, to the four injectors and through the ignition coil to ECM pin 25.

In addition, the fuel pump relay is switched on by the

ECM supplying an earth path on pin 20. Voltage is applied through the inertia switch to the fuel pump.

The pump runs for a short period to pressurise the fuel rail. The fuel pressure regulator will open at its maximum setting and excess fuel is spill returned to the tank.

The ECM determines the amount of stepper motor movement from the following signals:

•

Engine coolant temperature data at pin 33.

•

Inlet air temperature data at pin 16.

•

Throttle potentiometer data at pin 8.

•

Engine speed data at pins 31 and 32.

•

Manifold absolute pressure data (via pipe from manifold).

•

Battery voltage at pin 28.

•

Ignition signal at pin 11.

If one or more of the following inputs fail, the ECM will substitute the back-up values shown to maintain driveability.

Input Back-up value

Coolant temperature Idle Speed controlled until engine is fully warm. 60

C at speeds above idle.

Inlet air temperature Derived from engine speed and engine load.

Manifold absolute pressure

Derived from engine speed and throttle position.

Starter operation

Whilst the starter relay is energised, battery voltage is applied to the starter motor solenoid. The solenoid also energises and supplies battery voltage directly to the starter motor.

Ignition is controlled by the ECM switching the low tension circuit via pin 25.

The ECM provides an earth signal on pins 24, 23, 26 and 1 for the period the injectors are required to be open, the injector solenoids are energised

(simultaneously on naturally aspirated models) and fuel is sprayed into the manifold onto the back of the inlet valves. The ECM carefully meters the amount of fuel injected by adjusting the injector opening period

(pulse width). During cranking, when the engine speed is below approx. 400 rev/min, the ECM increases the injector pulse width to aid starting. The amount of increase depends upon coolant temperature. To prevent flooding, injector pulses are intermittent i.e. 24 on then 8 pulses off.

Idling

After start enrichment is provided at all temperatures immediately cranking ceases. The ECM controls the enrichment by increasing injector pulse width. The enrichment decays in relation to the rising coolant temperature.

Provided the ECM is receiving a signal that the engine speed is close to the idle speed set point, the ECM will implement idle speed control.

The ECM activates a unipolar stepper motor acting directly on the throttle lever. Idle speed response is improved by the ignition system advancing or retarding the timing when load is placed on, or removed from the engine.

If, during engine idle, the load on the engine is increased sufficiently to cause engine speed to fall, the ECM will sense this via the crankshaft sensor and instantly advance the ignition timing to increase idle speed and then energise the stepper motor to open the throttle disc thus maintaining the idle speed.

Finally the ignition timing is retarded to its nominal value.

The ECM monitors battery voltage and, if voltage falls sufficiently to cause fluctuations in injector pulse widths, it increases the injector pulse widths to compensate.

On return to idle, the ECM will implement a slightly higher idle speed to prevent the engine stalling.

DESCRIPTION AND OPERATION

FUEL SYSTEM

Driving

When the throttle pedal is depressed, the ECM implements the cruise air/fuel ratio map. During driving the ECM continually monitors inlet air temperature and engine speed and load for it’s air flow calculations, together with coolant temperature for any temperature corrections. Additional inputs are throttle potentiometer for acceleration and throttle pedal switch for cruise/idle fuel map selection and over-run fuel cut-off.

Acceleration enrichment

When the throttle pedal is depressed, the ECM receives a rising voltage from the throttle potentiometer and detects a rise in manifold pressure from the manifold absolute pressure sensor. The ECM provides additional fuel by increasing the normal injector pulse width and also provides a small number of extra injector pulses on rapid throttle openings.

Over-run fuel cut-off

The ECM implements over-run fuel cut-off when the following signals are received.

•

Throttle disc closed.

•

Engine speed is above 2000 rev/min - engine at normal operating temperature.

Fuel is reinstated progressively when any of the above signals cease.

Over-speed fuel cut-off

To prevent damage at high engine speeds the ECM inhibits the earth path for the injectors, cutting off injection. As engine speed falls, injection is reinstated.

Ignition switch off

When the ignition is switched off, the ECM will keep the main relay energised for approx. 30 seconds while it drives the stepper motor to the 35 step position for the next engine start.

DESCRIPTION AND OPERATION

THROTTLE CABLE

Adjust

NOTE: Use diagnostic equipment to ensure that the throttle potentiometer and stepper motor are synchronised before adjusting the throttle cable.

Ensure that the cable is correctly routed and located.

1. Switch ignition on, wait 5 seconds and switch ignition off to ensure stepper motor is in setting position.

2. Loosen throttle cable adjustment nut and locknut from abutment bracket.

3. Hold cam in "throttle closed" position and rotate cable adjustment nut until a gap of 2mm exists between the nut and abutment bracket.

Mpi

4. Tighten cable locknut to contact abutment bracket.

5. Using two wrenches tighten nuts onto abutment bracket.

6. Operate throttle pedal and ensure throttle opens fully.

ADJUSTMENT

KNOCK SENSOR

Service repair no - 18.30.18

Remove

1. Disconnect multiplug from knock sensor.

2. Remove knock sensor.

Mpi

IGNITION COILS

Service repair no - 18.20.40 - 1 & 4 Cylinders

Service repair no - 18.20.41 - 2 & 3 Cylinders

Remove

1. Disconnect battery negative lead.

2. Disconnect 4 h.t. leads from coils.

NOTE: Mark the position of the h.t. leads to ensure correct refitment.

3. Disconnect 2 multiplugs from coils.

4. Disconnect crankshaft sensor multiplug.

5. Remove screw securing crankshaft sensor multiplug to coil bracket.

6. Remove 3 bolts securing coil bracket to bell housing.

NOTE: Access to the rear bolts is from under the vehicle.

7. Remove coil assembly.

Refit

3. Clean mating face of cylinder block.

4. Fit knock sensor. Tighten to

15 Nm

5. Connect multiplug.

Refit

8. Position coil assembly to bell housing.

9. Fit 3 bolts and tighten to the correct torque.

10. Secure crankshaft sensor multiplug to coil bracket with screw.

11. Connect crankshaft sensor multiplug.

12. Connect multiplugs and h.t. leads to coils.

13. Reconnect battery negative lead.

REPAIR

FUEL SYSTEM

COOLANT TEMPERATURE SENSOR

Service repair no - 18.30.10

Remove

1. Position drain tin below coolant pump hose.

2. Disconnect sensor multiplug.

3. Release harness clip and harness.

4. Remove sensor.

CRANKSHAFT SENSOR

Service repair no - 18.30.12

Remove

1. Position vehicle on ramp [hoist].

2. Disconnect multiplug from crankshaft sensor flylead.

3. Remove screw, release lead from bracket.

Refit

5. Clean sensor.

6. Fit sensor and tighten to the correct torque.

7. Position harness and secure with clip.

8. Connect multiplug.

9. Top-up cooling system.

4. Raise ramp [hoist].

5. Remove 2 bolts securing crankshaft sensor.

6. Remove crankshaft sensor.

REPAIR

Refit

7. Clean crankshaft sensor and mating surface of backplate.

8. Fit crankshaft sensor, fit bolts. Tighten to

7 Nm

9. Lower vehicle.

10. Position lead to bracket, fit and tighten screw.

11. Connect multiplug

Mpi

FUEL TEMPERATURE SENSOR

Service repair no - 18.30.08

Remove

1. Disconnect fuel temperature sensor multiplug.

2. Remove fuel temperature sensor.

3. Discard sealing washer.

MEMS ENGINE CONTROL MODULE (ECM)

Service repair no - 18.30.01

Remove

1. Remove 3 bolts securing ECM.

2. Disconnect 2 multiplugs from ECM.

3. Disconnect vacuum hose from ECM.

4. Remove ECM.

5. Collect ECM spacers (LHD only)

Refit

4. Clean mating face of fuel rail.

5. Fit a new sealing washer to sensor.

6. Fit temperature sensor. Tighten to

7 Nm

7. Connect fuel temperature sensor multiplug.

Refit

6. Position ECM and spacers to wing [fender].

7. Connect vacuum hose to ECM.

8. Connect multiplugs to ECM.

9. Position ECM to mounting.

10. Fit bolts and tighten.

REPAIR

FUEL SYSTEM

CHARCOAL CANISTER

Service repair no - 17.15.13

Remove

1. Disconnect multiplug from purge valve.

2. Release clip and disconnect hose from purge valve.

3. Release clip and disconnect fuel tank hose from charcoal canister.

4. Unscrew bolt to release securing strap and remove charcoal canister.

THROTTLE CABLE

Service repair no - 19.20.06

Remove

1. Loosen 2 nuts securing throttle cable to abutment bracket.

2. Release throttle cable from throttle lever.

Refit

5. Fit charcoal canister and secure strap.

6. Connect fuel tank hose to charcoal canister and secure clip.

7. Connect hose to purge valve and secure clip.

8. Connect multiplug to purge valve.

3. Remove footwell closing panel.

4. Release split [cotter] pin from throttle pedal clevis pin.

5. Remove clevis pin and release cable from throttle pedal.

REPAIR

Mpi

6. Remove nut securing throttle cable bracket to brake servo and release cable.

7. Release grommet from bulkhead and withdraw cable.

THROTTLE POTENTIOMETER

Service repair no - 19.22.49

Remove

1. Disconnect throttle potentiometer multiplug.

2. Remove 2 screws securing throttle potentiometer, remove potentiometer.

8. Locate cable in bulkhead.

9. Connect cable to throttle pedal.

10. Connect cable to cam.

11. Adjust throttle cable.

Refit

3. Clean mating faces of throttle potentiometer and throttle housing.

4. Fit throttle potentiometer, fit and tighten screws.

CAUTION: Ensure throttle potentiometer is correctly engaged with throttle cam and that wiring outlet faces downwards.

5. Connect multiplug.

6. Check with diagnostic equipment.

REPAIR

FUEL SYSTEM

INTAKE AIR TEMPERATURE SENSOR

Service repair no - 18.30.09

Remove

1. Disconnect multiplug from temperature sensor.

2. Remove sensor from inlet manifold.

PURGE CONTROL VALVE

Service repair no - 17.15.39

Remove

1. Disconnect multiplug from purge control valve.

2. Release clip and disconnect hose from valve.

3. Release valve from charcoal canister.

4. Remove valve.

Refit

3. Clean sensor threads and mating face.

4. Fit sensor to inlet manifold. Tighten to

7 Nm

5. Connect multiplug to sensor.

5. Discard ’O’ ring.

Refit

6. Clean valve and valve location.

7. Position and secure valve to charcoal canister.

8. Connect hose to purge valve and secure with clip.

9. Connect multiplug to valve.

REPAIR

Mpi

FUEL RAIL AND INJECTORS

Service repair no - 19.60.04 - Rail

Service repair no - 19.60.10 - Injectors

Remove

1. Remove inlet manifold chamber gasket.

See

MANIFOLD AND EXHAUST SYSTEM, Repair,

Manifold Chamber Gasket - Mpi

2. Remove pressure regulator.

3. Remove 4 bolts securing fuel feed hose flange stiffening bracket, remove stiffening bracket.

4. Release fuel feed hose from fuel rail.

5. Discard ’O’ ring.

11. Discard outlet ’O’ rings from injectors.

12. Fix protective cap to each injector.

Do not carry out further dismantling if component is removed for access only.

13. Remove clip(s) securing injector(s) to fuel rail.

14. Remove injector(s).

15. Discard inlet ’O’ ring(s) from injector(s).

6. Disconnect 4 injector multiplugs.

7. Move injector harness aside.

8. Remove 2 bolts securing fuel rail to inlet manifold.

9. Release 4 injectors from inlet manifold.

10. Remove fuel rail complete with injectors.

16. Remove fuel temperature sensor.

REPAIR

FUEL SYSTEM

Refit

17. Clean fuel rail, temperature sensor and pressure regulator mating surfaces.

18. Fit fuel temperature sensor. Tighten to

7 Nm

19. Clean injectors and injector recesses in fuel rail and inlet manifold.

20. Fit new ’O’ ring(s) to inlet end of injector(s).

21. Fit injector(s) to fuel rail, fit and secure clip(s).

22. Fit new ’O’ rings to outlet ends of injectors.

23. Align injectors to inlet manifold and push fuel rail into position.

24. Fit fuel rail securing bolts. Tighten to

10 Nm

25. Connect injector multiplugs.

26. Remove plugs from fuel feed hose and fuel rail.

27. Fit new ’O’ ring to fuel feed hose.

28. Connect fuel feed hose to fuel rail.

29. Fit stiffening bracket.

30. Tighten stiffening bracket and feed hose bolts.

31. Fit pressure regulator.

32. Fit inlet manifold chamber.

THROTTLE HOUSING

Service repair no - 19.22.45

Remove

1. Loosen clip, disconnect hose from throttle housing.

2. Disconnect multiplug from stepper motor.

3. Disconnect multiplug from throttle potentiometer.

4. Disconnect breather hose from throttle housing.

5. Loosen 2 nuts securing throttle cable to abutment bracket and release cable.

6. Release throttle cable from cam.

7. Remove 4 nuts securing throttle housing to flexible mounting.

8. Release throttle housing from studs.

REPAIR

Mpi

FUEL PRESSURE REGULATOR

Service repair no - 19.45.06

Remove

1. Disconnect battery negative lead.

2. Position absorbant cloth around fuel pipe to fuel rail union. Loosen bolt to relieve pressure.

Re-tighten bolt.

Refit

9. Examine flexible mounting for splits or damage; renew as necessary.

10. Thoroughly clean throttle housing and mating face of flexible mounting.

11. Connect breather hose to throttle housing.

12. Position throttle housing to mounting studs, fit nuts. Tighten to

7 Nm.

13. Connect throttle cable to cam.

14. Adjust throttle cable.

15. Connect multiplug to stepper motor.

16. Connect multiplug to throttle potentiometer.

17. Connect hose to throttle housing, tighten clip.

3. Release clip and disconnect fuel hose from pressure regulator.

CAUTION: Plug the connectors.

4. Disconnect intake air temperature sensor multiplug.

5. Remove 4 bolts securing pressure regulator steady bracket to fuel rail and manifold, remove steady bracket.

6. Disconnect vacuum hose from pressure regulator.

7. Manoeuvre pressure regulator from fuel rail.

8. Discard ’O’ ring.

REPAIR

FUEL SYSTEM

OXYGEN SENSOR

Service repair no - 18.30.41 - L.H

Service repair no - 18.30.42 - R.H

Remove

1. Disconnect oxygen sensor multiplug.

2. Release multiplug from bracket.

3. Release harness lead from cable tie.

4. Remove oxygen sensor; recover sealing washer.

Refit

9. Clean pressure regulator and mating surfaces.

10. Fit new ’O’ ring to pressure regulator.

11. Fit vacuum hose to pressure regulator.

12. Position pressure regulator.

13. Fit steady bracket.

14. Fit bolts and tighten.

15. Connect multiplug to air temperature sensor.

16. Remove plugs, fit fuel hose to regulator and secure with clip.

17. Reconnect battery negative lead.

Refit

5. Fit sealing washer to oxygen sensor.

6. Fit oxygen sensor. Tighten to

55 Nm.

7. Secure multiplug to bracket, connect multiplug.

8. Secure harness lead with cable tie.

REPAIR

Mpi

AIR CLEANER

Service repair no - 19.10.01

Remove

1. Release clip and remove intake hose from air cleaner.

2. Ease air cleaner assembly bottom mounting rubbers from body.

3. Ease air cleaner from inner wing [fender] mounting rubber

4. Remove air cleaner.

Do not carry out further dismantling if component is removed for access only.

5. Release 4 clips securing top cover.

6. Raise top cover.

7. Remove air cleaner element.

Refit

8. Clean assembly body and top cover.

9. Fit air cleaner element.

10. Position top cover and secure with clips.

11. Position air cleaner assembly to body ensuring front spigots locate securely in wing [fender] mounting rubbers and bottom mounting rubbers are located in the body.

12. Fit intake hose and secure with clip.

REPAIR

CRUISE CONTROL COMPONENT LOCATIONS -

Tdi AUTO EDC

CRUISE CONTROL

COMPONENT LOCATION

Cruise control unit ...................................................

Engagement (on/off) switch ....................................

Cruise control switch ...............................................

Rotary coupler .........................................................

Vacuum pump .........................................................

Brake/vent switch ....................................................

Vehicle speed sensor ..............................................

Neutral lock-out relay ..............................................

Actuator ...................................................................

Under LH dash

Dash panel

Steering wheel

Box section under jack

Brake pedal

Transfer box behind transmission brake

Behind RH lower ’A’ post trim casing

RH engine compartment

DESCRIPTION AND OPERATION

FUEL SYSTEM

CRUISE CONTROL SYSTEM - V8i/Tdi AUTO EDC

Description

The cruise control system consists of electro-mechanical devices, and comprises of the following components.

ELECTRONIC CONTROL UNIT (ECU)

The microprocessor based ECU evaluates the signals provided by the driver controls, brake pedal switch, clutch pedal switch on manual models, and the vehicle speed sensor. The ECU activates the vacuum pump as required. The ECU also has a memory function for set speed storage.

Driver operated switches

The main cruise control switch is located in the auxiliary switch panel and activates the cruise control system. The steering wheel switches provide

’set/accelerate’ and ’resume/decelerate’ features.

These switches provide the interface between driver and cruise control system.

Brake pedal switch

The brake pedal switch is located under the lower dash attached to the brake pedal mounting bracket.

The switch provides for fast disengagement of the cruise control system and rapid return of the throttle levers to the idle position when the brake pedal is applied.

Clutch pedal switch

The clutch pedal switch is located under the lower dash attached to the clutch pedal mounting bracket.

The switch provides for fast disengagement of the cruise control system and rapid return of the throttle levers to the idle position when the clutch pedal is applied.

Vehicle speed sensor

The vehicle speed sensor is located on the side of the transfer box adjacent to park brake. The sensor provides road speed data to the ECU. The cruise control system cannot be engaged until the road speed exceeds 45 km/h, (28 mph) the system will automatically disengage at a road speed of 42 km/h

(26 mph).

Vacuum pump

The vacuum pump is energised when the main cruise control switch is operated, and is actuated by the steering wheel and brake pedal switches. The pump provides a vacuum source to the cruise control actuator. A control valve in the pump provides for steady increase of road speed or purge of the system when the brake pedal is applied.

Actuator

The actuator provides the servo mechanism link between the cruise control system and throttle linkage and is operated by vacuum from the vacuum pump.

Neutral lockout relay - automatic vehicles

The relay module is located in the right hand side footwell, accessible by removing the trim casing.

The function of the relay module is to disengage the cruise control system if neutral, or park, is selected in the main gearbox, when the system is engaged.

Engine speed trip ECU - Manual vehicles

This unit is located in the right hand side footwell, accessible by removing the trim casing.

The function of the unit is to disengage cruise control if engine speed exceeds 5000 rev/min.

DESCRIPTION AND OPERATION

CRUISE CONTROL

ROAD TEST

CAUTION: Do not engage cruise control when vehicle is being used in low transfer gear or reverse.

WARNING: The use of cruise control is not recommended on winding, snow covered or slippery roads or in heavy traffic conditions where a constant speed cannot be maintained.

1. Start engine, depress main control switch to actuate cruise control system. Accelerate to approximately 50 km/h, (30 mph), operate

’set/acc’ switch, immediately release switch, remove foot from accelerator pedal. Vehicle should maintain speed at which ’set/acc’ switch was operated.

2. Operate ’set/acc’ switch and hold at that position, vehicle should accelerate smoothly until switch is released. Vehicle should now maintain new speed at which ’set/acc’ switch was released.

3. Momentarily touch and release ’set/acc’ switch, vehicle speed should increase 1.6 km/h (1 mph) for each touch. Note that five touches will increase speed 8 km/h (5 mph).

4. Apply ’res/decel’ switch while vehicle is in cruise control mode, cruise control should disengage.

Slow to approximately 55 km/h, (35 mph) operate ’res/decel’ switch, immediately release switch and remove foot from accelerator, vehicle should smoothly accelerate to previously set speed. Increase speed using accelerator pedal, release pedal, vehicle should return to previously set speed.

NOTE: The cruise control system fitted to the diesel engine is not as responsive as that fitted to the petrol engine, due to the characteristics of diesel engines. Therefore, at speeds below approx. 65 km/h (40 mph), the vehicle speed may drop when cruise is selected and then slowly regain the ’set’ speed.

5. Operate brake pedal, cruise control system should immediately disengage returning vehicle to driver control at accelerator pedal. Operate

’res/decel’ switch, vehicle should accelerate to previously set speed without driver operation of accelerator pedal.

6. Operate ’res/decel’ switch and allow vehicle to decelerate to below 42 km/h, (26 mph). Operate

’res/decel’ switch, cruise control system should remain disengaged.

7. Operate ’set/acc’ switch below 40 km/h, (28 mph), cruise control system should remain disengaged. Accelerate, using accelerator pedal to above 45 km/h, (28 mph), operate ’res/decel’ switch, and remove foot from accelerator pedal, vehicle should smoothly adjust to previously memorised speed.

8. Automatic vehicles - select neutral, system should disengage. Manual vehicles - depress clutch, system should disengage.

9. Cruise at 80 km/h (50 mph), declutch, select neutral, remove foot from clutch. Operate

’res/decel’ switch. Engine should rev to 5000 rev/min, cruise control disengages, engine returns to idle.

10. Engage forward gear. Operate ’res/decel’ switch. Remove foot from accelerator. Speed should accelerate to previous set speed.

11. Depress main control switch in control system should immediately disengage and erase previously set speed from ECU memory.

See

Electrical Trouble Shooting Manual.

ELECTRICAL TESTS

Electrical functionality can be checked using

TestBook.

CABLE SETTING - TDi AUTOMATIC MODELS

1. An incorrectly adjusted kickdown cable can prevent correct operation of the cruise control system.

See AUTOMATIC GEARBOX,

Adjustment, kickdown cable adjustment.

FAULT DIAGNOSIS

BRAKE AND CLUTCH PEDAL SWITCHES/VENT

VALVES

Service repair no - 19.75.34 - Clutch Switch

Service repair no - 19.75.35 - Brake Switch

Remove

CRUISE CONTROL

1. Remove 3 studs securing driver’s side fascia closing panel.

2. Release and move closing panel aside.

3. Locate and release locking sleeve.

4. Release switch/vent valve from pedal bracket.

5. Disconnect vacuum hose and harness connector from switch.

6. Remove switch.

Refit

7. Reverse removal procedure.

NOTE: Ensure locking sleeve is correctly positioned.

REPAIR

FUEL SYSTEM

ENGAGEMENT (ON/OFF) SWITCH

Service repair no - 19.75.30

Switch Replacement

Remove

1. Disconnect battery negative lead.

CRUISE CONTROL SWITCH

Service repair no - 19.75.36

Remove

1. Disconnect battery negative lead.

2. Models fitted with airbags: Remove driver’s airbag module.

See SUPPLEMENTARY

RESTRAINT SYSTEM, Repair, Driver’s

Airbag Module

2. Carefully release auxiliary switch panel from fascia.

3. Disconnect multiplug from switch.

4. Depress retaining lugs on switch, remove switch from panel.

Bulb replacement

5. Position switch to facilitate removal of bulb.

6. Rotate bulb holder 90

° and withdraw it from switch.

3. Models without airbags: Turn steering wheel through 90

. Remove 2 Torx screws securing pad to steering wheel and remove steering wheel pad.

4. Disconnect cruise control switch multiplug from main harness.

REPAIR

CRUISE CONTROL

5. Disconnect 2 Lucars from horn contacts.

6. Remove 2 screws securing cruise control switch to steering wheel.

7. Remove 3 bolts securing mounting bracket to steering wheel and remove mounting bracket.

8. Remove cruise control switch from steering wheel.

Refit

9. Reverse removal procedure. Ensuring wiring harness is routed correctly.

10. Models fitted with airbags: Refit driver’s airbag module and follow all safety precautions.

See

SUPPLEMENTARY RESTRAINT SYSTEM,

Repair, Driver’s Airbag Module

ROTARY COUPLER

Service repair no - 19.75.54

The rotary coupler is located behind the steering wheel. Access is gained by removing the steering wheel and steering column shroud.

NOTE: On vehicles fitted with airbags.

See

SUPPLEMENTARY RESTRAINT SYSTEM,

Repair, Rotary Coupler

Remove

1. Disconnect battery negative lead.

2. Remove steering wheel.

See STEERING,

Repair, Steering Wheel

3. Release 2 turnbuckles securing lower dash closing panel and lower.

4. Remove 3 screws securing lower half of shroud to steering column.

5. Disconnect rotary coupler multiplug from steering column harness.

REPAIR

FUEL SYSTEM

NOTE: If rotary coupler is to be re-used a piece of adhesive tape should be placed around the moulding in position A to prevent rotation. Failure to do this may result in damage to the wires inside the coupler.

6. Release clips securing rotary coupler to column stalk assembly.

7. Remove rotary coupler from column stalk assembly.

ACTUATOR - V8i

Service repair no - 19.75.12

Remove

NOTE: The actuator is non serviceable, fit a new unit if failure or damage occurs.

1. Disconnect battery negative lead.

2. Disconnect vacuum hose from actuator.

3. Remove nut securing actuator to throttle bracket.

4. Remove actuator, and manoeuvre actuator operating link off throttle lever.

5. Withdraw actuator.

CAUTION: Ensure front wheels are in the straight ahead position before removal and refitting. Store in a plastic bag. DO

NOT rotate mechanism whilst removed.

Refit

8. Reverse removal procedure. Ensuring that the column harnesses are not trapped by the column shroud.

NOTE: If original rotary coupler is to be fitted and there is evidence of tampering, it is imperative that the coupler is centralised.

See SUPPLEMENTARY RESTRAINT

SYSTEM, Repair, Rotary Coupler

NOTE: If a new rotary coupler is to be fitted and the sealing tape is broken it

MUST NOT be used. Ensure rotary coupler lugs are correctly engaged in the rear of the steering wheel.

Refit

6. Inspect rubber diaphragm. Fit a new actuator assembly if diaphragm is damaged.

7. Reverse removal procedure. Fitting the hook uppermost.

REPAIR

CRUISE CONTROL

ACTUATOR LINK-SETTING - V8i

Service repair no - 19.75.21

NOTE: Setting procedure is carried out at minimum throttle condition only.

1. Ensure ignition is switched ’OFF’.

2. Check clearance between inside edge of actuator link and recessed diameter of throttle lever. Clearance should be 0.2 to 2.0 mm.

Link - adjust

3. Remove link from actuator.

4. Rotate socket joint adjuster as necessary.

5. Refit link to actuator and recheck clearance between link and lever.

6. With throttle fully open, check a gap of at least

3mm exists between side of link ("A" in illustration) and side of small spring ("B" in illustration). Realign link by bending to achieve correct gap. Recheck clearance at closed throttle/open throttle. Check link slides smoothly in groove of throttle lever.

REPAIR

FUEL SYSTEM

VACUUM PUMP - TDI

Service repair no - 19.75.06

Remove

NOTE: The vacuum pump is non serviceable, fit a new unit if failure or damage occurs.

1. Release turnbuckle securing wheel chock and remove.

5. Release multiplug cover and disconnect multiplug from pump.

6. Disconnect vacuum hose from pump.

7. Remove pump.

Refit

8. Reverse removal procedure. Ensure all hose and electrical connections are secure.

2. Release strap securing jack and remove.

3. Release 3 pump mounting rubbers from vehicle body.

4. Manoeuvre pump out of box section.

REPAIR

CRUISE CONTROL ECU - V8i

Service repair no - 19.75.49

Remove

1. Remove lower dash panel.

CRUISE CONTROL

NEUTRAL LOCK OUT RELAY

Service repair no - 19.75.28

1. Remove 3 studs securing fascia right hand side closing panel.

2. Release and move closing panel aside.

2. Disconnect ECU multi-plug.

3. Remove ECU fixing.

4. Remove ECU.

5. Reverse removal procedure. Ensuring that electrical multi-plug is securely reconnected.

SPEED TRIP ECU - MANUAL V8i right hand side footwell. To identify components.

See Electrical Trouble Shooting

Manual.

NOTE: The neutral lock out relay module/speed trip ECU is mounted in the

3. Remove 2 studs securing right hand side ’A’ post lower trim casing.

4. Remove casing.

5. Locate relay (neutral coloured base) and release base from bracket.

6. Remove relay.

NOTE: For further information.

See

Electrical Trouble Shooting Manual.

Refit

7. Reverse removal procedure.

VEHICLE SPEED SENSOR

Service repair no - 18.30.22

For Tdi

See FUEL SYSTEM Tdi, Repair, Vehicle

Speed Sensor

For V8i

See FUEL SYSTEM MFI, Repair, Vehicle

Speed Sensor

REPAIR

FUEL SYSTEM

ACTUATOR - Tdi

Service repair no - 19.75.05

NOTE: The actuator is non serviceable, fit a new unit if failure or damage occurs.

Remove

1. Disconnect battery negative lead.

Refit

2. Remove split pin, withdraw clevis pin and disconnect cable from lever.

3. Disconnect link ball end from cable lever.

4. Disconnect vacuum hose from actuator.

5. Remove nut securing actuator to bracket and remove actuator.

6. Inspect rubber diaphragm. Fit a new actuator assembly if diaphragm is damaged.

7. Check that link setting distance (dimension ’A’) equals 16 mm and that the retainer is locked in position. If correct, proceed to paragraph 9.

8. If dimension ’A’ is not correct, proceed as follows:

•

Measure 16 mm from diaphragm collar and mark the position.

•

Position link and retainer to the mark and rotate retainer half a turn to secure.

•

Check measurement ’A’ is still 16 mm, then turn retainer a further quarter turn to lock.

9. Fit actuator and secure to bracket with nut.

10. Connect vacuum hose.

11. Connect link ball end to cable lever.

12. Connect cable to lever and secure with clevis pin and split pin.

13. Adjust cable position to remove any free play from link, setting dimension ’B’ should be 103 mm.

REPAIR

CRUISE CONTROL

CRUISE CONTROL ECU - Tdi

Service repair no - 19.75.49

Remove

1. Remove 4 studs securing fascia left hand closing panel.

2. Remove closing panel.

6. Open glove box, align stops with cut-outs in fascia panel and lower.

7. Move SRS harness aside.

8. Remove top nut securing ECU to bracket.

9. Disconnect ECU multiplug.

10. Remove ECU.

Refit

11. Reverse removal procedure. Ensure electrical multiplug is securely reconnected.

3. Remove nut securing ECU/relay bracket.

4. Lower bracket for access.

5. Remove bottom nut securing ECU to bracket.

REPAIR

Tdi

ENGINE COOLING

Description

The Tdi engine uses a pressurized cooling system and cross flow radiator which is supplied from a separate header tank. The radiator assembly is in three sections. The largest section is for engine coolant and the other two sections which are cast in aluminium, are the engine oil cooler and the turbo charger intercooler.

A belt driven viscous fan and centrifugal water pump is located in the front of the cylinder block. Hot coolant is supplied to the heater through hoses. Two small diameter air purge hoses connect the top of the radiator and cylinder head water gallery, to the header tank.

COOLANT CIRCULATION

Operation

When the engine is started from cold the thermostat prevents any coolant circulation through the radiator by closing off the top hose. During the engine warm up period, the water pump, pumps coolant towards the rear of the cylinder block around each of the cylinders. Coolant as it is heated rises through ports in the cylinder block and head gasket, into the cylinder head.The coolant flows forwards to the thermostat, by-pass port and radiator top hose connection.

Start from cold (thermostat closed)

While the thermostat is closed, coolant circulates around the cylinder block and cylinder head via the by-pass.

Engine warm (thermostat open)

When the engine reaches normal running temperature the thermostat closes off the by-pass and opens the flow to the top of the radiator.

Coolant circulation (engine cold)

1. Cross flow radiator

2. Header tank

3. Viscous fan

4. Heater hoses

5. By pass hose and engine thermostat

6. Air purge hoses

7. Coolant pump

DESCRIPTION AND OPERATION

COOLING SYSTEM

VISCOUS FAN

Description

The viscous drive unit for the engine cooling fan, provides a means of controlling the speed of the fan relative to the running temperature of the engine. The viscous unit is a type of fluid coupling, which drives the fan blades through the medium of a special

’silicone fluid’ injected into the unit during manufacture.

Operation

The viscous unit consists of two principal components:

An inner member 1 which is secured to water pump spindle and is driven by the fan belt.

An outer member 2 which has the fan blades attached, houses the working parts and is driven through the medium of the viscous fluid.

The inner and outer members have interlocking annular grooves machined in each, with a small running clearance 3 to allow the silicone fluid to circulate through the valve plate 4.

The unit also contains a valve 5 which is controlled by an external bi-metal thermostat 6.

Starting engine from cold

During the time the engine is at rest the silicone fluid drains down, half filling chambers A and B. Thus when the engine is first started sufficient fluid is present in chamber A to provide a positive drive between the members, as is evident by the initial noise of the fan.

However within a very short period of time, after starting the engine, the fan speed and noise will decline indicating that the fluid is being centrifuged into chamber B (as seen in RR3757M) causing the drive to slip.

1. Drive in from water pump spindle

2. Drive out to fan blades

3. Bi-metal

DESCRIPTION AND OPERATION

Tdi

Hot conditions

When operating in high ambient temperatures or when stationary in traffic, the bi-metel thermostat will operate and open the valve port between chambers A and B.

Opening the valve (as shown in RR3758M) allows the fluid to circulate between the two members, causing the unit to couple, thus increasing the fan speed and cooling effect.

Viscous unit slipping (Engine at normal running temperature)

1. Inner member (drive in fast)

2. Outer member (drive out slow)

3. Running clearance

4. Valve plate

5. Valve (closed)

6. Bi-metal

7. Fluid seals

8. Ball race

A Fluid chamber

B Fluid chamber

If the engine speed is increased the degree of slip will also increase to limit the maximum fan speed.

Viscous unit coupled (Hot running conditions)

Bi-metal expanded, valve (open)

DESCRIPTION AND OPERATION

Tdi

ENGINE OVERHEATING

Before conducting any cooling system diagnosis:

See

Description and operation, Engine Cooling

1. Is coolant level correct?

NO Allow engine to cool, top up level to expansion tank seam.

YES - Continue.

2. Is drive belt tension correct?

NO -

See ENGINE, Repair, Compressor

Drive Belt

YES - Continue.

3. Is coolant in radiator frozen?

YES - Slowly thaw and drain system.

See

Adjustment, Coolant

NO Continue.

4. Is air flow through radiator restricted or blocked?

YES - Apply air pressure from engine side of radiator to clear obstruction.

NO Continue.

5. Are there any external leaks, from water pump, engine gaskets, fast idle thermostat or the heater unit?

YES - Investigate and rectify.

See Adjustment,

Coolant

NO Continue.

6. Are fan blades fitted correct way round, concave side towards engine?

NO Rectify.

YES - Continue

7. Is viscous unit operating correctly?

See

Description and operation, Viscous Fan

NO Renew.

See Repair, Viscous

Coupling, Fan Blades, Pulley and Fan

Cowl

YES - Carry out a pressure test on radiator cap and system. Check thermostat type, operation and correct fitting.

See Repair,

Thermostat

If pressure test leads you to suspect coolant leakage across gaskets, go to check 10, otherwise: Continue.

8. Are the air conditioning fans operating correctly?

See Electrical Trouble Shooting Manual.

NO Rectify.

YES - Continue.

9. Is temperature sender and gauge giving accurate readings?

NO Sustitute parts and compare readings.

YES - Continue.

10. Carry out cylinder pressure test to determine if pressure is leaking into cooling system causing over pressurising and loss of coolant.

If problem is not diagnosed, check the coolant system for engine oil contamination and engine lubrication system for coolant contamination.

If only the coolant system is contaminated suspect a cylinder head gasket.

If both systems are contaminated, suspect the radiator.

If only the lubrication system is contaminated with coolant, suspect leakage past cylinder liner seals or cylinder head gasket.

FAULT DIAGNOSIS

COOLING SYSTEM

ENGINE RUNS COLD

Before conducting any cooling system diagnosis:

See

Description and operation, Engine Cooling

1. Check operation of viscous unit.

See

Description and operation, Viscous Fan

Is viscous unit operating correctly?

NO -

See Repair, Viscous Coupling, Fan

Blades, Pulley and Fan Cowl

YES - Continue.

2. Is thermostat correct type and operating?

See

Repair, Thermostat

If problem is not diagnosed: Continue.

3. Are the air conditioning fans operating continuously?

YES -

See Electrical Trouble Shooting

Manual.

NO Continue.

4. Is temperature sender and gauge giving accurate readings? Substitute parts and compare readings. If problem is not diagnosed repeat tests, starting at 1.

FAULT DIAGNOSIS

Tdi

COOLANT

Service repair no - 26.10.01

Draining

WARNING: Do not remove any caps or plugs when the engine is hot. The cooling system is pressurised and personal scalding could result.

1. Remove expansion tank filler cap.

2. Disconnect bottom hose from radiator and allow coolant to drain into a container. Ensure container is clean if reusing coolant.

NOTE: When expansion tank has emptied, remove thermostat housing plug to assist drainage. Similarly when coolant level is below top of radiator, remove radiator plug.

3. Reconnect hose after draining and tighten hose clamp.

Refit

CAUTION: In order to expel ALL air from the cooling system, follow the procedures carefully.

NOTE: Refill procedure is slow but can be accelerated by squeezing hoses to assist removal of air from the system.

4. Add correct mix of coolant into expansion tank until radiator is full (as seen through plug hole on top of radiator).

See LUBRICANTS, FLUIDS

AND CAPACITIES, Information, Anti-Freeze

CAUTION: Take care to avoid excess coolant spillage from radiator.

5. Fit radiator plug.

6. Continue adding coolant into expansion tank until coolant appears in thermostat housing.

CAUTION: Take care to avoid excess coolant spillage from thermostat housing.

7. Fit thermostat housing plug.

8. Check coolant in expansion tank is level with indicator post. Add more coolant if necessary.

9. Start engine and run for 5 minutes.

10. Allow engine to cool, check coolant level in expansion tank; top up to level indicator post if necessary.

11. Fit expansion tank filler cap.

ADJUSTMENT

Tdi

VISCOUS COUPLING, FAN BLADES, PULLEY AND

FAN COWL

Service repair no - 26.25.03/05

Viscous coupling

Fan blades

Fan cowl

Fan pulley

Remove

- Remove 1 to 3

- Remove 1 to 4

- Remove 1 to 3

- Remove 1 to 6

WARNING: Disconnect battery negative terminal to prevent engine being started before removing or adjusting drive belt.

1. Slacken nut securing viscous coupling/fan blade assembly to pulley.

NOTE: Nut securing viscous unit to pulley has a left hand thread. Release by turning clockwise when viewed from front of viscous unit.

2. Drop viscous unit and fan assembly into bottom of cowling

3. Remove two fixings clips from top of cowling and lift cowling complete with viscous unit and fan out of lower mountings.

4. Remove fan blades from viscous coupling if necessary.

5. Remove serpentine drive belt and, if fitted, air conditioning compressor belt.

6. Remove pulley fixings, remove pulley.

NOTE: The serpentine belt is removed by using a hexagonal socket and tommy bar on the auto-tensioning pulley nut. Whilst tensioning the device the belt can be removed.

7. Reverse removal procedure. Ensure fan blades are fitted correctly. Fan is marked ’front’ and should be fitted with word ’front’ closest to radiator. Tighten to

30 Nm.

8. Refit drive belt.

See ENGINE, Repair, Drive

Belt

THERMOSTAT

Service repair no - 26.45.01

Remove

1. Partially drain cooling system, until coolant level is below thermostat housing.

2. Disconnect hose from thermostat housing.

3. Disconnect electrical connections to water temperature switch.

4. Remove outlet elbow.

5. Withdraw thermostat.

Test

6. Note rating of thermostat is 88

C. Place thermostat in a container half full of water. Heat water, observe temperature at which thermostat begins to open. Thermostat is satisfactory if its open between 85

C and 89

Refit

7. Insert thermostat with jiggle pin/vent hole upper most (12 o’clock position) .

8. Fit the outlet elbow and new joint washer.

Tighten to

28 Nm.

9. Reverse removal procedure. 1 to 3.

10. Check for coolant leaks around all connections and joint faces.

REPAIR

COOLING SYSTEM

WATER PUMP

Service repair no - 26.50.01

Remove

WARNING: Disconnect battery negative terminal to prevent engine being started before removing drive belts.

1. Drain engine cooling system.

See Adjustment,

Coolant

2. Remove top hose radiator to thermostat.

3. Remove top hose intercooler to induction manifold.

4. Slacken water pump and power steering pump pully retaining bolts.

5. Remove drive belt.

6. Remove centre nut from belt tensioner.

7. Manoeuvre pulley upwards and withdraw tensioner from retaining stud.

8. Disconnect hose thermostat to bottom hose, release hose from clip on water pump and move aside.

9. Remove water pump pulley.

10. Remove power steering pump pulley.

RADIATOR

Service repair no - 26.40.01

Remove

1. Drain cooling system.

See Adjustment,

Coolant

2. Disconnect radiator top hose.

3. Remove fan blade assembly.

4. Remove cowl.

5. Disconnect engine oil cooler connections and turbo intercooler connections from radiator ends.

NOTE: Oil spillage will occur when connections are loosened. Blank off exposed oil connections.

6. Disconnect expansion tank bleed hose from radiator.

7. Remove radiator securing brackets from each side.

8. Remove radiator unit by lifting from its location.

Check condition of rubber mounting pads.

Refit

9. Check radiator sealing strips are securely located.

10. Transfer oil cooler adaptors if fitting new radiator.

11. Reverse removal procedure. Tighten oil cooler connections to

30 Nm before fitting fan blades and cowl.

12. Check all connections for leaks.

11. Remove 8 bolts securing water pump, noting location of 3 through bolts.

12. Withdraw pump and gasket, clean all gasket material from mating surfaces.

Refit

13. Refit water pump in reverse order to removal using new gasket.

REPAIR

V8i

ENGINE COOLING

Description

The V8i engine uses a pressurised cooling system and cross flow radiator which is supplied from a separate header tank. The coolant radiator also incorporates a section at the left hand end for cooling the transmission oil and a section at the other end for cooling the engine oil.

The belt driven viscous fan and centrifugal water pump is located in the engine front cover with ports for circulation of coolant to both banks of cylinders and cylinder heads. Coolant returns to the top of the radiator via ports in the inlet manifold where the thermostat is mounted horizontally.

Coolant also circulates through the vehicle heating system and is used to heat air entering the inlet manifold plenum chamber.

Coolant circulation (engine hot)

1. Cross flow radiator

2. Header tank

3. Viscous fan and water pump

4. Heater pipes

5. Plenum chamber connection

6. Thermostat

DESCRIPTION AND OPERATION

COOLING SYSTEM

COOLANT CIRCULATION

Operation

When the engine is started from cold the thermostat prevents any coolant circulation through the radiator by closing off the top hose. During the engine warm up period, the water pump, pumps coolant around the cylinders to the rear of the cylinder block along the main galleries in both cylinder banks. At the rear of the cylinder block the coolant rises through a large port in each cylinder head/block joint face, and then flows forward to connect with ports at the front of the inlet manifold. From the manifold the coolant is carried by an external pipe to the heater unit and from the heater through another external pipe to the pump inlet.

The coolant circulation through the cylinder block and heads, does not change when normal running temperature is reached and the thermostat opens. But with the thermostat open, coolant flows through the top hose to the radiator where it is cooled and drawn back into the pump via the bottom hose.

DESCRIPTION AND OPERATION

V8i

Plenum chamber heating

Air entering the plenum chamber is heated by a flow of coolant from the inlet manifold which returns through a long hose, to the top right corner of the radiator.

VISCOUS FAN

Description

’silicone fluid’ injected into the unit during manufacture.

1. Hot water supply

2. Cold return to radiator

1. Drive in from water pump spindle

2. Drive out to fan blades

3. Bi-metal

DESCRIPTION AND OPERATION

COOLING SYSTEM

Operation

The viscous unit consists of two principal components:

An inner member 1 which is secured to water pump spindle and is driven by the fan belt.

An outer member 2 which has the fan blades attached, houses the working parts and is driven through the medium of the viscous fluid.

The inner and outer members have interlocking annular grooves machined in each, with a small running clearance 3 to allow the silicone fluid to circulate through the valve plate 4.

The unit also contains a valve 5 which is controlled by an external bi-metal thermostat 6.

Starting engine from cold

Viscous unit slipping (Engine at normal running temperature)

1. Inner member (drive in fast)

2. Outer member (drive out slow)

3. Running clearance

4. Valve plate

5. Valve (closed)

6. Bi-metal

7. Fluid seals

8. Ball race

A. Fluid chamber

B. Fluid chamber

If the engine speed is increased the degree of slip will also increase to limit the maximum fan speed.

DESCRIPTION AND OPERATION

Hot conditions

When operating in high ambient temperatures or when stationary in traffic, the bi-metal thermostat will operate and open the valve port between chambers A and B.

Opening the valve (as shown in RR3758M) allows the fluid to circulate between the two members, causing the unit to couple, thus increasing the fan speed and cooling effect.

V8i

Viscous unit coupled (Hot running conditions)

Bi-metal expanded, valve (open)

DESCRIPTION AND OPERATION

V8i

ENGINE OVERHEATING

Before conducting any cooling system diagnosis:

See

Description and operation, Engine Cooling

1. Is coolant level correct?

NO Allow engine to cool, top up level to expansion tank seam.

YES - Continue.

2. Is drive belt tension correct?

NO -

See ENGINE, Repair, Drive Belt -

Check Tension

YES - Continue.

3. Is ignition timing correct?

NO -

See ELECTRICAL, Adjustment,

Ignition Timing

YES - Continue.

4. Is coolant in radiator frozen?

YES - Slowly thaw and drain system.

See

Adjustment, Coolant Requirements

NO Continue.

5. Is air flow through radiator restricted or blocked?

YES - Apply air pressure from engine side of radiator to clear obstruction.

NO Continue.

6. Are there any external leaks, from water pump, engine gaskets or the heater unit?

YES - Investigate and rectify.

See Adjustment,

Coolant Requirements

NO Continue.

7. Are fan blades fitted correct way round, concave side towards engine?

NO Rectify.

YES - Continue.

8. Is viscous unit operating correctly?

See

Description and operation, Viscous Fan

NO Renew.

See Repair, Viscous

Coupling, Fan Blades, Pulley and Fan

Cowl

YES - Carry out a pressure test on radiator cap and system. Check thermostat type, operation and correct fitting

See Repair,

Thermostat

If pressure test leads you to suspect coolant leakage across gaskets, go to check 11, otherwise: Continue.

9. Are the air conditioning fans operating correctly?

See Electrical Trouble Shooting Manual.K5

NO Rectify.

YES - Continue.

10. Is temperature sender and gauge giving accurate readings?

NO Substitute parts and compare readings.

YES - Continue.

11. Carry out cylinder pressure test to determine if pressure is leaking into cooling system causing over pressurising and loss of coolant.

If problem is not diagnosed, check the coolant system for engine oil contamination and engine lubrication system for coolant contamination.

If the coolant only, or both systems are contaminated, suspect cylinder head gaskets or radiator.

If only the lubrication stystem is contaminated with coolant, suspect inlet manifold or front cover gaskets.

FAULT DIAGNOSIS

COOLING SYSTEM

ENGINE RUNS COLD

Before conducting any cooling system diagnosis:

See

Description and operation, Engine cooling

1. Check operation of viscous unit.

See

Description and operation, Viscous Fan

Is viscous unit operating correctly?

NO -

See Repair, Viscous coupling, fan blades, pulley and fan cowl

YES - Continue.

2. Is thermostat correct type and operating?

See

Repair, Thermostat

If problem is not diagnosed: Continue.

3. Are the air conditioning fans operating continuously?

YES -

See Electrical Trouble Shooting

Manual.

NO Continue.

4. Is temperature sender and gauge giving accurate readings? Substitute parts and compare readings. If problem is not diagnosed repeat tests, starting at 1.

FAULT DIAGNOSIS

V8i

COOLANT REQUIREMENTS

Frost precautions and engine protection.

Cooling system MUST ALWAYS be filled and topped-up with solution of water and anti-freeze, winter and summer. NEVER use water alone, this may corrode aluminium alloy.

where only available natural water supply has some salt content use only rain or distilled water.

CAUTION: Do not use salt water otherwise corrosion will occur. In certain territories

Recommended solutions

Anti-freeze: Universal anti-freeze or permanent type ethylene base, without methanol, containing a suitable inhibitor for aluminium engines and engine parts.

Use one part of anti-freeze to one part of water.

Anti-freeze can remain in the cooling system and will provide adequate protection for two years provided that specific gravity of coolant is checked before onset of second winter and topped-up with new anti-freeze as required.

Vehicles leaving factory have cooling system filled with 50% solution of anti-freeze and water. This gives protection against frost down to minus 36

C (minus

F). Vehicles so filled are identified by a label affixed to radiator.

NOTE: Should ambient temperatures be below that stated above refer to

Anti-Freeze Data in Recommended

Lubricants, Fluids and Capacities in Section 09.

Instructions in chart must be strictly adhered to before driving vehicle.

After the second winter the system should be drained and thoroughly flushed. Before adding new anti-freeze examine all joints and replace defective hoses to make sure that the system is leakproof.

See the ’Recommended Lubricants Fluids and

Capacities’ for protection quantities.

See

LUBRICANTS, FLUIDS AND CAPACITIES,

Information, Recommended Lubricants and

Fluids

COOLANT

Service repair no - 26.10.01

Draining

WARNING: Do not remove expansion tank filler cap when engine is hot. The cooling system is pressurised and personal scalding could result.

See coolant requirements before refilling system.

1. Remove expansion tank filler cap by slowly turning it anti-clockwise, pause to allow pressure to escape. Continue turning it in same direction and remove.

2. Remove radiator filler plug and ’O’ ring to assist drainage.

ADJUSTMENT

COOLING SYSTEM

3. Disconnect bottom hose from radiator. Drain coolant into a clean container. Reconnect bottom hose, re-tighten hose clamp.

5. Pour correct solution of water and anti-freeze into expansion tank until radiator is full.

6. Start engine, run it until normal operating temperature is attained, topping up as necessary.

7. Refit radiator filler plug and ’O’ ring, with new ’O’ ring if required. Tighten to

6 Nm.

8. Fit expansion tank filler cap.

9. Allow engine to cool, check coolant level. Finally top up expansion tank until level reaches seam of expansion tank.

NOTE: It is not possible to drain all coolant retained in heater system. It is not desirable to flush through system, after draining.

4. Remove engine drain plugs, one each side of cylinder block, beneath exhaust manifolds. Drain coolant, refit and tighten plugs.

ADJUSTMENT

V8i

EXPANSION TANK

Service repair no - 26.15.01

Remove

WARNING: Do not remove expansion tank filler cap when engine is hot. The cooling system is pressurised and personal scalding could result.

1. Remove expansion tank filler cap by first turning it slowly anti-clockwise, pause to allow pressure to escape. Continue turning in same direction and lift off.

2. Disconnect two hoses from bottom of expansion tank, allowing coolant to drain into a suitable container.

3. Remove three fixing bolts, remove expansion tank.

VISCOUS COUPLING, FAN BLADES, PULLEY AND

COWL

Service repair no - 26.25.19 - Viscous coupling and fan assembly

Service repair no - 26.25.03 - Water pump pulley

Service repair no - 26.25.05 - Fan blades

Special tools:

LRT-12-093

LRT-12-094 - Viscous coupling removal

Remove

1. Disconnect battery negative lead.

Refit

4. Reverse removal procedure.

5. Replenish cooling system.

6. Check for leaks around all hose connections.

NOTE: 4.0 V8 only:

Release coolant hose from cooling fan upper cowl.

2. Release 2 clips securing cooling fan upper cowl.

Remove cowl.

REPAIR

COOLING SYSTEM

3. Use LRT-12-093 to prevent coolant pump pulley from turning and using LRT-12-094, unscrew viscous coupling from water pump.

NOTE: Nut securing viscous unit to water pump has a right hand thread. Release by turning anti-clockwise when viewed from front of viscous unit.

4. Remove fan and coupling assembly.

Refit

8. Clean fan blades and mating faces.

9. Fit fan blades to coupling. Secure with screws.

Tighten to

24 Nm.

10. Using LRT-12-093 and LRT-12-094, fit fan assembly to pump. Tighten to

56 Nm.

11. Fit cooling fan upper cowl. Secure with clips.

12. 4.0 V8 only:Fit coolant hose to cooling fan upper cowl.

13. Fit serpentine drive belt.

14. Fit pulley fixings, remove pulley.

15. Reconnect battery negative lead.

Do not carry out further dismantling if component is removed for access only.

NOTE: Mark fan with reference to assist refitting.

5. Remove 4 Allen screws securing blades to coupling. Remove coupling.

6. Remove serpentine drive belt.

7. Remove pulley fixings, remove pulley.

REPAIR

V8i

THERMOSTAT

Service repair no - 26.45.01

Remove

1. Partially drain cooling system, until coolant level is below thermostat housing.

2. Disconnect hose from thermostat housing.

3. Disconnect electrical connections to water temperature switch.

Refit

7. Insert thermostat with jiggle pin/vent hole uppermost (12 o’clock position).

8. Fit the outlet elbow and new joint washer.

Tighten to

28 Nm.

9. Reverse removal procedure. 1 to 3.

10. Check for coolant leaks around all connections and joint faces.

4. Remove outlet elbow.

5. Withdraw thermostat.

Test

6. Note rating of thermostat is 88

C. Place thermostat in a container half full of water. Heat water, observe temperature at which thermostat opens. Thermostat is satisfactory if it opens between 85

C and 89

REPAIR

COOLING SYSTEM

RADIATOR

Service repair no - 26.40.01

Remove

1. Drain cooling system.

See Adjustment,

Coolant

2. Remove viscous coupling and fan assembly.

See Viscous Coupling, Fan Blades, Pulley and Fan Cowl

Refit

9. Reverse removal procedure.

10. Clean unions and apply sealant.

11. Lubricate new ’O’ rings before fitting.

12. Check radiator sealing strips are securely located.

13. Transfer oil cooler adaptors if fitting new radiator.

14. Ensure that oil cooler connections are tightened to

30 Nm. before fitting fan blades and cowl.

15. Clean coolant/oil spillage from vehicle.

16. Check all connections for coolant/oil leaks.

3. Release 2 clips and remove fan cowl.

4. Disconnect radiator top hoses.

5. Disconnect four transmission and engine oil cooler connections to radiator end tanks. Note oil spillage will occur when connections are loosened. Blank off exposed oil connections.

6. Disconnect transmission oil temperature sensor.

7. Remove radiator securing brackets from each side.

8. Remove radiator unit by lifting from its location.

Check condition of rubber mounting pads.

REPAIR

V8i

REPAIR

COOLING SYSTEM

WATER PUMP

Service repair no - 26.50.01

Remove

WARNING: Disconnect battery negative terminal to prevent engine being started before removing or adjusting drive belts.

1. Drain engine cooling system.

See Adjustment,

Coolant

2. Remove fan blades and pulley.

See Viscous

Coupling, Fan Blades, Pulley and Fan Cowl

3. Disconnect inlet hose from water pump.

4. Remove water pump bolts.

5. Remove water pump and joint washer.

Refit

6. Lightly grease new joint washer, position on timing cover.

7. Clean threads of all long bolts and coat with

Loctite 572 thread lubricant-sealant.

8. Locate water pump in position. Tighten remaining water pump housing bolts evenly to

28 Nm.

9. Reverse removal procedure. 1 to 3.

10. Check for coolant leaks around all hose connections and joint faces.

REPAIR

V8i

TORQUE VALUES

NOTE: Torque wrenches should be regularly checked for accuracy to ensure that all fixings are tightened to the correct torque.

Oil cooler pipes ..........................................................................................

Radiator filler plug (plastic) .........................................................................

SPECIFICATIONS, TORQUE

Mpi

COOLANT PUMP

Service repair no - 26.50.01

Remove

1. Position drain tin below coolant pump hose.

WARNING: Do not carry out the next instruction until the coolant is cool to avoid personal injury from scalding.

2. Release clip and disconnect hose from coolant pump housing cover.

3. Remove 5 bolts securing housing cover.

4. Remove housing cover.

5. Remove coolant pump from housing.

6. Discard 3 sealing rings.

Refit

7. Clean coolant pump housing and mating faces.

8. Lubricate new sealing rings with Loctite 405 and fit to coolant pump.

9. Fit coolant pump to housing.

10. Position housing cover, fit 5 bolts. Tighten to

25Nm

11. Connect hose to housing cover and tighten clip.

12. Refill cooling system.

REPAIR

COOLING SYSTEM

RADIATOR

Service repair no - 26.40.01

Remove

1. Disconnect battery negative lead.

WARNING: Do not carry out the next instruction until the coolant is cool to avoid personal injury from scalding.

2. Slacken clip and release bottom hose from radiator, allow coolant to drain into a suitable container

3. Slacken clip and release bottom hose from radiator rail.

10. Slacken clip and release heater hose from radiator rail.

4. Slacken clip and release top hose from radiator.

5. Release air cleaner to throttle housing hose from securing brackets.

6. Slacken clip and release bypass hose from radiator.

7. Slacken clip and release top expansion hose from radiator.

8. Remove 2 bolts securing radiator side support brackets.

9. Collect L.H. support bracket and position R.H.

support bracket aside.

11. Disconnect 2 multiplugs from cooling fan assemblies.

REPAIR

12. With assistance lift out radiator assembly.

Do not carry out further dismantling if component is removed for access only.

13. Remove 2 bolts securing radiator rail to radiator.

14. Remove radiator rail.

15. Remove 8 nuts securing fan assemblies to radiator.

NOTE: Vehicles without air conditioning have one cooling fan fitted.

Mpi

Refit

16. Position fan assemblies to radiator and tighten nuts to

6Nm

17. Position radiator rail to radiator and secure with bolts.

18. Position radiator to vehicle.

19. Secure radiator to body with the side support brackets and retaining bolts.

20. Connect multiplugs to cooling fans.

21. Fit and secure 6 hoses to radiator.

22. Secure air cleaner to throttle housing to brackets.

23. Refill cooling system.

24. Reconnect battery negative lead.

REPAIR

COOLING SYSTEM

THERMOSTATIC SENSOR

Service repair no - 19.22.18

Remove

1. Disconnect Lucar connector from sensor.

2. Remove sensor.

THERMOSTAT

Service repair no - 26.45.01

Remove

1. Position suitable container to collect coolant.

2. Slacken 2 clips and release radiator top hose.

3. Release bypass hose from securing bracket.

4. Release top hose from securing bracket.

5. Remove top hose.

Refit

3. Clean sensor.

4. Apply Loctite 405 to threads of sensor.

5. Fit sensor and tighten to

15Nm

6. Connect Lucar to sensor.

7. Top-up cooling system.

REPAIR

6. Remove clip securing thermostat in hose.

7. Lubricate hose in front of thermostat and manoeuvre thermostat from hose.

Refit

8. Lubricate inside of top hose with liquid soap.

9. Manoeuvre thermostat into hose to previous position.

10. Fit and tighten clip securing thermostat to top hose.

11. Refit radiator hose.

12. Top-up cooling system.

Mpi

REPAIR

MANIFOLD AND EXHAUST SYSTEM

CATALYTIC CONVERTERS - V8i

Description

Catalytic converters which form part of the engine emission control system, are designed to ’clean’ the exhaust gases, by closely controlling the fuel air ratio delivered to the engine and converting the residual exhaust compounds into products more acceptable to the environment.

The front section of the exhaust system to each cylinder bank contain the ceramic elements of the catalytic converters. The oxygen sensors which transmit information to the fuel ECU for control of the mixture, are located in the exhaust down pipes.

The Hydrocarbons (HC), Nitogen oxides (NO x

) and

Carbon monoxide (CO) emitted by the engine react with the catalytic element and exhaust temperature to convert the toxic gas, into Nitrogen (N), Carbon dioxide (CO

) and water vapour.

Should the engine be supplied with a rich mixture causing high CO in the exhaust gas, the ceramic element will become coated and the useful life of the catalyst reduced. If the mixture is too weak, excess oxygen in the exhaust gas will cause the catalysts to burn out.

1. Catalysts

2. Lambda oxygen sensors

DESCRIPTION AND OPERATION

EXHAUST SYSTEM COMPLETE

Service repair no - 30.11.01

MANIFOLD AND EXHAUST SYSTEM

To improve sealing and accuracy of assembly, a two piece exhaust system is fitted.

NOTE: Ensure no exhaust leaks are evident in either a new or old exhaust system, as this will affect vehicle performance.

NOT attempt to disconnect any components until exhaust system has cooled down.

WARNING: To prevent personal injury occurring from a hot exhaust system, DO

REPAIR

MANIFOLD AND EXHAUST SYSTEM

Remove

Catalysts - remove and refit 1 to 5

1. Raise vehicle on a ramp [hoist].

2. Catalyst vehicles only: Disconnect two heated oxygen sensor wiring connectors.

NOTE: NAS models have four heated oxygen sensors fitted.

3. Remove two nuts securing rear exhaust assembly to front exhaust assembly.

4. Remove nuts and release front downpipes from manifolds. Discard gaskets.

5. Lower front exhaust assembly with catalysts (if fitted), retain olive.

NOTE: Assistance is required for removing and refitting rear exhaust assembly.

6. Remove bolts securing three hanger brackets to chassis. Lower exhaust assembly onto rear axle.

Detach rubbers from hanging brackets.

7. Place extended axle stands underneath chassis, in front of chassis mounted rear towing brackets.

8. Lower ramp[hoist] until vehicle weight is supported securely on stands.

9. Lower ramp [hoist] until rear shock absorbers are ALMOST fully extended.

10. Move rear exhaust to a diagonal position, centre silencer to right of vehicle.

11. Facing rear of vehicle, twist assembly anti-clockwise clear of rear axle.

12. Remove rear exhaust assembly from vehicle.

Refit

13. Position rear exhaust assembly over rear axle in a diagonal position, as for removing.

14. Twist assembly clockwise until it is in mounting position.

15. Reverse removal procedure. 1. to 9. using new manifold gaskets and applying exhaust sealer to system joint.

16. Examine system for leaks, ensuring that system does not foul underbody components. Rectify if necessary.

EXHAUST MANIFOLD - V8i

Service repair no - Left hand - 30.15.10

Service repair no - Right hand - 30.15.11

Remove

1. Disconnect front exhaust pipe(s) from manifold(s).

2. Tap back bolt locking tabs and remove eight bolts, lock tabs and washers.

3. Remove manifold(s) and old gaskets.

Refit

4. Ensure that mating surfaces of cylinder head and exhaust manifold are clean and smooth.

5. Coat threads of each bolt with anti-seize compound.

6. Place manifold and new gaskets in position on cylinder head and fit securing bolts, new lockplates and plain washers. Plain washers are fitted between manifold and lockplates.

7. Evenly tighten manifold bolts to 20Nm bend over lockplate tabs.

8. Reconnect front exhaust pipe, using new exhaust flange gaskets.

REPAIR

MANIFOLD AND EXHAUST SYSTEM - Tdi

MANIFOLD AND EXHAUST SYSTEM

Remove

1. Raise vehicle on a ramp [hoist].

2. Remove anti-roll[sway] bar bolts to chassis and allow to swing down clear of axle.

See REAR

SUSPENSION, Repair, Anti-roll [sway] Bar

Assembly Rear

3. Remove exhaust support bracket behind catalyst.

4. Disconnect exhaust at manifold.

5. Disconnect flange between rear and front exhaust.

6. Fit axle stands in suitable place on chassis.

7. Allow hoist to lower until front suspension is fully extended.

8. Manoeuvre front exhaust section fron underneath vehicle.

9. Remove bolts securing three hanger brackets to chassis. Lower rear exhaust assembly onto rear axle. Detach rubbers from hanging brackets.

10. Place extended axle stands underneath chassis in front of chassis mounted rear towing brackets.

11. Lower hoist until vehicle weight is supported securely on stands.

12. Lower hoist until rear suspension is almost fully extended.

13. Move rear exhaust to a diagonal position, centre silencer to right of vehicle.

14. Facing rear of vehicle, twist assembly anti-clockwise clear of rear axle.

15. Remove rear exhaust assembly from vehicle.

Refit

16. Position rear exhaust assembly over rear axle in a diagonal position, as for removing.

17. Twist assembly clockwise until it is in mounting position.

18. Reverse removal procedure instructions 1 to 15 using a new manifold gasket and applying exhaust sealer to system joints.

19. Examine system for leaks, ensuring that system does not foul under body components. Rectify if necessary.

REPAIR

MANIFOLD AND EXHAUST SYSTEM

EXHAUST MANIFOLD - Tdi

Service repair no - 30.15.10

Remove

1. Disconnect battery negative lead.

2. Remove heat shield from rear of air intake manifold.

3. Release dip stick tube from cylinder block.

4. Disconnect the intake hose from the manifold.

5. Remove the two bolts and two nuts securing the intake manifold to the cylinder head and withdraw the inlet manifold.

6. Remove air filter inlet pipe to turbo unit.

7. Remove intercooler pipe from turbo to intercooler.

8. Disconnect the EGR pipe from the inlet manifold hose.

9. Remove the three fixings at the exhaust pipe flange.

10. Release the turbo charger oil pipes from the cylinder block.

11. Remove the turbo boost pipes.

12. Remove seven bolts securing the exhaust manifold, release the heater rail and remove the manifold gasket, complete with turbo unit.

13. Remove four bolts and disconnect diaphragm rod from manifold, and remove turbo charger if necessary.

Refit

14. Reverse removal procedure. 1 to 12. Use a new manifold and exhaust flange gaskets.

15. Reconnect battery negative lead. Start engine and check for leaks.

REPAIR

MANIFOLD AND EXHAUST SYSTEM

INLET MANIFOLD GASKET - Mpi

Service repair no - 30.15.08

Remove

1. Disconnect battery negative lead.

2. Position absorbent cloth around fuel pipe to fuel rail union. Unscrew union to relieve fuel pressure. Re-tighten union.

CAUTION: Plug connections.

6. Release throttle cable from abutment bracket.

7. Release throttle cable from cam. Remove coolant bypass hose.

8. Disconnect fuel temperature sensor multiplug.

9. Release clip and disconnect brake servo hose from manifold.

3. Release clip and remove air cleaner to throttle housing hose.

4. Disconnect stepper motor multiplug.

5. Disconnect throttle potentiometer multiplug.

REPAIR

MANIFOLD AND EXHAUST SYSTEM

10. Release clip and disconnect breather hose from manifold.

11. Release 2 bolts securing cam cover brackets to manifold.

CAUTION: Plug the connections.

15. Disconnect intake air temperature sensor multiplug.

16. Disconnect fuel injector harness multiplug.

12. Remove 3 bolts securing engine harness to manifold.

17. Remove 2 nuts and 7 bolts securing manifold to cylinder head

18. Remove manifold assembly and collect gaskets.

13. Disconnect 3 vacuum hoses from manifold.

14. Release clip and disconnect fuel hose from pressure regulator.

REPAIR

MANIFOLD AND EXHAUST SYSTEM

Refit

19. Ensure mating faces of inlet manifold and cylinder head are clean.

20. Fit a new gasket, position inlet manifold to cylinder head.

21. Fit nuts and bolts, tighten in the order shown to the correct torque

25Nm

EXHAUST MANIFOLD GASKET - Mpi

Service repair no - 30.15.12

Remove

1. Raise vehicle.

2. Loosen 2 nuts securing downpipe to silencer box.

22. Position engine breather hose to manifold and secure with bolts.

23. Connect fuel injector harness and intake air temperature sensor multiplug.

24. Connect fuel hose to pressure regulator and secure with clip.

25. Fit fuel pipe to fuel rail, tighten union to

10Nm

26. Connect vacuum hoses to manifold.

27. Position engine harness and cam cover brackets to manifold, secure with bolts.

28. Connect breather hose and brake servo hose to manifold, secure with clips.

29. Connect multiplug to fuel temperature sensor.

30. Connect breather hose to throttle housing and secure with clip.

31. Connect throttle cable to cam and secure to abutment bracket.

32. Connect coolant bypass hose to throttle housing.

33. Connect stepper motor and throttle potentiometer multiplugs.

34. Connect air cleaner hose to throttle housing and secure with clip.

35. Connect battery negative lead.

36. Adjust throttle cable.

3. Remove 4 nuts securing downpipe to exhaust manifold.

4. Release downpipe from exhaust manifold.

5. Discard gasket.

REPAIR

MANIFOLD AND EXHAUST SYSTEM

6. Disconnect oxygen sensor multiplug.

7. Release multiplug from bracket on thermostat housing.

8. Release harness from cable tie.

16. Remove 3 bolts and 2 nuts securing exhaust manifold to cylinder head.

17. Release coolant rail bracket from manifold studs.

18. Remove exhaust manifold and discard gasket.

9. Remove drive belt.

10. Remove 2 front bolts securing generator to mounting bracket.

11. Remove 2 rear bolts securing generator to mounting bracket.

12. Move generator from mounting bracket and place aside.

Refit

NOTE: For torque values.

See

Specifications, torque, Torque Values

19. Clean mating faces of exhaust manifold and cylinder head.

20. Fit new manifold gasket and align exhaust manifold to cylinder head.

21. Position coolant rail bracket to manifold studs.

22. Fit manifold nuts and bolts, tighten to the correct torque in the order shown.

13. Remove exhaust manifold heat shield.

14. Remove dipstick and bolt securing dipstick tube to coolant rail.

15. Remove dipstick tube from cylinder block.

23. Secure oxygen sensor multiplug to bracket.

24. Connect oxygen sensor multiplug.

25. Fit new manifold flange gasket and align exhaust front pipe to manifold.

26. Fit nuts and tighten diagonally to the correct torque.

27. Tighten exhaust downpipe to silencer box nuts to the correct torque.

28. Position generator to mounting bracket.

29. Fit and tighten 4 generator securing bolts.

30. Refit drive belt.

REPAIR

MANIFOLD AND EXHAUST SYSTEM

MANIFOLD CHAMBER GASKET - Mpi

Service repair no - 30.15.37

Remove

1. Disconnect battery negative lead.

2. Position absorbent cloth around fuel pipe to fuel rail union. Loosen union to relieve pressure.

Re-tighten union.

6. Release throttle cable from abutment bracket.

7. Release throttle cable from cam. Remove coolant bypass hose from throttle housing.

3. Release clip and remove air cleaner to throttle housing hose.

4. Disconnect stepper motor and throttle potentiometer multiplugs.

5. Release clip and disconnect breather hose from throttle housing.

8. Disconnect fuel temperature sensor multiplug.

9. Release clip and disconnect brake servo hose from manifold.

REPAIR

MANIFOLD AND EXHAUST SYSTEM

10. Release clip and disconnect breather hose from manifold.

11. Release 2 bolts securing camshaft cover brackets to manifold.

12. Disconnect 4 vacuum hoses from manifold.

13. Remove 6 bolts securing manifold chamber to lower manifold.

14. Remove manifold chamber and collect gaskets.

Refit

NOTE: For torque values.

See

Specifications, torque, Torque Values

15. Ensure mating faces of manifold chamber and lower manifold are clean.

16. Fit a new gasket, position manifold chamber to lower manifold.

17. Fit bolts, tighten to the correct torque.

18. Connect vacuum hoses to manifold.

19. Position camshaft cover brackets to manifold, secure with bolts.

20. Connect breather hose and brake servo hose to manifold, secure with clips.

21. Connect multiplug to fuel temperature sensor.

22. Connect breather hose to throttle housing and secure with clip.

23. Connect throttle cable to cam and secure to abutment bracket.

24. Connect coolant bypass hose to throttle housing.

25. Connect stepper motor and throttle potentiometer multiplugs.

26. Connect air cleaner hose to throttle housing and secure with clip.

27. Reconnect battery negative lead.

28. Adjust throttle cable.

REPAIR

MANIFOLD AND EXHAUST SYSTEM

TORQUE VALUES

NOTE: Torque wrenches should be regularly checked for accuracy to ensure that all fixings are tightened to the correct torque.

MANIFOLDS AND EXHAUSTS - Mpi

Inlet manifold nuts and bolts ......................................................................

Fuel pipe to fuel rail ....................................................................................

Exhaust manifold nuts ................................................................................

Exhaust frontpipe to manifold ....................................................................

Exhaust downpipe to silencer box .............................................................

Manifold chamber gasket ...........................................................................

SPECIFICATIONS, TORQUE

CLUTCH

DESCRIPTION

The clutch unit fitted with the manual transmission, comprises a single dry plate friction disc and diaphragm spring clutch unit, secured to the engine flywheel.

OPERATION

The unit is operated hydraulically by the clutch master cylinder 12 and a slave cylinder 13 attached to the transmission bell housing.

1. Crankshaft and flywheel

2. Friction plate

3. Clutch cover

4. Diaphragm spring

5. Pressure plate

6. Fulcrum posts (9) for diaphragm spring

7. Bearing rings (2) for diaphragm spring

8. Retraction links and bolts (3) for pressure plate

9. Release bearing

10. Release lever

11. Release lever pivot post

12. Master cylinder

13. Slave cylinder

14. Master cylinder pedal pushrod

15. Primary shaft and taper bearing (in gearbox)

16. Gearbox front cover

17. Primary shaft flywheel bush

18. Pedal pivot and return spring

19. Hydraulic damper (Diesel only)

DESCRIPTION AND OPERATION

CLUTCH

When the clutch pedal is depressed, hydraulic fluid transmits the movement via the slave cylinder, release lever 10, bearing 9, to the inner fingers of the diaphragm spring 4.

The diaphragm spring 4 pivots on the bearing rings 7 and fulcrum posts 6 causing the pressure plate 5 to release the clamping force on the friction plate and linings 2.

As the the clamping force is removed from the friction plate 2, the plate slides on the splines of the primary shaft 15 and takes up a neutral position between the flywheel 1 and the pressure plate 5 , thus breaking the drive between the engine and the gearbox.

NOTE: Diesel engined vehicles have an hydraulic damper 19 fitted into the system.

The damper contains a steel diaphragm which absorbs slight hydraulic pulses caused by cyclic variations of the diesel engine crankshaft at low rpm.

DESCRIPTION AND OPERATION

CLUTCH

CLUTCH ASSEMBLY CONDITIONS

For the clutch to operate correctly as described and illustrated in the "Description and Operation", it is important the following conditions are satisfied:-

A. The primary shaft 15 must be free in the crankshaft spigot bush 17.

B. The friction plate 2 must be able to slide easily on the splines on the primary shaft 15, to a position where it does not contact either the flywheel or the pressure plate.

C. The friction plate must not be distorted or the linings contaminated with oil, which may cause it to stick or continue to run in contact with the flywheel or pressure plate.

A number of faults can develop in the operation of the clutch for a variety of reasons and although most faults are due to normal wear at high mileage, problems can also occur if the unit has been renewed by an unskilled operator.

Recognising and diagnosing a particular clutch fault is therefore of paramount importance in ensuring, that the problem is rectified at the first attempt.

Problems which develop in the clutch are as follows:-

A. Clutch spin/drag

B. Clutch slip

C. Clutch judder/fierce

CLUTCH SPIN - DRAG

Symptoms

Clutch spin is that, with engine running and clutch pedal depressed, the gears cannot be immediately engaged without making a grinding noise. This indicates the clutch is not making a clean break.

However, if the clutch pedal is held depressed for several seconds the friction plate will eventually break free from the engine and the gear will engage silently.

Clutch spin as it becomes more severe develops into clutch drag, making the silent engagement of a gear impossible, regardless of how long the pedal is held depressed.

CLUTCH SLIP

Symptoms

Clutch slip is most evident climbing a hill or when the vehicle is moving off from stationary with a heavy load. As the clutch is released slip occurs between the engine and the transmission, allowing the engine speed to increase without a corresponding increase in vehicle speed.

Clutch slip can develop to the stage where no power is transmitted through the clutch as the pedal is released.

CLUTCH JUDDER - FIERCE

Symptoms

Clutch judder or fierce engagement, like slip, is most likely to occur when the vehicle is moving off from stationary. As the clutch pedal is released the vehicle will move rapidly or in a series of jerks, which can not be controlled even by careful operation of the clutch by the driver.

It should be noted that a vehicle may display all the symptoms or any combination of the symptoms described, depending on the driving conditions vehicle load and operating temperatures.

FAULT DIAGNOSIS

CLUTCH

FAULT/SYMPTOM CHART

Slip

Symptoms

Spin/Drag

Judder/Fierce

Fault

Worn or oil on clutch linings

Mechanical damage

Distorted clutch plate

Failed or air in hydraulic system

Primary shaft tight fit in crankshaft bush

Clutch splines sticking

Weak clutch plate springs or insecure/worn engine/gearbox mountings

Insecure/worn propeller shafts

Insecure/worn suspension components/rubber bushes

For items refered to in this chart.

See Description and operation, Description

Item

4 5 6 7 8

12 13

15 17

2 15

CLUTCH NOISE - MECHANICAL FAULTS

Noise from clutch or gearbox in neutral, which disappears when clutch is depressed.

Suspect gearbox input/primary shaft bearings.

See MANUAL GEARBOX, Fault diagnosis,

Manual Gearbox

- Noise from gearbox in neutral, which disappears when clutch is depressed

Noise from clutch or gearbox in neutral, which changes tone or becomes worse when the clutch is depressed.

Suspect worn release bearing.

Knocking/rattling from clutch or gearbox in neutral, which is reduced or disappears when the clutch is depressed.

Suspect worn/weak release lever retainer or clutch unit.

Noise from clutch or gearbox in neutral, which disappears when clutch is depressed.

Suspect gearbox fault.

See MANUAL GEARBOX, Fault diagnosis,

Manual Gearbox

- Noise from gearbox in neutral, which disappears when clutch is depressed.

HYDRAULIC FAULTS

Unable to dis-engage clutch, little or no pedal resistance.

1. Check condition, specification and level of fluid.

2. Check pipes and cylinders for leaks.

3. Check that air vent in reservoir lid is clear.

Suspect faulty master cylinder if no fluid leaks present.

See Repair, Master Cylinder

Spongy pedal operation

1. Check condition, specification and level of fluid.

2. Check that air vent in reservoir lid is clear.

Suspect air in fluid.

See Repair, Bleed Hydraulic System

Clutch is difficult to dis-engage and/or does not immediately re-engage when pedal is released.

1. Check condition, specification and level of fluid.

2. Check that air vent in reservoir lid is clear.

Suspect pedal pivot, master cylinder or slave cylinder seizure.

See Repair, Master Cylinder

FAULT DIAGNOSIS

CLUTCH

CLUTCH ASSEMBLY

Service repair no - 33.10.01

Clutch pressure plate

Renew pressure plate if diaphragm spring fingers are worn or if pressure plate shows signs of wear, cracks or burning.

Clutch driven plate

Renew driven plate if centre hub splines are worn or if lining is contaminated, burned or unevenly worn.

Service tools:

Clutch centralising tool

LRT-12-001 - V8

LRT-12-040 - Tdi

LRT-12-057 - Mpi

Remove

1. Remove gearbox.

See MANUAL GEARBOX,

Repair, R380 Manual Gearbox

2. Mark position of clutch cover to flywheel for reassembly.

3. Remove clutch cover securing bolts, working evenly and diagonally.

4. Do not disturb three bolts in clutch cover.

5. Remove clutch assembly.

6. Withdraw clutch driven plate.

Refit

NOTE: To prevent clutch plate sticking, lubricate splines using Rocol MV 3 or

Rocol MTS 1000 grease.

7. Renew/refit clutch driver plate and clutch assembly using centralising tool, where applicable, align assembly marks.

8. Secure clutch assembly cover fixings evenly, working in a diagonal sequence. Tighten to

Nm.

9. Fit gearbox to engine.

REPAIR

CLUTCH

BLEED HYDRAULIC SYSTEM

Service repair no - 33.15.01

Procedure

NOTE: During bleed procedure, keep fluid reservoir topped up to avoid introducing air to system. For hydraulic fluid recommendations.

See LUBRICANTS, FLUIDS

AND CAPACITIES, Information, Recommended

Lubricants and Fluids

1. Attach suitable tubing to slave cylinder bleed screw.

2. Place free end of tube in a glass jar containing clutch fluid.

3. Loosen bleed screw.

MASTER CYLINDER

Service repair no - 33.20.01/03

Remove

NOTE: All flexible and pipe connections and joints should be tightened to

15 Nm.

1. Evacuate hydraulic fluid from system.

2. Disconnect fluid pipe at master cylinder. Plug master cylinder fluid port and seal end of hydraulic pipe to prevent ingress of foreign matter.

3. Lower fascia fuse box panel.

4. Remove master cylinder fixings.

5. Remove retaining washer and clevis pin from push rod and clutch pedal.

6. Remove master cylinder.

4. Pump clutch pedal, pausing at end of each stroke, until fluid from tubing is free of air.

Keeping free end of tube below surface of fluid.

5. Hold clutch pedal down, tighten bleed screw.

6. Top up fluid reservoir.

REPAIR

CLUTCH

Refit

7. Fit the master cylinder and fixings.

8. Fit push-rod to pedal and retain with clevis pin and washer.

9. Raise fasica fuse box panel.

RELEASE BEARING ASSEMBLY

Service repair no - 33.10.07

Remove

1. Remove gearbox.

See MANUAL GEARBOX,

Repair, R380 Manual Gearbox

2. Remove clutch slave cylinder.

See Slave

Cylinder

3. Withdraw retainer staple.

10. Fit fluid pipe to master cylinder.

11. Bleed system.

See Bleed Hydraulic System

4. Withdraw bearing and sleeve. If required, press bearing off sleeve. Fit replacement bearing with domed face outwards from sleeve.

5. Remove spring clip and fixings.

6. Withdraw release lever assembly.

Refit

7. Smear pivot with grease and fit release lever and retain with spring clip and bolt.

8. Smear release bearing sleeve inner diameter with molybdenum disulphide base grease.

9. Reverse removal procedure. 1 to 4.

REPAIR

CLUTCH

SLAVE CYLINDER

Service repair no - 33.35.01

Remove

NOTE: All flexible and pipe connections and joints should be tightened to

15 Nm.

1. Evacuate clutch system fluid at slave cylinder bleed valve.

2. Disconnect fluid pipe.

3. Remove two securing bolts and withdraw slave cylinder and backing plate.

4. If dust cover is not withdrawn with slave cylinder, withdraw it from bell housing.

9. Reconnect fluid pipe.

10. Replenish and bleed clutch hydraulic system.

11. Check for fluid leaks with pedal depressed and also with system at rest.

Refit

5. Withdraw dust cover and backing plate from slave cylinder.

6. Coat both sides of backing plate with Hylomar

P232M waterproof jointing compound.

7. Locate backing plate and dust cover in position on slave cylinder.

8. Fit slave cylinder, engaging push-rod through centre of dust cover and with bleed screw uppermost.

REPAIR

RENEWING HYDRAULIC DAMPER - Tdi

Service repair no - 33.15.05

Remove

NOTE: All flexible and pipe connections and joints should be tightened to

15 Nm.

1. Remove the pipe between the slave cylinder and damper.

2. Disconnect the hydraulic hose from the damper.

3. Remove the two bolts securing the damper to the bracket and remove the damper.

CLUTCH

Refit

4. Fit the damper to the bracket and tighten the two bolts.

5. Connect the flexible hose to the damper.

6. Fit the pipe to the slave cylinder and to the damper and tighten the unions.

7. Bleed the hydraulic system.

REPAIR

CLUTCH

MASTER CYLINDER

Service repair no - 30.20.07

1. Remove master cylinder.

See Repair, Master

Cylinder

Disassemble

2. Pull back and remove rubber sealing boot from pushrod.

3. Depress push-rod and extract circlip.

4. Withdraw push-rod assembly.

5. Withdraw piston assembly.

6. Withdraw retainer and spring.

7. Remove two piston seals and piston washer.

Inspecting

8. Clean all components thoroughly using new hydraulic fluid. Dry, using a lint-free cloth.

9. Examine cylinder bore and piston, ensure they are smooth to touch with no corrosion, score marks or ridges. If in doubt, fit new components.

10. Fit new seals and rubber boot. These items are all included in master cylinder overhaul kit.

11. Ensure that feed and by-pass ports are not obstructed.

12. Ensure reservoir cap vent is clear.

Assemble

NOTE: Cleanliness is essential, ensure hands are free of grease or dirt. Lubricate cylinder bore and rubber seals with new hydraulic fluid before assembly.

13. Fit a new piston washer and thinner of two piston seals, lip last, over piston nose, up against drilled piston head. Fit thicker seal into piston groove with lip facing towards seal at opposite end.

14. Insert spring and retainer into master cylinder bore.

15. Insert piston and seal assembly, ensuring that seal lips do not bend back.

16. Reverse 3 and 4, correctly locating circlip.

17. Stretch new rubber boot over push-rod, pack with rubber grease. Fit securely into locating groove.

18. Operate push-rod several times to ensure free movement of internal components.

19. Fit master cylinder.

OVERHAUL

CLUTCH

SLAVE CYLINDER

Service repair no - 33.35.07

Overhaul

1. Remove slave cylinder.

See Repair, Slave

Cylinder

Disassemble

2. Withdraw rubber boot.

3. Withdraw push-rod.

4. Remove circlip.

5. Extract piston and seal assembly, applying low pressure air to fluid inlet if necessary.

6. Withdraw spring.

7. Remove bleed valve.

Inspecting

8. Clean all components thoroughly using new hydraulic fluid, and dry using lint-free cloth.

9. Examine cylinder bore and piston which must be free from corrosion, scores and ridges.

10. Replace seal and rubber boot using appropriate repair kit.

Assemble

NOTE: Cleanliness is essential, ensure hands are free of grease or dirt.

11. Fit bleed valve. Do not overtighten.

12. Lubricate seals, piston and bore using new hydraulic fluid.

13. Fit seal into piston groove, lip of seal towards fluid inlet end of cylinder.

14. Enter piston assembly, spring first, into cylinder bore. Ensure that seal lip does not fold back.

15. Secure with circlip.

16. Fill rubber boot with rubber grease.

17. Reverse removal procedure. 1 to 3.

OVERHAUL

CLUTCH

TORQUE VALUES

NOTE: Torque wrenches should be regularly checked for accuracy to ensure that all fixings are tightened to the correct torque.

Clutch pipes

Master cylinder union .................................................................................

Pipe joint ....................................................................................................

Pipe to damper ...........................................................................................

Pipe out of damper .....................................................................................

Pipe to jump hose ......................................................................................

Jump hose to pipe ......................................................................................

Pipe to slave cylinder .................................................................................

SPECIFICATIONS, TORQUE

R380

MANUAL TRANSMISSION

Description

The all synchromesh five speed manual gearbox unit, is married to a LT230T two speed transfer gearbox.

All the gears including reverse run on needle roller bearings and the main, layshaft and primary shafts are supported by tapered roller bearings.

The whole of the geartrain is lubricated through drillings in the shafts, supplied by a low pressure pump driven from the rear of the layshaft. The gear change has a single rail selector and spool type interlock. The main and transfer gearboxes ventilate through nylon pipes, which terminate high up in the engine compartment to prevent water entry when the vehicle is operating in adverse conditions.

1. Mainshaft 1st gear

2. Mainshaft 2nd gear

3. Mainshaft 3rd gear

4. Primary input shaft

5. Mainshaft 5th gear

6. Layshaft

7. Mainshaft

8. Lubrication pump

9. Drain plug

10. Ventilation pipe

11. Single rail gear shift

12. 1st/2nd synchromesh

13. Oil seals

14. 3rd/4th synchromesh

15. 5th gear synchromesh

DESCRIPTION AND OPERATION

R380

MANUAL GEARBOX

Symptom - Gear jumps out of engagement (any forward gear)

1. Check condition and security of transmission and engine mountings.

2. Check in situ, gear lever and selector adjustments.

3. In situ, remove gearshift and check selector rail yoke security.

Also check selector detent spring tension and both spool retainers.

Suspect internal fault

See remove and overhaul procedure.

4. Check action/operation of main selector rail and forks.

5. Check condition of synchromesh and gear dog teeth.

6. Check main and layshaft end floats bearings and adjustments.

7. Check condition of all gearbox components, ensure clearances and adjustments are correct on reassembly.

Symptom - Reverse gear only jumps out of engagment

1. Check condition and security of transmission and engine mountings.

2. Check in situ, gear lever and selector adjustments.

3. In situ, remove gearshift and check selector rail yoke security.

Also check selector detent spring tension and both spool retainers.

Suspect internal fault

See remove and overhaul procedure.

4. Check action/operation of main selector rail and reverse lever.

5. Check condition of reverse gear, angled bearings and shaft.

6. Check condition of all gearbox components, ensure clearances and adjustments are correct on reassembly.

Symptom - Excessive force required to engage or change gear, vehicle stationary or moving.

1. Check lubricant specification and level, if low do not top up at this stage.

2. In situ, lubricate gear mechanism, and check selector adjustments.

3. In situ, remove gearshift and check selector rail is free and that the yoke is secure. Also check selector detent spring tension and both spool retainers.

4. Drain lubricant and check for contamination or metal particles.

Suspect worn synchromesh unit or baulk rings on affected gears. See remove and overhaul procedure.

Symptom - Noisy gear engagement, vehicle stationary.

See CLUTCH, Fault diagnosis, Clutch

Noise - Mechanical Faults

Symptom - Noisy gear selection, vehicle moving.

1. Confirm that clutch operation is satisfactory.

2. Establish which gear/gears is causing noise.

3. Check lubricant specification and level, if low do not top up at this stage.

4. Drain lubricant and check for contamination or metal particles.

Suspect worn synchromesh. See remove and overhaul procedure.

5. Check condition of synchromesh unit, springs and cones for distortion and wear. Also check dog teeth for damage and cone mating surface on gear for signs of overheating.

6. Check condition of all gearbox components, ensure clearances and adjustments are correct on reassembly.

Symptom - Noise from gearbox in neutral, which changes tone or becomes worse when clutch is depressed.

See CLUTCH, Fault diagnosis, Clutch

Noise - Mechanical Faults

FAULT DIAGNOSIS

MANUAL GEARBOX

Symptom - Noise from gearbox in neutral, which disappears when clutch is depressed.

1. Check lubricant specification and level, if low do not top up at this stage.

2. Drain lubricant and check for contamination or metal particles.

Suspect worn bearings on layshaft, primary shaft or front of main shaft. See remove and overhaul procedure.

Symptom - Noise from gearbox in one or more gears when being driven.

1. Check lubricant specification and level, if low do not top up at this stage.

2. Drain lubricant and check for contamination or metal particles.

Suspect worn roller bearings on particular mainshaft gears. See remove and overhaul procedure.

FAULT DIAGNOSIS

R380

R380 MANUAL GEARBOX

Service repair no - 37.20.02

Remove

WARNING: Where the use of a transmission hoist is necessary, it is absolutely essential to follow the manufacturer’s instructions to ensure safe and effective use of equipment.

1. Install vehicle on a ramp [hoist].

2. Disconnect battery earth lead.

3. Remove centre console.

See CHASSIS AND

BODY, Repair, Centre Console

4. Remove sound insulation from top of transmission tunnel.

5. Remove bolt and remove upper gear lever.

6. Remove screws securing gear selector lever and high/low selector lever draft excluders.

7. Remove draft excluder clamp rings.

8. Remove handbrake cable clevis pin clip and clevis pin.

9. Remove ’C’ clip and cable adjuster.

10. Select low range to prevent gear lever fouling tunnel when removing gearbox.

11. Remove bolt securing gearbox breather pipe clip to cylinder block.

12. Remove bolts securing fan cowl to radiator.

13. Release fan cowl from radiator and lay over fan blades.

14. Raise ramp [hoist].

15. Drain oil from main gearbox and transfer gearbox.

See SECTION 10, Maintenance,

Under Vehicle Maintenance

16. Remove exhaust front pipe(s).

See MANIFOLD

AND EXHAUST SYSTEM, Repair, Exhaust

System Complete

17. Release intermediate exhaust pipe(s) from mountings and tie aside.

18. Remove bolts securing clutch slave cylinder.

19. Release slave cylinder from clutch housing and collect spacer.

20. Mark propeller shaft drive flange relationships for reassembly.

21. Disconnect front and rear propeller shafts from transfer gearbox. Tie shafts aside.

22. Remove clamp and disconnect speedometer cable from transfer gearbox.

23. Release handbrake cable from transmission tunnel.

24. Temporarily support transmission in a way which enables the crossmember to be removed and a hoist cradle to be fitted.

REPAIR

MANUAL GEARBOX

25. Remove nuts and bolts securing transmission cross-member to chassis.

26. Remove nuts and bolts securing cross-member mountings to transmission.

27. Remove cross-member.

28. Manufacture an adapter plate to dimensions given in service tool section and attach it to a transmission hoist. To achieve balance of the transmission unit when mounted to hoist, it is essential that point A, is situated over lifting hoist ram. Drill holes B to suit hoist table. Secure the transmission unit cradle at point C using the lower bolts retaining transfer gearbox rear cover.

Raise hoist just enough to take weight of transmission.

29. Lower hoist sufficiently to allow transfer gearbox selector lever to clear transmission tunnel aperture.

30. Disconnect differential lock switch connectors.

31. Disconnect reverse lamp switch connectors.

32. Remove clips securing gearbox breather pipes to harness.

33. Support engine under sump with a jack.

CAUTION: Use a wooden block to protect sump.

34. Remove bell housing nuts.

35. Withdraw transmission whilst ensuring all connections to engine and chassis are released.

36. Remove transmission assembly from hoist cradle and position safely on a bench.

37. Remove breather pipes. Discard pipe union sealing washers.

38. Remove ’Nyloc’ nut, and remove bolt, securing lever to high/low shaft.

39. Collect spacer washer.

40. Remove 2 clips and remove differential lock lever link.

41. Remove lower locknut from high/low operating rod.

42. Place a sling round transfer box and attach to hoist.

43. Remove nut and 5 bolts securing transfer gearbox to extension housing.

44. Withdraw transfer gearbox.

REPAIR

R380

Assembling transfer gearbox to main gearbox

45. Clean extension housing and transfer gearbox mating faces.

46. Ensuring loose upper dowel is fitted, hoist transfer gearbox into position.

47. Fit and tighten nut and bolts to

34Nm.

48. Connect high/low operating rod, fit and tighten locknut.

49. Fit link to differential lock lever and secure with 2 clips

50. Align lever to high/low shaft, position washer, fit bolt and new Nyloc nut. Tighten to

2Nm.

51. Position breather pipes, secure pipe unions using new sealing washers. Tighten unions to

15Nm.

Fitting transfer gearbox and main gearbox assembly to engine

52. Position transmission assembly to hoist cradle.

53. Clean bell housing and engine mating faces.

54. Temporarily fit gear lever and select any gear in main gearbox to facilitate entry of gearbox input shaft.

55. Position and raise hoist, and fit transmission to engine whilst keeping wires and pipes clear to prevent trapping.

56. Fit and tighten nuts securing transmission to engine.

57. Connect reverse lamp switch connectors and differential lock switch connectors.

58. Secure breather pipes to harness with clips.

59. Position temporary support.

60. Remove 2 bolts securing lifting cradle to transmission and remove hoist. Apply Loctite

290 to bolts and refit bolts.

61. Position cross-member, loosely fit nuts and bolts securing cross-member mountings to transmission.

62. Raise transmission, align cross-member and loosely fit nuts and bolts securing cross-member to chassis.

63. Tighten all securing nuts and bolts. Remove supporting jack from under sump.

64. Remove temporary support.

65. Fit handbrake cable through transmission tunnel and secure gaiter.

66. Connect speedometer cable to transfer gearbox.

67. Line up marks and connect front and rear propeller shafts.

68. Clean spacer, clutch slave cylinder and gearbox mating faces.

69. Position spacer and slave cylinder, fit bolts.

Tighten to

25Nm.

70. Untie intermediate exhaust pipe(s) and refit exhaust front pipe(s).

See MANIFOLD AND

EXHAUST SYSTEM, Repair, Exhaust System

Complete

71. Refill main gearbox and transfer gearbox with oil.

See SECTION 10, Maintenance, Under

Vehicle Maintenance

72. Lower ramp [hoist].

73. Fit fan cowl, fit and tighten bolts.

74. Align breather pipe clip to cylinder block, fit and tighten bolts.

75. Fit handbrake cable adjuster and secure with ’C’ clip.

76. Align cable trunnion to handbrake lever, fit clevis pin and secure with clip.

77. Check handbrake adjustment.

See SECTION

10, Maintenance, Vehicle Interior

78. Fit upper gear lever, fit and tighten bolt.

79. Fit gear selector lever and high/low selector lever draft excluders.

80. Position draft excluder clamp rings, fit and tighten screws.

81. Refit sound insulation.

82. Refit centre console.

See CHASSIS AND

BODY, Repair, Centre Console

83. Connect battery earth lead.

REPAIR

R380

TORQUE VALUES

NOTE: Torque wrenches should be regularly checked for accuracy to ensure that all fixings are tightened to the correct torque.

Slave cylinder to bell housing

Breather

....................................................................

.....................................................................................................

Bell housing to cylinder block

High/low level to shaft

.....................................................................

.................................................................................

Transfer box to gearbox .............................................................................

NOTE: Torque values below apply to all screws and bolts used unless otherwise specified.

METRIC

...........................................................................

M8 ...........................................................................

M10 .........................................................................

M12 .........................................................................

M14 .........................................................................

M16 .........................................................................

105

180

UNC / UNF

1/4 ...........................................................................

5/16 .........................................................................

3/8 ...........................................................................

7/16 .........................................................................

1/2 ...........................................................................

5/8 ...........................................................................

136

SPECIFICATIONS, TORQUE

ADAPTER PLATE GEARBOX

Adapter plate for removing gearbox. This can be manufactured locally to drawing shown.

R380

MATERIAL AND WELDING SPECIFICATION

Steel Plate

Tube

Arc Welding

BS 1449 (Grade 4 or 14)

BS 4848 (Part 2)

BS 5135

SERVICE TOOLS

LT230T TRANSFER BOX

The LT230T transfer box is a permanent 4 wheel drive, two speed ratio reducing gearbox incorporating high and low range outputs with mechanically lockable centre differential (diff-lock). High/low range and diff-lock selection are made via a single lever located forward of the main gear lever.

A shiftlock device is fitted in some territories, it is used as a park facility and prevents accidental gear disengagement when the ignition is switched off. An audible neutral alarm is also fitted. This alerts the driver when parking to move the gear lever to the high or low position.

TRANSFER GEARBOX

DESCRIPTION AND OPERATION

TRANSFER GEARBOX

REAR OUTPUT DRIVE ASSEMBLY

1. Rear output shaft

2. Joint sealant

3. Speedometer drive housing

4. Speedometer drive pinion assembly

5. Speedometer worm drive

6. Spacer

7. Ball bearing

8. Circlip

9. Oil seal

10. Oil shield

11. Rear output flange

12. Sealing washer

DESCRIPTION AND OPERATION

TRANSFER GEARBOX

DIFFERENTIAL AND OUTPUT DRIVE ASSEMBLY

1. Differential selector assembly

2. Front output housing

3. High-low ratio cross shaft assembly

4. High-low selector shaft and lever

5. High-low selector fork and shaft

6. High-low selector finger

7. Differential lock selector shaft

8. Differential lock selector fork

9. Differential lock spring and clips

10. Front output housing cover and housing

11. Felt washer, steel washer and flange nut

12. Front output flange

13. Mud shield

14. Oil seal

15. Bearing

16. Spacer

17. Circlip

18. Differential carrier, front half

19. Differential carrier, rear half

20. Retaining ring

21. Front output shaft

22. Dog clutch, front drive lock-up

23. Selective shim

24. Bearing

25. Selective thrust washers

26. Sun and planet gears

27. Thrust washers

28. Cross shafts

29. Gear low

30. Hub and sleeve assembly

31. High output gear

32. Bush

33. Bearing

34. Bearing retaining nut

35. Differential lock switch

36. Differential lock detent ball and spring

DESCRIPTION AND OPERATION

TRANSFER GEARBOX

INTERMEDIATE GEAR AND POWER TAKE OFF

ASSEMBLY

1. Transfer case assembly

2. Transfer case bottom cover

3. Intermediate shaft and ’O’ ring

4. Oil seal

5. Retaining plate and anchor screw

6. Intermediate shaft nut

7. Bearing

8. Transfer mainshaft gear

9. Selective shim

10. Mainshaft transfer bearing housing

11. Joint sealant

12. Power take off cover

13. High low detent ball and spring

14. Intermediate gear cluster

15. Bearings

16. Collapsible spacer

17. Circlip

DESCRIPTION AND OPERATION

TRANSFER GEAR SELECTOR COMPONENTS

TRANSFER GEARBOX

1. Gaiter retaining screw - 4 off

2. Gaiter

3. Gaiter support plate

4. Gate plate

5. Gasket

6. Clip

7. Pin

8. Circlip, retaining nylon seat

9. Gear lever ball

10. Nylon seat

11. Cross shaft

12. Gear lever

13. Gear change housing

14. Non-metallic bushes

15. Countersunk screws

16. End cover

17. Selector fork

18. ’O’ ring seals

DESCRIPTION AND OPERATION

LT230T TRANSFER BOX - OIL LEAKS

Verify that the leak is from the transfer box and not the gearbox before proceeding.

1. Input seal.

2. Cover plate joints.

3. Front output seal.

4. Front and rear housing joint faces.

5. Rear output seal.

6. Power take off cover plate joint.

7. Bearing plate joint.

TRANSFER GEARBOX

FAULT DIAGNOSIS

TRANSFER GEARBOX

PROCEDURE

Prior to road test

1. Check oil level in transfer box is correct.

2. Check tightness of level and drain plugs.

3. Check breather system for blockage. To validate the system the pipe must be removed, inspected, rectified as necessary and refitted.

4. Remove all traces of oil from exterior of transfer box.

Take vehicle for short road test.

5. Identify source of leaks and rectify as follows.

Front or rear output seal leaking:-

1. Drain the oil and remove the leaking output flange.

2. Inspect the seal track on the flange for surface damage. If damaged renew component.

3. Remove and discard the oil seal.

4. Inspect the seal locating bore and remove any sharp edges which may damage the new oil seal.

5. Fit new seal.

6. Fit the output flange and all the other parts.

7. Add oil to correct level into the gearbox.

See

LUBRICANTS, FLUIDS AND CAPACITIES,

Information, Recommended Lubricants and

Fluids

Cover plate gasket leaking.

1. Drain the oil and remove the leaking cover plate.

2. Remove all traces of joint sealant from both joint faces.

3. Degrease all components and apply a thin film of

Hylomar sealant, to both joint faces.

4. Apply thread sealant to the bolts which come into contact with gearbox oil.

5. Refit cover plate.

CAUTION: Care must be taken not to overtighten the fixings.

Leak between the main and transfer gearboxes.

1. Site vehicle onto a ramp [hoist].

2. Select neutral in transfer box and select 4th gear in the main gearbox.

3. Run engine at 2000 rpm with the clutch/drive engaged.

4. Observe joint between the main and transfer boxes.

5. If oil leak is found establish if it is gear oil.

6. If so, the leak is originating from the transfer box.

7. Check the two inner (main/transfer) bolts are oil tight, as these holes are tapped through into the main transfer case.

8. Remove the transfer box to inspect the mainshaft collar seal track condition, and the front face of the transfer case for porosity.

See

Repair, LT230T Transfer Gearbox

9. If these areas require servicing, the transfer gearbox input seal must also be renewed.

CAUTION: Avoid damaging the new seal lip and ensure the seal is fitted flush with the machined face. Also ensure the new seal is not damaged when refitting the transfer gearbox.

10. If red A.T.F type oil is seen leaking during the workshop test, investigate the main gearbox for cause of leak.

Detent plug or electrical switch leaks.

1. Detent plugs and electrical switches do not usually leak. It must be noted that they fit into open tapped holes in the transfer case and therefore should be considered when looking for the source of the leak.

FAULT DIAGNOSIS

LT230T TRANSFER GEARBOX

Service repair no - 41.10.25

Remove

Adaptor plate for removing transfer gearbox

The transfer gearbox is removed from underneath the vehicle. Using a transmission hoist with an adaptor plate for securing the transfer gearbox to the hoist.

The adaptor can be manufactured locally to the drawing below.

WARNING: When using a transmission hoist it is essential to follow the hoist manufacturer’s instructions.

TRANSFER GEARBOX

REPAIR

TRANSFER GEARBOX

Remove

1. Site vehicle on a ramp [hoist].

2. Disconnect battery negative lead.

3. Remove fan cowl from radiator.

4. Remove transfer gear lever knob and gaiter.

5. Raise vehicle on ramp [hoist].

6. Drain oil and refit plug.

7. Detach heat shield at front exhaust pipe to manifold.

8. Disconnect electrics to Lambda sensors.

9. Remove catalytic converter assembly.

10. Remove chassis crossmember from under gearbox.

11. Remove heat shield from speedometer cable at transfer gearbox.

12. Remove clamp and disconnect speedometer cable from transfer gearbox. Tie cable to one side.

13. Mark for reassembly then disconnect propeller shaft to output flange, tie to one side.

14. Repeat on front propeller shaft to output flange.

15. Remove bolts retaining silencer front and rear securing brackets and tie silencer to one side.

16. Place four 30mm long spacers between top of hoist and adaptor plate, at securing points, and secure adaptor plate to hoist.

17. Remove four central bolts from transfer gearbox bottom cover, move hoist into position and secure adaptor plate to transfer gearbox.

18. Adjust hoist to take weight of transfer gearbox.

19. Remove tie bar, transfer gearbox to main gearbox.

20. Remove nuts and bolts securing right transfer gearbox mounting bracket to chassis.

21. Repeat for left mounting bracket. Removal of these fixings will also free speedometer transducer bracket.

22. Remove right side mounting bracket to flexible mounting rubber.

23. Lower hoist until rear brake drum clears passenger footwell. Check engine does not crush any components while lowering.

24. Loosen park brake adjustment nut.

25. Remove park brake drum.

26. Remove park brake assembly complete from rear output flange.

27. Disconnect leads from transfer gearbox temperature sensor and differential lock warning light switch.

28. Remove banjo bolt from breather pipe, retrieve sealing washers and lay pipe aside.

29. Remove split [cotter] pin and washers securing differential lock to connecting rod and disconnect rod from lever.

30. Select low range transfer gearbox position.

31. Remove high/low rod lower lock nut and remove rod from yoke.

32. Position hoist jack channel under bell housing.

33. Using wooden block support the main gearbox and bell housing.

34. Remove upper and lower bolts securing transfer gearbox to main gearbox.

35. Fit guide studs 18G 1425 to main gearbox and move transfer gearbox rearwards to detach.

REPAIR

TRANSFER GEARBOX

Refit

36. Select ’P’ in main gearbox, with low range and differential lock selected in transfer gearbox.

37. Secure transfer gearbox to adaptor plate on lifting hoist.

38. Ensure joint faces of transfer and main gearboxes are clean and guide studs 18G 1425 are fitted.

39. Raise hoist until transfer gearbox can be located over guide studs to main gearbox. At the same time locate high/low lower link to yoke.

40. Remove guide studs and secure transfer gearbox to main gearbox.

41. Complete refitting by reversing removal procedure, noting the following important points.

42. After removal of adaptor plate from transfer gearbox, clean threads of four bottom cover bolts, coat threads with Loctite 290 and fit together with spring washers. Tighten to

25Nm

43. Add correct grade of oil to transfer gearbox to oil level plug hole.

See LUBRICANTS, FLUIDS

AND CAPACITIES, Information,

Recommended Lubricants and Fluids

44. Check main gearbox oil level.

45. Check operation of parking brake and adjust as necessary.

See SECTION 10, Maintenance,

Vehicle Interior

REPAIR

TRANSFER GEARBOX

SHIFTLOCK SOLENOID/NEUTRAL SWITCH

Service repair no - 41.10.63/64

This is sited on top of the transfer gearbox. Access to the component is gained through the transmission tunnel aperture.

Remove

1. Disconnect battery negative lead.

2. Remove centre console.

See CHASSIS AND

BODY, Repair, Centre Console

3. Remove rear passenger heater air ducts.

4. Remove insulation pad.

5. Remove four screws and remove main gear lever assembly.

6. Drill out rivets and remove tunnel blanking plate.

7. Disconnect solenoid multiplug.

8. Remove four retaining bolts and remove shiftlock solenoid cover.

9. Remove solenoid and spring washer.

10. Clean joint sealant from mating faces.

Refit

1. Apply Hylosil or equivalent sealant to mating faces.

2. Ensure solenoid plug lead is located in cover recess.

3. Reverse removal procedure.

4. Fit four solenoid bolts. Tighten to

9Nm.

Neutral switch, audible alarm

1. Disconnect neutral switch electrical plug.

2. Remove neutral switch from transfer box.

Refit

3. Apply Hylomar PL32/L20 or SL500 sealant to neutral switch.

4. Reverse removal procedure.

5. Switch - Tighten to

25Nm.

KEY

1. Gearlever

2. Transmission tunnel aperture

3. Transfer gearbox

4. Bolt

5. Switch

6. Solenoid

7. Electrical connections

REPAIR

TRANSFER GEARBOX

TORQUE VALUES

NOTE: Torque wrenches should be regularly checked for accuracy to ensure that all fixings are tightened to the correct torque.

LT230T Transfer gearbox

Pinch bolt - operating arm to crank arm

End cover gear change housing

......................................................

.................................................................

Bottom cover to transfer case ....................................................................

Front output housing to transfer case ........................................................

Cross shaft housing to front output housing ...............................................

Gear change housing .................................................................................

Pivot shaft to link arm .................................................................................

Connecting rod to adjustable clevis

Anti-rotation plate intermediate shaft

...........................................................

.........................................................

Front output housing cover ........................................................................

Pivot bracket to extension housing ............................................................

Finger housing to front output housing

Bearing housing to transfer case

......................................................

...............................................................

Brake drum to coupling flange ...................................................................

Bearing housing cover to transfer gearbox ................................................

Rear output speedometer housing to transfer gearbox ..............................

Selector finger to cross shaft high/low

Selector fork, high/low to shaft

.......................................................

...................................................................

Transmission brake to speedometer housing

Gate plate to grommet plate

............................................

.......................................................................

Gearbox to transfer case

Oil drain plug

...........................................................................

..............................................................................................

Oil filler/level plug .......................................................................................

Differential case (front to rear) ...................................................................

Output flanges ...........................................................................................

Differential case rear stake nut ..................................................................

162

Transfer breather .......................................................................................

Transfer box front drive flange to drive shaft ..............................................

Transfer box rear drive flange to drive shaft ..............................................

Transfer gearbox mounting brackets to chassis ........................................

Mounting brackets to transfer gearbox ......................................................

Mounting rubbers to mounting brackets .....................................................

Shiftlock

Shiftlock screws

Neutral switch

..........................................................................................

............................................................................................

SPECIFICATIONS, TORQUE

TRANSFER GEARBOX

LT230T TRANSFER GEARBOX DATA

High range gear end - float ..............................................

Front differential bearing pre - load ..................................

Input gear bearing pre - load ............................................

Intermediate shaft bearing pre - load ...............................

0,05 to 0,15 mm

0.56 to 1.69 Nm

0.56 to 2.25 Nm

0.56 to 1.69 Nm

JOINT SEALANT

Joint faces use .................................................................

Shiftlock solenoid cover ...................................................

Neutral switch ...................................................................

BLS. 22SE03 TYPE 2

HYLOSIL RTV

HYLOMAR

SPECIFICATIONS, TORQUE

LT230T TRANSFER GEARBOX

TRANSFER GEARBOX

LRT-51-003 Drive flange wrench

18G 1205

18G 1271

Oil seal remover

LRT-37-014 Mainshaft rear oil seal replacer

18G 1422

LRT-99-003 Oil seal replacer handle

MS 550 or 18G 134

SERVICE TOOLS

DESCRIPTION

The automatic transmission is specially tailored version of the ZF4 HP22, used by many manufacturer’s of high performance vehicles.

A three element torque converter delivers the power to a four speed epicyclic transmission. First, second and third gears are reduction ratios but fourth is an overdrive gear for high speed cruising. A direct drive clutch, integral with the torque converter operates to engage fourth gear.

The gear selector has seven positions as follows:

P = Park provides a mechanical lock on the output shaft.

R = Reverse gear.

N = Neutral.

D = Provides a 1st gear start and automatic shifts 1-2-3-4-3-2-1.

3 = Provides a 1st gear start and automatic shifts 1-2-3-2-1.

2 = Provides a 1st gear start and automatic shifts 1-2-1 or 3-2-1.

1 = Provides a 1st gear start with no up shifts, or 3-2-1.

All automatic shifts are automatically controlled by the valve block and an hydraulic governor driven by the output shaft.

DESCRIPTION AND OPERATION

AUTOMATIC GEARBOX

Power flow

1st gear D selected

With D selected 1st gear engaged, clutches 4 and 11 are operative. The front planet gear carrier of gear set 9 is locked against the housing through freewheel 15 when the engine is pulling but freewheels when the vehicle is coasting. Epicyclic gear set 10 rotates as a solid unit with the front planet gear carrier. In selector position 1 with

1st gear engaged, clutch 8 operates to prevent the loss of drive on the overrun through freewheel 15, to provide engine braking.

2nd gear D selected

Clutches 4, 6, 7 and 11 are engaged. Freewheel 15 overruns, the hollow shaft with the sun wheel of epicyclic gear set 9 is locked. Epicyclic gear set 10 also rotates as a solid unit.

DESCRIPTION AND OPERATION

3rd gear D selected

Clutches 4, 5, 7 and 11 are engaged. Freewheel 15 and 16 are overrun. Epicyclic gear set 9 and 10 rotate as a solid unit at a ratio of 1:1.

4th gear D selected

Clutches 4, 5, 7 and 12 are engaged. Freewheel 14, 15 and 16 are overrun. Epicyclic gear set 9 rotates as a solid unit. The hollow shaft with the sun wheel of epicyclic gear set 10 is locked.

Above a predetermined road speed, clutch 2 locks the gearbox power input direct to the engine, by-passing the torque converter.

DESCRIPTION AND OPERATION

AUTOMATIC GEARBOX

Reverse gear

Clutches 5, 8 and 11 are engaged. Since the front planet gear carrier of epicyclic gear set 9 is locked, the direction of output-shaft rotation is reversed. Epicyclic gear set 10 also rotates as a solid block.

DESCRIPTION AND OPERATION

ZF AUTOMATIC GEARBOX

Before referring to fault symptoms, carry out initial static checks first:

INITIAL STATIC CHECKS

Check start positions ........................................................

Reverse lights ..................................................................

Gear engagements ..........................................................

Full throttle .......................................................................

Oil level ............................................................................

’P’ & ’N’ only

’R’ only

N-D,N-3,N-2,N-1,N-R

Engine switched off, check full travel at engine and at pedal.

’N’ selected, engine running at normal running temperature.

Pressure test

2000 rev/min

Idle pressure

....................................................................

0.3 bar, 150

5 lbf/in

6.9

0.3 bar, 100

5 lbf/in

2 at 665 to 735 rev/min.

To fit pressure gauge

Service tools:

See Service tools, Automatic

Gearbox

0 to 20 bar, 0 to 300 lbf/in

Flexible hose adaptor.

Pressure gauge.

Remove pressure gauge

6. Reverse removal procedure.

1. Site vehicle on a ramp [hoist].

2. From under gearbox, remove socket head plug

(located 10cm from oil pipe) Fit hose adaptor

LST502-1.

3. Fit hose to adaptor.

4. Fit gauge 18G502A to hose and route into vehicle, ensuring hose is clear of rotating parts and exhaust pipes.

5. Carry out road test.

See Road Test Procedure

FAULT DIAGNOSIS

AUTOMATIC GEARBOX

ROAD TEST PROCEDURE

Follow the procedure given commencing each test, from a standing start, on a level road, in good weather conditions.

ROADTEST 1 = CHECKS 1-2-3-4-5-6-7-8

D SELECTED KICKDOWN START FROM REST

CHECK 1

Check for clutch squeal and slip. Check pressure is

150lbf/in

CHECK 2

Check 1st to 2nd upshift speed and quality. Pressure should fall to 120 lbf/in

CHECK 3

Check 2nd-3rd upshift speed and quality. Pressure should fall to 100 lbf/in

CHECK 4

Release throttle to allow simultaneous engagement

4th + DDC. Check shift quality and engine rpm drop of approximately 500 rpm.

CHECK 5

To proceed to Check 5 release throttle and check drop out speed of direct drive clutch to 4th.

CHECK 6

Check down shift speed and quality 4th to 3rd.

NOTE: This shift is usually very smooth and difficult to detect.

CHECK 7

Check downshift speed and quality 3rd to 2nd.

CHECK 8

Check downshift speed and quality 2nd to 1st. Also difficult to detect.

END OF ROADTEST 1

ROADTEST 2 CHECKS = 9-10-11

D SELECTED FROM REST

FULL THROTTLE START

CHECK 9

Check 1st-2nd upshift speed and quality.

CHECK 10

Check 2nd 3rd upshift speed and quality.

CHECK 11

Check 3rd 4th and direct drive clutch upshift speed and quality.

NOTE: 4th and the direct drive clutch engage simultaneously.

END OF ROADTEST 2

FAULT DIAGNOSIS

ROADTEST 3 = CHECKS

12-13-14-15-16-17-18-19-20-21-22-23

D SELECTED FROM REST

LIGHT THROTTLE START

CHECK 12

Check 1st 2nd upshift speed and quality.

CHECK 13

Check 2nd 3rd upshift speed and quality.

CHECK 14

Check 3rd 4th upshift speed and quality.

NOTE: This shift is usually very difficult to detect but can be confirmed by a 200 rpm drop in engine speed.

CHECK 15

Check speed and quality of shift into direct drive clutch, confirmed by 300 rpm drop in engine speed.

NOTE: An intermediate throttle position engagement of 4th and the direct drive clutch, which is indicated by a fall of

500rpm in engine speed.

CHECK 16

At approximately 88 kph (55 mph) depress throttle to kickdown - gearbox should change down to 2nd release throttle to re-engage 4th direct drive clutch continue to accelerate gently.

CHECK 17

At approximately 128 kph (80 mph) depress throttle to kickdown - gearbox should change down to 3rd release throttle to re-engage 4th direct drive clutch and continue to accelerate gently.

CHECK 18

At approximately 138 kph (85 mph) select 3rd, gearbox should change immediately down to 3rd.

Release throttle.

CHECK 19

De-accelerate to approximately 47 kph (30 mph) depress throttle to kickdown - geabox should downshift to 1st gear, continue accelerating at full throttle until 3rd gear is attained. To do this you will have repeated check 2 of Test 1.

CHECK 20

At 128 kph (80 mph) select 2nd no downshift should occur. Release throttle.

CHECK 21

At 104 kph (65 mph) an automatic downshift into 2nd gear should occur. Continue to de-accelerate.

CHECK 22

At 88 kph (55 mph) select 1st. No downshift should occur. Continue to de-accelerate.

CHECK 23

With 1 selected 2nd gear engaged continue to de-accelerate and at 45 kph (28 mph) the box should automatically downshift to 1st gear after which no upshifts will occur in this selector position.

END OF ROADTEST

FAULT DIAGNOSIS

AUTOMATIC GEARBOX

AUTOMATIC GEARBOX ASSEMBLY ILLUSTRATED

1. Gearbox assembly

2. Inhibitor switch assembly

3. Control unit assembly

4. Filter and sump assembly

FAULT DIAGNOSIS

1. Torque converter housing assembly

2. Gearbox pump and casing assembly

3. Governor and adaptor housing assembly

FAULT DIAGNOSIS

AUTOMATIC GEARBOX

1. A Clutch assembly

2. B Clutch assembly

FAULT DIAGNOSIS

1. C,C’ and D Clutch assembly

FAULT DIAGNOSIS

AUTOMATIC GEARBOX

1. Freewheel and fourth gear assembly

FAULT DIAGNOSIS

1. E and F Clutch assembly

FAULT DIAGNOSIS

AUTOMATIC GEARBOX

FAULT SYMPTOMS

SYMPTOM 1 - Intermittent drive and high pitched noise

FAULT - Low fluid level or restricted filter

SYMPTOM 2 - No drive in reverse

Select ’D’

œ No drive

FAULT - Continue with Symptom 3

œ Drives forward

FAULT - Reverse gear interlock valve seized

Select ’1’

œ No engine braking

FAULT - Clutch brake 3

SYMPTOM 3 - No drive from rest with ’D’ selected

Select ’1’

œ Vehicle drives

FAULT - No 2 freewheel

œ No drive

Carry out main line pressure check

œ Normal pressure

FAULT - Clutch A

œ No pressure

FAULT - Blocked filter or pump failure

œ Low pressure

FAULT - Restricted filter or sticking primary regulator

SYMPTOM 4 - Slip in all forward gears

Carry out main line pressure check

œ No pressure

FAULT - Blocked filter or pump failure

œ Low pressure

FAULT - Restricted filter or sticking primary regulator

œ Normal pressure

FAULT - Clutch ’A’

SYMPTOM 5 - Harsh engagement ’N’ to ’D’

Check engine idle speed

Carry out main line pressure check

œ High pressure

FAULT - Primary regulator stuck

œ Normal pressure

FAULT - Clutch ’A’ or damper for clutch’A’

SYMPTOM 6 - Fierce shift or flare 1st to 2nd shift

Check engine idle speed

Carry out mainline pressure check

œ High pressure

FAULT - Continue with symptom 5

œ Normal pressure

FAULT - Modulator valve or dampers for clutch brake CB1 and/or clutch brake CB2

FAULT - Clutch brake CB1 and/or clutch brake CB2

SYMPTOM 7 - Fierce shift or flare 2nd to 3rd

Carry out mainline pressure check

œ High pressure

FAULT - Continue with symptom 5

œ Normal pressure

FAULT - Modulator valve or clutch ’B’ damper

FAULT - Clutch ’B’

SYMPTOM 8 - No 3rd gear

FAULT - 2-3 shift valve

FAULT - Clutch ’B’

SYMPTOM 9 - No 4th gear ’D’ selected

FAULT - 4th to 3rd downshift valve stuck or

3rd to 4th upshift valve stuck

FAULT - Clutch brake 4

FAULT DIAGNOSIS

SYMPTOM 10 - None or harsh engagement of direct drive clutch

NOTE: The direct drive clutch will only engage if 4th gear is engaged at 40 to 45 mph.

Carry out road test pressure check with gauge connected to torque converter.

œ Normal pressure

FAULT - Failed direct drive clutch

œ Pressures correct but remains high

FAULTS POSSIBLE -

Direct drive clutch and torque converter control valve stuck

Hysteresis valve stuck

Direct drive clutch control valve stuck

SYMPTOM 11 - Direct drive clutch shift point incorrect or at low speed

NOTE: Direct drive clutch engagement at low speed will cause vibration in the torque converter

Carry out mainline and torque converter pressure check

œ Normal pressure

FAULT - Governor valve sticking

œ Low or incorrect pressure

FAULTS POSSIBLE -

Direct drive clutch and torque converter control valve sticking.

Hysteresis valve stuck.

Direct drive clutch control valve stuck.

SYMPTOM 12 - Drives in ’D’ but immediately upshifts to 3rd

FAULT - 2nd to 3rd shift valve stuck.

SYMPTOM 13 - With ’D’ selected vehicle starts in

2nd

FAULTS POSSIBLE -

1st and 2nd shift valve stuck.

Governor sleeve sticking.

SYMPTOM 14 - With ’D’ selected vehicle starts in

3rd

FAULTS POSSIBLE -

1st to 2nd and 2nd to 3rd shift valves stuck.

Governor sleeve sticking.

SYMPTOM 15 - No kickdown 4th to 3rd

FAULT - 4th to 3rd kickdown valve stuck.

SYMPTOM 16 - Upshifts/downshifts and kickdown shifts at incorrect road speeds

Check throttle kickdown cable adjustment

Carry out main line pressure check

œ Normal pressure

FAULT - Governor valve sticking

œ Incorrect pressure

FAULTS POSSIBLE -

Incorrect throttle valve adjustment

Primary regulator sticking

SYMPTOM 17 - No upshifts at light throttle

FAULTS POSSIBLE

Governor valve sticking

Shift valves sticking

SYMPTOM 18 - No engine braking ’3’ selected 3rd gear

FAULT - Clutch ’C’

SYMPTOM 19 - Delayed or no downshift occurs when making a manual selection from ’3’ to ’2’

FAULTS POSSIBLE -

2nd and 3rd upshift valve sticking.

Governor valve sticking.

’2’ Position interlock valve sticking.

SYMPTOM 20 - At speeds below 28 mph when making a manual selection from ’2’ to ’1’, downshift is delayed or does not occur

FAULTS POSSIBLE -

Governor sticking.

1st to 2nd shift valve sticking.

’1’ Position interlock valve sticking.

SYMPTOM 21 - ’1’ Selected 1st gear no engine braking

FAULT - Clutch brake 3

SYMPTOM 22 - ’2’ Selected 2nd gear no engine braking

FAULT - Clutch brake 1

SYMPTOM 23 - Vehicle drives forward in ’N’

FAULT - Clutch ’A’ stuck

FAULT DIAGNOSIS

KICKDOWN CABLE ADJUSTMENT

1. Remove split pin, withdraw clevis pin and disconnect kickdown cable from lever.

2. Remove split pin, withdraw clevis pin and disconnect throttle cable from lever.

3. Adjust the position of the kickdown cable locknuts so that dimension ’A’ is 28 mm. With cable held in this position, there should be 6 threads exposed to the rear of the bracket,

(dimension ’B’).

4. Tighten both locknuts Connect the kickdown cable to the lever and secure with clevis pin and split pin.

5. Connect the throttle cable to the lever and secure with clevis pin and split pin.

6. Pull back the rubber boot on the kickdown cable until the crimped nipple is visible.

7. Rotate the knurled plug on the throttle cable until the crimped nipple is 1 mm from the end of the threads, (dimension ’C’).

8. Refit the rubber boot.

ADD: 09/95 ADJUSTMENT

LT230T TRANSFER GEARBOX WITH AUTOMATIC

GEARBOX ASSEMBLY - V8i

Service repair no - 44.20.04

Removal from V8i engine

The assembled transfer gearbox, automatic gearbox and torque converter is removed from underneath the vehicle. Use a transmission hoist with an adaptor plate for securing the assembly to the hoist. The adaptor can be manufactured locally to the drawing below or purchased from:- Straight Set Engineering,

England. Tel.01909 480055

WARNING: When using a transmission hoist it is essential to follow the hoist manufacturer’s instructions.

REPAIR

AUTOMATIC GEARBOX

1. Site vehicle on a four post ramp [hoist].

2. Disconnect battery negative lead.

3. Remove fan cowl securing screws and release cowl from radiator.

4. Loosen securing clip and disconnect air flow hose from plenum chamber.

5. Disconnect stepper motor hose from top of plenum chamber.

6. Disconnect kickdown cable from throttle linkage and release from clipping.

7. Release two gearbox breather pipes from clip located on lifting eye at rear of right hand cylinder head.

8. Remove dipstick from main gearbox oil filler tube.

9. Working inside vehicle detach transfer gear lever gaiter from console, unscrew knob and withdraw gaiter and knob.

10. Raise vehicle on ramp [hoist].

11. Remove drain plugs and drain oil from transfer gearbox and main gearbox. Refit plugs.

12. Detach heat shield at front exhaust pipe to manifold.

13. Disconnect electrics to Lambda sensors.

14. Remove catalytic converter assembly.

15. Remove chassis cross-member from under gearbox.

16. Remove heat shield from speedometer cable at transfer gearbox.

17. Remove clamp and disconnect speedometer cable from transfer gearbox. Tie cable to one side.

18. Mark for reassembly propeller shaft to transfer gearbox mating flanges.

REPAIR

19. Disconnect rear propeller shaft to output flange, and tie to one side.

20. Repeat instructions 18 and 19 on front propeller shaft to main gearbox.

21. Remove bolts retaining silencer front and rear securing brackets and tie silencer to one side.

22. Disconnect oil cooler feed and return pipes from bottom and side of main gearbox.

23. Release cooler pipes from clamp at engine sump and remove distance piece.

24. Blank pipe ends and unions.

25. Move oil cooler pipes clear of transmission and tie aside.

26. Disconnect selector cable from operating lever.

27. Disconnect inhibitor switch at multiplug.

28. Attach adaptor plate to hoist.

29. Remove two bolts from transfer gearbox rear cover.

30. Raise hoist to align adaptor plate with transfer gearbox and transmission. Secure to transfer gearbox at rear cover with two bolts removed.

31. Adjust hoist to take weight of transmission.

32. Remove nuts and bolts securing right transfer gearbox mounting bracket to chassis.

33. Repeat for the left mounting bracket. Removal of these fixings will also free speedometer transducer bracket

34. Remove right side mounting bracket to flexible mounting rubber retaining nut.

35. Lower hoist until rear brake drum clears passenger footwell. Check engine does not crush any components while lowering.

36. Remove clip and clevis pin from park brake lever.

37. Remove clip securing outer brake cable

38. The park brake cable is now free.

39. Disconnect leads from transfer gearbox temperature sensor and differential lock warning light switch.

40. Remove ties securing breather pipes to harness.

41. Remove bell housing access plate complete with gasket.

42. Rotate engine, using crankshaft pulley, until two access holes are visible in drive plate/ring gear assembly through bell housing bottom cover opening.

43. Identify an access hole and bolt hole to aid reassembly.

44. Remove bolts securing drive plate to convertor through access holes.

45. Rotate crankshaft half turn to access and remove remaining bolts.

46. Disconnect oil dipstick tube at main gearbox.

47. Remove bolt at bell housing and detach dipstick tube. Blank pipe end and union.

48. Position hoist jack channel under engine and support using a wooden block.

49. Remove bell housing to engine securing bolts, also detach harness bracket from bell housing.

50. Ease transmission rearwards to allow access to secure torque converter in bell housing.

51. Lower hoist and complete removal of transmission.

Refit

52. Ensure torque converter is retained in bell housing.

53. Secure transmission to adaptor plate on lifting hoist.

54. Raise hoist and locate transmission with engine.

55. Remove torque converter retainer.

56. Complete attachment of transmission to engine and fit bell housing bolts. Fit the dipstick tube bracket and harness bracket to their respective bolts.

57. Complete refitting by reversing removal procedure. Note the following important points.

58. Drive plate to torque converter bolts are to be coated with Loctite 290 prior to assembly.

59. Refill transfer and main gearboxes with correct grade oil.

See LUBRICANTS, FLUIDS AND

CAPACITIES, Information, Recommended

Lubricants and Fluids

60. Check operation of parking brake and adjust as necessary.

See SECTION 10, Maintenance,

Vehicle Interior

REPAIR

AUTOMATIC GEARBOX

LT230T TRANSFER GEARBOX WITH AUTOMATIC

GEARBOX ASSEMBLY - Tdi

Service repair no - 44.20.04

Removal from Tdi engine

The assembled transfer gearbox, automatic gearbox and torque converter is removed from underneath the vehicle. Use a transmission hoist with an adaptor plate for securing the assembly to the hoist.

WARNING: When using a transmission hoist it is essential to follow the hoist manufacturer’s instructions.

REPAIR

Remove

1. Select low range with transfer gear lever.

2. Remove knob and gaiter from transfer gear lever.

3. Disconnect battery terminals.

4. Remove insulation pad from rocker cover and inlet manifold.

5. On LH drive vehicles only, disconnect multi-plug from top of brake fluid reservoir.

6. Release electrical harness from clips along top of bulkhead and pull over to one side.

7. Remove bolt securing transfer and main gearbox breather pipe clip to rear of cylinder head.

8. Disconnect kick down cable at fuel injection pump.

9. Drain coolant from cooling system.

10. Disconnect top hose from radiator.

11. Disconnect turbo charger hose from inter-cooler.

12. Remove starter heat shield.

REPAIR

AUTOMATIC GEARBOX

13. Remove starter.

14. Working through starter aperture note position of torque converter flexible drive plate to facilitate refitting.

15. Remove the four torque convertor to flexible drive securing bolts, rotating engine to gain access to each individual bolt.

16. Raise vehicle on four post ramp [hoist].

17. Drain lubrication oil from transfer and main gearboxes.

18. Disconnect speedometer cable from transfer gearbox and disconnect associated clipping.

19. Remove rear propeller shaft.

See PROPELLER

SHAFTS, Overhaul, Flexible Coupling

20. Disconnect front propeller shaft at transfer gearbox and tie to one side.

21. Remove exhaust front pipe.

22. Remove bolts securing front and centre silencer mounting brackets and tie silencer to one side.

23. Disconnect oil cooler pipes from gearbox.

24. Blank off pipes and union connections.

25. Remove bolt securing retaining bracket to sump and move cooler pipes aside.

26. Disconnect selector cable from lever on side of gearbox.

27. Disconnect inhibitor switch multi-plug.

28. Disconnect park brake cable from linkage to park brake lever.

29. Disconnect electrical connections from differential lock switch on transfer gearbox.

30. Remove two lower bolts from transfer gearbox input bearing support plate.

31. Assemble approved support cradle to transmission hoist.

32. Raise hoist and secure cradle to transfer gearbox input bearing support plate using bolts removed.

33. Disconnect gearbox mounting brackets from chassis cross member.

34. Remove chassis cross member.

35. Lower transmission sufficiently to allow access to items attached to top of gearbox.

36. Remove left hand gearbox mounting bracket assembly.

37. Remove ties from breather pipes and harness.

38. Remove nut securing gearbox oil filler/dip stick tube to bell housing.

39. Release union nut at gearbox sump and remove filler/dipstick tube. Fit blanking plugs.

40. Support engine using a wooden block with a suitable ramp [hoist] jack.

41. Remove nut securing kick down cable bracket to bell housing.

42. Remove two bolts securing top of bell housing to flywheel housing.

43. Remove nuts securing bell housing to flywheel housing and withdraw transmission assembly from engine.

44. Fit a suitable torque converter retaining strap to the bell housing.

45. Remove hoist and transmission from under vehicle.

46. Fit lifting eyes to transmission.

47. Using suitable chains and lifting tackle take weight of transmission assembly.

48. Remove bolts securing transmission cradle to transfer box and withdraw hoist complete with cradle.

49. Refit bolts to cover plate.

REPAIR

Accessories removal/fitting

If fitting a replacement transmission assembly to the vehicle, remove the following items from the existing assembly and fit to the replacement.

50. Breather pipe union and washers from main gearbox.

51. Breather pipe, union and washers from transfer gearbox.

52. Main gearbox selector lever.

53. RH mounting bracket assembly.

54. Oil cooler pipe unions.

55. Fit blanks to all apertures where unions have been removed and blank off pipe ends.

Refit

CAUTION: It is important to remove the spacer from the extension shaft and fit onto the replacement unit.

1. Fit transmission to cradle and hoist.

2. Locate hoist under vehicle and remove torque convertor retaining strap.

3. Ensure low range gear is engaged.

4. Apply approved sealant to bell housing face.

5. Carefully raise assembly, align bell housing with flywheel housing and bring mating faces together.

6. Fit nuts and bolts to secure transmission to engine.

7. Locate electrical wiring and breather pipes to position.

8. Secure kick down cable clip to bell housing.

9. Raise hoist sufficiently to take weight.

10. Remove block and jack from engine sump.

11. Fit filler/dipstick tube to gearbox sump and secure bracket to bell housing.

12. Apply Loctite to torque convertor bolts

13. Working through starter aperture refit the four torque convertor to flexible drive securing bolts, rotating crankshaft to gain access to bolt locations.

14. Refit starter and heatshield.

15. Secure breather pipes and harness with ties.

16. Fit left hand mounting bracket assembly to gearbox.

17. Raise transmission and support with a suitable ramp [hoist] jack.

18. Remove two bolts securing transmission to cradle, lower hoist and remove from under vehicle.

19. Apply Loctite to above bolts and fit to transfer gearbox input bearing support plate.

20. Fit chassis cross member.

21. Secure gearbox mounting brackets to chassis cross member.

22. Remove ramp [hoist] jack.

23. Connect electrical leads to differential lock switch.

24. Connect inhibitor switch multi-plug.

25. Connect selector cable to lever on side of gearbox.

26. Connect oil cooler pipes to gearbox and secure retaining bracket to gearbox sump.

27. Secure silencer to chassis and refit exhaust front pipe.

28. Refit front propeller shaft to transfer gearbox.

29. Refit rear propeller shaft.

See PROPELLER

SHAFTS, Overhaul, Flexible Coupling

30. Connect speedometer cable to transfer gearbox.

31. Refill transfer gearbox with correct grade of lubricating oil.

See LUBRICANTS, FLUIDS

AND CAPACITIES, Information,

Recommended Lubricants and Fluids

32. Lower ramp [hoist] to ground level.

33. Reconnect turbo-charger hose to inter-cooler.

34. Reconnect top hose to radiator.

35. Refill cooling system with correct mixture of coolant.

See LUBRICANTS, FLUIDS AND

CAPACITIES, Information, Recommended

Lubricants and Fluids

36. Reconnect kick down cable to fuel injection pump.

37. Secure breather pipe clip to rear of cylinder head.

38. Engage harness with clips along top of bulkhead.

39. On left hand drive vehicles only, connect multi-plug to top of brake fluid reservoir.

40. Refit insulation pad to rocker cover and inlet manifold, secure with oil filler cap.

41. Refit gaiter and knob to transfer gear lever.

42. Select high range gear.

43. Reconnect battery terminals.

44. Refill main gearbox with correct grade of lubricating oil.

See LUBRICANTS, FLUIDS

AND CAPACITIES, Information,

Recommended Lubricants and Fluids

REPAIR

AUTOMATIC GEARBOX

INHIBITOR SWITCH

Service repair no - 44.15.19

Remove

4. Detach heat shield at front exhaust pipe to manifold.

5. Disconnect electrics from Lambda sensors.

6. Remove catalytic converter assembly.

7. Remove chassis cross-member from under gearbox.

8. Engage low range gear in the transfer gearbox.

9. Support transfer gearbox with a jack or transmission hoist.

10. Remove transfer gearbox chassis mounting bracket nuts and bolts. Note location of speedometer cable bracket for refit.

11. Lower transmission to allow access to selector shaft.

1. Site vehicle on a four post ramp [hoist].

2. Disconnect battery negative lead. Raise vehicle.

3. Disconnect inhibitor switch multi plug.

4. Remove inhibitor switch retaining plate.

5. Remove inhibitor switch.

6. Remove ’O’ ring seal.

7. Clean inhibitor switch.

Refit

8. Clean mating face on casing.

9. Fit and lubricate new ’O’ ring seal to switch.

10. Fit switch to casing.

11. Secure with retaining plate and bolt.

12. Connect multiplug to harness.

13. Reconnect battery and remove vehicle from ramp [hoist].

SELECTOR SHAFT OIL SEAL

Service repair no - 44.15.34

Renew

1. Site vehicle on a four post ramp [hoist].

2. Disconnect battery negative lead.

3. Raise vehicle.

12. Remove selector lever from shaft.

13. Remove selector shaft seal from casing.

14. Clean selector shaft and seal mating faces.

15. Fit centre section of special tool LST 114 over selector shaft.

16. Lubricate new oil seal and position seal on tool.

17. Fit tool outer sleeve and screw on nut to drive seal into housing.

18. Remove tool from shaft.

19. Refit selector lever to shaft.

20. Raise transmission and secure mounting brackets to chassis. Ensure speedometer cable bracket is secured. Tighten bolts to

30Nm.

21. Remove support jack.

22. Refit chassis cross-member.

23. Refit catalytic converter assembly.

24. Connect electrics to Lambda sensors.

25. Connect heat shield front pipe to manifold.

26. Connect battery.

27. Check/top up gearbox oil level.

REPAIR

OIL SUMP

Service repair no - 44.24.05

Remove

1. Site vehicle on a four post ramp [hoist].

2. Disconnect battery negative lead.

3. Raise vehicle.

4. Drain oil and refit plug with new seal.

5. Detach heat shield at front exhaust pipe to manifold.

6. Disconnect electrics from Lambda sensors.

7. Remove catalytic converter assembly.

8. Remove chassis cross-member from under gearbox.

Refit

12. Refit oil sump using a new gasket.

13. Connect dipstick tube to oil sump and tighten bolt at bell housing.

14. Refit chassis cross member.

15. Refit catalytic converter assembly

16. Connect electrics to Lambda sensors.

17. Connect heat shield front pipe to manifold.

18. Connect battery.

19. Refill gearbox using correct grade of oil.

See

LUBRICANTS, FLUIDS AND CAPACITIES,

Information, Recommended Lubricants and

Fluids

9. Disconnect dipstick tube at oil sump. Loosen securing bolt at bell housing and move dipstick aside.

10. Remove clamps securing oil sump. Note their locations for refit and withdraw sump.

11. Remove gasket and clean gasket mating faces.

REPAIR

AUTOMATIC GEARBOX

OIL SCREEN

Service repair no - 44.24.07

Renew

1. Site vehicle on a four post ramp [hoist].

2. Disconnect battery negative lead.

3. Raise vehicle.

4. Drain oil and refit plug with new seal.

5. Detach heat shield at front exhaust pipe to manifold.

6. Disconnect electrics from Lambda sensors.

7. Remove catalytic converter assembly.

8. Remove chassis cross-member from under gearbox.

13. Detach suction pipe from oil screen, discard ’O’ ring seal.

14. Clean oil screen and blow out with airline.

15. Clean suction pipe.

16. Fit new ’O’ ring seals to oil screen using light grease to aid assembly.

17. Fit oil screen and suction pipe with spacer and secure with three bolts.

18. Refit oil sump using a new gasket.

19. Connect dipstick tube to oil sump and tighten bolt at bell housing.

20. Refit chassis cross-member.

21. Refit catalytic converter assembly

22. Connect electrics to Lambda sensors.

23. Connect heat shield front pipe to manifold.

24. Connect battery.

25. Refill gearbox oil system using correct grade of oil.

See LUBRICANTS, FLUIDS AND

CAPACITIES, Information, Recommended

Lubricants and Fluids

9. Disconnect dipstick tube at oil sump. Loosen securing bolt at bell housing and move dipstick aside.

10. Remove clamps securing oil sump. Note their locations for refit and withdraw sump.

11. Remove gasket and clean gasket mating faces.

12. Remove securing screws and detach oil screen and suction pipe, taking care to retain suction pipe spacer, discard ’O’ ring seal.

REPAIR

CONTROL UNIT

Remove

1. Site vehicle on a four post ramp [hoist].

2. Disconnect battery negative lead.

3. Raise vehicle.

4. Drain oil and refit plug with new seal.

5. Detach heat shield at front exhaust pipe to manifold.

6. Disconnect electrics from Lambda sensors.

7. Remove catalytic converter assembly.

8. Remove chassis cross-member from under gearbox.

9. Disconnect dipstick tube at oil sump. Loosen securing bolt at bell housing and move dipstick aside.

10. Remove clamps securing oil sump. Note their locations for refit and withdraw sump.

11. Remove gasket and clean gasket mating faces.

12. Remove securing screws and detach oil screen and suction pipe, taking care to retain suction pipe spacer, discard ’O’ ring seal.

13. Remove securing screws and detach control unit from casing.

REPAIR

AUTOMATIC GEARBOX

Oil seal replacement

14. Remove circlips and springs from control unit.

Note locations of long and short springs.

15. Using seal replacer/remover LST113 remove and discard seals.

21. Manually open throttle linkage to full throttle position.

16. Clean control unit, springs and circlips and check that they are satisfactory for further use.

17. Fit new seals to control unit using LST113, ensure seals are fully seated.

18. Fit springs to locations noted during removal and secure with circlips.

Refit

19. Fit control unit to gearbox, locating throttle valve behind cam and engaging selector quadrant with manual valve.

20. Loosely fit securing screws.

22. Engage special tool LST 109 between control unit and throttle valve pin.

23. Set correct distance between control unit and cam.

24. Remove special tool and close throttle.

25. Fit new ’O’ ring seals to oil screen using light grease to aid assembly.

26. Fit oil screen and suction pipe with spacer and secure with three bolts.

27. Refit oil pan using a new gasket.

28. Connect dipstick tube to oil sump and tighten bolt at bell housing.

29. Refit chassis cross member.

30. Refit catalytic converter assembly

31. Connect electrics to Lambda sensors.

32. Connect heat shield front pipe to manifold.

33. Connect battery.

34. Refill gearbox oil system using correct grade of oil.

See LUBRICANTS, FLUIDS AND

CAPACITIES, Information, Recommended

Lubricants and Fluids

REPAIR

KICKDOWN CABLE

Service repair no - 44.15.01

Remove

1. Site vehicle on a four post ramp [hoist].

2. Select neutral ’N’ gear lever.

3. Disconnect battery negative lead.

4. Disconnect kickdown cable at throttle linkage.

5. Release outer cable locknut.

6. Disconnect cable from mounting bracket.

7. Release cable from bracket attached to cylinder head.

8. Feed cable through to underside of vehicle.

9. Raise vehicle on ramp [hoist].

10. Drain oil and refit plug with new seal.

11. Detach heat shield at front exhaust pipe to manifold.

12. Disconnect electrics from Lambda sensors.

13. Remove catalytic converter assembly.

14. Remove chassis cross-member from under gearbox.

15. Disconnect dipstick tube at oil sump. Loosen securing bolt at bell housing and move dipstick aside.

16. Remove clamps securing oil sump. Note their locations for refit, and withdraw sump.

17. Pull kickdown inner cable to fully open valve cam. Wedge cam in this position.

18. Release cable from cam by pushing inner cable into outer casing and detaching cable nipple from cam.

19. Using special tool LST112 compress cable tangs and remove cable from gearbox.

20. If cable is to be refitted remove ’O’ ring seal and clean cable assembly.

Refit

21. Fit new ’O’ ring seal to cable and lubricate seal.

22. Fit cable to gearbox casing ensuring it is correctly seated.

23. Fit inner cable nipple to its location on cam.

NOTE: When a new cable is fitted, to help locate nipple to cam, introduce a curve into the cable. Do not bend or kink cable.

24. Remove wedge from cam and ensure nipple remains engaged.

25. Feed free end of cable assembly into engine compartment.

26. Refit oil pan using a new gasket.

27. Connect dipstick tube to oil sump and tighten bolt at bell housing.

28. Refit chassis cross-member

29. Refit catalytic converter assembly

30. Connect electrics to Lambda sensors.

31. Connect heat shield front pipe to manifold.

32. Lower vehicle on ramp [hoist].

33. Fit cable to bracket at cylinder head.

34. Locate cable in mounting bracket, do not tighten locknut.

35. Fit cable to throttle linkage.

36. Ensure throttle linkage is fully closed.

37. Adjust outer cable to achieve a gap of 0,25 to

1,25mm (dimension ’A’) between end of outer cable and crimped collar on inner cable.

38. Tighten locknuts and recheck gap.

NOTE: If fitting a new cable, and collar on inner cable is loose, measure distance ’B’ on old cable. Crimp collar on new cable to this dimension.

39. Reconnect battery negative lead.

40. Refill gearbox oil using correct grade of oil.

See

LUBRICANTS, FLUIDS AND CAPACITIES,

Information, Recommended Lubricants and

Fluids

REPAIR

AUTOMATIC GEARBOX

EXTENSION HOUSING

Service repair no - 44.20.18

Remove

1. Remove transfer gearbox.

See TRANSFER

GEARBOX, Repair, LT230T Transfer Gearbox

2. Drain oil from automatic gearbox.

3. Remove bolts securing left hand mounting bracket to extension housing and withdraw bracket.

4. Remove transfer gear lever housing securing bolts and move housing aside.

Refit

9. Fit extension housing to gearbox, with a new gasket, ensuring oil seal is not damaged by extension shaft.

10. Secure housing with nine bolts. Tighten to

Nm.

11. Refit transfer gear lever housing to top of extension housing. Tighten to

25 Nm.

12. Refit mounting bracket to extension housing.

Tighten to

52 Nm.

13. Refit transfer gear box.

See TRANSFER

GEARBOX, Repair, LT230T Transfer Gearbox

14. Refill automatic gearbox lubrication system with correct grade of oil.

See LUBRICANTS,

FLUIDS AND CAPACITIES, Information,

Recommended Lubricants and Fluids

5. Remove securing bolts and withdraw extension housing from over coupling shaft. Remove and discard gasket.

6. Place extension housing on bench and remove oil seal.

7. Ensure that all surfaces are clean and housing is free from damage. If damage is found and housing has to be renewed remove dowels from face of existing housing and fit to new housing.

8. Using special tool LST108 fit new oil seal to housing.

REPAIR

GOVERNOR ASSEMBLY

Service repair no - 44.22.01

Remove

1. Remove transfer gearbox.

See TRANSFER

GEARBOX, Repair, LT230T Transfer Gearbox

2. Drain oil from automatic gearbox.

3. Remove bolts securing left hand mounting bracket to extension housing and withdraw bracket.

4. Remove transfer gear lever housing securing bolts and move housing aside.

5. Remove extension housing ensuring seal is not damaged, remove and discard gasket.

6. Remove extension shaft retaining bolt, withdraw shaft and discard ’O’ ring seal. If Tdi vehicle remove spacer.

7. Remove governor assembly.

8. Remove park gear from governor assembly.

9. Detach governor housing.

10. Remove security clip and counter weight.

11. Remove and discard ’O’ ring seal from output shaft and three seal rings from ’F’ clutch housing.

12. Clean all components.

13. If necessary detach parking pawl by removing guide plates and withdrawing mechanism.

Refit

14. Refit parking pawl mechanism if removed.

15. Fit and lubricate new seal rings to ’F’ clutch housing shaft, ensure they are correctly seated.

16. Apply petroleum jelly to a new ’O’ ring seal. Fit to output shaft

17. Fit park gear to governor assembly tightening screws to correct torque.

18. Fit governor assembly to output shaft.

19. Fit extension shaft with spacer if Tdi. Fit new ’O’ ring under bolt head.

20. Fit extension housing, avoid damaging seal.

Tighten to

23 Nm.

21. Refit transfer gear lever housing to extension housing.

22. Refit mounting bracket to extension housing.

Tighten to

52 Nm.

23. Refit transfer gearbox.

See TRANSFER

GEARBOX, Repair, LT230T Transfer Gearbox

24. Refill automatic gearbox with correct grade of oil.

See LUBRICANTS, FLUIDS AND

CAPACITIES, Information, Recommended

Lubricants and Fluids

REPAIR

AUTOMATIC GEARBOX

GOVERNOR HUB

Service repair no - 44.22.04

Remove

1. Remove transfer box.

See TRANSFER

GEARBOX, Repair, LT230T Transfer Gearbox

2. Remove transfer gear selector housing.

3. Loosen nine bolts holding extension housing.

4. Remove extension housing ensuring that seal is not damaged, discard gasket.

5. Remove extension shaft and retaining bolt with

’O’ ring. If Tdi vehicle remove spacer.

6. Remove governor assembly with parking wheel.

7. Remove two screws holding governor housing.

8. Remove two bolts, remove parking wheel.

Discard governor hub.

9. Remove security clip and counter-weight.

10. Remove ’O’ ring from output shaft and discard.

11. Remove three seal rings from ’F’ clutch housing shaft.

12. Inspect all parts for damage or wear, replace if necessary.

Refit

13. Fit counterweight and security clip into new governor hub.

14. Secure governor housing to governor hub.

Tighten to

10Nm.

15. Fit parking wheel to governor hub. Tighten to

Nm.

16. Fit three new seal rings onto F clutch housing shaft, fit ’O’ ring onto output shaft.

NOTE: To aid fitting of ’O’ ring apply petroleum jelly.

17. Push governor assembly and parking wheel onto output shaft until seated.

NOTE: Apply petroleum jelly to ’O’ ring.

Ensure seal rings are snapped together and seated.

18. Fit new gasket to rear of gearbox. Fit extension housing, avoid damaging seal.

19. Fit extension shaft,and spacer if Tdi, apply

Loctite 270 to retaining bolt. Using a new ’O’ ring, tighten bolt to

42 Nm.

20. Tighten nine extension housing nine bolts to

Nm.

21. Fit transfer gear selector housing, tighten three bolts to

25 Nm.

22. Refit transfer box.

REPAIR

PARKING PAWL MECHANISM

Service repair no - 44.28.07

Remove

1. Remove transfer box.

See TRANSFER

GEARBOX, Repair, LT230T Transfer Gearbox

2. Remove transfer gear selector housing.

3. Loosen nine bolts holding extension housing.

4. Remove extension housing ensuring that seal is not damaged, discard gasket.

5. Remove extension shaft and retaining bolt with

’O’ ring. If Tdi vehicle, remove spacer.

6. Remove governor assembly with parking wheel.

7. Remove guide plate bolt.

8. Remove plate and guide plate from gearbox case.

9. Remove pin, pawl and spring.

CAUTION: When removing assembly.

Avoid damaging parts which could weaken spring tension.

10. Inspect all parts for wear or damage. Replace if necessary.

Refit

11. Fit pin and leg spring, locate spring correctly.

12. Fit pawl to pin. Locate spring leg into hole in pawl to create tension in spring.

13. Fit plate and guide plate. Tighten to

10 Nm.

14. Push governor assembly with parking wheel onto output shaft until seated.

NOTE: Apply petroleum jelly to ’O’ ring.

Ensure seal rings are snapped together and seated.

15. Fit new gasket to rear of gearbox. Fit extension housing, taking care not to damage seal or assembly.

16. Fit extension shaft with spacer if Tdi and retaining bolt with new ’O’ ring.

17. Fit extension housing, tighten nine bolts to

23Nm.

18. Fit transfer gear selector housing, tighten three bolts to

25 Nm.

19. Refit transfer box.

REPAIR

AUTOMATIC GEARBOX

REPLACING TORQUE CONVERTER

1. Remove gearbox and transfer box assembly.

See LT230T Transfer Gearbox

2. Place gearbox on bench. Remove torque converter using torque converter handles

18G1501, taking care not to damage torque converter/oil pump housing oil seal.

3. Fit new torque converter using torque converter handles 18G1501. Check dimension from converter fixing boss to converter housing face is

50 mm. This shows converter is correctly seated in housing.

4. Refit gearbox and transfer box assembly.

See

LT230T Transfer Gearbox

ELIMINATING LEAKS ON PUMP HOUSING

1. Remove gearbox and transfer box assembly.

See LT230T Transfer Gearbox

2. Place gearbox on bench. Remove torque converter using torque converter handles

18G1501, taking care not to damage torque converter/oil pump housing oil seal.

3. Remove twelve hexagonal bolts (inner ring pattern).

4. Remove bell housing and pump assembly, discard gasket.

5. Remove eight hexagonal bolts on rear of pump.

REPAIR

6. Screw in two bolts, diagonally opposite each other. Tap lightly using a soft headed mallet to remove pump assembly from intermediate plate.

7. Remove shaft sealing ring and ’O’ ring from pump housing and discard.

8. Using oil seal replacer LST108 fit shaft seal ring into pump housing.

9. Fit ’O’ ring onto circumference of pump housing.

10. Align dowel with hole in intermediate plate and press pump housing home.

11. Fit pump housing to intermediate plate, tighten eight bolts to

10 Nm.

12. Place bell housing and intermediate plate assembly on bench, front face up. Using oil pump rotation sleeve LST111, check that pump gears rotate freely.

13. Before fitting intermediate plate and bell housing assembly,check that thrust washer and axial cage are seated on A clutch housing.

14. Place gasket and disc washer onto bell housing and intermediate plate assembly using

Petroleum Jelly.

15. Fit bell housing and intermediate plate assembly to gearcase. Tighten twelve bolts to

46 Nm.

16. Place end float gauge LST111 onto pump housing and check that axial play is between

0.2-0.4 mm. Replace existing washer, situated at rear of intermediate plate, with a suitable washer to give required end float.

17. Refit torque converter into housing using torque converter handles 18G1501, checking that dimension from converter fixing bolt boss to converter housing face is 50 mm. This shows converter is properly seated in housing.

18. Refit gearbox/transfer box assembly.

See

LT230T Transfer Gearbox

REPAIR

AUTOMATIC GEARBOX

ELIMINATING LEAKS BETWEEN GEARBOX

HOUSING AND INTERMEDIATE PLATE

1. Remove gearbox and transfer box assembly.

See LT230T Transfer Gearbox

2. Place gearbox on bench. Remove torque converter using torque converter handles

18G1501, taking care not to damage torque converter/oil pump housing oil seal.

3. Remove twelve hexagonal bolts (inner ring pattern).

4. Remove bell housing/intermediate plate assembly from gearbox case and discard gasket.

5. Place new gasket onto intermediate plate using

Petroleum Jelly.

6. Before fitting bell housing assembly check that thrust washer and axial cage are seated on A clutch housing.

7. Fit bell housing assembly with disc washer to gearcase. Tighten twelve bolts to

46Nm.

8. Place end-float gauge LST111 onto pump housing and check that axial play is between

0.2-0.4 mm. Replace existing washer, situated at rear of intermediate plate, with a suitable washer to give required end-float.

9. Refit torque converter using torque converter handles 18G1501. Checking that dimension from converter fixing boss to converter housing case is 50mm. This dimension shows converter is properly seated.

10. Refit gearbox/transfer box assembly.

See

LT230T Transfer Gearbox

REPAIR

REPLACING PUMP

Service repair no - 44.32.01

1. Remove gearbox and transfer box assembly.

See LT230T Transfer Gearbox

2. Place gearbox on bench. Remove torque converter using torque converter handles

18G1501, taking care not to damage torque converter/oil pump housing oil seal.

4. Remove bell housing and pump assembly from gearbox case, discard gasket.

5. Remove eight bolts on rear of pump.

6. Screw in two bolts,diagonally opposite each other, tap lightly using a soft headed mallet to free pump assembly from intermediate plate.

3. Remove twelve bolts (inner ring pattern).

7. Fit new pump assembly, aligning dowel with hole in intermediate plate, press pump housing home.

8. Secure pump housing to intermediate plate using eight hexagonal bolts. Tighten to

10 Nm.

9. Place bell housing and intermediate plate assembly on bench, front face up. Using oil pump rotation sleeve LST111, check that pump gears rotate freely.

10. Before replacing intermediate plate/bell housing assembly check that thrust washer and axial cage are seated on A clutch housing.

11. Place new gasket and disc washer onto bell housing and intermediate plate assembly using a Petroleum Jelly.

12. Fit bell housing and intermediate plate assembly, tighten twelve bolts to

46 Nm.

REPAIR

AUTOMATIC GEARBOX

13. Place end-float gauge LST111 onto pump housing and check that axial play is between

0.2-0.4 mm. Replace existing washer, situated at rear of intermediate plate, with suitable washer to give required end-float.

NOTE: If damage is apparent to bolts they should be replaced.

14. Refit torque converter into housing using torque converter handles 18G1501. Check dimension converter fixing boss to converter housing face is

50 mm. This shows converter is properly seated in housing.

15. Refit gearbox/transfer box assembly.

See

LT230T Transfer Gearbox

GEAR SELECTOR-INTERLOCK

For remove and refit of gear selector interlock.

See

ELECTRICAL, Repair, Gear Selector-Interlock

REPAIR

TORQUE VALUES

NOTE: Torque wrenches should be regularly checked for accuracy to ensure that all fixings are tightened to the correct torque.

Coupling shaft to mainshaft

Filler tube to sump

......................................................................

.....................................................................................

42*

Gear change lever to gearbox

Cooler pipe adaptor to gearbox

...................................................................

.................................................................

Securing screws - clutch F .........................................................................

Securing screw - parking pawl

Securing screws - pump

...................................................................

............................................................................

50 Intermediate plate plugs (M20)

Intermediate plate plugs (M14)

..................................................................

Bell housing mounting bolts .......................................................................

Governor mounting screws

Extension housing bolts

........................................................................

.............................................................................

Control unit mounting bolts

Sump plug

.........................................................................

..................................................................................................

Mounting screws for sump ..........................................................................

Drive plate to converter .............................................................................

39*

Gearbox to engine .....................................................................................

Strut (threaded end) ...................................................................................

Bottom cover to converter housing .............................................................

Cover - converter housing ...........................................................................

Drive plates to crankshaft adaptor

Adaptor to crankshaft

............................................................

.................................................................................

40*

NOTE: * These bolts must have threads coated with Loctite 270 prior to assembly.

Torque values below are for all screws and bolts used except for those that are specified otherwise.

METRIC

M10

M12

M14

M16

......................................................................................................

.....................................................................................................

...................................................................................................

..................................................................................................

105

180

UNC / UNF

1/4 ......................................................................................................

5/16 ...................................................................................................

3/8

7/16

.....................................................................................................

...................................................................................................

1/2

5/8

.....................................................................................................

....................................................................................................

136

SPECIFICATIONS, TORQUE

AUTOMATIC GEARBOX

ZF GEARBOX DATA

Axial end float 0.2 to 0.4 mm.

From torque converter boss to torque converter housing face 50 mm

Freewheel cage assembly to ring gear; minimum clearance 0.1 mm

Output shaft above cylinder F assembly; dimension

10.00 mm

A cylinder protrusion above gearbox front face not more than 8.5 mm

SPECIFICATIONS, TORQUE

AUTOMATIC GEARBOX HOLDING FIXTURE

NOTE: This fixture enables ZF gearbox to be held securely during bench sited repairs. It can be manufactured to details given, or purchased under service tool number LST 118.

SERVICE TOOLS

AUTOMATIC GEARBOX

SERVICE TOOLS

AUTOMATIC GEARBOX

LRT-44-001 Front and rear oil seal replacer.

LST 108

LRT-44-002 Selector linkage setting gauge.

LST 109

LRT-44-003 Oil pump rotation sleeve and end float

LST 111 gauge.

LRT-44-004 Kickdown cable remover.

LST 112

SERVICE TOOLS

AUTOMATIC GEARBOX

LRT-44-005 Control unit oil seal remover/replacer.

LST 113

LRT-44-006 Selector shaft oil seal replacer.

LST 114

LRT-44-007 Line pressure test gauge.

18G.502A

LRT-44-008 Hose and adaptor.

18G.502K

SERVICE TOOLS

LRT-44-009 Adaptor pressure take off.

LST 502-1

LRT-44-010 Convertor lifting handles.

18G.1501

SERVICE TOOLS

PROPELLER SHAFTS

PROPELLER SHAFT ALIGNMENT

Description

The front and rear propeller shafts have non-constant velocity ’Hooks’ type universal joints, with needle roller bearings. The bearing cups are pre-packed with lubricant on assembly and a grease nipple is fitted for servicing as specified, in maintenance section.

Both shafts have Rilsan coated sliding splines to accommodate the variation in distance between the axles and transmission. The splines are pre-packed with lubricant and sealed.

The rear shaft is fitted with a conventional joint at gearbox end and the sliding joint sealed with a rubber gaiter. An SGF rubber coupling is fitted at the differential end of the shaft.

The front shaft which is shorter than the rear is

’Phased’, with the joints at each end, A and B mis-aligned as shown in RR4199.

The phasing is necessary on the front shaft only to allow for greater variation in angular changes.

Catalyst vehicles

The front shaft is ’phased’ as above but is of solid bar construction.

DESCRIPTION AND OPERATION

VIBRATION HARSHNESS

1. Check that the propeller shaft universal joints and sliding splines are not siezed or worn and that the shafts are correctly aligned.

NOTE: In the event that both shafts are satisfactory, but the vibration/harshness is still present, the transfer box operation and balance of the road wheels should be checked.

For transfer box operation.

See TRANSFER

GEARBOX, Fault diagnosis, LT230T Transfer Box

- Oil Leaks

For balance of road wheels.

See WHEELS AND

TYRES, Repair, Wheel Balancing

PROPELLER SHAFTS

FAULT DIAGNOSIS

PROPELLER SHAFTS

FRONT PROPELLER SHAFT

Service repair no - 47.15.02 - Front

Remove

1. Place vehicle over pit or on a ramp [hoist].

2. Remove nuts from each end of propeller shaft.

Remove shaft.

3. Scribe alignment marks on flanges at both ends of propeller shaft to ensure correct refitting.

Service repair no - 47.15.11

Overhaul

4. Thoroughly examine universal joint for signs of damage or wear. Replace if necessary.

5. Clean universal joint bearing cups and circlips.

CAUTION: To ensure correct assembly and reduce possibility of imbalance.

Before removing propeller shaft joint. Mark position of spider pin lubricator relative to journal yoke ears.

6. Remove circlips, and grease nipple.

7. Tap yokes to eject bearing cups.

8. Remove bearing cups and spider.

9. Repeat instructions 4 to 7 for opposite end of propeller shaft if necessary.

10. Clean yokes and bearing cup locations.

Assemble

11. Remove bearing cups from new spider.

12. Check all needle rollers are present and positioned in bearing cups.

13. Ensure bearing cups are one-third full of lubricant.

See LUBRICANTS, FLUIDS AND

CAPACITIES, Information, Recommended

Lubricants and Fluids

14. Enter new spider with seals into yokes of sliding member flange.

15. Partially insert one bearing cup into flange yoke and enter spider trunnion into bearing cup.

16. Insert opposite bearing cup into flange yoke.

17. Press both cups into place.

REPAIR

PROPELLER SHAFTS

18. Press each cup into its respective yoke up to lower land of circlip grooves. Damage may be caused to cups and seals if cups pass this point.

19. Fit circlips and check no end float exists.

20. Engage spider in yokes of sliding member. Fit bearing cups and circlips as described in instructions 14 to 19.

21. Fit grease nipples to spider and sliding member.

22. Apply instructions 14 to 19 to opposite end of propeller shaft.

23. Fit grease nipple and lubricate.

Refit

24. Fit propeller shafts to vehicle and tighten nuts to

47Nm

Refit FRONT propeller shaft so sliding joint end of shaft is fitted to transfer gearbox.

REPAIR

SPIDER ASSEMBLY COMPONENTS

1. Circlip

2. Bearing cup

3. Nylatron washer

4. Needle rollers (27 per cup)

5. Seal retainer and seal

PROPELLER SHAFTS

REPAIR

PROPELLER SHAFTS

REAR PROPELLER SHAFT

Service repair no - 47.15.03

NOTE: SGF rubber coupling should be left attached to propeller shaft. Only remove coupling from propeller shaft if replacement is required.

Remove

1. Scribe alignment marks on flanges at both ends of propeller shaft to ensure correct refitting.

2. Remove three nuts and bolts securing flexible coupling to axle flange.

3. Remove nuts securing propeller shaft flange to transfer gearbox.

4. Raise propeller shaft at gearbox end detach coupling from spigot at differential and withdraw shaft.

NOTE: For replacement of spigot (pinion flange centralising peg).

See REAR AXLE

AND FINAL DRIVE, Overhaul, Axle

Differential Assembly

Overhaul

Service repair no - 47.15.12

NOTE: Refer to front propeller shaft overhaul procedure for gearbox end of shaft. The SGF rubber coupling is a non-serviceable item.

Refit

5. Locate flexible coupling over spigot, align scribed marks and secure at transfer gearbox.

Tighten to

47 Nm.

6. Secure flexible coupling to axle flange with three nuts and bolts and Tighten to

78 Nm.

FLEXIBLE COUPLING

NOTE: Flexible coupling should only be removed if a new coupling is to be fitted.

Remove

1. Remove rear propeller shaft.

See Rear

Propeller Shaft.

2. Remove nuts and bolts securing flexible coupling to propeller shaft.

Refit

3. Reverse removal procedure. Fit nuts and bolts.

Tighten to

78 Nm.

REPAIR

REAR AXLE AND FINAL DRIVE

DESCRIPTION

The welded steel rear axle casing houses a separate spiral bevel type differential unit, which is off set to the right of the vehicle centre line. The differential unit drives the rear wheels via the axle shafts and fully floating hubs which are mounted on tapered roller bearings.

Lubrication

The differential is lubricated with oil and the hub bearings with grease. The hub bearings are fitted with inner and outer seals. The outer seals prevent the differential oil mixing with the hub grease and the inner seals prevent dirt ingress into the hub.

Ventilation

Ventilation of the hub bearings is through the outer oil seals and the differential ventilation pipe, which terminates at a high level.

The wheel hubs on axles with ABS brakes share the same construction to non ABS axles except for the addition of a sensor ring 11 on the brake disc 10.

Rear axle hub

1. Axle casing

2. Ventilation pipe

3. Axle shaft

4. Wheel studs and hub

5. Wheel bearing stub axle

6. Wheel bearings (2)

7. Inner hub seal

8. Outer hub/axle shaft seal

9. Hub lock plate, thrust washer and nuts (2)

10. Brake disc

11. Sensor ring, ABS

DESCRIPTION AND OPERATION

REAR AXLE AND FINAL DRIVE

FAULT DIAGNOSIS

Complaint - Oil leaks

An external leak of lubrication from the hub seals can be caused by a faulty internal seal. For example, if the internal seals which separate the differential from the hubs are faulty and the vehicle is operating or parked on an embankment. Oil from the differential may flood one hub causing a leak and leave the differential lacking lubrication.

When a seal is found to be leaking check the axle ventilation system, as a blockage can cause internal pressure to force oil past the seals.

See ’Description and Operation’ for illustrations of oil seal locations.

When investigating hub seal leaks check the grease for dilution with oil. Check also the differential level and oil for metal particles and the condition of internal seals.

If the vehicle is driven in deep water with defective oil seals, water may contaminate the lubricants and raise the differential level giving a false impression that the housing has been overfilled with oil.

Do not assume that a high oil level in the differential is due to over filling or, that a low level is because of an external leak.

FAULT DIAGNOSIS

REAR AXLE AND FINAL DRIVE

REAR AXLE

Service repair no - 51.25.01

Remove

WARNING: Remove and refit of axle requires a further two persons to steady the axle when lowering or repositioning axle.

1. Drain brake system.

2. Support chassis rear.

3. Remove road wheels.

4. Support axle weight with hydraulic jack.

5. Disconnect ABS wiring harness multi-plug at jump hose bracket, if applicable.

6. Disconnect shock absorbers.

7. Disconnect flexible brake hose at connection under floor.

8. Disconnect lower links at axle.

9. Mark differential and propeller shaft flanges with identification marks for assembly. Remove four nuts and bolts. Lower propeller shaft and tie to one side.

10. Disconnect pivot bracket ball joint at axle bracket.

11. Release bolts and remove coil spring retaining plates.

12. Lower axle and remove road springs.

13. Disconnect anti-roll[sway] bar links to axle.

See

REAR SUSPENSION, Repair, Anti-Roll[Sway]

Bar Ball Joint Links

14. Remove axle assembly.

Refit

15. Position axle and fit lower links. Tighten to

176

16. Reverse removal procedure.

17. Tighten pivot bracket ball joint to axle to

176 Nm.

18. Tighten propeller shaft to differential drive flange to

47 Nm

19. Bleed brake system.

See BRAKES, Repair,

Brake System Bleed

REPAIR

REAR AXLE AND FINAL DRIVE

REAR BRAKE DISC NON ABS

Service repair no - 70.10.11.

Remove

1. Remove rear hub assembly.

See Rear Hub

Assembly

2. Remove disc bolts.

3. Remove disc from rear hub.

Refit

4. Fit disc to rear hub.

5. Fit disc bolts. Tighten to

73 Nm.

6. Check total disc run out, this must not exceed

0,15 mm. If necessary reposition disc.

REAR BRAKE DISCS ABS

Service repair no - 70.11.11.

Remove

1. Remove rear hub assembly.

See Rear Hub

Assembly

2. Remove five nyloc nuts.

3. Remove sensor ring.

4. Remove five hub to disc retaining bolts.

5. Remove disc from hub.

Refit

6. Fit disc onto hub.

7. Apply loctite 270 and fit hub to disc retaining bolts. Tighten to

73 Nm.

8. Using new nyloc nuts fit sensor ring.

7. Fit rear hub assembly.

See Rear Hub

Assembly

Disc reclamation

8. Check disc thickness. This dimension may be reduced to minimum thickness of 12 mm.

Machine equal amounts off each face.

9. Check total disc run out, this must not exceed

0,15 mm. If necessary reposition disc.

10. Fit hub assembly.

See Rear Hub Assembly

Disc reclamation

11. Check disc thickness. This dimension may be reduced to a minimum thickness of 12 mm.

Machine equal amounts off each face.

REPAIR

REAR AXLE AND FINAL DRIVE

REAR HUB ASSEMBLY

Service repair no - 64.15.01

Remove

1. Place rear axle onto axle stands and remove road wheel.

2. Release brake hose clips and remove brake caliper bolts. Secure to one side.

WARNING: Take care not to kink brake hose.

3. Remove five bolts and withdraw axle shaft.

4. Remove joint washer.

5. Bend back lock washer tabs.

6. Remove locknut and lock washer.

7. Remove hub adjusting nut.

8. Remove spacing washer.

9. Remove hub and brake disc assembly complete with bearings.

REAR HUB COMPONENTS

1. Sensor ring retaining nut ABS.

2. Axle shaft.

3. Axle shaft joint washer.

4. Axle shaft retaining bolt (five off).

5. Lock nut.

6. Lock washer.

7. Hub adjusting nut.

8. Spacing washer.

9. Outer bearing.

10. Hub.

11. Inner bearing.

12. Grease seal.

13. Brake disc.

14. Disc retaining bolt (five off).

15. Sensor ring ABS.

REPAIR

REAR AXLE AND FINAL DRIVE

Refit

10. Clean stub axle. Retract ABS sensor slightly from sensor sleeve, if applicable

11. Fit hub assembly to stub axle.

12. Fit spacing washer.

13. Fit hub adjusting nut. Tighten to

61 Nm.

Back off adjusting nut 90

. Tighten to

4 Nm.

This will give the required hub end float of

0,010mm

14. Fit a new lock washer.

18. Fit brake caliper. Tighten to

82 Nm.

Secure brake pipes to axle casing.

19. If applicable, set ABS brakes sensor.

Push sensor in until it touches sensor ring then rotate hub to set sensor.

20. Fit road wheel, remove axle stands and final tighten road wheel nuts to

126 Nm.

21. Operate footbrake to locate brake pads before driving vehicle.

15. Fit locknut. Tighten to

61 Nm.

16. Tab over lock washer to secure adjusting nut and locknut.

17. Using a new joint washer fit axle shaft to hub, secure with five bolts. Tighten to

65 Nm.

REPAIR

REAR AXLE AND FINAL DRIVE

AXLE DIFFERENTIAL ASSEMBLY

Service repair no - 51.15.07.

DISMANTLE

NOTE: Mark differential components so their original positions relative to other components is maintained. Bearing caps must not be interchanged.

1. Remove axle shafts then differential assembly fom axle.

2. Remove roll pin securing bearing nut locking fingers to bearing caps. Remove locking fingers.

3. Loosen bearing cap bolts and mark caps for assembly.

4. Using service tool LRT-54-508, remove bearing adjusting nuts.

5. Remove bearing cap bolts and bearing caps.

6. Remove crown wheel differential unit and bearings.

9. Remove pinion complete with bearing and outer bearing shims.

10. Remove pinion flange oil seal, spacer and bearing.

Remove pinion REAR AXLE DIFFERENTIAL ONLY

7. Remove pinion flange centralizing peg using service tool LRT-51-008.

8. Remove pinion flange nut using service tool

LRT-51-003 to restrain flange.

9. Remove pinion complete with bearing and outer bearing shims.

10. Remove pinion flange oil seal and bearing.

Remove pinion FRONT AXLE DIFFERENTIAL

ONLY

7. Remove pinion flange nut using service tool

LRT-51-003 to restrain flange.

8. Remove washer and pinion drive flange.

11. Using service tool LRT-54-505, remove pinion head bearing track and shim and drive out outer bearing of differential housing.

OVERHAUL

REAR AXLE AND FINAL DRIVE

12. Remove pinion head bearing with service tool

LRT-99-002.

INSPECTION

18. Check all bearings for wear and pitting.

19. Check all gears for wear, scuffing, pitting and damaged teeth.

20. Supplied as matched sets are: crown wheel and pinion, pinion housing and bearing caps.

ASSEMBLE

Differential gears

21. Fit differential gears to differential housing.

22. Fit differential cross shaft and circlips.

13. Remove bolts and washers securing crown wheel to differential flange. Remove crown wheel.

14. Remove differential carrier bearings.

15. Remove circlips and extract differential cross shaft.

16. Withdraw differential gears and pinions.

17. Clean all components.

OVERHAUL

REAR AXLE AND FINAL DRIVE

23. Check gear for freedom of rotation and backlash.

Nominal backlash should be present. Excess backlash necessitates replacement of gears or differential housing.

24. Check serial number marked on pinion end face matches that on crown wheel.

25. Clean and fit crown wheel.

26. Fit carrier bearings and assemble tracks to bearings.

30. Tighten bearing cap bolts to

90 Nm.

31. Check crown wheel for run-out. This should not exceed 0,10 mm. If exceeded examine crown wheel and mounting flange for burrs, grit, etc.

Refit and recheck. A buckled or damaged differential housing flange is corrected by replacing differential gear housing.

32. After checking run out remove differential housing from pinion housing.

33. Remove crown wheel bolts and refit using

Loctite ’Studlock’. Tighten to

58 Nm.

27. Place differential housing with crown wheel and bearings in pinion housing.

28. Fit bearing caps and bolts. Do not tighten bolts.

29. Fit bearing adjusting nuts and adjust to obtain zero end float.

34. Fit pinion head bearing track and original shim to pinion housing. Use service tools LRT-54-505 and LRT-54-506. If fitting a new shim use minimum 1.27 mm thickness.

OVERHAUL

REAR AXLE AND FINAL DRIVE

35. Fit pinion outer bearing track to pinion housing.

Use service tools LRT-54-505 and LRT-54-507.

37. Fit pinion into its location without shims for bearing pre-load.

38. Fit outer bearing, and spacer (front axle differential only).

39. Fit driving flange, washer and nut.

36. Fit pinion head bearing to pinion. Use service tool LRT-54-502.

40. Do not fit oil seal at this stage.

41. Tighten pinion flange nut until force required to rotate pinion is 3 Nm if new bearings are fitted.

This will pre-load bearings to check pinion height dimension.

NOTE: If using original bearings, pre-load figure is 1.5 Nm.

Drive pinion markings

NOTE: Markings on end face adjacent to serial number are of no relevance to servicing.

42. Figures marked on end face opposite to serial number show in thousandths of an inch, deviation from nominal, required to set pinion.

Pinions marked plus (+) must be set below nominal. Pinions marked minus (-) must be set above nominal. Unmarked pinions must be set at nominal.

OVERHAUL

REAR AXLE AND FINAL DRIVE

43. Nominal setting dimension is represented by setting gauge block LRT-54-503. Referenced from pinion end face to bottom radius of differential bearing bore.

Drive pinion adjustment

44. Ensure pinion end face is free of burrs around etched markings.

45. Remove keep disc from magnetized base of dial gauge tool.

46. Place dial gauge and setting block on surface plate. Zero dial gauge trace pin on setting block.

NOTE: Setting block has three height settings heights.

Use 39.50mm setting mark for this differential.

Pinion height shims

PART No.

INCH MM

FTC3853 .061

1.548

FTC3854 .060

1.523

FTC3855 .059

1.498

FTC3856 .058

1.473

FTC3857 .057

1.448

FTC3858 .056

1.423

FTC3859 .055

1.398

FTC3860 .054

1.373

FTC3861 .053

1.348

FTC3862 .052

1.323

FTC3863 .051

1.298

FTC3864 .050

1.273

FTC3865 .049

1.248

FTC3866 .048

1.223

FTC3867 .047

1.198

FTC3868 .046

1.173

47. Position dial gauge centrally on pinion end face, register on lowest point on one differential bearing bore. Note dial gauge measurement from zeroed setting.

OVERHAUL

REAR AXLE AND FINAL DRIVE

48. Repeat on other bearing bore. Add readings then halve sum to obtain mean reading. Note whether trace pin has moved up or down from zero.

Where trace pin moves down, reading is equal to thickness of shims to remove, to bring pinion to nominal.

Where trace pin moves up, reading is equal to thickness of shims to add, to bring pinion to nominal.

49. Before adjusting shim thickness: check pinion face marking. If a plus (+) figure, subtract in thousandths of an inch from shim thickness figure.

50. If pinion has a minus (-) figure, add amount to shim thickness figure.

Adjust shim thickness under pinion head bearing track as necessary.

INCH MM

.001

.002

.003

.004

.005

.006

.007

.008

.009

.010

.025

.05

.075

.10

.125

.15

.175

.20

.225

.25

NOTE: Where dial indicator is metric conversion must be made to inches when measuring and selecting shims.

51. Recheck pinion height setting. If setting is correct, mean reading of dial gauge will agree with figure marked on pinion end face.

For example, with end face marking of +3, dial gauge reading should indicate pinion is +0.003

in.

Bearing pre-load adjustment

52. Remove the pinion flange, pinion, outer bearing and spacer.

53. Slide new shim, of same thickness as original

(bearing pre-load) into position on pinion shaft. If fitting a new shim use thickest shim 2.155 mm.

54. Fit pinion to pinion housing and fit outer bearing and spacer (front differential only).

55. Fit driving flange, washer and nut.

56. Do not fit oil seal at this stage.

57. Tighten pinion flange nut to

NOTE: If using original bedded in bearings, pre-load figure is 1.5 Nm.

58. Remove pinion flange.

130 Nm. Force to rotate pinion shaft is 3Nm using new bearings.

Change shim as necessary to obtain reading.

Thicker shim will reduce pre-load. Thinner shim will increase pre-load.

OVERHAUL

REAR AXLE AND FINAL DRIVE

PINION PRELOAD SHIMS

PART No.

INCH MM

FTC3869 .085

2.155

FTC3870 .084

2.130

FTC3871 .083

2.105

FTC3872 .082

2.080

FTC3873 .081

2.055

FTC3874 .080

2.030

FTC3875 .079

2.005

FTC3876 .078

1.980

FTC3877 .077

1.955

FTC3878 .076

1.930

FTC3879 .075

1.905

FTC3880 .074

1.880

FTC3881 .073

1.855

FTC3882 .072

1.830

FTC3883 .071

1.805

FTC3884 .070

1.780

FTC3885 .069

1.755

FTC3886 .068

1.730

FTC3887 .067

1.705

FTC3888 .066

1.680

FTC3889 .065

1.655

FTC3890 .064

1.630

FTC3891 .063

1.605

FTC3892 .062

1.580

FTC3893 .061

1.555

FTC3894 .060

1.530

FTC3895 .059

1.505

FTC3896 .058

1.480

Fitting Pinion Oil Seal

59. Coat outer diameter of seal with grease. Fit seal lip side leading flush with end face of housing using tool LRT-51-001.

Fit pinion drive flange - front axle differential

60. Lubricate seal lips with axle oil.

61. Fit spacer and pinion drive flange to differential.

62. Secure flange with washer and nylon nut.

Tighten to

130 Nm.

Fit pinion drive flange - rear axle differential

60. Lubricate seal lips with axle oil.

61. Fit pinion drive flange to differential and secure with washer and nylon nut. Tighten to

130 Nm.

62. Coat centralizing peg with Loctite 601 or 638 and fit over pinion retaining nut in drive flange.

OVERHAUL

REAR AXLE AND FINAL DRIVE

CROWN WHEEL/PINION BACKLASH

ADJUSTMENT

63. Place differential housing in pinion housing.

64. Fit bearing caps and partly tighten bolts.

68. Tighten left nut until it contacts bearing. Continue turning until a backlash of 0,10 to 0,17 mm is met. DO NOT loosen right nut otherwise bearing preload will be affected.

69. Fit locking fingers and roll pins. Align locking finger with a slot.

70. Evenly tighten bearing cap bolts to

90 Nm.

65. Fit bearing adjusting nuts.

66. Mesh crown wheel to pinion. Using service tool

LRT-54-508 loosen left bearing adjuster nut.

67. Tighten right nut until crown wheel/pinion backlash is just removed.

OVERHAUL

71. Recheck crown wheel/pinion backlash.

72. Lubricate bearings and gears.

REAR AXLE AND FINAL DRIVE

REAR HUB ASSEMBLY

Service repair no - 61.15.13.

Overhaul

1. Remove rear hub assembly.

See Repair, Rear

Hub Assembly

2. Remove outer bearing.

3. Remove five nyloc nuts and withdraw ABS sensor ring, if applicable.

4. Mark, for reassembly, position of hub to brake disc.

5. Remove five bolts and separate hub from brake disc.

WARNING: A maximum of two road wheel retaining studs can be renewed. Should more studs be unserviceable fit new hub with studs.

6. Remove grease seal and inner bearing from hub.

7. Remove inner and outer bearing tracks.

REAR HUB COMPONENTS

1. Sensor ring retaining nut ABS.

2. Axle shaft.

3. Axle shaft joint washer.

4. Axle shaft retaining bolt (five off).

5. Lock nut.

6. Lock washer.

7. Hub adjusting nut.

8. Spacing washer.

9. Outer bearing.

10. Hub.

11. Inner bearing.

12. Grease seal.

13. Brake disc.

14. Disc retaining bolt (five off).

15. Sensor ring ABS.

OVERHAUL

REAR AXLE AND FINAL DRIVE

Refit

8. Clean hub and fit inner and outer bearing tracks.

11. Assemble brake disc to the hub, line up reassembly marks. Applying Loctite 270, fit and tighten retaining bolts to

73 Nm.

12. If necessary, where applicable, renew sensor ring studs applying Loctite 270 to threads. Fit sensor ring using new nyloc nuts. Tighten to

Nm. Ensuring it is correctly fitted to avoid tooth run out.

13. Pack hub outer bearing with grease and fit to hub.

14. Fit rear hub assembly.

See Repair, Rear Hub

Assembly

9. Pack hub inner bearing with grease and fit to hub.

10. With lip side leading fit a new seal flush with rear face of hub. Using service tool LRT-54-003 seal replacer and drift. Apply grease between seal lips.

OVERHAUL

REAR STUB AXLE

Service repair no - 64.15.22.

STUB AXLE COMPONENTS

1. Rear axle shaft.

2. Stub axle to axle casing bolt.

3. Mudshield.

4. Stub axle.

5. Stub axle joint washer.

6. Axle case.

7. Sensor ABS.

REAR AXLE AND FINAL DRIVE

Overhaul

1. Remove hub assembly.

See Repair, Rear Hub

Assembly

2. Remove six bolts from stub axle to axle casing.

3. Remove mudshield.

4. Remove stub axle and joint washer.

5. Remove rear axle shaft from axle casing.

Renew rear stub axle oil seal

6. Remove and discard oil seal. Lubricate seal and lip with EP90 oil. Using special tool LST 138 fit new oil seal lipside trailing so that seal is flush with rear face of stub axle.

Refit

7. Fit new joint washer, stub axle and mudshield with bolts. Tighten to

65 Nm.

8. Fit rear axle shaft avoid damaging stub axle seal.

9. Refit rear hub assembly.

See Repair, Rear

Hub Assembly

OVERHAUL

REAR AXLE AND FINAL DRIVE

AXLE DIFFERENTIAL DATA

Pinion bearing pre-load:

(new bearings) ........................................................

(bearings bedded in)

Crown wheel run-out

...............................................

........................................................

Crown wheel/pinion backlash ...........................................

3 Nm

1,5 Nm

0,10 mm

0,10 to 0,17 mm

REAR HUB

Rear hub end float ............................................................

0,010 mm

TORQUE VALUES

NOTE: Torque wrenches should be regularly checked for accuracy to ensure that all fixings are tightened to the correct torque.

REAR AXLE

Pinion housing to axle case .......................................................................

Crown wheel to differential case ................................................................

Differential bearing cap to pinion housing ..................................................

47 Differential drive flange to drive shaft .........................................................

Bevel pinion nut

Lower link to axle

........................................................................................

......................................................................................

Pivot bracket ball joint to axle ...................................................................

129

176

REAR HUB ABS VEHICLES

Hub driving member to hub .......................................................................

Brake disc to hub ......................................................................................

Stub axle rear to axle case

Brake caliper to axle case

........................................................................

..........................................................................

65 *

73 *

Disc shield to axle case .............................................................................

Sensor ring to brake disc ABS ....................................................................

* Apply loctite 270 prior to assembly.

SPECIFICATIONS, TORQUE

REAR AXLE AND FINAL DRIVE

Torque values below cover all screws and bolts used, unless specified otherwise.

METRIC

M10

M12

M14

M16

......................................................................................................

.....................................................................................................

...................................................................................................

..................................................................................................

105

180

UNC / UNF

1/4 ......................................................................................................

5/16 ...................................................................................................

3/8

7/16

.....................................................................................................

...................................................................................................

1/2

5/8

.....................................................................................................

....................................................................................................

136

SPECIFICATIONS, TORQUE

AXLE DIFFERENTIAL

REAR AXLE AND FINAL DRIVE

LRT-51-003 Flange holder tool

18G1205

LRT-54-504 Universal setting block

18G1914

LRT-54-502 Pinion head bearing remover/replacer

18G476

LRT-99-002 Press

MS47

SERVICE TOOLS

REAR AXLE AND FINAL DRIVE

LRT-51-001 Oil seal replacer

LST106

LRT-54-505 Extractor for pinion bearing races

RO262757A

LRT-54-506 Replacer adapter pinion head bearing

RO2627571 cup

LRT-54-507 Adaptor pinion tail bearing cup

RO2627572 replacer

SERVICE TOOLS

REAR HUB

REAR AXLE AND FINAL DRIVE

LRT-54-508 Wrench flange and carrier

RO530105 bearing nuts

LRT-99-503 Bracket for dial gauge and indicator

RO530106

LRT-54-001 Oil seal replacer non ABS

LST550-5

LRT-99-003 Drift

18G134

SERVICE TOOLS

REAR AXLE AND FINAL DRIVE

LRT-54-002 Hub nut wrench

RO606435A

LRT-54-003 Hub oil seal replacer ABS

LST137

LRT-54-004 Oil seal replacer ABS

LST138

SERVICE TOOLS

FRONT AXLE AND FINAL DRIVE

DESCRIPTION

The welded steel front axle casing houses a separate spiral bevel type differential unit, which is off set to the right of the vehicle centre line. The differential unit drives the front wheels via the axle shafts and constant velocity joints which are totally enclosed in the spherical and swivel housings.

The front axles fitted with ABS brakes or non ABS brakes are of the same construction except for different top swivel pins in the swivel housing and a sensor on the constant velocity joint.

Front axle - ABS

The front wheels are pivoted on taper roller bearings

19 at the bottom of the swivel housing and a ’Rialco bush’ 25 at the top. The top swivel pin also houses the

ABS pickup (electrical connection) as shown in the main illustration, J5367.

Front axle - non ABS

The front wheels are pivoted on tape roller bearings at the top (see insert) and bottom of the swivel housing.

The wheel hubs on all axles are supported by two taper bearings and driven by drive flanges which are splined to the one piece, stub shaft/constant velocity joint.

Lubrication

The differential, swivel pin housing and wheel hubs are indiviudally lubricated and separated by oil seals 7 and 8 to prevent oil transfer across the axle when the vehicle is traversing steep inclines. The wheel bearings are lubricated with grease and the swivel housing and differential with oil.

Ventilation

Ventilation of the differential is through a plastic pipe 2 which terminates at a high level in the vehicle on both

ABS and non ABS axles. The swivel housings ventilate through axle shaft oil seals 8 into the differential and the hub bearings vent via the oil seals into swivel housing.

DESCRIPTION AND OPERATION

FRONT AXLE AND FINAL DRIVE

Front axle

1. Axle casing

2. Ventilation pipe

3. Axle shaft

4. Wheel studs and hub

5. Stub axle

6. Wheel bearings (2)

7. Inner and outer hub seals

8. Axle shaft seal

9. Hub lock plate, thrust washer and nuts (2)

10. Brake disc

11. Drive flange

12. Shim washer and circlip

13. Dust cap

14. Constant velocity joint/shaft

15. Thrust collar for CV joint

16. Roller bearing

17. Spacer

18. Circlip

19. Bottom swivel taper bearing

20. Top and bottom swivel pins

21. Spherical housing, seal and retainer

22. Swivel housing

23. Constant velocity shaft seal

24. ABS pickup (electrical connection)

25. ’Rialco’ bush ABS

DESCRIPTION AND OPERATION

FRONT AXLE AND FINAL DRIVE

FAULT DIAGNOSIS

Complaint - Oil leaks

An external leak of lubrication can be caused by a faulty internal seal. For example, if the seals which separate the differential from the swivel housings are faulty and the vehicle is operating or parked on an embankment, oil may leak across the axle leaving one swivel with a high level and the other swivel and differential lacking lubrication.

See ’Description and Operation’ for illustrations of oil seal locations.

When investigating leaks or checking oil levels, it is essential that all the lubrication is drained from any housing with a high level and that the other levels are checked.

Swivel oil should be checked for signs of grease leaking from the hub bearings and the hub grease should not contain oil.

Check that the axle ventilation system is clear, as a blockage can cause internal pressure to force oil past the seals.

If the vehicle is driven in deep water with defective oil seals, water may contaminate the lubricants and when checked, give a false impression that the housing has been overfilled with oil.

Do not assume that a high oil level is due to over filling or, that a low level is because of an external leak.

FAULT DIAGNOSIS

FRONT AXLE AND FINAL DRIVE

FRONT AXLE ASSEMBLY

Service repair no - 54.15.01

Remove

WARNING: Remove and refit of axle requires a further two persons to steady axle when lowering or repositioning axle.

1. Support chassis front.

2. Remove road wheels.

3. Support axle weight with hydraulic jack.

4. Remove radius arms to chassis frame nuts.

5. Disconnect steering damper from track rod.

Using a extractor remove track rod links from swivel pin arms.

6. Remove four nuts and bolts securing radius arms to axle bracket.

7. Remove radius arms.

8. Remove bolts securing brake hose brackets.

Refit bolts to prevent oil leakage.

9. Remove ABS sensor, if applicable.

10. Remove bolts from brake calipers and tie to one side.

11. Remove nuts and washers securing shock absorbers to axle.

12. Disconnect drag link from swivel pin housing arm.

13. Remove two nuts and bolts securing panhard rod to axle bracket. Lift rod clear of axle.

14. Mark for reassembly drive shaft flanges.

Remove four nuts and bolts, tie propeller shaft to one side.

15. Lower axle assembly and remove road springs.

16. Disconnect anti-roll[sway] bar link.

See FRONT

SUSPENSION, Repair, Anti-Roll[Sway] Bar

Ball Joint Links

17. Remove axle assembly.

Refit

18. Position axle under vehicle, supporting left side of axle.

19. Reverse removal procedure.

20. Tighten propeller shaft bolts to

47 Nm.

21. Tighten panhard rod to axle bracket to

88 Nm.

22. Tighten drag link to hub arm to

40 Nm.

23. Tighten upper swivel pin bolts.

See

Specifications, torque, Torque Values

24. Tighten radius arms to axle bolts to

197 Nm.

25. Tighten radius arms to chassis side member nuts to

197 Nm.

26. Tighten track rod end to

40 Nm.

Fit new split [cotter] pin.

REPAIR

FRONT AXLE AND FINAL DRIVE

FRONT BRAKE DISCS

Service repair no - 70.10.10.

Remove

1. Remove front hub assembly.

See Front Hub

Assembly

2. Remove five hub to disc bolts.

3. Tap disc to separate from hub.

Refit

4. Locate disc to hub.

5. Apply Loctite 270 to disc bolts. Tighten to

Nm.

6. Check total disc runout with a dial indicator, this must not exceed 0,15 mm. If necessary reposition disc.

7. Fit hub assembly.

See Front Hub Assembly

Disc reclamation

8. Check disc thickness. This dimension may be reduced to minimum thickness of 12 mm.

Machine equal amount off each face.

REPAIR

FRONT AXLE AND FINAL DRIVE

FRONT HUB ASSEMBLY

Service repair no - 60.25.01.

Remove

1. Loosen front wheel nuts, jack up vehicle and lower onto axle stands and remove road wheel.

2. Release brake hose clips and remove brake caliper. Secure to one side.

3. Lever off dust cap.

4. Remove circlip and drive shaft shim from driveshaft.

5. Remove five bolts and withdraw driving member and joint washer.

6. Bend back lock washer tabs.

7. Remove locknut and lock washer.

8. Remove hub adjusting nut.

9. Remove spacing washer.

10. Remove hub and brake disc assembly complete with bearings.

HUB COMPONENTS

1. Dust cap.

2. Drive shaft circlip.

3. Drive shaft shim.

4. Drive member.

5. Drive member joint washer.

6. Drive member retaining bolt.

7. Lock nut.

8. Lock washer.

9. Hub adjusting nut.

10. Spacing washer.

11. Outer bearing.

12. Hub.

13. Inner bearing.

14. Grease seal.

15. Brake disc

16. Disc retaining bolt.

REPAIR

FRONT AXLE AND FINAL DRIVE

Refit

11. Clean stub axle and drive shaft and fit hub assembly to axle.

12. Fit spacing washer.

13. Fit hub adjusting nut. Tighten to

61 Nm.

14. Back off adjusting nut 90

. Tighten to

4 Nm.

This will give the required hub end float of

0,010mm

15. Fit a new lock washer.

19. Fit original drive shaft shim and secure with a circlip.

20. To check drive shaft end play mount a dial gauge using bracket LRT-99-503 and rest pin in a loaded condition on end of drive shaft.

21. Fit a suitable bolt to threaded end of drive shaft.

Move drive shaft in and out noting dial gauge reading. End play should be between 0,08 to

0,25 mm.

16. Fit locknut. Tighten to

61 Nm.

17. Tab over lock washer to secure adjusting nut and locknut.

18. Fit a new joint washer to driving member and fit member to hub and secure with five bolts.

Tighten to

65 Nm.

22. If end play requires adjustment, remove circlip, measure shim thickness and fit an appropriate shim to give required end-play.

23. Remove bolt from drive shaft, fit circlip and dust cap.

24. Fit brake caliper. Tighten to

82 Nm.

25. Bleed brake system.

See BRAKES, Repair,

Brake System Bleed

26. Fit road wheel, remove axle stands and tighten road wheel nuts to

126 Nm.

27. Operate footbrake to locate brake pads before taking vehicle on road.

REPAIR

FRONT AXLE AND FINAL DRIVE

FRONT DIFFERENTIAL

Service repair no - 54.10.07.

Overhaul

The front and rear differentials are the same. When overhauling front differential.

See REAR AXLE AND

FINAL DRIVE, Overhaul, Axle Differential

Assembly

5. Drift out grease seal and inner bearing from hub and discard seal.

6. Drift out inner and outer bearing tracks.

7. Clean hub and drift in inner and outer bearing tracks.

FRONT HUB

Service repair no - 60.26.14.

Overhaul

1. Remove front hub assembly.

See Repair,

Front Hub Assembly

2. Remove outer bearing.

3. Mark, for reassembly, relationship between hub and brake disc, if original hub is to be refitted.

4. Remove five bolts and separate hub from brake disc.

HUB COMPONENTS

1. Dust cap.

2. Drive shaft circlip.

3. Drive shaft shim.

4. Drive member.

5. Drive member joint washer.

6. Drive member retaining bolt.

7. Lock nut.

8. Lock washer.

9. Hub adjusting nut.

10. Spacing washer.

11. Outer bearing.

12. Hub.

13. Inner bearing.

14. Grease seal.

15. Brake disc.

16. Disc retaining bolt.

8. Pack hub inner bearing with recommended grease and fit to hub.

OVERHAUL

FRONT AXLE AND FINAL DRIVE

9. With lip side leading fit new seal to hub using special tool LST 137 seal replacer and drift 18G

134. Drive in seal flush with rear face of hub.

Apply grease between seal lips.

10. Fit brake disc to hub, lining up to marks made during dismantling. apllying Loctite 270, fit five retaining bolts. Tighten to

73 Nm.

11. Grease and fit outer bearing to hub.

12. Fit front hub assembly.

See Repair, Front Hub

Assembly

OVERHAUL

FRONT AXLE AND FINAL DRIVE

FRONT STUB AXLE, CONSTANT VELOCITY JOINT

AND SWIVEL PIN HOUSING NON ABS

Service repair no - 60.15.43.

Remove stub axle, axle shaft and constant velocity joint.

1. Remove front hub assembly.

See Repair,

Front Hub Assembly

2. Drain swivel pin housing and refit plug.

3. Remove six bolts retaining stub axle to swivel housing.

4. Remove mud shield.

5. Remove stub axle and joint washer.

Remove constant velocity joint from axle shaft

7. Hold axle shaft firmly in a soft jawed vice.

8. Using a soft mallet drive constant velocity joint from shaft.

9. Remove circlip and collar from axle shaft.

Constant velocity joint

10. Mark positions of constant velocity joint, inner and outer race and cage for reassembly.

11. Swivel cage and inner race to remove balls.

6. Pull out axle shaft and constant velocity joint from axle casing.

OVERHAUL

FRONT AXLE AND FINAL DRIVE

12. Examine all components in particular inner and outer track, cage balls and bearing surfaces for damage and excessive wear.

13. Maximum acceptable end-float on assembled joint 0,64mm. Renew if worn or damaged.

Lubricate with a recommended oil during assembly.

Fit constant velocity joint to axle

14. Fit collar and a new circlip.

15. Engage constant velocity joint on axle shaft splines and using a soft mallet, drive joint in fully.

19. Lubricate seal and lip with EP90 oil and with cavity side leading press in a new oil seal using special tool LRT-54-004.

Renew stub axle,thrust ring, oil seal and bearing

16. Drill and chisel off thrust ring taking care to avoid damaging stub axle.

17. Remove bearing and oil seal using special tool

LRT-37-004 and slide hammer LRT-99-004.

Ensure lip of tool locates behind bearing to to drive it out.

18. Repeat instruction for removal of oil seal.

20. Using special tool LRT-54-005, fit bearing with its part number visible when fitted, and flush with end face of stub axle.

21. Press fit a new thrust ring onto stub axle.

OVERHAUL

FRONT AXLE AND FINAL DRIVE

Swivel pin housing

22. Remove bolts securing oil seal retaining plate and joint washer. Release assembly from swivel pin housing.

NOTE: Removal of oil seal and retaining plate is achieved when swivel bearing housing is removed.

23. Remove two bolts, retaining lower swivel pin to housing.

24. Remove brake disc shield bracket.

25. tap lug to remove lower swivel pin and joint washer.

26. Remove two bolts retainin brake hose bracket and top swivel pin.

27. Remove bracket, top swivel pin and shims.

28. Remove swivel pin housing while retrieving lower and upper bearings.

Swivel bearing housing

29. Remove lower bearing track from swivel bearing housing.

NOTE: Use upper bearing opening to gain access to lower bearing track.

30. Remove seven bolts retaining swivel bearing housing to axle case.

31. Remove inner oil seal from back of housing.

32. Remove top bearing track from swivel bearing housing.

NOTE: Use lower bearing opening to gain access to upper bearing track.

33. If worn, pitted or damaged, renew housing.

34. Fit upper and lower bearing tracks into swivel bearing housing.

CAUTION: Ensure bearing tracks are fitted square or damage could occur.

35. With seal lips trailing, fit swivel housing inner oil seal into rear of housing. Grease seal lips.

Fit swivel pin housing

36. Coat swivel bearing housing to axle casing bolts with Loctite 270 or equivalent.

37. Coat both sides of joint washer with a sealing compound. Position swivel bearing housing to axle mating face.

38. Place retaining plate, joint washer and oil seal over axle flange ready for assembly.

39. Fit swivel bearing housing to axle flange with seven bolts. Tighten to

73 Nm.

40. Grease and fit upper and lower swivel pin taper roller bearings.

41. Position swivel pin housing over swivel bearing housing.

42. Coat joint washer both sides with sealing compound and position on lower swivel pin.

43. Loosely fit brake shield bracket plus lower swivel pin with lug outboard to swivel pin housing.

44. Loosely fit top swivel pin plus existing shims and brake hose bracket to swivel pin housing.

45. Apply Loctite 270 or equivalent to lower swivel pin bolts. Tighten to

78 Nm bend over lock tabs.

46. Tighten top swivel pin bolts to

78 Nm.

OVERHAUL

FRONT AXLE AND FINAL DRIVE

Swivel assembly components Check and adjust preload on bearings

NOTE: Swivel housing oil seal and axle should not be fitted.

47. Attach a spring balance to ball joint bore and pull balance to determine effort required to turn swivel pin housing.

Resistance, once initial inertia has been overcome, should be 1.16 to 1.46 kg. Adjust by removing or adding shims to top swivel pin.

1. Swivel pin housing

2. Top swivel pin and brake hose bracket

3. Upper and lower swivel pin bearings

4. Shim

5. Retaining plate and washer

6. Oil seal

7. Joint washer

8. Swivel bearing housing

9. Joint washer

10. Lower swivel pin

11. Mudshield bracket

12. Swivel housing inner oil seal

48. When setting is correct remove top swivel bolts, apply Loctite 270 or equivalent. Refit to

78 Nm,

and bend over lock tabs.

49. Apply recommended grease between lips of swivel oil seal.

50. Fit oil seal, joint washer and retaining plate with seven bolts and spring washers to

11 Nm.

51. Fit tie rod and drag link and secure with new cotter pins. Tighten to

40 Nm.

52. Fit brake disc shield.

53. Loosely fit lock stop bolt and nut.

54. Apply a recommended grease between lips of swivel housing oil seal.

55. Secure oil seal with retaining plate and securing bolts. Tighten to

11 Nm.

56. Fit track-rod and drag link and secure with new cotter pins.

57. Loosely fit lock stop bolt for later adjustment.

58. Fit brake disc shield.

OVERHAUL

FRONT AXLE AND FINAL DRIVE

Fit driveshaft and stub axle

59. Insert axle shaft, and when differential splines are engaged, push assembly in fully.

CAUTION: Take care not to damage axle shaft oil seals.

60. Place a new joint washer in position on swivelpin housing to stub axle mating face. Coat threads of stub axle bolts with Loctite 270.

61. Fit stub axle with flat at 12 o’clock position.

CAUTION: Ensure that constant velocity joint bearing journal is butted against thrust ring on stub axle. Before stub axle is secured.

62. Place mud shield in position and secure stub axle to swivel pin housing with six bolts and tighten evenly to

65 Nm.

63. Fit brake jump hoses to brake jump hose bracket.

64. Fit front hub complete assembly.

See Repair,

Front Hub Assembly

65. Check swivel pin housing oil drain plug is fitted.

66. Fill swivel assembly to correct level, with new oil.

See SECTION 10, Maintenance, Under

Vehicle Maintenance

67. Set steering lock stop bolts to provide a clearance of 20mm.

See STEERING,

Adjustment, Steering Lock Stops

FRONT STUB AXLE, CONSTANT VELOCITY JOINT

AND SWIVEL PIN HOUSING ABS

Service repair no - 60.15.43.

Remove stub axle, axle shaft and constant velocity joint.

1. Remove front hub assembly.

See Repair,

Front Hub Assembly

2. Drain swivel pin housing and refit plug.

3. Remove six bolts retaining stub axle to swivel housing.

4. Remove mud shield.

5. Remove stub axle and joint washer.

6. Pull out axle shaft and constant velocity joint from axle casing.

OVERHAUL

FRONT AXLE AND FINAL DRIVE

Remove constant velocity joint from axle shaft

7. Hold axle shaft firmly in a soft jawed vice.

8. Using a soft mallet drive constant velocity joint from shaft.

9. Remove circlip and collar from axle shaft.

12. Examine all components in particular inner and outer track, cage balls and bearing surfaces for damage and excessive wear.

13. Maximum acceptable end-float on assembled joint 0,64mm. Renew if worn or damaged.

Lubricate with a recommended oil during assembly.

Fit constant velocity joint to axle

14. Fit collar and a new circlip.

15. Engage constant velocity joint on axle shaft splines and using a soft mallet, drive joint in fully.

Constant velocity joint

10. Mark positions of constant velocity joint, inner and outer race and cage for reassembly.

11. Swivel cage and inner race to remove balls.

Renew stub axle,thrust ring, oil seal and bearing

16. Drill and chisel off thrust ring taking care to avoid damaging stub axle.

17. Remove bearing and oil seal using special tool

LRT-37-004 and slide hammer LRT-99-004.

Ensure lip of tool locates behind bearing to to drive it out.

18. Repeat instruction for removal of oil seal.

OVERHAUL

FRONT AXLE AND FINAL DRIVE

19. Lubricate seal and lip with EP90 oil and with cavity side leading press in a new oil seal using special tool LRT-54-004.

20. Using special tool LRT-54-005, fit bearing with its part number visible when fitted, and flush with end face of stub axle.

21. Press fit a new thrust ring onto stub axle.

Swivel pin housing assembly

22. Remove brake disc shield bracket.

23. Disconnect track-rod end ball joint from housing.

24. Disconnect drag-link ball joint.

25. Disconnect jump hoses from brake jump hose bracket.

26. Remove ABS brake sensor.

27. Remove six bolts securing oil seal and retaining plate to swivel pin housing. Prise seal from swivel pin housing.

NOTE: Oil seal and retaining plate cannot be removed until swivel pin bearing housing is removed.

28. Remove two screws securing brake damper/shield bracket and lower swivel pin to housing.

29. Withdraw lower swivel pin and joint washer by tapping protruding lug.

30. Remove top swivel pin retaining bolts complete with brake jump hose bracket.

31. Remove top swivel pin and shims.

32. Remove swivel pin housing while retrieving lower taper bearing.

Swivel pin bearing housing

33. Remove seven bolts securing swivel pin bearing housing to axle case.

34. Remove and discard oil seal and joint washer.

35. Remove lower swivel pin bearing track.

36. Remove top swivel pin bush housing assembly.

Discard two thrust washers and bearing.

37. If worn, pitted or damaged, renew swivel pin bearing housing.

38. Fit a new lower swivel pin bearing track.

39. Fit a new bush and bush housing. Ensure relieved lip of bush housing faces towards rear, as shown.

OVERHAUL

FRONT AXLE AND FINAL DRIVE

50. Coat threads of lower swivel pin screws with

Loctite 270 and fit, together with damper and shield bracket. Tighten to

25 Nm.

51. Tighten top swivel pin and brake jump hose bracket securing bolts to

65 Nm.

Check and adjust preload on bearings

52. The preload on bearings to be 0,25 to 0,30 mm,

without swivel housing oil seal and axle fitted, and reading from centre of swivel pin. The torque required to turn swivel assembly from lock to lock to be

2.0 to 2.8 Nm. Adjust by removing or adding shims as necessary.

53. To take a reading use special tool LRT-57-024 torque test adaptor, with a torque wrench and extension as shown.

40. With seal lips trailing press axle shaft oil seal flush into rear of housing. Grease lips.

41. Fit new thrust washers and bearing into top swivel pin bush.

42. Hang swivel pin bearing housing oil seal and retainer plate over back of housing. Ensure they are in correct assembly order.

43. Fit a new joint washer and secure swivel pin bearing housing to axle. Starting with top fixing dowel bolt. Tighten to

72Nm.

Fit swivel pin housing

44. Grease and fit lower swivel pin bearing to bearing housing.

45. Place swivel pin housing in position over swivel pin bearing housing.

46. Using a new joint washer, fit lower swivel pin with lip outboard. Do not secure with screws at this stage.

47. Fit a new sensor bush and new oil seal, lip side leading to top swivel pin.

48. Lubricate with a recommended oil and fit top swivel pin with existing shims.

49. Coat threads of top swivel pin bolts with Loctite

542. Fit bolts and jump hose bracket (do not tighten).

54. Apply a recommended grease between lips of swivel housing oil seal.

55. Secure oil seal with retaining plate and securing bolts. Tighten to

11Nm.

56. Fit track-rod and drag link and secure with new cotter pins.

57. Loosely fit lock stop bolt for later adjustment.

58. Fit brake disc shield.

OVERHAUL

FRONT AXLE AND FINAL DRIVE

Fit driveshaft and stub axle

59. Insert axle shaft, and when differential splines are engaged, push assembly in fully.

CAUTION: Take care not to damage axle shaft oil seals.

60. Place a new joint washer in position on swivelpin housing to stub axle mating face. Coat threads of stub axle bolts with Loctite 270.

61. Fit stub axle with flat at 12 o’clock position.

CAUTION: Ensure that constant velocity joint bearing journal is butted against thrust ring on stub axle. Before stub axle is secured.

62. Place mud shield in position and secure stub axle to swivel pin housing with six bolts and tighten evenly to

65 Nm.

63. Fit brake jump hoses to brake jump hose bracket.

64. Fit front hub complete assembly.

See Repair,

Front Hub Assembly

65. Check swivel pin housing oil drain plug is fitted.

66. Fill swivel assembly to correct level, with new oil.

See SECTION 10, Maintenance, Under

Vehicle Maintenance

67. Set steering lock stop bolts to provide a clearance of 20mm.

See STEERING,

Adjustment, Steering Lock Stops

68. Fit ABS brake sensor.

See BRAKES, Repair,

Sensors - Front

OVERHAUL

FRONT AXLE AND FINAL DRIVE

FRONT HUB AND SWIVEL COMPONENTS

1. Brake caliper.

2. Mud shield.

3. Stub axle.

4. Joint washer.

5. Oil seal.

6. Bearing.

7. Brake disc shield.

8. Constant velocity joint.

9. Circlip.

10. Bush.

11. Inner driveshaft.

12. Top swivel pin and jump hose bracket.

13. Shim.

14. Swivel pin housing.

15. Joint washer.

16. Lower swivel pin.

17. Damper and shield bracket.

18. Thrust washer, ABS.

19. Bush and housing, ABS.

20. Swivel pin bearing housing.

21. Lower swivel pin bearing (and upper bearing non

ABS).

22. Oil seal.

23. Oil seal retaining plate.

24. Joint washer.

25. Oil seal, ABS.

26. Sensor bush, ABS.

27. Thrust bearing, ABS.

OVERHAUL

FRONT AXLE AND FINAL DRIVE

TORQUE VALUES

NOTE: Torque wrenches should be regularly checked for accuracy to ensure that all fixings are tightened to the correct torque.

FRONT AXLE

Hub driving member to hub ........................................................................

65 *

Brake disc to hub .......................................................................................

Stub axle to swivel pin housing ..................................................................

Brake caliper to swivel pin housing ............................................................

Upper swivel pin to swivel pin housing ......................................................

Upper swivel pin to swivel pin housing ABS ..............................................

Lower swivel pin to swivel pin housing ......................................................

Lower swivel pin to swivel pin housing ABS ..............................................

Oil seal retainer to swivel pin housing ........................................................

Swivel bearing housing to axle case ..........................................................

73 *

Pinion housing to axle case .......................................................................

Crown wheel to differential housing ...........................................................

Differential bearing cap to pinion housing ..................................................

47 Differential drive flange to drive shaft .........................................................

Mudshield to bracket lower swivel pin

Disc shield to bracket lower ABS

........................................................

................................................................

Bevel pinion nut ........................................................................................

Draglink to hub arm ....................................................................................

130

Panhard rod to axle bracket .......................................................................

Radius arm to axle ....................................................................................

190

Radius arm to chassis side member .........................................................

190

NOTE: * These bolts to be coated with Loctite 270 prior to assembly.

SPECIFICATIONS, TORQUE

FRONT AXLE AND FINAL DRIVE

Torque values below cover all screws and bolts used, unless specified otherwise.

METRIC

M10

M12

M14

M16

......................................................................................................

.....................................................................................................

...................................................................................................

..................................................................................................

105

180

UNC / UNF

1/4 ......................................................................................................

5/16 ...................................................................................................

3/8

7/16

.....................................................................................................

...................................................................................................

1/2

5/8

.....................................................................................................

....................................................................................................

136

FRONT HUB AND SWIVEL DATA

Front hub

Front hub end float ..................................................

Drive shaft end play ................................................

0,010 mm

0,08 to 0,25 mm

Swivel pin bearing preload

ABS vehicles - Torque to turn .................................

Non ABS vehicles - Resistance to turn ...................

2. to 3. Nm

1,16 to 1,46Kg

SPECIFICATIONS, TORQUE

FRONT HUB

FRONT AXLE AND FINAL DRIVE

LRT-54-001 Oil seal replacer non ABS

LST550-5

LRT-99-003 Drift

18G134

LRT-54-002 Hub nut wrench

RO606435A

LRT-54-003 Hub oil seal replacer ABS

LST137

SERVICE TOOLS

FRONT AXLE AND FINAL DRIVE

LRT-99-503 Dial gauge bracket

RO530106

LRT-37-004 Extractor ABS

18G284AAH

LRT-54-005 Bearing installer ABS

LST132

LRT-54-004 Seal installer ABS

LST133

SERVICE TOOLS

FRONT AXLE AND FINAL DRIVE

LRT-99-004 Impulse extractor

MS284

LRT-570-024 Torque test adaptor ABS

LST141

SERVICE TOOLS

STEERING

DESCRIPTION

The power assisted steering system incorporates a compression joint in the lower shaft, designed to collapse on impact and for certain countries, an air bag located in the centre of the steering wheel.

The mis-alignment of the upper steering column with the steering box and the inclusion of two universal joints and a compression joint in the lower shaft, is also designed to prevent frontal impact moving the column toward the driver.

The steering box is located behind the first cross member of the chassis and is connected to the road wheels by the drag link and track rod. An hydraulic damper absorbs shocks in the steering, caused by road wheel deflections when operating on rough terrain.

Power steering system

The power steering system comprises a hydraulic pump which is belt driven from the engine and supplied with fluid from a reservoir that also acts as a cooler.

The steering box houses a self neutralizing rotary valve which is part of the worm/valve assy and a hydraulic piston/rack to assist the mechanical operation.

The rotary valve which is operated by movement of the steering wheel, directs fluid pressure to the appropriate side of the hydraulic piston/rack to provide assistance.

Power steering system

1. Hydraulic pump

2. Fluid reservoir

3. Steering box

4. Upper column

5. Universal joints

6. Lower shaft

7. Compression joint

8. Drag link

DESCRIPTION AND OPERATION

STEERING

DESCRIPTION AND OPERATION

Steering column components

1. Upper shroud

2. Column harness

3. Cruise control switch (if fitted)

4. Steering wheel and nut

5. Rotary coupler

6. Column switch

7. Shear bolts

8. Switch saddle

9. Upper steering column

10. Universal joint

11. Universal joint bolt

12. Steering column lock assembly

STEERING

13. Lower shroud

14. Column lock/ignition

15. Air bag mounting bracket (if fitted)

16. Air bag module

17. Steering pad (non-airbag)

18. Lower shaft

19. Rubber coupling

20. Compression joint

21. Universal joint

22. Universal joint bolt

DESCRIPTION AND OPERATION

STEERING

Power steering box components

1. Housing complete with sector shaft bearings

2. Cover plate complete with bearing

3. Sector shaft

4. Hydraulic piston/rack

5. Worm/valve and torsion bar assembly

6. Shims for centralizing worm/valve

7. Ball race (2)

8. ’Teflon’ seals for valve sleeve (3)

9. Bearing adjuster, locknut and seal

10. Worm shaft pressure seal, circlip and dirt excluder

11. ’Teflon’ and rubber seal for piston

12. End cover seal and snap ring

13. Adjustment components for piston/rack

14. Hydraulic pipe

15. Bleed screw

16. Sector shaft adjustment lock nut with seal

17. Cover plate bolts (4)

18. Cover plate seal

19. Seal, washer and backup seal

20. Circlip and dust cover

DESCRIPTION AND OPERATION

STEERING

Rotary valve operation

The rotary valve assembly seen in RR3620M comprises the worm (1), the valve sleeve (2), the input shaft (4) and the torsion bar (5).

The valve sleeve is retained inside the worm by the trim screw (3), and incorporates valve ports in its inner bore. The input shaft is attached to the steering wheel via the steering shaft and steering column and incorporates valve ports in its outer diameter to align with those in the sleeve. The torsion bar which is secured to the worm and input shaft with pins (6) at each end (later models use one pin at input shaft end), holds the valve ports in neutral alignment when there is no demand for assistance.

No demand for assistance (Valve at neutral)

When there is no demand for assistance as seen in

RR3620M, the torsion bar holds the input shaft and sleeve valve ports in neutral relationship to one another, allowing equal pump pressure A to both sides of the piston/rack (9). Any excess fluid flow from the pump returns to the reservoir via B.

Rotary valve at neutral

DESCRIPTION AND OPERATION

STEERING

Demand for assistance (Valve misaligned)

When the steering wheel and input shaft is turned, steering resistance transmitted to the worm causes the torsion bar to be twisted and the valve ports to be misaligned for a right or left turn. The misalignment of the valve ports directs all fluid pressure A to one side of the piston only and allows displaced fluid B on the other side.

When demanding maximum assistance, any excessive fluid output from the pump due to high pump speed, will circulate through the regulator valve located in the pump unit, causing the temperature of the fluid and the pump to rise rapidly.

To avoid excessive fluid temperatures which could damage the oil seals, the steering must not be held on full lock for more that 30 seconds in one minute.

Only when the steering wheel and the demand for assistance is released, will the torsion bar return the valve to neutral, allowing the fluid to circulate through the reservoir where it is cooled.

In the unlikely event of mechanical failure of the torsion bar, a coarse splined connection (7) between the input shaft and worm, ensures steering control is maintained sufficient to allow the vehicle to be recovered.

Rotary valve misaligned

DESCRIPTION AND OPERATION

STEERING

Pump and regulator valve operation

The pump which is belt driven from the engine is an eccentric roller type and also houses the pressure regulator and flow control valve. The pressure is controlled by a spring loaded ball valve 3 which is housed inside the flow control valve piston 4.

No demand for assistance High flow through box -

Low pressure

With no demand for assistance as illustrated in

RR3568M the rotary valve in the steering box acts as a pressure relief valve, allowing fluid A to flow freely through the steering box and back to the reservoir and pump inlet B.

No flow, through box - High pressure

When the steering is turned, the rotary valve effectively stops all fluid flow through the steering box, thus causing an increase in pressure A. This increase in pressure is felt in the flow control valve spring chamber where, at a pre-determined pressure the relief valve 3 will open and allow the pressure to escape. The fall in pressure in the flow control spring chamber, allows the flow control valve to move to the right, which in turn allows pump output A to escape directly into the pump inlet B, as seen in RR3569M.

No demand for assistance

1. Reservoir

2. Pump

3. Pressure control ball valve and spring

4. Flow control valve and spring

5. Press fit plug (ball bearing)

6. Restrictor

The ball plug item 5 is pressed into the valve 4 during manufacture and determines the opening pressure of pressure relief valve 3.

Assistance demanded

As soon as the steering wheel is released after making a turn, the system reverts to the condition seen in RR3568M and the road wheels are returned to the straight ahead position by the mechanical steering geometry.

In the event of any hydraulic failure steering control though heavy, will be maintained through the mechanical components in the steering box.

DESCRIPTION AND OPERATION

STEERING

INSUFFICIENT POWER ASSISTANCE

1. Is fluid level correct?

YES - go to 3.

NO Fill/bleed sytem

2. Is problem a leak?

YES - Diagnose.

See Power Steering Fluid

Leaks

NO continue

3. Is drive belt tension correct?

YES - go to 5.

NO retension.

See ENGINE, Repair, Drive

Belt

4. Is problem resolved?

YES - end

NO continue

5. Carry out pressure test at idle and 1000 rev/min.

See Power Steering System - Test

6. Is correct pressure achieved?

YES - steering box defective

Not at any speed go to 9.

Not at idle go to 7.

7. Is idle speed correct?

YES - Go to 8.

NO Correct idle speed -

If 3.9

See ENGINE TUNING DATA,

Information, Engine 3.9 V8i

If Tdi

See ENGINE TUNING DATA,

Information, 300 Tdi Engine

If Mpi

See ENGINE TUNING DATA,

Information, Engine - Mpi - 2.0 Litre

8. Is problem resolved?

YES - end

NO go to 9.

9. Bypass steering box using adaptor tap

LRT-57-001

10. Is correct pressure obtained?

YES - defective steering box

NO defective steering pump

CAUTION: Do not hold steering wheel on full lock for more than 30 seconds in any one minute to avoid overheating fluid and possibly damaging seals.

NOTE: 1. Excessive pressure in the system is almost always caused by a faulty relief valve in the PAS pump.

NOTE: 2. Insufficient pressure in the system is usually caused by low fluid level or PAS pump drive belt slip, or one of the following: PAS system leaks, faulty PAS pump relief valve, fault in steering box valve and worm assembly, leak at piston in steering box, worn components in PAS pump or box.

FAULT DIAGNOSIS

STEERING

POWER STEERING SYSTEM - TEST

NOTE: If steering lacks power assistance.

Check pressure of hydraulic pump before fitting new components. Use fault diagnosis chart to assist in tracing faults.

Steering box.

Steering pump.

Existing hose, steering box to pump.

Hose LRT-57-030.

Test adaptor LRT-57-001.

Pressure gauge LRT-57-005.

Thread adaptor LRT-57-004.

Thread adaptor LRT-57-022.

Procedure

1. A hydraulic pressure gauge and test adaptor is used to test power steering system. This gauge is able to measure 140 kgf/cm

. The maximum power steering system pressure is 77 kgf/cm

2. Some fault conditions of hydraulic pump may obtain pressures up to 105 kgf/cm

. Pressure on gauge is same pressure being exerted upon steering wheel. When testing, turn steering wheel gradually while reading pressure gauge.

3. Check and maintain maximum fluid level of reservoir.

4. Examine power steering units and connections for leaks. All leaks must be rectified before attempting to test the system.

5. Check steering pump drive belt tension.

See

ENGINE, Repair, Drive Belt

6. Assemble test equipment and fit to vehicle, as shown in RR3959M.

7. Open tap of adaptor.

8. Bleed system, take care not to overload pressure gauge.

9. With system in good condition, pressures should be:

(A) Steering wheel held on full lock and engine running at 1,000 rev/min, 70 to 77 kgf/cm

(B) Steering wheel held on full lock and engine idling, 28 kgf/cm

Checks should be carried out on both full lock positions.

CAUTION: Do not maintain this pressure for more than 30 seconds in any one minute to avoid overheating fluid and possibly damaging seals.

10. Release steering wheel and with engine idling.

Pressure should read below 7 kgf/cm

11. If pressures differ to those given a fault exists.

12. To determine if fault is steering box or pump.

Close adaptor tap for a maximum five seconds.

13. If gauge does not register specified pressure, pump is faulty.

14. Fit a new pump, bleed system and repeat test. If low pressure or a substantial imbalance exists, fault is in steering box valve and worm assembly.

FAULT DIAGNOSIS

STEERING

STEERING DAMPER

The power steering system, as well as reducing the effort required to manoeuvre the vehicle when parking, also helps to dampen any deflections of the road wheels, being transmitted back to the steering wheel.

When operating the vehicle off road, the road wheels are often deflected by ruts and boulders causing the steering wheel to turn left and right. This phenomenon is known as ’steering kickback’. To subdue the effects of ’steering kickback’, a hydraulic damper is fitted in the steering linkage between the track rod and the differential casing. The damper, which offers the same resistance in extension and compression, is sealed for life.

Steering damper check

Check the condition operation of the hydraulic steering damper as follows:

Check procedure

1. Inspect damper for casing damage or leaks.

2. Clamp one end of the damper horizontally in a vice using soft jaws. Compress and extend the unit by hand. Resistance should be equal in both directions.

3. If it is felt that the unit is outside acceptable limits, fit a new steering damper

STEERING FAULTS

Symptom:-

Excessive kickback through steering wheel - when driven on rough terrain.

1. Is the steering damper in good working order?

See Steering Damper

NO Renew unit.

See Repair, Steering

Damper

YES Continue.

2. Is there any looseness or free play in the steering ball joints and linkage?

YES -

See Steering Linkage Inspect

NO Continue.

3. Is there any looseness or worn bushes in front suspension?

YES -

See FRONT SUSPENSION, Repair,

Radius Arm

NOTE: When replacing suspension bushes

ALL bushes and fixings must be replaced.

NO Continue.

4. Is the steering exceptionally light/sensitive when driven on good road surface?

YES See fault symptom - Steering

excessively light/sensitive and

NO -

freeplay at steering wheel.

Suspect axle swivel resistance.

5. Check the resistance of the axle swivels.

See

FRONT AXLE AND FINAL DRIVE, Overhaul,

Front Stub Axle, Constant Velocity Joint and

Swivel Pin Housing Non ABS See FRONT

AXLE AND FINAL DRIVE, Overhaul, Front

Stub Axle, Constant Velocity Joint and

Swivel Pin Housing ABS

FAULT DIAGNOSIS

STEERING

Symptom:-

Fluid leaks from steering box seals.

CAUTION: The steering wheel must not be held on full lock for more than 30 seconds in one minute, as this may overheat the fluid and cause damage to the oil seals.

1. Check fluid level.

See Repair, Power Steering

Fluid Reservoir

Check fluid pressure.

See Power Steering

System - Test

2. Is pressure high?

YES - Renew pump.

See Repair, Power steering Pump

If oil seal leaks persist after renewing the pump.

See Overhaul, Power Steering

Box

NO -

See Overhaul, Power Steering Box

Symptom:-

Insufficient power assistance - castor return action normal.

1. Are tyres correct type and pressure?

NO -

See GENERAL SPECIFICATION DATA,

Information, Wheels and Tyres

YES - Continue.

2. Is fluid level correct?

NO Check fluid level

See Repair, Power

Steering Fluid Reservoir

YES - Check system for air locks.

See Repair,

Power Steering System - Bleed

3. Is pressure correct?

NO Check fluid pressure.

See Power

Steering System - Test

If pressure is not correct after bleeding the system, renew pump.

See Repair,

Power Steering Pump

YES -

See Overhaul, Power Steering Box

Symptom:-

Steering heavy - stiff, poor castor return action.

1. Are tyres correct type and pressure?

NO -

See GENERAL SPECIFICATION DATA,

Information, Wheels and Tyres

YES - Check universal joints for seizure and correct alignment.

See Repair, Lower

Steering Shaft and Universal Joints

Check power steering box adjustments.

See Overhaul, Power Steering Box

2. Is the power assistance satisfactory?

NO See fault symptom Insufficient

assistance, (castor return action normal).

YES - Disconnect drag link from drop arm and check steering column and box for stiffness.

See Repair, Drag Link and

Drag Link Ends

3. Is the steering stiff with the drag link disconnected?

NO Check steering ball joints for seizure and axle swivels lubrication and resistance.

See Repair, Drag Link and Drag Link

Ends See FRONT AXLE AND FINAL

DRIVE, Overhaul, Front Stub Axle,

Constant Velocity Joint and Swivel Pin

Housing Non ABS See FRONT AXLE

AND FINAL DRIVE, Overhaul, Front

Stub Axle, Constant Velocity Joint and

Swivel Pin Housing ABS

YES - Disconnect the lower steering shaft and check the column and box for stiffness.

See Repair, Lower Steering Shaft and

Universal Joints

4. Is the steering column stiff to turn when disconnected from the box?

NO Remove and overhaul box.

See

Overhaul, Power Steering Box

YES - Adjust steering column.

See Stiff

Steering Checklist

FAULT DIAGNOSIS

STEERING

Symptom :-

Steering excessively light/sensitive. Excessive freeplay at steering wheel.

1. Are steering box adjustments correct?

NO -

See Adjustment, Power Steering Box

WARNING: Adjustments of steering box should not be required while in warranty period. If box is within warranty, it must be returned to manufacturer. No attempt must be made to introduce backlash.

YES - Suspect worn panhard rod or radius arm bushes Check condition of ball joints and the lower steering column shaft universal joints for wear.

See Repair, Lower

Steering Shaft and Universal Joints

Symptom :-

Steering vibration, road wheel shimmy - wobble.

Vibration through the steering linkage powerful enough to induce high frequency oscillation of the steering wheel, is generally caused by out of balance road wheels. However there are a number of other possible causes of this symptom which if severe, may be described as shimmy or wobble. Regardless of the terminology used by the owner/driver to describe the symptoms, the following diagnostic checks should be carried out in the order presented.

1. Check the tyres and balance of the road wheels.

See GENERAL SPECIFICATION DATA,

Information, Wheels and Tyres See

WHEELS AND TYRES, Fault diagnosis, Fault

- Symptoms See WHEELS AND TYRES,

Repair, Wheel Balancing

2. Check the steering hydraulic damper function.

See Steering Damper

3. Check steering column universal joints for wear and correct alignment.

See Repair, Lower

Steering Shaft and Universal Joints

4. Check steering linkage ball joints for wear, correct alignment and security, including steering box and tie rod.

See Steering Linkage Inspect

5. Check all front suspension rubbers for wear.

Check all fixing torques, including radius arm bushes, panhard rod and anti-roll [sway] bar.

See FRONT SUSPENSION, Repair, Panhard

Rod See FRONT SUSPENSION, Repair,

Radius Arm See FRONT SUSPENSION,

Repair, Anti-Roll[Sway] Bar Assembly See

FRONT SUSPENSION, Repair, Front Shock

Absorber

6. Fit new radius arm bushes using NTC 6860. Fit harmonic damper if vehicle has air suspension.

Fit new nuts, bolts and washers.

7. Coil spring vehicles only - If problem persists fit damper kit STC 241 (2 off front) and STC

1474 (2 off rear). Road test vehicle.

8. Check the power steering box adjustments and operation.

See Overhaul, Power Steering Box

9. Check the hub bearing end floats and determine the condition of the hub bearings. As applicable.

See FRONT AXLE AND FINAL DRIVE, Repair,

Front Hub Assembly

10. Check the resistance and condition of the swivels.

See FRONT AXLE AND FINAL

DRIVE, Description and operation,

Description

If problem is not diagnosed: Repeat checks starting at 1.

11. Carry out a full steering geometry check.

See

INTRODUCTION, Information, Steering

FAULT DIAGNOSIS

STEERING

STEERING STABILITY AND VEER UNDER

BRAKING

Possible cause:

Incorrectly set, swivel pin bearing preload. There are three different settings for these bearings dependant on model year and if fitted with ABS brakes.

Remedy.

1. Establish model year of vehicle.

2. If fitted with or without antilock brakes.

3. Follow instructions to overhaul front stub axle, constant velocity joint and swivel pin non ABS, or with ABS as appropriate.

See FRONT AXLE AND FINAL DRIVE,

Overhaul, Front Stub Axle, Constant Velocity

Joint and Swivel Pin Housing Non ABS See

FRONT AXLE AND FINAL DRIVE, Overhaul,

Front Stub Axle, Constant Velocity Joint and

Swivel Pin Housing ABS

1. GENERAL STEERING

1. Carry out visual and safety checks.

See Visual and Safety Checks

2. Road test vehicle.

See Road Test Procedure

3. Is problem resolved?

YES - end

NO continue

4. Is problem stiff steering?

YES -

See Stiff Steering Checklist

NO Go to 6.

5. Is problem resolved?

YES - end

NO go to 8.

6. Is problem steering niggle ?

YES - Replace radius arm bushes, arm and axle.

See FRONT SUSPENSION,

Repair, Radius Arm

NO go to 8.

7. Is problem resolved?

YES - end

NO continue.

8. Centralise steering box.

See Adjustment,

Centralise Steering Box

9. Is problem resolved?

YES - end

NO continue.

10. Check, adjust if necessary, steering geometry.

11. Is problem resolved?

YES - end

NO continue.

12. Categorise the remaining problems into one or more of the following descriptions:

See 2. Steering Veer

See 3. Veer Under Braking

See 4. Directional Stability

FAULT DIAGNOSIS

STEERING

2. STEERING VEER

From 1. GENERAL STEERING:

1. Vehicle veers, not under braking, swap front tyres side to side.

2. Is problem resolved?

YES - end

NO continue.

3. Does vehicle now veer in other direction?

YES - fit new tyres

NO continue.

4. Recentralise steering box.

See Adjustment,

Centralise Steering Box

5. Is problem resolved?

YES - end

NO contact local technical office.

3. VEER UNDER BRAKING

From 1. GENERAL STEERING:

1. Vehicle veers under braking, bleed brake system.

2. Is problem resolved?

YES - end

NO continue.

3. Check brake pads for glazing, and discs, axles etc for contamination.

4. Is problem resolved?

YES - end

NO continue.

5. Check brake lines and hoses for deterioration.

Replace as necessary.

6. Is problem resolved?

YES - end

NO continue.

7. Contact local technical office.

FAULT DIAGNOSIS

STEERING

4. DIRECTIONAL STABILITY

From 1. GENERAL STEERING:

1. Is directional stability concern when vehicle is towing?

YES - Check towing/vehicle loading parameters in Owner’s Handbook.

NO go to 3.

2. Is problem resolved?

YES - end

NO continue.

3. Check condition of rear trailing link/chassis bushes.

4. Is problem resolved?

YES - end

NO continue.

5. Check condition of front and rear shock absorbers. If in doubt change units in pairs, side to side.

6. Is problem resolved?

YES - end

NO continue.

7. Check steering damper.

See Steering Damper

8. Is problem resolved?

YES - end

NO continue.

9. Check wheel balance

10. Is problem resolved?

YES - end

NO contact local technical office.

POWER STEERING FLUID LEAKS

1. Is fluid level correct?

YES - go to 3.

NO Refill or drain to correct level. Bleed system, check for leaks.

See Repair,

Power Steering System - Bleed

2. Is problem resolved?

YES - end

NO continue.

3. Are hoses or joints leaking? Check on full lock with engine at 2000 rev/min.

YES - loosen and retorque joints.

NO go to 6.

4. Does leak remain?

YES - change PAS pipe.

NO end.

5. Does leak remain?

YES - suspect seal in component. Check and replace as necessary.

NO end.

6. Is oil escaping from filler cap?

YES - bleed system.

See Repair, Power

Steering System - Bleed

NO go to 8.

7. Is oil still escaping from filler cap?

YES - go back to 1.

NO end.

8. Is oil leaking from PAS pump?

YES - go to 10.

NO continue.

9. Is oil leaking from PAS box?

YES - go to 10.

NO end.

10. Clean unit, add tracer dye to system. Retest

11. Is oil still leaking?

YES - establish leak point. Repair or replace unit as necessary.

NO end.

FAULT DIAGNOSIS

STEERING

POWER STEERING SYSTEM - EXCESSIVE NOISE

1. Is fluid level correct?

YES - go to 3.

NO Refill or drain to correct level. Bleed system, check for leaks.

See Repair,

Power Steering System - Bleed

2. Is problem resolved?

YES - end

NO continue.

3. Is pressure hose from pump to box touching body in a hard foul condition?

YES - reroute hose away from body.

NO go to 5.

4. Does noise remain?

YES - continue.

NO end.

5. Is noise a whistle or hiss on full lock?

YES - noise is not a fault unless excessive.

Compare with other vehicles

NO go to 8.

6. Is noise excessive?

YES - continue.

NO end.

7. Change steering box and/or pump.

8. Is noise a squeal on full lock?

YES - check/reset drive belt tension.

See

ENGINE, Repair, Drive Belt

NO go to 10.

9. Does squeal remain?

YES - drive belt contaminated, change belt.

NO end.

10. Is noise a continuous moan?

YES - bleed PAS system.

See Repair, Power

Steering System - Bleed

NO go to 13.

11. Does moan remain?

YES - do figure 8 manoeuvres.

NO end.

12. Does moan remain?

YES - continue

NO end.

13. Is noise an intermittent "grunt"?

YES -

NO -

See Power Steering System - Grunt

continue.

14. Is it a clunking noise?

YES - reset drive belt tension.

See ENGINE,

Repair, Drive Belt

contact local technical office.

15. Does noise remain?

YES - Suspect suspension or drive train.

NO end.

POWER STEERING SYSTEM - GRUNT

Steering box grunts intermittently when turning from lock to lock:

1. Is fluid level correct?

YES - go to 3.

NO refill or drain to correct level. Bleed system, check for leaks.

See Repair,

Power Steering System - Bleed

2. Does grunt remain?

YES - continue

NO end.

3. Is correct low pressure hose ANR 3152, steering box to reservoir fitted?

YES - go to 5.

NO Fit correct hose.

4. Does grunt remain?

YES - continue

NO end.

5. Purge box by doing figure 8 manoeuvres e.g. on car park, followed by 10 minutes normal road use.

6. Does grunt remain?

YES - Contact local technical office

NO end.

FAULT DIAGNOSIS

STEERING

VISUAL AND SAFETY CHECKS

WARNING: Before taking vehicle out on the public highway for road test, it is important that the following basic visual checks are carried out to ensure that the vehicle complies with legal requirements.

Tyres and wheel rims

1. Check and adjust tyre pressures.

See

GENERAL SPECIFICATION DATA,

Information, Tyre Pressures

Note that this information refers to standard tyres fitted as original equipment.

2. Check condition of tyres. Inspect for signs of uneven wear, damage and feathering. Check tread depth.

3. Ensure that the tyre make, type and general condition are common across each axle.

4. Check wheel rims for signs of damage and excessive run out.

5. Carry out road test.

See Road Test Procedure

ROAD TEST PROCEDURE

General steering/handling problems can usually be classified into one of the categories listed and ARE

GENERALLY RELATED TO THE AGE, CONDITION

AND USE OF THE VEHICLE.

WARNING: Ensure that all road tests are conducted by suitably qualified drivers in a safe and legal manner, and where local traffic conditions allow.

1. Carry out visual and safety checks.

See Visual and Safety Checks

Confirm general nature of complaint with customer, simulating where possible the conditions under which the problem occurs. Carry out following road test procedure to establish the problem.

2. Steering load assessment - drive at 16 km/h (10 mph). Put 90

° turn input into steering wheel, check self centering. The self centering should be equal on each lock BUT not necessarily return to exactly straight ahead without assistance from the driver.

3. Steering assessment - drive at 64 km/h (40 mph) on a staight FLAT road (no camber), check for steering veer. The vehicle should follow a straight path with NO tendency to follow a curved path. If vehicle veers towards the kerb, vehicle may be ’camber sensitive’. A small amount of veer in direction of camber is acceptable.

4. Directional stability assessment - drive at 112 km/h (70 mph) or maximum legal speed on a straight flat road. Carry out a normal lane change. Vehicle should quickly settle into a new straight path.

5. Braking assessment (medium effort) - drive at 96 km/h (60 mph) on a straight flat road. Apply steady medium braking effort, noting any tendency to veer. Carry out brake test three times, if a veer is consistently noted carry out a braking efficiency test on a rolling road.

6. Braking assessment (full effort) - drive at 96 km/h (60 mph) on a straight flat road. Apply full braking effort, noting any tendency to veer. Carry out brake test three times, if a veer is consistently noted carry out a braking efficiency test on a rolling road.

If the symptom described by the customer is stiff steering or steering niggle, carry out stiff steering procedure.

See Stiff Steering Checklist

If not proceed with basic checks and adjustments.

See Visual Check and Basic Adjustments

FAULT DIAGNOSIS

STEERING

STIFF STEERING CHECKLIST

NOTE: Having completed visual checks and steering assessment and confirmed that vehicle steering load is incorrect carry out the following procedure in order shown.

Steering wheel ’torque to turn’ loads

1. Raise vehicle so both front wheels free.

2. With engine off, centralise steering wheel, and remove air bag, if fitted or steering wheel pad.

Using torque wrench on column nut, check torque required to turn the steering wheel one turn in each direction.

3. Record readings obtained in each direction.

Compare figures obtained with the specified figures:

Without ABS

4.40 Nm.

With ABS

4.65 Nm.

NOTE: If figures are in excess of those specified carry out steering box tie bar reset below. If figures are as specified.

See Visual Check and Basic Adjustments

Steering box tie bar reset

1. Loosen the three tie bar fixings one complete turn.

2. Drive vehicle carefully a short distance (within the dealership) applying full lock in both directions in order to settle steering components.

Drive vehicle over speed bumps and include harsh braking if possible.

WARNING: Do not drive on public highway.

3. Near end of 2. ensure vehicle is driven in a straight line on level ground and halted.

4. Tighten panhard rod mounting arm nut,

110 Nm.

5. Tighten the two fixings tie bar to steering box,

Nm.

6. Recheck steering wheel torque to turn. If torque reading is still greater than specified, carry out steering shaft universal joint lubrication.

Lower steering shaft universal joint lubrication

1. Check lower steering shaft is correctly phased.

See Repair, Lower Steering Shaft and

Universal Joints

2. Lubricate universal joints with an anti-seizure type penetrating spray. Work the joints to ensure full penetration of the spray by driving vehicle and steering from lock to lock.

3. If steering stiffness still persists carry out swivel pin preload setting.

Swivel pin preload setting

The swivel pin preload setting must be checked and set following the workshop manual procedure.

1. NON ABS vehicles.

See FRONT AXLE AND

FINAL DRIVE, Overhaul, Front Stub Axle,

Constant Velocity Joint and Swivel Pin

Housing Non ABS

Note that a pull load of 1.16 - 1.46 kg is required after the axle shaft and swivel housing seal have been removed.

2. ABS vehicles.

See FRONT AXLE AND FINAL

DRIVE, Overhaul, Front Stub Axle, Constant

Velocity Joint and Swivel Pin Housing ABS

Note that a torque to turn of 2.0 - 2.8 Nm is required after the axle shaft and swivel housing seal have been removed.

3. If steering stiffness still persists carry out steering column alignment.

FAULT DIAGNOSIS

STEERING

Steering column alignment

1. Place vehicle on level ground. Measure the angle of lower steering shaft using a Pernumeter placed on the shaft between the universal joints.

The angle should measure a minimum of 12˚.

2. If necessary, realign the shaft. Release the five fixings securing the steering column. Position column as required. Tighten the fixings evenly,

27 Nm.

3. Loosen the three screws securing lower steering column shroud to upper shroud ensure lower shroud is clipped to upper shroud. Reposition shroud, tighten screws.

4. Recheck steering column angle.

Steering box adjustment

1. Check steering box adjustment.

See

Adjustment, Power Steering Box

Steering damper check

1. Check condition of steering damper

See

Steering Damper

VISUAL CHECK AND BASIC ADJUSTMENTS

NOTE: It is important that the following instructions are carried out in the sequence shown and the results recorded.

1. Road springs - check that road springs are correctly seated and are to correct specification for vehicle. For spring specification.

See

GENERAL SPECIFICATION DATA,

Information, Road Springs Data

2. Ride height - measure trim height from wheel centre to wheelarch eyebrow. Record results on data sheet.

3. Check/top up power steering fluid

See Repair,

Power Steering Fluid Reservoir

4. Check tension and condition of drive belt.

See

ENGINE, Repair, Drive Belt

5. Track rod/drag link - check condition of track rod, drag link and ball joints.

See Repair, Drag Link and Drag Link Ends

If either component is damaged, check operation of steering damper and steering box for smoothness. Replace all damaged or worn components that impair the operation of the steering system.

6. Suspension bushes - examine all steering and suspension bushes for signs of wear and deterioration. Also check all fixings for torque relaxation. Tighten to correct torque value.

See

FRONT SUSPENSION, Specifications, torque,

Torque Values

7. Oil leaks - check front and rear axle hubs for leak and repair as necessary.

8. Brake system - check brake system for leaks, pipe condition, pad wear/contamination, disc wear/condition and ABS sensors for correct fitting.

9. Hub end float - check movement in the hubs by rocking the wheels.

10. Check front wheel alignment. Vehicles displaying a tendency to veer more than considered allowable, it is permissible to set the front track to parallel.

11. Having completed all the above checks and adjustments, road test vehicle.

See Road Test

Procedure

Attempting to reproduce the symptoms established earlier. If symptoms still exist refer to relevant Diagnostic Chart.

FAULT DIAGNOSIS

STEERING LINKAGE INSPECT

NOTE: When inspecting steering linkages and ball joints for wear the following items must be checked.

Steering ball joints

1. Check ball joint rubber boots for security, signs of cracking or deterioration.

2. Check ball joint assemblies for seizure i.e. no movement on ball joint and associated assemblies.

3. Check for excessive wear. This will be evident as extreme movement on track rod and steering linkages. Renew parts as necessary.

See

Repair, Track Rod and Linkage See Repair,

Drag Link and Drag Link Ends

Steering linkages

4. Check all linkages for wear, deterioration and damage. Renew parts as necessary.

See

Repair, Track Rod and Linkage See Repair,

Drag Link and Drag Link Ends

STEERING

FAULT DIAGNOSIS

STEERING

POWER STEERING BOX

Service repair no - 57.10.13

WARNING: Adjustments of steering box should not be required while in warranty period. If box is stiff or tight and within warranty, it must be returned to manufacturer. No attempt must be made to introduce backlash.

1. Apply park brake, select ’P’ in automatic transmission and chock wheels. Support chassis front on axle stands.

2. Remove engine undertray.

3. Disconnect drag link from steering drop arm.

4. Check torque to turn.

See Fault diagnosis,

Stiff Steering Checklist

5. Centralise steering box.

See Centralise

Steering Box

NOTE: Only check for no backlash when steering box is in central position.

NOTE: If steering wheel is not straight, it should be repositioned.

See Repair,

Steering Wheel

The adjustment of the steering box ensures any preload or end float present on centre is removed.

6. The adjustment is obtained by rocking the drop arm about centre whilst an assistant slowly tightens the steering box adjuster screw.

7. Tighten the locknut when all backlash has been removed.

8. Repeat the check for backlash. If backlash exists loosen locknut and repeat adjustment procedure.

9. Turn steering wheel lock to lock and check no tightness exists.

10. Ensure front wheels are aligned and in straight ahead position.

See Front Wheel Alignment

11. Adjust drag link 924 mm between ball joint centres.

12. Connect drag link. Tighten to

40 Nm.

13. Lower vehicle to ground level and remove chocks.

14. Road test vehicle.

See Fault diagnosis, Road

Test Procedure

NOTE: If steering wheel is not in straight ahead position when vehicle is travelling in a straight line, drag link length is incorrect and is pushing drop arm away from central position.

Drag link adjust

15. Right hand drive vehicles - if steering wheel is to right, drag link is too long. If steering wheel is to left drag link is too short.

Left hand drive vehicles - if steering wheel is to right, drag link is too short. If steering wheel is to left drag link is too long.

16. Adjust drag link until steering wheel points straight ahead when vehicle is travelling in a straight line.

CENTRALISE STEERING BOX

1. To centralise the box, insert a suitable peg (hole size 8.06 mm) into the rear of the drop arm and into the steering box casing to enable rapid and accurate setting on centre.

ADJUSTMENT

STEERING

STEERING LOCK STOPS

Service repair no - 57.65.03

Check

1. Measure clearance between tyre wall and radius arm at full lock. This must be 20 mm.

NOTE: Alternatively lock stop adjustment may be carried out using following procedure.

Check

1. Measure stop bolt protrusion as shown in

RR1697M. This must be 40.5 mm.

Adjust

2. Loosen stop bolt locknut.

3. Turn stop bolt as required.

4. Tighten locknut.

5. Check clearance between tyre wall and radius arm on each lock.

Adjust

2. Loosen stop bolt locknut.

3. Turn stop bolt as required.

4. Tighten locknut.

5. Check wheel position at full lock.

ADJUSTMENT

STEERING

FRONT WHEEL ALIGNMENT

Service repair no - 57.65.01

Checking Toe-out dimensions

NOTE: No Adjustment is provided for castor, camber or swivel pin inclinations.

1. Set vehicle on level ground with road wheels positioned straight ahead.

2. Push vehicle back and forwards to settle linkage.

3. Measure toe-out at horizontal centre-line of wheels.

4. Check tightness of clamp bolt fixings. Tighten to

14 Nm.

Adjust

5. Loosen adjuster sleeve clamp.

6. Rotate adjuster to lengthen or shorten track rod.

7. Check toe-out setting as instructions 1 to 4.

When toe-out is correct, tap steering linkage ball joint, in directions of arrows shown, to maximum of their travel. This ensures full unrestricted working travel.

8. Tighten clamp bolts to

14 Nm.

POWER STEERING PUMP DRIVE BELT

Service repair no - 57.20.01

Adjust

NOTE: For details of drive belt adjust procedure See ENGINE, Repair, Drive

Belt

ADJUSTMENT

STEERING

POWER STEERING FLUID PIPES

Service repair no - 57.15.21

CAUTION: If any joints are disconnected, it is essential that open pipe and ports are plugged to prevent ingress of dirt.

The following procedures must be followed when refitting fluid pipes:

Power steering pump

1. Remove plugs, place clamp on feed hose.

6. Remove plugs and refit pipes to steering box, leave fingertight.

7. Tighten to torque: 16mm thread

20 Nm.

14mm thread

15 Nm.

Power steering reservoir

1. Remove plugs and refit pipes and clamps.

V8i Steering pump illustrated

2. Push hose onto pump.

3. Hold clamp in position, Tighten to

3 Nm.

4. Fit high pressure union into pump.

5. Hold pipe in correct position. Tighten to

20 Nm.

2. Tighten clamps to

3 Nm.

REPAIR

STEERING

POWER STEERING BOX

Service repair no - 57.10.01

General precautions

1. Whenever any part of system, is removed or disconnected, utmost cleanliness must be observed.

2. Disconnected ports and hoses must be plugged to prevent ingress of dirt. If metal sediment is found in system, establish cause rectify and flush system.

3. Do not start engine until reservoir is full as pump will be damaged.

4. Metric pipe fittings are used with ’O’ ring pipe ends on fittings to steering box.

5. Follow normal ’O’ ring replacement procedure whenever pipes are disconnected.

6. Ensure compatible metric components when fitting replacement pipes.

CAUTION: Before removing any parts of steering linkage, it is imperative that road wheels are positioned straight ahead.

Then steering wheel removed to prevent rotary coupler being wound up or damaged.

CAUTION: After refitting steering linkage parts follow correct procedure to ensure that road wheels, steering box and steering wheel are correctly positioned relative to each other when in straight ahead condition. If steering wheel requires repositioning, ensure that drive pegs on rotary coupler are correctly positioned before steering wheel is replaced.

This ensures drive pegs locate in their holes in rear of steering wheel.

After final alignment connect rotary coupler multiplug, tighten steering wheel securing nut and fit air bag - if fitted or steering wheel trim pad.

equal.

NOTE: When drag link is disconnected from steering box, travel available at steering wheel to each full lock is not

Remove

1. Site vehicle on level surface.

2. Open bonnet[hood].

3. Remove filler cap from power steering fluid reservoir.

4. Clean steering box.

5. Disconnect feed and return pipes from steering box.

6. Plug open pipes and steering box ports to prevent ingress of dirt.

7. Support chassis front on axle stands. Or raise vehicle on a hoist.

WARNING: Ensure wheels are chocked, parking brake is applied, and low range selected.

REPAIR

STEERING

8. Remove undertray

9. Disconnect drag link from drop arm using a suitable extractor.

10. Remove pinch bolt securing lower shaft universal joint to power steering box.

12. Remove bolts securing tie bar, move tie bar aside.

11. Loosen but do not remove nut securing tie bar to mounting.

13. Remove bolts securing power steering box to chassis side member.

14. Withdraw power steering box.

REPAIR

STEERING

Refit

15. Position steering box to chassis side member, ensuring locating peg is engaged. Tighten bolts to

81 Nm.

16. Fit pinch bolt and nut securing universal joint to power steering box. Tighten to

25 Nm.

17. Position tie bar, tighten bolts and nut to

81 Nm, starting with tie bar to mounting nut, then loosen nut and bolts by one complete turn.

18. Check steering box, adjust if necessary.

See

Adjustment, Power Steering Box

19. Refit drag link to drop arm tighten nut to

40 Nm.

20. Fit undertray.

21. Lower vehicle to ground.

22. Remove plugs and refit pipes to steering box.

Tighten 16mm thread to

20 Nm.

14mm thread to 15 Nm.

23. Remove filler cap. Fill reservoir to oil level mark on dipstick. Use recommended fluid.

See

LUBRICANTS, FLUIDS AND CAPACITIES,

Information, Recommended Lubricants and

Fluids and bleed power steering system. See

Power Steering System - Bleed

24. Recheck fluid level and replace cap.

25. With engine running, test steering system for leaks by holding steering in both full lock directions.

CAUTION: Do not maintain this pressure for more than 30 seconds in any one minute, to avoid oil overheating and possible seal damage.

26. Test drive vehicle: using both full lock directions, to settle steering components. If possible, drive vehicle over speed bumps and include harsh braking.

WARNING: Do not test drive vehicle on public highway.

27. Drive vehicle in a straight line on level ground and stop.

28. Tighten tie bar to mounting nut to

110 Nm.

29. Tighten bolts securing tie bar to

81 Nm.

30. Ensure steering wheel is correctly aligned when wheels are positioned straight ahead.

31. If necessary reposition steering wheel.

See

Steering Wheel

32. Road test vehicle.

REPAIR

STEERING

POWER STEERING SYSTEM - BLEED

Service repair no - 57.15.02

1. Ensure fluid in reservoir reaches dipstick maximum.

2. Run engine to normal operating temperature.

3. Recheck and correct reservoir fluid level.

wheel.

NOTE: During instructions 4 to 6, maintain maximum fluid level in reservoir. Do not increase engine speed or move steering

4. With engine at idle speed, loosen bleed screw.

When fluid seeps past bleed screw retighten screw.

POWER STEERING FLUID RESERVOIR

Service repair no - 57.15.08

Remove

1. Remove undertray.

2. Position drain tin beneath reservoir.

3. Loosen mounting bracket clamp bolt, raise reservoir to gain access to pipe clamps.

4. Loosen clamps, disconnect feed and return hoses from reservoir, allow fluid to drain.

CAUTION: Plug the connections.

5. Check fluid level.

6. Clean away fluid around bleed screw.

7. Check hose connections, pump and steering box for fluid leaks by holding steering on full lock in both directions.

CAUTION: Do not maintain this pressure for more than 30 seconds in any one minute to avoid overheating fluid and possibly damaging seals.

8. Carry out road test.

5. Remove reservoir.

CAUTION: Discard fluid drained from system. Do not allow fluid to contact paintwork, if spilled, remove fluid and clean area with warm water.

REPAIR

STEERING

Refit

6. Position reservoir, connect feed and return hoses and tighten clamps to

3 Nm.

7. Fit reservoir in clamp, tighten clamp bolt.

8. Fill reservoir to ’MAX’ mark on dipstick with power steering fluid.

See LUBRICANTS,

FLUIDS AND CAPACITIES, Information,

Recommended Lubricants and Fluids

9. Fit undertray.

10. Bleed power steering system.

See Power

Steering System - Bleed

POWER STEERING PUMP DRIVE BELT

Service repair no - 57.20.02

NOTE: For details of drive belt remove and refit.

See ENGINE, Repair, Drive Belt

POWER STEERING PUMP - V8i

Service repair no - 57.20.14

Remove

NOTE: The power steering pump is not serviceable. Fit new pump if worn or damaged.

1. Disconnect battery negative lead.

2. Remove drive belt from steering pump.

See

ENGINE, Repair, Drive Belt

3. Remove undertray.

4. Remove fan blades and viscous coupling.

See

COOLING SYSTEM, Repair, Viscous

Coupling, Fan Blades, Pulley and Fan Cowl

5. Position drain tin beneath steering pump.

6. Using a 9 mm Allen key to restrain steering pump pulley, remove 3 bolts securing pulley to pump; remove pulley.

REPAIR

STEERING

7. Loosen clamp securing reservoir hose to steering pump; disconnect hose.

8. Disconnect high pressure pipe from steering pump.

CAUTION: Plug the connections.

9. Release ht lead from clip

10. Remove 3 bolts securing steering pump.

Remove pump and recover engine lifting bracket.

NOTE:

Do not carry out further dismantling if component is removed for access only.

11. Remove 5 bolts securing front mounting plate.

12. Fit front mounting plate to replacement steering pump. Tighten bolts to

9 Nm.

Refit

13. Position steering pump and engine lifting plate, fit bolts. Tighten to

35 Nm. Secure ht lead in clip.

14. Connect high pressure pipe to steering pump, tighten union to

20 Nm.

15. Connect reservoir hose to steering pump.

Tighten clamp to

3 Nm.

16. Position pulley to pump, coat threads of bolts with Loctite 242.

17. Restrain pulley using a 9 mm Allen key, fit bolts.

Tighten to

10 Nm.

18. Fit drive belt.

See ENGINE, Repair, Drive Belt

19. Fit fan blades and viscous coupling.

See

COOLING SYSTEM, Repair, Viscous

Coupling, Fan Blades, Pulley and Fan Cowl

20. Fit undertray.

21. Reconnect battery negative lead.

22. Bleed power steering system.

See Power

Steering System - Bleed

POWER STEERING PUMP - Tdi

Service repair no - 57.20.14

Remove

1. Remove fan blades and viscous coupling.

See

COOLING SYSTEM, Repair, Viscous

Coupling, Fan Blades, Pulley and Fan Cowl

2. Restrain steering pump pulley, loosen but do not remove 3 bolts securing pulley.

3. Remove drive belt.

Drive Belt

See ENGINE, Repair,

4. Remove 3 bolts securing steering pump pulley, remove pulley.

5. Remove undertray.

6. Position drain tin beneath steering pump.

REPAIR

STEERING

7. Loosen clamp securing reservoir hose to steering pump, disconnect hose.

8. Disconnect high pressure pipe from steering pump.

CAUTION: Plug the connections.

9. Remove 4 bolts securing steering pump to mounting bracket, remove pump.

NOTE:

Do not carry out further dismantling if component is removed for access only.

Refit

12. Position steering pump, fit 3 bolts. Tighten to

Nm.

13. Connect high pressure pipe to steering pump.

Tighten to

20 Nm.

14. Connect reservoir hose to steering pump.

Tighten clamp to

3 Nm.

15. Position pulley to steering pump, coat threads of bolts with Loctite 242; fit but do not fully tighten 3 bolts.

16. Fit drive belt.

See ENGINE, Repair, Drive Belt

17. Restrain steering pump pulley, tighten bolts to

Nm.

18. Fit fan blades and viscous coupling.

See

COOLING SYSTEM, Repair, Viscous

Coupling, Fan Blades, Pulley and Fan Cowl

19. Fit undertray.

20. Bleed power steering system.

See Power

Steering System - Bleed

10. Remove 3 bolts securing mounting plate to pump, remove plate.

11. Fit mounting plate to replacement steering pump. Tighten bolts to

9 Nm.

REPAIR

STEERING

LOWER STEERING SHAFT AND UNIVERSAL

JOINTS

Service repair no - 57.40.25

CAUTION: Before removing any parts of steering linkage, it is imperative that road wheels are positioned straight ahead.

Then steering wheel removed to prevent rotary coupler being wound up or damaged.

This ensures drive pegs locate in their holes in rear of steering wheel.

After final alignment connect rotary coupler, tighten steering wheel securing nut and fit air bag module - if fitted or steering wheel trim pad.

Remove

1. Ensure road wheels are straight ahead.

2. Remove pinch bolt securing top universal joint to steering column.

3. Remove 2 pinch bolts securing lower universal joint.

4. Move lower shaft up to release lower universal joint from steering box splines. Remove lower shaft.

5. Remove universal joint from lower shaft.

NOTE: Do not dismantle upper coupling joint. Steering shaft, rubber coupling and top universal joint is only available as an assembly.

6. Inspect lower universal joint for wear and excessive play, renew if necessary.

7. Inspect top universal joint and rubber coupling, renew lower shaft as an assembly if necessary.

8. Inspect universal joints for stiffness, lubricate if necessary.

NOTE: Prior to fitting a replacement steering shaft check the following:

9. Release stud fasteners securing heat shield (if fitted).

10. Check that indicator clip coloured red is fully inserted under head of compression joint bolt.

WARNING: If clip is displaced, no attempt must be made to drive clip into engagement, a new shaft assembly must be fitted.

11. Secure heat shield stud fasteners (if fitted).

Refit

NOTE: Fit universal joints so pinch bolt holes line up with flat on shaft.

12. Position lower universal joint on shaft.

13. Position shaft assembly onto steering column.

Move assembly up spline to enable lower universal joint to fit onto steering box splines.

14. Align bolt holes with grooves in splines. Fit pinch bolts. Tighten to

25 Nm.

REPAIR

STEERING

STEERING COLUMN SHROUD

Service repair no - 57.40.29

Remove

1. Disconnect battery negative lead.

2. Remove 3 screws securing shroud.

3. Carefully release upper shroud from lower.

4. Manoeuvre lower shroud clear of steering column.

Refit

5. Position upper and lower shrouds to steering column ensuring plastic tags on lower shroud are correctly located. Clip both halves of shroud together.

6. Fit and tighten 3 screws.

STEERING WHEEL

Service repair no - 57.60.01

CAUTION: Prior to commencing work on vehicles fitted with an air bag,

See

SUPPLEMENTARY RESTRAINT SYSTEM,

Description and operation,

CAUTION: Before removing any parts of steering linkage, it is imperative that road wheels are positioned straight ahead.

Then remove steering wheel to prevent rotary coupler being wound up or damaged.

This ensures drive pegs locate in their holes in rear of steering wheel.

After final alignment connect rotary coupler multiplug, tighten steering wheel securing nut and fit air bag - if fitted or steering wheel trim pad.

REPAIR

STEERING

Remove

1. Disconnect battery negative lead.

2. Position road wheels straight ahead so steering wheel can be correctly re-assembled.

3. Airbag fitted: Remove air bag.

See

SUPPLEMENTARY RESTRAINT SYSTEM,

Repair, Driver’s Airbag Module

4. Remove trim pad from steering wheel, disconnect Lucars from horn button.

Refit

10. Recheck road wheels are positioned straight ahead.

11. Position steering wheel to column, feed harness through wheel hub.

12. Remove adhesive tape securing rotary coupler.

13. Locate rotary coupler drive pegs and indicator switch self-cancel pegs in steering wheel hub, push wheel fully onto taper.

14. Fit steering wheel nut. Tighten to

50 Nm.

15. Connect rotary coupler multiplug.

16. Non airbag module: Fit horn push assembly, connect Lucars to horn button, secure harness in clip.

17. Fit airbag module - if fitted.

See

SUPPLEMENTARY RESTRAINT SYSTEM,

Repair, Driver’s Airbag Module

18. Reconnect battery negative lead.

5. Disconnect rotary coupler multiplug.

6. Loosen but do not remove retaining nut.

7. Release steering wheel from taper, remove retaining nut and washer.

8. Release harness from retaining clip.

9. Withdraw steering wheel whilst at the same time feeding harness through wheel hub.

CAUTION: Prevent rotation of rotary coupler once steering wheel is removed.

Secure in position with adhesive tape.

NOTE: Do not carry out further dismantling if component is removed for access only.

REPAIR

STEERING

UPPER STEERING COLUMN

Service repair no - 57.40.01

NOTE: Steering column assembly is not a serviceable component.

CAUTION: Before removing any parts of steering linkage, it is imperative that road wheels are positioned straight ahead. then steering wheel removed to prevent rotary coupler being wound up or damaged.

CAUTION: After refitting steering linkage parts follow correct procedure to ensure that road wheels, steering box and steering wheel are correctly positioned relative to each other when in straight ahead condition. if steering wheel requires repositioning, ensure that drive pegs on rotary coupler are correctly positioned before steering wheel is replaced.

This ensures drive pegs locate in their holes in rear of steering wheel.

After final alignment, connect rotary coupler multiplug, tighten steering wheel securing nut and fit airbag - if fitted or steering wheel trim pad and horn push assembly.

Remove

1. Remove steering wheel.

See Steering Wheel

CAUTION: Prevent rotation of rotary coupler once steering wheel is removed.

Secure in position with adhesive tape.

2. Remove driver’s access panel.

3. Remove steering column shroud.

See Steering

Column Shroud

4. Remove rotary coupler.

See

SUPPLEMENTARY RESTRAINT SYSTEM,

Repair, Rotary Coupler

5. If fitted - remove 4 screws securing knee bolster, remove knee bolster.

6. Disconnect column switch multiplug.

7. Disconnect ignition switch multiplug from fuse box.

REPAIR

8. Disconnect ignition switch main feed multiplug.

STEERING

13. Carefully manoeuvre upper column out of footwell, recover rubber boot.

NOTE: Do not carry out further dismantling if upper column is removed for access only.

14. Loosen but, do not remove screw securing column switch assembly, withdraw assembly to gain access to multiplugs.

15. Disconnect column switch multiplugs, remove column switch assembly.

9. Remove 4 nuts securing upper column to lower mounting.

10. Remove 2 nuts securing lower mounting steady bracket, remove bracket.

11. Remove pinch bolt securing upper column to universal joint.

12. Remove 2 nuts and washes securing upper column to upper mounting bracket.

16. Disconnect ignition switch multiplug.

17. Remove shear bolts securing steering column lock, remove lock and saddle; discard shear bolts.

18. Withdraw bulb holder from column lock shroud.

19. Transfer components to new upper column, connect multiplug.

NOTE: Do not shear column lock bolts at this stage.

REPAIR

STEERING

Refit

20. Manoeuvre upper column to position in footwell, ensure splines in column and universal joint are correctly engaged and rubber boot is fitted.

21. Fit but do not tighten universal joint pinch bolt.

22. Position upper column to upper mounting, fit washers and nuts, do not tighten nuts.

23. Fit but do not tighten nuts and bolts securing upper column to lower mounting.

24. Fit lower mounting steady bracket, fit but do not tighten nuts and bolts.

25. Ensure upper column is aligned to mountings.

26. Tighten all nuts and bolts to

22 Nm.

27. Tighten universal joint pinch bolt to

25 Nm.

28. Connect column switch multiplug.

29. Connect ignition switch multiplugs.

30. Fit rotary coupler.

See SUPPLEMENTARY

RESTRAINT SYSTEM, Repair, Rotary

Coupler

31. Fit steering wheel.

See Steering Wheel

32. Reconnect battery negative lead.

33. Check steering column lock for correct operation, tighten shear bolts until heads shear off.

34. If fitted - position knee bolster, fit and tighten screws.

35. Fit steering column shroud.

See Steering

Column Shroud

36. Fit driver’s access panel.

REPAIR

STEERING

STEERING COLUMN LOCK ASSEMBLY

Service repair no - 57.40.31

Remove

CAUTION: Before removing any parts of steering linkage, it is imperative that road wheels are positioned straight ahead.

Then steering wheel removed to prevent rotary coupler being wound up or damaged.

This ensures drive pegs locate in their holes in rear of steering wheel.

After final alignment connect rotary coupler multiplug, tighten steering wheel securing nut and fit airbag module - if fitted.

1. Disconnect battery negative lead.

2. Remove steering column shroud.

See Steering

Column Shroud

3. Release turnbuckles, lower driver’s access panel.

4. If fitted, remove 4 screws securing knee pad, remove bolster.

5. Disconnect ignition switch multiplug from fuse box.

6. Disconnect ignition switch main feed multiplug.

REPAIR

STEERING

DROP ARM

Service repair no - 57.50.14

Remove

1. Place vehicle on a hoist, or support front axle on axle stands.

7. Remove bulb holder from steering column lock shroud.

8. Tap head of shear bolts anti-clockwise to release them.

9. Remove and discard shear bolts.

10. Detach saddle.

11. Remove steering column lock assembly.

Refit

12. Position steering lock saddle on column, locating spigot in hole provided.

13. Place lower lock assembly into column.

14. Fit but do not fully tighten new shear bolts.

15. Connect multiplugs.

16. Insert bulb holder into steering column lock shroud.

17. Reconnect battery negative lead.

18. Check steering column lock for correct operation, tighten shear bolts until heads shear off.

19. Fit steering column shroud.

See Steering

Column Shroud

20. If fitted - fit knee bolster, fit and tighten screws.

21. Raise driver’s access panel, secure turnbuckles.

2. Disconnect drag link ball joint from drop arm, using extractor LRT-57-018.

REPAIR

STEERING

3. Bend back tabs on locking washer and remove drop arm using extractor LRT-57-012. Loosen drop arm securing nut, but do not remove before using extractor.

4. Remove nut, discard locking washer.

STEERING DAMPER

Service repair no - 57.55.21

Remove

1. Site vehicle on a ramp [hoist].

2. Remove fixings at differential case bracket.

3. Remove fixings at track rod bracket.

4. Remove steering damper.

Refit

5. Centralise steering box.

See Adjustment,

Centralise Steering Box

6. Fit drop arm, align master splines.

7. Fit a new tab washer and drop arm fixing nut.

Tighten to

176 Nm, bend over tab.

8. Fit drag link. Tighten ball joint nut

40 Nm.

Refit

5. Reverse removal procedure. 1 to 4.

REPAIR

STEERING

TRACK ROD AND LINKAGE

Service repair no - 57.55.09

Remove track rod

1. Site vehicle on a ramp [hoist].

2. Disconnect steering damper at track rod.

3. Disconnect track rod at ball joints, using extractor LRT-57-018.

4. Remove track rod.

Remove linkage

5. Loosen clamp bolts.

6. Unscrew ball joints.

7. Unscrew track rod adjuster. (left hand thread).

Refit linkage

8. Fit replacement parts. Loosely fit clamp pinch bolts.

9. Screw in ball joint to full extent of threads.

10. Set adjuster to track rod distance to 9mm as shown.

11. Set adjuster end ball joint distance to 28.5mm as shown.

12. Track rod effective length of 1230.0mm is subject to adjustment during wheel alignment check.

Refit track rod

CAUTION: Fit a new track rod if existing is damaged or bent. No attempt should be made to repair it.

13. Fit track rod and tighten ball joint nuts to

40 Nm.

14. Check front wheel alignment.

See Adjustment,

Front Wheel Alignment

15. Connect steering damper to track rod.

16. Remove vehicle from hoist, or axle stands.

REPAIR

STEERING

DRAG LINK AND DRAG LINK ENDS

Service repair no - 57.55.17

Remove drag link

1. Check front wheel alignment.

See Adjustment,

Front Wheel Alignment

2. Ensure wheels are positioned straight ahead during following procedure.

3. Place vehicle on a hoist, or support front axle on axle stands.

4. Remove right front road wheel.

Refit drag link ends

11. Fit replacement ends. Loosely fit clamp bolts.

12. Set ball joints to drag link distance to 28.5mm as shown.

13. Adjust ball pin centres to nominal length of

924.0mm. this length is adjusted during refit.

14. Centralise steering box.

See Adjustment,

Centralise Steering Box

15. Align steering wheel, if necessary.

See

Steering Wheel

Refit drag link

CAUTION: Fit new drag link if existing drag link is damaged or bent. No attempt should be made to repair it.

16. Fit drag link. Tighten ball-joint nuts to

40 Nm.

17. Check steering lock stops.

See Adjustment,

Steering Lock Stops

18. Ensure full steering travel is obtained between lock stops. Adjust drag link length to suit.

19. Tap ball joints in direction shown, so both pins are in same angular plane.

20. Tighten clamp bolts to

14 Nm.

5. Disconnect drag link ball joint at swivel housing arm, using extractor LRT-57-018.

6. Disconnect drag link ball joint at drop arm using

LRT-57-018.

7. Remove drag link.

Remove drag link ends

8. Loosen clamp bolts.

9. Unscrew ball joints.

10. Clean internal threads in drag link.

21. Reverse removal procedure. 3 and 4.

22. Road test vehicle.

23. If driving straight ahead and steering wheel is offset by 0

° to

° in either direction. Remedy by adjusting drag link length.

Wheel

WARNING: To correct steering wheel deviations greater than

. Remove and reposition steering wheel.

See Steering

REPAIR

STEERING

POWER STEERING BOX

Service repair no - 57.10.07

Overhaul

NOTE: Overhaul of steering box should not be carried out during the warranty period.

WARNING: Wear safety glasses while removing and refitting circlips and retaining ring.

CAUTION: Absolute cleanliness is essential when overhauling power steering box.

1. Remove steering box from vehicle.

See Repair,

Power Steering Box

Remove drop arm using extractor LRT-57-012.

Loosen drop arm securing nut, but do not remove before using extractor. Remove dirt excluder from output shaft.

2. Drain oil, remove blanking plugs and bleed screw. Hold steering box over suitable container, turn input shaft from lock to lock, until oil is drained. Refit bleed screw.

3. Rotate retainer ring until one end is 12 mm from extractor hole. Using a drift through hole in cylinder, lift retaining ring from groove in cylinder bore.

4. Remove retainer ring, using a screwdriver.

5. Turn input shaft (left lock on left hand drive, right lock on right hand drive) until piston pushes out cover. Turn input shaft fully in opposite direction, applying pressure to piston.

6. Remove set screw retaining rack pad adjuster.

7. Remove rack adjuster and pad.

8. Remove sector shaft adjuster locknut.

9. Remove four bolts from sector shaft cover.

10. Screw in sector shaft adjuster until cover is removed.

NOTE: Sealant is applied to hexagon socket to ’tamperproof’ sector shaft adjuster

11. Slide out sector shaft.

OVERHAUL

STEERING

12. Remove piston, a bolt screwed into piston will assist removal.

13. Remove input shaft dirt excluder.

NOTE: Should difficulty be experienced warm casing and bearing assembly. Cool bearing cup using a mandrel and tap steering box on a bench.

14. Remove worm adjuster locknut using ’C’ wrench

LRT-57-007.

15. Remove worm adjuster using wrench

LRT-57-006.

16. Tap splined end of shaft to free bearing.

17. Remove bearing cup and caged ball bearing assembly.

18. Remove valve and worm assembly.

19. Remove inner bearing cage, cup and shim washers. Retain shims for reassembly.

Steering box seals

20. Remove circlip and seal from sector shaft housing bore.

OVERHAUL

STEERING

CAUTION: Do not remove sector shaft bearings from casing. Replacement parts are not available. If sector shaft bearings are worn fit a new steering box.

21. Remove dirt excluder, circlip and seal from input shaft housing bore.

CAUTION: The use of a seal puller is recommended to prevent damage to casing, and possible oil leaks.

INSPECTING

Piston

22. Discard all rubber seals and provide replacements.

NOTE: A rubber seal is fitted behind plastic ring on rack piston. Discard seal and plastic ring.

Sector shaft assembly

26. Check there is no side play on roller.

27. If side play on roller exists fit a new sector shaft.

28. Check condition of adjuster screw threads.

Check adjuster end float. Fit new adjuster if end float exceeds 0.15 mm.

29. Examine bearing areas on shaft for excessive wear.

30. Examine gear teeth for uneven or excessive wear.

Steering box casing

23. Examine piston bore for scoring and wear.

24. Examine feed tube.

25. Fit a new feed tube if damaged. Tighten to

Nm.

OVERHAUL

STEERING

Sector shaft cover assembly

31. Inspect cover and bearing. If worn or damaged, replacement parts are not available, fit a new steering box.

Sector shaft adjuster locknut

32. The locknut is also a fluid seal. Fit new nut at overhaul.

Valve and worm assembly

33. Examine bearing areas for wear. The areas must be smooth and not indented.

34. Examine worm track which must be smooth and not indented.

37. If required, replace all three rings, using ring expander LRT-57-019. The expander will not pass over rings already fitted. Remove rings to allow access without damaging seal grooves.

38. Warm rings and expander tool to aid assembly.

Fit rings to expander, slide expander over valve and worm assembly. In turn fit rings to their grooves. Remove expander, slide valve and worm assembly into ring compressor

LRT-57-020 and allow to cool.

Ball bearing and cage assemblies

39. Examine ball races and cups for wear and general condition.

40. If ball cage has worn against bearing cup, fit replacements.

41. Bearing balls must be retained by cage.

42. Bearing and cage repair is carried out by complete replacement of assembly.

35. Check for wear on torsion bar assembly pin. No free movement should exist between input shaft and torsion bar or between torsion bar and worm.

NOTE: Any sign of wear makes it essential to fit new valve and worm assembly.

36. Examine valve rings for cuts, scratches and grooves. The valve rings should be free to rotate in grooves.

OVERHAUL

Rack thrust pad and adjuster

43. Examine thrust pad for scores.

44. Examine adjuster for wear in pad seat.

45. Fit new sealing ring to rack adjuster.

STEERING

Reassemble

NOTE: When fitting replacement oil seals lubricate with recommended fluid and ensure absolute cleanliness.

Sector shaft oil seal

52. Fit oil seal, lip side first.

53. Fit extrusion washer.

54. Fit dust seal, lipped side last.

55. Fit circlip.

Rack and piston

46. Examine for excessive wear on rack teeth.

47. Ensure thrust pad bearing surface is free from scores and wear.

48. Ensure piston outer diameters are free from burrs and damage.

49. Examine seal and ring groove for scores and damage.

50. Fit new ring to piston. Warm nylon seal and fit to piston.

51. Slide piston assembly into cylinder with rack tube outwards.

Fitting valve and worm assembly

56. Refit original shims and inner bearing cup. Use

Petroleum Jelly to aid assembly.

NOTE: If original shims are not used, fit shims of 0.76 mm thickness.

57. Fit inner cage and bearings assembly.

58. Fit valve and worm assembly.

59. Fit outer cage and bearings assembly.

60. Fit outer bearing cup.

OVERHAUL

STEERING

61. Fit new worm adjuster sealing ring.

Fitting rack and piston

68. Screw slave bolt into piston to aid assembly.

69. Fit piston and rack so piston is 70 mm from outer end of bore.

Fitting sector shaft

70. Fit sector shaft using seal saver LRT-57-021.

Align roller with cut out in casing - see

RR3934M. Push in sector shaft while rotating input shaft to allow sector roller to engage worm.

62. Loosely screw adjuster into casing.

63. Fit locknut, do not tighten.

64. Turn in worm adjuster until end float is almost eliminated. Ensure bearing cages are seated correctly.

65. Measure maximum rolling torque of valve and worm assembly, using a torque wrench and spline socket LRT-57-025.

66. Turn in worm adjuster while rotating shaft to increase figure measured in instruction 65. to

0.56 Nm.

67. Back off worm adjuster 1/4 turn. Turn in worm adjuster to increase reading at 65. by 0.21 - 0.34

Nm with locknut tight,

100 Nm. Use worm adjusting wrench LRT-57-006 and locknut wrench LRT-57-028.

Fitting rack adjuster

71. Fit rack adjuster and thrust pad to engage rack.

Back off half turn on adjuster.

72. Loosely fit new nylon pad and adjuster set screw assembly.

OVERHAUL

STEERING

Fitting sector shaft cover

73. Fit new sealing ring to cover.

74. Align cover with casing.

75. Screw cover assembly fully on to sector shaft adjuster screw.

76. If necessary back off sector shaft adjuster screw.

Tap cover in place to allow cover to joint fully with casing.

NOTE: Before tightening fixings, rotate input shaft to ensure sector shaft roller is free to move in valve worm. If initial resistance is left, turn adjuster screw approximately two turns in a clockwise direction.

77. Fit cover bolts. Tighten to

75 Nm.

Fitting cylinder cover

78. Fit new square section seal to cover.

79. Remove slave bolt fitted at instruction 68. Press cover into cylinder just to clear retainer ring groove.

80. Fit retaining ring to groove with one end of ring positioned 12 mm from extractor hole.

Adjusting sector shaft

NOTE: Refit drop arm and tighten nut sufficiently to ensure that no backlash exists between drop arm and sector shaft.

81. To set worm on centre, rotate input shaft to full inner-lock (full right lock for a left hand drive vehicle, full left lock for a right hand drive vehicle). Rotate input shaft back towards centre two full turns.

82. The box is now on centre and can be adjusted.

OVERHAUL

STEERING

83. Hold input shaft and rock drop arm to establish backlash is present. Continue rocking and slowly turn sector shaft adjusting screw clockwise.

Continue rotating adjuster screw until backlash has almost been eliminated.

84. Refit locknut and tighten.

NOTE: It is important steering box is centralised before any adjustments are made.

85. Check maximum rolling torque one and a quarter turns either side of centre position, using a torque wrench and spline socket LRT-57-025.

Rotate adjuster screw to obtain across centre torque of 0.34 Nm plus torque figure at one and a quarter turns. Tighten adjuster locknut to

Nm.

Adjusting rack adjuster.

86. Turn in rack adjuster to increase figure measured in instruction 85. by 0.23 - 0.34 Nm.

The final figure may be less, but must not exceed 1.35 Nm.

87. Lock rack adjuster in position with grub screw.

Tighten to

5 Nm.

Torque peak check

With input shaft rotated from lock to lock, rolling torque figures should be greatest across centre position and equally disposed about centre position.

The condition depends on value of shimming fitted between valve and worm assembly inner bearing cup and casing. The original shim washer value will give correct torque peak position unless major components have been replaced.

Procedure

88. With input coupling shaft toward the operator, turn shaft fully counter-clockwise.

89. Check torque figures obtained from lock to lock using torque wrench and spline socket

LRT-57-025.

90. Check also for equal engagement either side of centre.

Adjustments

91. Note where greatest figures are recorded relative to steering position.If greatest figures are not recorded across centre of travel (steering straight-ahead), adjust as follows:

If torque peak occurs before centre position, add to shim washer value; if torque peak occurs after centre position, subtract from shim washer value,

refer to

fitting valve and worm assembly .

Shim washers are available as follows:

0.03mm, 0.07mm, 0.12mm and 0.24mm.

NOTE: Adjustment of 0.07mm to shim value will move torque peak area by 1/4 turn on the shaft.

CAUTION: When reshimming valve and worm, extreme caution must be exercised to prevent seal damage during reassembly.

OVERHAUL

STEERING

Input shaft oil seal

92. Fit seal, lip side first, into housing. Use seal saver LRT-57-016 and seal installer

LRT-57-026. Note that seal is fitted to a depth of

4.75 - 5.00 mm from face of box.

93. Secure seal with circlip.

94. Smear inner lip of dirt excluder with PTFE grease. Fit dirt excluder using LRT-57-027.

When fitted correctly outer shoulder of excluder is 4.00 - 4.50 mm from face of box, dimension X in RR3941M.

97. Fit steering box.

See Repair, Power Steering

Box

95. Remove drop arm. Smear inner lip of dirt excluder with PTFE grease and refit, ensuring outer lip is flush with casing.

96. With input shaft on centre, line up centralising holes in drop arm and steering box see inset in

RR3940M. Fit drop arm to steering box using a new tab washer. Tighten to

176 Nm, bend over tab.

OVERHAUL

STEERING

STEERING PUMP

Make/type - V8i

Make/type - Tdi

................................................................

Operating pressure - straight ahead position - at idle

Full lock (left or right) at idle

......

.............................................

Full lock (left or right) 1000 rev/min ..................................

ZF ’Unicorn’

Hobourn Eaton 500 series

7 bar, 100 lbf/in

2 maximum

28 bar, 400 lbf/in

2 minimum

70-77 bar, 1000-1100 lbf/in

SPECIFICATIONS, TORQUE

STEERING

TORQUE VALUES

NOTE: Torque wrenches should be regularly checked for accuracy to ensure that all fixings are tightened to the correct torque.

Ball joint nuts ..............................................................................................

Clamp bolt nuts ..........................................................................................

Steering column bracket nuts

Steering wheel nut

....................................................................

.....................................................................................

Tie bar to mounting nut .............................................................................

110

Universal joint pinch bolt ............................................................................

PAS box

Adjuster locknut .................................................................................

Drop arm nut ....................................................................................

176

Sector shaft cover to steering box .....................................................

Steering box to chassis .....................................................................

Steering box fluid pipes 14mm thread

Steering box fluid pipes 16mm thread

Tie bar

...............................................

...............................................................................................

........................................................................................

PAS pump

High pressure fluid pipe .....................................................................

Power steering pump mounting .........................................................

Pulley bolts, power steering pump

Hose clamp

....................................................

........................................................................................

Front mounting plate bolts ..................................................................

PAS reservoir

Hose clamp 3

* Torque values below are for all screws and bolts used except for those that are specified otherwise.

METRIC

M10

M12

M14

M16

......................................................................................................

.....................................................................................................

...................................................................................................

..................................................................................................

105

180

UNC / UNF

1/4 ......................................................................................................

5/16 ...................................................................................................

3/8

7/16

.....................................................................................................

...................................................................................................

1/2

5/8

.....................................................................................................

....................................................................................................

136

SPECIFICATIONS, TORQUE

POWER STEERING BOX

STEERING

LRT-57-012 Drop arm extractor

LRT-57-007 ’C’ Wrench

LRT-57-006 Worm adjusting wrench

LRT-57-019 Ring expander

SERVICE TOOLS

STEERING

LRT-57-020 Ring compressor

LRT-57-021 Seal saver, sector shaft

LRT-57-016 Seal saver, valve and worm

LRT-57-017 Torque setting tool

SERVICE TOOLS

LRT-57-018

STEERING

Ball joint remover

LRT-57-005 Pressure gauge

LRT-57-001 Test adaptor

LRT-57-022 Pressure test adaptors

SERVICE TOOLS

FRONT SUSPENSION

INTRODUCTION

Suspension design is a major factor in determining the comfort, safety and performance of any vehicle, but is particularly significant to 4 wheel drive cross country vehicles. The ideal suspension must allow maximum wheel travel and axle articulation, and provide good ground clearance without loss of traction or directional stability.

A well designed beam axle layout can embrace all of these qualities and also has the inherent advantage (over independent systems) of no variation in wheel track or camber angle.

Suspension comparison

1. Beam axle system

2. Independent system

DESCRIPTION AND OPERATION

FRONT SUSPENSION

AXLE LOCATION

The front axle is controlled longitudinally, by two forged steel radius arms and transversely by a panhard rod.

Front axle suspension

1. Panhard rod - transverse location

2. Radius arms - longitudinal location

3. Coil springs

4. Shock absorber

Long travel coil springs and hydraulic shock absorbers, provide the springing for each wheel.

DESCRIPTION AND OPERATION

FRONT SUSPENSION

SELF LOCKING NUTS

WARNING: Where self locking nuts are removed, they must be replaced with new nuts of same specification.

PANHARD ROD

Service repair no - 60.10.07.

Remove

1. Remove fixings at mounting arm.

2. Remove fixings at axle bracket.

3. Remove Panhard rod.

4. Press out flexible bushes. Ensure the steel tubing locates on the outer edge of the bush and not on the rubber inner.

RADIUS ARM

Service repair no - 60.10.16.

Remove

1. Loosen road wheel retaining nuts.

2. Raise front of vehicle. Support chassis on stands and remove wheel.

3. Support front axle weight with jack.

4. Remove radius arm to chassis side member fixings.

Refit

5. Fit replacement bushes.

CAUTION: Apply pressure to outer edge of bush, and not rubber inner.

6. Reverse removal procedure. 1 to 4. Tighten to

88Nm

5. Disconnect track rod at ball joint.

6. Remove fixings, radius arm to axle.

7. Lower radius arm front end to clear axle and remove from vehicle.

REPAIR

FRONT SUSPENSION

FRONT SHOCK ABSORBER

Service repair no - 60.30.02.

Remove

1. Loosen road wheel retaining nuts.

2. Support chassis on stands and remove road wheel.

3. Support axle weight with jack.

8. Press out flexible bushes.

Refit

9. Press in replacement bushes.

CAUTION: When pressing in new bushes press on outer edge of bush and not rubber inner.

10. Reverse removal procedure. 1 to 8.

Tighten fixings to following torques:

Radius arm to chassiss

176Nm

Radius arm to axle

197Nm

4. Remove shock absorber lower fixing and withdraw cupwasher, rubber bush and seating washer.

5. Remove four shock absorber bracket fixings.

6. Withdraw shock absorber and bracket complete.

REPAIR

FRONT SUSPENSION

7. Withdraw lower seating washer, rubber bush and cupwasher.

8. Remove fixings, shock absorber to mounting bracket.

9. Withdraw mounting bracket.

10. Lift off top seating washer, rubber bush and cupwasher.

Refit

11. Reverse removal procedure. 1 to 10.

FRONT ROAD SPRING

Service repair no - 60.20.11.

Remove

1. Remove front shock absorber.

See Front

Shock Absorber

CAUTION: Avoid over stretching brake hoses. If necessary loosen hose connector locknuts to allow hoses to follow axle.

2. Lower axle sufficient to free road spring.

3. Withdraw road spring.

4. Withdraw shock absorber bracket securing ring.

Refit

5. Fit shock absorber bracket retaining ring. Retain in position with a nut.

6. Reverse 2 and 3.

7. Remove nut retaining securing ring.

8. Fit front shock absorber.

REPAIR

FRONT SUSPENSION

BUMP STOP

Service repair no - 60.30.10.

Remove

1. Remove fixings.

2. Remove bump stop.

Refit

3. Position bolts in slots in chassis brackets.

4. Fit bump stop, secure with washers and nuts.

REPAIR

ANTI-ROLL[SWAY] BAR ASSEMBLY FRONT

Service repair no - 60.10.01

FRONT SUSPENSION

KEY

1. Anti-roll[sway] bar

2. Rubber bush

3. Strap

4. Nut, bolt, washer

Remove

1. Mark for reassembly position of rubber bushes on anti- roll[sway] bar.

2. Remove four nuts, bolts and washers securing two bush straps.

3. Remove nuts, bolts, washers and rubber bushes from ball joint links and remove anti-roll[sway] bar.

5. Nut and washer

6. Castellated nut and cotter pin

7. Ball joint link arm

Refit

4. Position bushes on anti-roll[sway] bar. Ensure split points towards axle on RH bush and away from axle on LH bush.

5. Fit anti-roll[sway] bar with two straps. To ensure correct fit angled sides of bar should point down as shown. Loosely fit the bolts, washers and nyloc nuts.

6. Fit bolt, washers and rubber bushes. Using new nuts fit anti-roll[sway] bar to ball joint links.

Tighten to

68Nm.

7. Tighten nuts securing straps to

30Nm

REPAIR

FRONT SUSPENSION

ANTI-ROLL[SWAY] BAR BALL JOINT LINKS

Service repair no - 60.10.04.

Remove

1. Remove two nuts, bolts, washers and rubber bushes from ball joint links.

2. Remove cotter pin and loosen castellated nut a few turns.

3. Release ball joint using special tool 18G 1063A as shown.

4. Remove castellated nut and ball joint link.

Refit

5. Fit ball joint link and castellated nut. Ensure ball joint link arm points up. Tighten to

40Nm and fit new cotter pin.

6. Align anti-roll bar to ball joint links.

7. Fit bolts, washers and rubber bushes using new self locking nuts secure anti-roll[sway] bar to ball joint links. Tighten to

68Nm.

REPAIR

FRONT SUSPENSION

TORQUE VALUES

NOTE: Torque wrenches should be regularly checked for accuracy to ensure that all fixings are tightened to the correct torque.

Anti-roll[sway] bar front

- Strap nyloc nuts ..............................................................................

- Ball link self lock nut ........................................................................

- Castellated nut

Drag link to axle

................................................................................

.........................................................................................

Securing ring for mounting turret

Radius arm to chassis

...............................................................

...............................................................................

176

Panhard rod mounting arm to chassis

Panhard rod to axle

.......................................................

....................................................................................

Radius arm to axle (front only) ..................................................................

Panhard rod to mounting bracket ...............................................................

Tie bar to Panhard rod ..............................................................................

110

197

Torque values below are for all screws and bolts used except for those that are specified otherwise.

METRIC

...........................................................................

M8 ...........................................................................

M10 .........................................................................

M12 .........................................................................

M14 .........................................................................

M16 .........................................................................

105

180

UNC / UNF

1/4 ...........................................................................

5/16 .........................................................................

3/8 ...........................................................................

7/16 .........................................................................

1/2 ...........................................................................

5/8 ...........................................................................

136

SPECIFICATIONS, TORQUE

REAR SUSPENSION

AXLE LOCATION

Longitudinal location of the rear axle is by solid round section steel link arms and a forged "A" frame, upper link assembly, which is secured to a chassis cross member and provides transverse control. Long travel coil springs and hydraulic shock absorbers provide the springing for each wheel.

Rear axle suspension

1. "A" frame, upper link assembly - transverse location

2. Lower link assembly - longitudinal location

3. Coil springs

4. Shock absorber

DESCRIPTION AND OPERATION

REAR SUSPENSION

REAR ROAD SPRING

Service repair no - 64.20.01

Remove

1. Loosen rear road wheel retaining nuts.

2. Support chassis on stands and remove wheels.

3. Support rear axle weight with jack.

4. Disconnect shock absorbers at one end.

REAR SHOCK ABSORBER

Service repair no - 64.30.02.

Remove

1. Loosen road wheel retaining nuts.

2. Support chassis on stands. Remove road wheel and support rear axle weight with jack.

3. Remove fixings and withdraw shock absorber from axle bracket.

5. Position coil spring compressor correctly on road spring.

6. Compress spring evenly to facilitate removal.

7. Lower axle to free road spring from upper seat.

CAUTION: Avoid lowering axle further than rear brake flexible hose will allow.

8. Remove spring retainer plate.

9. Withdraw road spring, and spring isolator.

10. Lift off spring seat.

Refit

11. Reverse removal procedure.

4. Remove upper fixings.

5. Withdraw shock absorber.

6. If required remove mounting bracket

7. If required remove mounting rubbers.

Refit

8. Reverse removal procedure.

REPAIR

REAR SUSPENSION

BUMP STOP

Service repair no - 64.30.15.

Remove

1. Remove fixings.

2. Remove bump stop.

SUSPENSION LINK UPPER

Service repair no - 64.35.44.

Remove

1. Support rear of chassis on stands, allow axle to hang freely.

2. Remove fixings, upper link bracket to frame.

3. Remove fixings, upper links to pivot bracket.

4. Remove upper link complete with frame bracket.

Refit

3. Position bolts in slots in bracket.

4. Fit bump stop secure with washer and nuts.

5. Remove bolt.

6. Separate link from bracket.

REPAIR

REAR SUSPENSION

Renew bush

7. Press out rubber bushes.

8. Fit bush centrally in housing.

CAUTION: Apply pressure to outer edge of bush, and not rubber inner.

Refit

9. Reverse removal procedure. 1 to 6. Do not fully tighten fixings until all components are in position.

10. Tighten fixings to correct torque.

See

Specifications, torque, Torque Values

4. Remove mounting bracket fixings at side member bracket.

5. Remove lower link complete.

6. Remove locknut.

7. Remove mounting bracket from lower link.

SUSPENSION LINK LOWER

Service repair no - 64.35.02.

Remove

1. Site vehicle on a ramp [hoist].

2. Alternatively, support vehicle on stands under rear axle.

3. Remove rear fixings.

Renew bush

8. Press out rubber bushes.

9. Fit bush centrally in housing.

CAUTION: Apply pressure to outer edge of bush, and not rubber inner.

Refit

10. Reverse removal procedure. 6 and 7. Do not tighten locknut.

11. Reverse removal procedure. 3 to 5.

12. Lower vehicle, allow axle to take up static laden position. Tighten to

176 Nm.

REPAIR

REAR SUSPENSION

ANTI-ROLL[SWAY] BAR ASSEMBLY REAR

Service repair no - 64.35.08.

KEY

1. Anti-roll[sway] bar

2. Rubber bush

3. Strap

4. Nut, bolt, washer

Remove

1. Note for reassembly, position of rubber bushes on anti-roll bar.

2. Remove four nuts, bolts and washers securing two bush straps.

3. Remove nuts, bolts, washers and rubber bushes from the ball joint links and remove anti-roll bar.

5. Nut and washer

6. Ball joint link arm

7. Bolt and washer

8. Castellated nut and cotter pin

Refit

4. Position rubber bushes on anti-roll bar. Fit joint towards axle.

5. Fit anti-roll bar with two straps. Ensure ball joint link arms point down as shown. Loosely fit, bolts, washers and new nyloc nuts.

6. Fit bolt, washers and rubber bushes. Fit anti-roll bar to ball joint links. Tighten to

68Nm.

7. Tighten nuts securing straps to

30Nm.

REPAIR

ANTI-ROLL[SWAY] BAR BALL JOINT LINKS

Service repair no - 64.35.24.

Remove

1. Remove two nuts, bolts, washers and rubber bushes from ball joint links and lower anti-roll bar to clear links.

2. Remove cotter pin and loosen castellated nut a few turns.

3. Release ball joint using special tool 18G 1063A as shown.

4. Remove castellated nut and ball joint link.

REAR SUSPENSION

Refit

5. Fit ball joint link arm and castellated nut. Point ball joint link arm down as shown. Tighten to

40Nm and fit new cotter pin.

6. Align anti-roll bar to ball joint links.

7. Fit bolts, washers and rubber bushes using new self locking nuts secure anti-roll bar to ball joint links. Tighten to

68Nm.

REPAIR

REAR SUSPENSION

TORQUE VALUES

NOTE: Torque wrenches should be regularly checked for accuracy to ensure that all fixings are tightened to the correct torque.

Anti-roll[sway] bar rear

- Strap nyloc nuts ..............................................................................

- Ball link self lock nut ........................................................................

- Castellated nut ................................................................................

Top link to mounting bracket .....................................................................

176

Bottom link to axle .....................................................................................

Bottom link to chassis ...............................................................................

Top link bracket to rear cross member ......................................................

176

Shock absorber to axle ..............................................................................

Torque values below are for all screws and bolts used except for those that are specified otherwise.

METRIC

M10

M12

M14

M16

......................................................................................................

.....................................................................................................

...................................................................................................

..................................................................................................

105

180

UNC / UNF

1/4 ......................................................................................................

5/16 ...................................................................................................

3/8

7/16

.....................................................................................................

...................................................................................................

1/2

5/8

.....................................................................................................

....................................................................................................

136

SPECIFICATIONS, TORQUE

BRAKES

Discovery vehicles have servo assisted brake systems and the option of an anti-lock brake system.

Information in this section refers to components relevant to both brake systems. Where the system components are different they are referred to as ABS or NON ABS

If the servo should fail, both hydraulic circuits will still function but would require greater pedal effort due to the lack of vacuum assistance. The hand operated parking brake acts on a brake drum at the rear of the transfer gearbox and is completely independent of the hydraulic circuits.

Hydraulic circuit non ABS

BRAKE SYSTEM NON ABS

Description

The servo assisted hydraulic braking system is the dual line type, incorporating primary and secondary hydraulic circuits.

NOTE: References made to primary or secondary do not imply main service brakes or emergency brakes but denote hydraulic line identification.

The brake pedal is connected to a vacuum assisted mechanical servo which in turn operates a tandem master cylinder. The front disc brake calipers each house four pistons, these pistons are fed by the secondary hydraulic circuit. The rear disc brake calipers each house two pistons, these are fed by the primary hydraulic circuit via a pressure reducing valve.

A brake fluid level switch is incorporated into the reservoir cap assembly, the switch will immediately illuminate a warning light in the instrument binnacle indicating low fluid or sudden fluid loss.

The brake fluid reservoir is divided, the section closest to the servo feeds the primary circuit and the section furthest from the servo feeds the secondary circuit.

Under normal operating conditions both the primary and secondary circuits operate simultaneously on brake pedal application. In the event of a failure in the primary circuit the secondary circuit will still function. If the secondary circuit fails the primary circuit will still function. The brake pedal travel will be longer in the event of a half system failure.

Key

A = Primary hydraulic circuit

B = Secondary hydraulic circuit

C = Pressure reducing valve

DESCRIPTION AND OPERATION

BRAKES

ABS COMPONENTS

Location

Key to diagram

1. ABS Modulator unit

2. Servo/Master cylinder

3. Pressure reducing valve

4. Electronic control unit

DESCRIPTION AND OPERATION

5. Rear sensors/exciter rings

6. Front sensors/exciter rings

7. Diagnostic plug connection

BRAKES

Description of components

1. ABS Modulator unit

To provide the ABS function a Modulator is positioned within the system between the master cylinder and the calipers. On both LHD and RHD vehicles it is sited on the left inner wing [fender]. The Modulator has 8 solenoid valves, 2 for each wheel, 2 expanders and a recirculation pump. It is non serviceable.

2. Servo/master cylinder

Actuation of the system is provided by a combined master cylinder and servo assembly attached to the pedal box, this provides pressure to opposed piston calipers at each brake pad Twin piston at the front axle, single piston at the rear.

3. Pressure reducing valve

To maintain the braking balance, pressure to the rear axle is regulated by a Pressure Reducing Valve (PRV)

This PRV is of the failure bypass type, allowing full system pressure to the rear axle in the event of a front circuit failure. It is sited on the left inner wing [fender].

4. Electronic control unit - ECU

ABS control is provided by an electronic control unit which is positioned on the passenger side of the vehicle behind the dash panel/glove box.

The ECU, which is non-serviceable, is connected to the ABS harness by a 35 way connector. non serviceable.

The ECU continually monitors the brake system, providing diagnostics in the event of a system malfunction. Details of how to access the ECU diagnostics are provided in the Electrical

Troubleshooting Manual.

5.& 6. Front and rear sensors/exciter rings - 4 off

A sensor is sited at each wheel, sensing a 60 tooth exciter ring. When vehicle is in motion inductive sensors send signals to ECU. Front exciter ring is fitted to outside diameter of constant velocity joint inside each front hub assembly. The rear exciter ring is bolted to the rear of each brake disc bell.

7. Diagnostic plug connection

A diagnostic plug is located behind the dash. To the left of the steering column on LHD vehicles. To the right of the steering column on RHD vehicles. It is a 5 way blue connector.

The location and identification of ABS electrical relays are given in the Electrical Troubleshooting Manual.

For location and identification of ABS electrical fuses.

See ELECTRICAL, Repair, Fuse Box - Interior or.

See ELECTRICAL, Repair, Fuse Box - Engine

Compartment

ANTI-LOCK BRAKE SYSTEM - ABS

Manufactured by WABCO

Introduction

The purpose of ABS is to prevent vehicle wheels locking during brake application, thus maintaining vehicle steerability and stability. This allows vehicle to be steered whilst brakes are applied, even under emergency conditions, and to avoid obstacles where there is sufficient space to redirect the vehicle.

WARNING: ABS is an aid to retaining steering control and stability while braking.

• ABS cannot defy the natural laws of physics acting on the vehicle.

• ABS will not prevent accidents resulting from excessive cornering speeds, following another vehicle too closely or aquaplaning, i.e. where a layer of water prevents adequate contact between tyre and road surface.

• The additional control provided by ABS must never be exploited in a dangerous or reckless manner which could jeopardise the safety of driver or other road users.

• The fitting of ABS does not imply that the vehicle will always stop in a shorter stopping distance.

DESCRIPTION AND OPERATION

BRAKES

System description

The brake system consists of dual hydraulic circuits in a front - rear split. That is individual circuits to front and rear axles.

Wheelspeed signals are provided by the fitting of exciter rings to axles and speed sensors.

An ABS stop light switch is fitted to provide a braking signal to the ECU as well as operate the stop lights.

Electrical wiring is provided as necessary with system relays and fuses. Discovery Electrical Troubleshooting

Manual gives the location and wiring circuits of these components.

Visual warning of system malfunction is provided via a warning light in the instrument panel.

Hydraulic circuit ABS

ABS System operation

During normal braking the feel of the brake pedal on vehicles equipped with ABS will be the same as that on non ABS vehicles. During ABS cycling the driver will experience feedback in the form of a pulsating brake pedal and solenoid/pump motor noise from the

Modulator.

The system is fully automatic in operation both on and off road, and will only act when the ECU detects that

ABS cycling is necessary. The ECU continually monitors the operation of the system.

When starting the ABS system will go through a series of self checks, including a check of the solenoid valves/pump motor.

WARNING LIGHT

The warning light will be on during the self check

(1.3-2 secs). If no faults are stored in the memory the light goes out for 0.5sec,then comes on again. It will then remain on until the vehicle is driven faster than 7 kph/5mph. This is the only time that the light will be on without indicating a problem.

Any faults detected by the ECU will cause the warning light to illuminate indicating that the vehicle may not have full ABS control.

Key

A = Primary hydraulic circuit

B = Secondary hydraulic circuit

C = Pressure reducing valve

D = ABS Modulator

DESCRIPTION AND OPERATION

BRAKES

BRAKE PIPE LAYOUT ABS

Left hand drive shown. On right hand drive vehicles the master cylinder and servo unit only move position.

KEY

1. Connector double elbow

2. Rear left brake

3. Modulator to rear left brake

4. Modulator to master cylinder

5. Modulator to pressure reducing valve upper

6. Electrical connection

7. Modulator unit

8. Nut, mounting bush and cup

9. Modulator to front left brake

10. Front left brake

11. Electrical connection

12. Modulator to front right brake

13. Modulator to pressure reducing valve lower

14. Master cylinder to pressure reducing valve lower

15. Front right brake

16. Bolt

17. Pressure reducing valve

18. Modulator to pressure reducing valve upper

19. Master cylinder

20. Servo unit

21. Modulator to rear right brake

22. Rear right brake

DESCRIPTION AND OPERATION

BRAKES

BRAKE PIPE LAYOUT NON ABS

Left hand drive shown. On right hand drive vehicles the master cylinder and servo unit only move position.

KEY

1. T-Connector

2. Rear left brake

3. Master cylinder to pressure reducing valve lower

4. Front left brake to pressure reducing valve upper

5. Front left brake

6. Front right brake

7. Master cylinder to pressure reducing valve lower

8. Pressure reducing valve

9. Front right brake to pressure reducing valve upper

10. Master cylinder

11. Servo unit

12. Pressure reducing valve upper to both rear brakes

13. Rear right brake

DESCRIPTION AND OPERATION

BRAKES

BRAKE SERVO UNIT

Description

The power assistance for the brake system is provided by a twin diaphragm suspended vacuum servo.

A ’Suspended Vacuum’ servo is one where, with the engine running vacuum is present both sides of the diaphragm or diaphragms when the brakes are fully released or partially applied. The principal of having vacuum both sides of the diaphragm has two main advantages. First, it ensures instantaneous servo response to the brake being applied or released and second, it provides very accurate control of the position of the diaphragm and therefore, the degree of partial brake application.

At full pedal depression, vacuum is present in front of the diaphragm with atmospheric pressure on the rear.

Operation

Brakes released

With the brakes released depression is present both sides of the diaphragms, in chambers 1,2,3 and 4.

The chambers comunicate by ports A, B, D via the valve C which is shown fully released in RR3640M.

DESCRIPTION AND OPERATION

BRAKES

Brakes applied

When the brake pedal is depressed the pedal pushrod operates valve C situated in the plastic diaphragm hub

9 and 10. Inital depression of the the brake pedal, push rod 6 and plunger 7 compress a rubber pad 8.

This slight movement causes valve C to close port D sealing off the vacuum to chambers 2/4 and allows atmospheric pressure to enter the chambers through the air filter E.

With depression in chambers 1/3 and air pressure in chambers 2/4 the servo hub will apply the brakes via the master cylinder push rod 13.

Atmospheric pressure over the large area of the diaphragms multiples the force applied to the master cylinder piston, to provide the power assistance. If the brake pedal is only partially depressed, the servo hub, diaphragms and master cylinder push rod will stop moving, when valve C comes to rest on the plunger 7.

At this point the valve will balance the pressure in all the chambers, to the applied effort at the pedal and provide proportional braking.

It is only when the brakes are fully applied that the valve does not balance the pressures in all the chambers, but ensures that maximum available depression is in chambers 1/3 and full atmospheric pressure enters chambers 2/4.

When the brake pedal is released, the pressure in all chambers is equalised and the servo is returned to the rest position by spring 12.

DESCRIPTION AND OPERATION

Petrol engine vacuum system

The vacuum necessary to operate the brake servo on petrol engine vehicles is provided by the engine inlet manifold. During normal operation of the brakes only a small volume of air is drawn from the servo and into the inlet manifold or plenum chamber. However any excessive air leaks due to damage in the brake servo system or manifold hose connection, will effect the mixture strength and ECM fuelling calculations on engines equipped with an MFI system.

Diesel engine vacuum system

As the diesel engine inlet system does not produce depression sufficient to operate the brake servo, it is necessary to install an engine driven vacuum pump.

During normal operation of the brakes only a small volume of air is drawn from the servo by the vacuum pump. However as the pump exhausts air into the engine crankcase atmosphere, an air leak due to damage in the brake servo system or pump hose connection, may cause excessive crankcase pressure.

BRAKES

DESCRIPTION AND OPERATION

BRAKES

ABS FAULT DIAGNOSIS

If a fault has occurred, or has been identified by ECU self diagnostic function and ABS warning light is illuminated. The system and components must be checked to locate and rectify fault, using Testbook diagnostics.

NOTE: If warning lamp has indicated a fault in system, and no fault code has been stored in memory, cause of fault is:

a) Failure in electrical supply b) Bad ECU ground c) Faulty warning light relay d) ECU not connected

Before commencing fault diagnosis pr